62-11389 Vector6500 Change12 10

Trailer & Rail Refrigeration
EVAPORATOR
TXV BULB
CONDENSER TXV
RECEIVER
OPERATION & SERVICE

MANUAL
for
VECTOR 6500 ST
Trailer
Single--Temp/Dual Switch
Refrigeration Units
62--11389 Rev -- Change 12/10

OPERATION & SERVICE
MANUAL
for
VECTOR 6500 ST
Trailer
Single--Temp/Dual Switch
Refrigeration Units
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--1
1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--1
1.2 SPECIFIC WARNING AND CAUTION
STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--1
1.3 SAFETY DECALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6
UNIT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--1
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--1
2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--1
2.3 CONDENSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.3.1 Condenser Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.3.2 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.3.3 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.3.4 Unloaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.3.5 Filter Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--9
2.3.6 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--9
2.3.7 Compressor Transducers and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--10
2.4 EVAPORATOR SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--10
2.4.1 Electronic Expansion Valve (EVXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--10
2.4.2 Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--10
2.4.3 Evaporator Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--10
2.4.4 Evaporator Transducers and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--10
2.5 SYSTEM OPERATING CONTROLS AND COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--11
2.5.1 Multiple Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--11
2.5.2 Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--11
2.5.3 Component Description And Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--11
2.5.4 Handling of PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--15
2.6 ELECTRONIC MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--16
2.6.1 Overload Ground Fault Module (OGF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--16
2.6.2 Phase Reversal Module (PRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--16
2.7 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--16
2.7.1 LED Light Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--16
2.7.2 Door Switch and Remote Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--16
2.7.3 Out of Range Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--16
2.7.4 Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--17
2.8 ENGINE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--18
2.8.1 Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--18
2.9 ENGINE SCREW THREADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--18
2.10 ENGINE AIR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--18
2.11 COMPRESSOR DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--18
2.12 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--18
2.13 ELECTRICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--19
2.13.1 Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--19
2.13.2 Component Resistance & Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--20
i 62--11389
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

2.14 SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--20
2.15 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT DURING COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--21
2.16 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT -- HEATING AND DEFROSTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--21
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--1
3.1 STARTING UNIT -- ENGINE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--1
3.2 STARTING UNIT -- ELECTRIC STANDBY OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--2
3.3 SELF TEST & PRESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--3
3.4 PRETRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--4
3.5 CHANGING SET POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--7
3.6 START--STOP OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8
3.7 CONTINUOUS RUN OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--10
3.8 SLEEP MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--11
3.9 MANUAL DEFROST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--13
3.10 TRIP START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--14
3.11 VIEW ACTIVE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--15
3.12 VIEW INACTIVE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--16
3.13 UNIT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--19
3.14 VIEW HOURMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--22
3.15 FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--23
3.16 LANGUAGE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--27
3.17 STOPPING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--28
3.18 DATA RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--29
3.18.1 Microprocessor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--29
3.18.2 Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--29
3.18.3 Sensor & Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--29
3.18.4 Data Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--30
3.18.5 Data Recorder Power--Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--30
3.19 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--31
3.19.1 IntelliSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--31
3.19.2 DataTrak for Advance Microprocessors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--34
3.20 Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--35
ENGINE/STANDBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
4.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
4.2 ENGINE START--UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
4.2.1 Engine Cranking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
4.2.2 Intake Air Heater Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
4.3 STANDBY START--UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
4.3.1 Standby Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
4.3.2 Engine Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
4.3.3 Initial Engine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
4.4 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM START--UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
62--11389 ii

4.5 RUNNING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
4.5.1 Start--Stop Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
4.5.2 Continuous Run Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--4
4.6 SPEED CONTROL OVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--4
TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
5.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
5.2 PERISHABLE AND FROZEN SET POINT RANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
5.3 PULLDOWN / PULL-UP MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
5.3.1 Pulldown or Pull-up will be initiated in any of the following conditions: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--2
5.3.2 Pulldown or Pull-up will end in the following conditions: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--2
5.4 HEAT MODE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--2
5.5 COOL MODE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--3
5.6 UNLOADER CONTROL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--3
5.7 DEMAND CONTROL LOGIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--3
5.7.1 Heat/Cool/Null Switching Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--4
5.7.2 Null Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--4
5.8 DEMAND CONTROL LOGIC FROZEN TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--8
5.8.1 Demand Control Logic Continuous Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--8
5.8.2 Demand Control Logic Start--Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--8
5.9 SUPPLY AIR LIMIT CONTROL (Perishable Sensitive Product) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--12
5.10 CARGO PROTECT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--12
5.11 ENGINE SPEED OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--13
5.12 DEFROST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--13
5.12.1 Evaporator Temperature Criteria For Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--13
5.12.2 Defrost Initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--13
5.12.3 Defrost Operation With Heaters(Normal Defrost) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--14
5.12.4 Normal Defrost Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--14
5.12.5 Normal Defrost Termination Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--14
5.12.6 Defrost Operation Without Heaters (Natural Defrost) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--15
5.12.7 Natural Defrost Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--15
5.12.8 Natural Defrost Termination Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--15
5.13 TEMPERATURE RANGE LOCK 1 & 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--15
5.14 PRODUCTSHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--17
5.14.1 ProductShield Modes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--17
5.15 UNLOADER CONTROL OVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--20
TECHNICIAN INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--1
6.1 PC MODE / DOWNLOAD PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--1
6.2 MICROPROCESSOR CONFIGURATION AND TECHNICIAN TEST MODES
(REMOVE JUMPER MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--2
6.2.1 Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--3
6.2.2 Component Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--14
6.2.3 Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--15
6.3 PC SUPPORT SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--15
6.3.1 ReeferManager And Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--15
iii 62--11389

6.4 DOWNLOADING DATA WITH THE PC CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--17
6.5 INSTALLING NEW SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--18
6.5.1 Software Version Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--18
6.5.2 Using The Program PC Card to Install Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--19
6.5.3 Using ReeferManager to Install Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--20
6.5.4 Troubleshooting Software Loading Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--20
6.6 RE-SETTING PM (PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE) HOURMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--20
6.7 ADVANCE MICROPROCESSOR REPLACEMENT & CONFIGURATION SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--23
6.7.1 Microprocessor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--23
6.7.2 Microprocessor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--24
6.7.3 Configurations Via Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--25
6.7.4 Functional Parameters Via Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--25
6.7.5 DataRecorder Via ReeferManager PC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--25
6.7.6 Engine And Switch--on Hour Meters Via ReeferManager PC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--26
6.7.7 Configuration / IntelliSet PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--26
6.7.8 Microprocessor Final Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--26
6.7.9 Replacing Display Bezel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--27
MESSAGECENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--1
7.1 MESSAGECENTER MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--1
ALARM TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1
8.1 Introduction To Alarm Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1
8.2 NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--2
8.3 DRIVER / OPERATOR ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--3
1 LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--3
2 LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--4
3 LOW COOLANT LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--5
8.4 SHUTDOWN ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--6
11 LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--6
12 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--7
12 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--8
13 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--9
14 ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--11
15 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--12
16 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--13
17 HIGH COMP DISCHARGE TEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--14
18 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--15
19 LOW FUEL SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--17
20 MAXIMUM COMPRESSOR ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--18
22 LOW SUCTION SUPERHEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--18
23 A/C CURRENT OVER LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--20
27 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--22
28 CHECK REFRIGERATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--23
62--11389 iv

8.5 START UP / ENGINE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--24
30 FAILED TO RUN MINIMUM TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--24
31 FAILED TO START -- AUTO MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--25
34 ENGINE FAILED TO STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--27
35 CHECK STARTER CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--28
36 CHECK COOLANT TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--29
37 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--30
38 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--31
39 CHECK ENGINE RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--33
40 CHECK GLOW PLUGS (This alarm applies to the Intake Air Heater) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--35
41 ENGINE STALLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--36
8.6 WARNING / STATUS ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--38
51 ALTERNATOR NOT CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--38
53 BOX TEMP OUT--OF--RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--39
54 DEFROST NOT COMPLETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--41
55 CHECK DEFROST AIR SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--42
59 DATALOGGER NOT RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--43
60 DATALOGGER TIME WRONG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--44
61 DOOR OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--45
8.7 ELECTRICAL ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--46
71 BAD F2 OR F3 FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--46
73 NO POWER--CHECK POWER CORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--47
75 COMP MOTOR OVERLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--48
76 CONDENSER MOTOR OVERHEATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--49
77 EVAP MOTOR OVERHEATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--51
83 CHECK REMOTE DEFROST LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--53
84 CHECK REMOTE ALARM LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--53
85 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--54
86 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--54
89 CHECK REMOTE AUTO LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--55
91 CHECK HTCON1 RELAY COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--55
92 CHECK 1HTCON2 RELAY COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--56
93 CHECK START UP BUZZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--57
94 CHECK COMP CONTACTOR 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--57
95 CHECK CDCON RELAY COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--58
96 CHECK GENCONR RELAY COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--58
98 CHECK HIGH TEMP THERMOSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--59
99 CHECK STANDBY CONTACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--59
100 OVERLOAD/GROUND FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--60
v 62--11389

8.8 SENSOR ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--61
121 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--61
122 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--62
123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--63
124 CHECK DEFROST TERM 1 SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--64
125 CHECK COMP DISCHARGE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--65
126 CHECK FUEL SENSOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--66
127 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--67
128 AMPS MEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--67
129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--68
130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--69
131 CHECK EVAP TEMP SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--70
133 CHEK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--71
134 CHECK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--72
135 CHECK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--73
8.9 Pretrip ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--74
P141 PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--74
P144 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--74
P145 CHECK SPEED SOL CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--75
P151 CHECK GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT (This applies to the Intake Air Heater) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--76
P152 CHECK FUEL SOLENOID CIRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--77
P153 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--78
P154 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--79
P155 CHECK COOLANT TEMP SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--80
P156 CHECK BATTERY VOLTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--80
P157 CHECK BATTERY CURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--81
P158 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--82
P159 CHECK DEFROST TERM 1 SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--83
P160 CHECK DISCHARGE TEMP SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--84
161 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR (CST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--85
P164 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--86
P171 CHECK EVAP & DISC PRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--87
P174 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--89
P175 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--90
P177 CHECK EVAP SUPERHEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--92
P178 CHECK UL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--93
P180 CHECK SUCTION MOD VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--94
P186 CHECK EVAP OUTLET TEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--95
P187 CHECK HEATER 1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--96
P188 CHECK HEATER 2 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--98
P189 CHECK EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--100
P190 CHECK CONDENSER FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--102
62--11389 vi

P191 CHECK UL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--103
P206 CHECK CONDENSER FAN CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--104
P207 CHK COMPRESSOR CONTACT CIRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--104
P208 CHECK GENERATOR CONT CIRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--105
P209 CHECK STANDBY CONT CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--106
8.10 MAINTENANCE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--107
223 ENGINE MAINTENANCE DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--107
224 STANDBY MAINTENANCE DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--107
225 GENERAL MAINTENANCE DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--108
226 SERVICE SOON--PM #1 DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--108
8.11 MICROPROCESSOR ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--111
232 SETPOINT ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--111
233 MODEL # ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--111
237 FUNCTION PARAMETERS ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--112
238 CONFIGURATIONS 1 ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--113
242 DIS PRESS CALIBRATE ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--114
243 SUCTION/EVAP CALIBRATE ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--114
245 CANNOT SAVE SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--115
246 EEPROM WRITE FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--115
248 CONFIGURATION MODE / HP2 ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--116
249 MICROPROCESSOR ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--117
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1
9.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--2
9.2 PRE TRIP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--4
9.3 GRILLE INSERT REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--6
9.4 SURROUND REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--7
9.5 DOOR LATCH MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--8
9.5.1 Front Door Latch Cable Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--8
9.5.2 Side Door Latch Cable Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--8
9.6 TESTING HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--9
9.6.1 Megohmmeter Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--9
9.7 PRIMING FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--10
9.7.1 Mechanical Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--10
9.8 SERVICING FUEL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--10
9.8.1 Mechanical Pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--10
9.8.2 Electrical Pump -- Optional. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--10
vii 62--11389

9.9 ENGINE SERVICE AND COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--11
9.9.1 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--11
9.9.2 Fuel Level Sensor (FLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--11
9.9.3 Engine Oil And Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--12
9.9.4 Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--12
9.9.5 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--13
9.9.6 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--13
9.9.7 Crankcase Breather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--14
9.9.8 Intake Air Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--14
9.9.9 Water Pump V--Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--14
9.10 EVAPORATOR HEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--14
9.10.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--14
9.10.2 Testing And Replacing Heater Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--14
9.11 EVAPORATOR BLOWER AND MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--15
9.12 CONDENSER FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--16
9.13 BATTERY CHARGER (BTYC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--17
9.13.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--17
9.13.2 Checking Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--17
9.14 GENERATOR (GEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--17
9.14.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--17
9.14.2 Preventive Maintenance and
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--17
9.14.3 Generator Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--18
9.14.4 Generator Assembly Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--20
9.15 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (EVXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--22
9.15.1 EVXV coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--22
9.15.2 Checking Operation of EVXV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--22
9.15.3 EVXV Diagnostics: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--22
9.15.4 Replacing The Electronic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--23
9.16 PUMPING UNIT DOWN OR REMOVING REFRIGERANT CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--23
9.16.1 Removing the Refrigerant Charge From The Complete System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--23
9.16.2 Pumping Down The Low Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--24
9.16.3 Pumping Down The Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--24
9.17 LEAK CHECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--25
9.17.1 Leak Testing The Refrigeration System When A Leak Is Suspected, But The Refrigerant
Has Not Been Removed From Any Part Of The System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--25
9.17.2 Leak Testing Of The Refrigeration System When The Entire Charge Has Been Removed,
And The Microprocessor Is In Service Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--25
9.17.3 Leak Testing Of the Low Pressure side of the Refrigeration System when the Low Side
had been pumped down, and the Microprocessor is in Service Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--26
9.17.4 Compressor Leak Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--26
9.18 EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--27
9.18.1 Complete System Evacuation And Dehydration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--27
9.18.2 Low Side Evacuation And Dehydration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--28
9.18.3 Evacuation And Dehydration of Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--28
62--11389 viii

9.19 ADDING REFRIGERANT TO SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--30
9.19.1 Checking Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--30
9.19.2 Adding A Partial Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--30
9.19.3 Adding Full Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--30
9.19.4 Checking For Noncondensibles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--31
9.20 COMPRESSOR -- MODEL 06D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--31
9.20.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--31
9.20.2 Compressor Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--32
9.20.3 Compressor Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--32
9.21 COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--33
9.21.1 Checking Compressor Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--33
9.21.2 Adding Oil With Compressor In System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--34
9.21.3 Adding Oil To Service Replacement Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--34
9.21.4 Removing Oil From The Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--34
9.22 UNLOADER VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--35
9.22.1 Unloader Checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--35
9.22.2 Solenoid Valve Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--35
9.22.3 Replacing unloader valve internal parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--35
9.22.4 Unloader Coil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--36
9.23 CHECKING AND REPLACING FILTER-DRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--36
9.24 CHECKING AND REPLACING HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (HPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--36
9.24.1 Checking High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--36
9.24.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--37
9.25 DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (CDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--37
9.25.1 Testing Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--37
9.25.2 Calibrating Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--37
9.25.3 Replacing Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--38
9.26 SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (CSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--39
9.26.1 Testing Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--39
9.26.2 Calibrating Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--39
9.26.3 Replacing Compressor Suction Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--39
9.27 EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (EVOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--40
9.27.1 Testing the EVOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--40
9.27.2 Replacing Evaporator Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--40
9.28 REPLACING RECEIVER SIGHT GLASS ASSEMBLY OR FUSIBLE PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--40
9.29 COMPRESSOR SUCTION MODULATION VALVE (CSMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--40
9.29.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--40
9.29.2 CSMV Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--41
9.29.3 Replacing The CSMV Power Head (14--00263--20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--42
9.30 PHASE REVERSAL MODULE (PRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--43
9.30.1 Operation And Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--43
ix 62--11389

9.31 OVERLOAD GROUND FAULT DETECTOR (OGF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--43
9.31.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--43
9.31.2 OGF Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--43
9.32 LIGHT BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--44
9.32.1 Light Bar Operation and Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--44
9.33 DEFROST AIR SWITCH (DAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--44
9.33.1 Testing The Defrost Air Switch And Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--44
9.33.2 Checking Calibration Of Defrost Air Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--44
9.34 EVAPORATOR COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--45
9.34.1 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--45
9.35 CONDENSER COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--45
9.35.1 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--45
9.35.2 Condenser Coil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--45
9.35.3 Radiator Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--45
9.36 MICROPROCESSOR SENSOR CHECKOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--46
UNIT TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--1
10.1 ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--1
10.1.1 Engine Will Not Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--1
10.1.2 Engine Starts Then Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--2
10.1.3 Engine Will Not Shut Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--2
10.1.4 Starter Motor Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--2
10.1.5 Malfunction In The Engine Starting Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--2
10.1.6 Miscellaneous Engine Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--3
10.2BATTERY CHARGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--4
10.3 GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--5
10.4 REFRIGERATION / TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--5
10.4.1 Unit Will Not Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--5
10.4.3 Unit Operates Long Or Continuously In Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--5
10.4.4 Unit Will Not Terminate Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--6
10.4.6 Unit Will Not Terminate Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--6
10.4.7 Defrost Cycle Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--6
10.4.8 Abnormal Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--7
10.4.9 Abnormal Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--7
10.4.10 No Evaporator Air Flow Or Restricted Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--7
10.4.11 Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV) Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--8
10.4.12 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--8
10.5 Electronic Speed Control Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--9
10.6 Microprocessor Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--14
10.7 Compressor Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--24
WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--1
62--11389 x
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE NUMBER Page
Figure 2--1. Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--2
Figure 2--2. Roadside View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--3
Figure 2--3. Curbside View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--4
Figure 2--4. Evaporator Section -- Grille Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--5
Figure 2--5. Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6
Figure 2--6. Engine Speed Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
Figure 2--7. Compressor Cylinder Head Unloaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--8
Figure 2--8. Compressor Cylinder Head Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--9
Figure 2--9. Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--12
Figure 2--10. Display and Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--13
Figure 2--11. OGF Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--16
Figure 2--12. Phase Reversal Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--16
Figure 2--13. Refrigerant Circuit During Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--22
Figure 4--1. Auto Start Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
Figure 5--1. Continuous Run With ECO Mode set to OFF, or Start--Stop Temperature Control Operating
Sequence -- Perishable Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--5
Figure 5--2. Continuous Run With ECO Mode set to ON Temperature Control Operating Sequence --
Perishable Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--6
Figure 5--3. Start-Stop Temperature Control Operating Sequence -- Perishable Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--7
Sequence -- Frozen Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--9
Frozen Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--10
Figure 5--6. Start-Stop -- Temperature Control Operating Sequence -- Frozen Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--11
Figure 5--7. Range Lock 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--16
Figure 5--8. Range Lock 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--16
Figure 5--9. Evaporator Pressure Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--21
Figure 6 --1. Display Module Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--28
Figure 9--1. Grille Insert Removal And Door Latch Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--6
Figure 9--2. Surround Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--7
Figure 9--3. Side Door Latch Lower Cable Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--8
Figure 9--4. Megohmmeter Connection to Ground Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--9
Figure 9--5. High Voltage Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--9
Figure 9--6. Priming Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--10
Figure 9--7. Mechanical Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--10
Figure 9--8. Electric Fuel Pump (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--11
Figure 9--9. Fuel Level Sensor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--11
Figure 9--10. Fuel System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--12
Figure 9--11. Lube Oil Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--12
Figure 9--12. Electronic Speed Control Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--13
Figure 9--13. Engine Speed Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--13
Figure 9--14. Engine Crankcase Breather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--14
Figure 9--15. Intake Air Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--14
Figure 9--16. Water Pump V--Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--14
xi 62--11389
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS - Continued
FIGURE NUMBER Page
Figure 9--17. Evaporator Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--15
Figure 9--18. Condenser Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--16
Figure 9--19. Generator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--21
Figure 9--20. Bolt Hole Pattern For Bell Housing and Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--21
Figure 9--21. Electronic expansion valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--22
Figure 9--22. Electronic expansion valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--22
Figure 9--23. Vacuum Pump Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--29
Figure 9--24. Compressor -- model 06D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--32
Figure 9--25. Exploded view of valve plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--33
Figure 9--26. Suction valve & positioning springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--33
Figure 9--27. Compressor Oil Pump End View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--33
Figure 9--28. Oil Level in Sight Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--35
Figure 9--29. Unloader Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--36
Figure 9--30. Typical Setup for Testing High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--36
Figure 9--31. Discharge Pressure Transducer Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--37
Figure 9--32. Transducer Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--39
Figure 9--33. Suction Modulation Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--40
Figure 9--34. CSMV Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--42
Figure 9--35. Overload Ground Fault Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--44
Figure 9--36. Defrost Air Switch Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--44
Figure 9--37. Condenser and Radiator Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--46
Figure 10--1. ESC Diagnostic Tree -- 1 Long, 1 Short LED Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--10
Figure 10--5. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 1 -- Start/Run-Off Switch On -- Unit Does Not Operate . . . . . . 10--15
Figure 10--6. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 2 -- Start/Run-Off Switch On -- Unit Operates But Not Properly 10--16
Figure 10--7. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 3 -- Start/Run-Off Switch Off -- Unit Fails To Stop . . . . . . . . . . 10--17
Figure 10--8. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 4 -- Unit Will Not Run In High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--18
Figure 10--9. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 5 -- Unit Will Not Run In Low Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--19
Figure 10--10. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 6 -- Data Recorder Data Download Problems When Using
ReeferManager and a Download Cable. Data File Analysis Problems Using Reports . . . . . . . 10--20
Figure 10--11. Microprocessor Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 7 -- PC Card Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--21
Figure 10--12. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 8 -- Programming Problems With PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--22
Figure 10--13. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 9 -- Programming Problems With MicroProgrammer . . . . . . . 10--23
Figure 10--14. Compressor Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--27
62--11389 xii
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NUMBER Page
Table 2-1 Model Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--1
Table 2-2 Additional Support Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--1
Table 2-3. Field Effect Transistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--12
Table 2-4. Engine Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--17
Table 2-5. Compressor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--18
Table 2-6. Component Resistance & Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--20
Table 3-1. Shutdown Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--17
Table 3-2. Unit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--20
Table 3-3 Functional Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--24
Table 4-1. Glow Heat Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
Table 6-1. Connection Point Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--23
Table 9--1 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--2
Table 9--2 Compressor Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--34
Table 9--3 Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--38
Table 9--4 CSP or EVOP Pressure Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--39
Table 9--5 CSMV Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--41
Table 9--6 Phase Reversal Module Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--43
Table 9--7 Sensor Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--47
Table 9--8. Sensor Resistance (CDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--48
Table 9--9 Temperature Pressure Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--49
Table 10--1 ENSCU LED Fault Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--9
Change 12/10 xiii 62--11389

SECTION 1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Engine Coolant
Your Carrier Transicold refrigeration unit has been The engine is equipped with a pressurized cooling
designed with the safety of the operator in mind. During system including a prfessurezed coolant bottle. Under
normal operation, all moving parts are fully enclosed to normal operating conditions, the coolant in the engine
help prevent injury. During all pre-trip inspections, daily and radiator is under high pressure and is very hot.
inspections, and problem troubleshooting, you may be Contact with hot coolant can cause severe burns. Do
exposed to moving parts. Please stay clear of all moving not remove the cap from a hot radiator or bottle. If the
parts when the unit is in operation and when the unit cap must be removed, cover it with a rag and remove
main power switch is in the START/RUN position. very slowly in order to release the pressure without
spray.
CAUTION Refrigerants
Under no circumstances should anyone at- The refrigerant contained in the refrigeration system of
tempt to repair the Logic or Display Boards. this unit can cause frostbite, severe burns, or blindness
Should a problem develop with these com-
ponent, contact your nearest Carrier Tran- when in direct contact with the skin or eyes. For this
sicold dealer for replacement. reason, and because of legislation regarding the
handling of refrigerants during system service, we
recommend that whenever your unit requires service of
the refrigeration system you contact your nearest
CAUTION Carrier Transicold authorized repair facility for service.
Under no circumstances should a techni- Battery

cian electrically probe the processor at any
point, other than the connector terminals This unit is equipped with a lead-acid type battery. The
where the harness attaches. Microproces- battery normally vents small amounts of flammable
sor components operate at different volt- hydrogen gas. Do not smoke when checking the battery.
age levels and at extremely low current lev- A battery explosion can cause serious physical harm
els. Improper use of voltmeters, jumper and/or blindness.
wires, continuity testers, etc. could perma-
nently damage the processor.
1.2 SPECIFIC WARNING AND CAUTION
STATEMENTS
CAUTION To help identify the label hazards on the unit and explain
Most electronic components are suscepti- the level of awareness each one carries, an explanation
ble to damage caused by electrical static is given with the appropriate consequences:
discharge (ESD). In certain cases, the hu-
man body can have enough static electric- DANGER -- warns against an immediate hazard which
ity to cause resultant damage to the compo- WILL result in severe personal injury or death.
nents by touch. This is especially true of the
integrated circuits found on the truck/trailer WARNING -- warns against hazards or unsafe condi-
microprocessor. tions which COULD result in severe personal injury or
death.
Auto-Start CAUTION -- warns against potential hazard or unsafe
Your refrigeration unit is equipped with Auto-Start in practice which could result in minor personal injury, or
both Start--Stop operation and Continuous Run product or property damage.
operation. The unit may start at any time when the
Start/Run--Off Switch (SROS) is in the Start/Run The statements listed below are specifically applicable
position. A buzzer will sound for 5 seconds before the to this refrigeration unit and appear elsewhere in this
unit is started. When performing any check of the manual. These recommended precautions must be un-
refrigeration unit (e.g., checking the belt, checking the derstood and applied during operation and maintenance
oil), make certain that the SROS is in the OFF position. of the equipment covered herein.
1--1 62-11389
WARNING WARNING
Always place the START/RUN--OFF switch
Be aware of HIGH VOLTAGE supplied by the in the OFF position and turn off the high
generator as the unit may start voltage power supply before disconnect-
automatically. Before servicing the unit, ing the high voltage power plug from the
make sure the START/RUN--OFF switch is in unit.
the OFF position. Use discretion when ser-
vicing the unit. It may be necessary to
disconnect the negative battery and the
standby power cables for certain service WARNING
procedures. NEVER dis--assemble the
generator: HIGH MAGNETIC FIELD INSIDE! Do not place the START/RUN--OFF Switch
This field can interfere with and cardiac im- (SROS) in the START/RUN position or the
plants such as pacemaker and defibrillat- unit will start.
ors.
WARNING
Do Not Allow Jumper Wire To Touch Any
Ground during Microprocessor Configura-
WARNING tion and Technician Test Modes.
UNITS EQUIPPED WITH REMOTE TWO WAY

COMMUNICATION CAPABILITIES HAVE THE WARNING
ABILITY TO BE STARTED OR TURNED OFF
REMOTELY REGARDLESS OF THE SETTING Any time service is being performed on
OF THE START/RUN-OFF SWITCH. moving parts or high voltage components,
disconnect the negative battery and
The unit is controlled locally and there can standby power cables.
be no two-way communication when the
Mode Switch on the Remote Monitoring
Control Box is in MAINTENANCE MODE.
Therefore, when performing any work on
WARNING
the unit place the mode switch in MAINTE- Voltage will be applied to high voltage com-
NANCE MODE. After the unit is serviced, re- ponents (i.e. the fan motor contactor) and
turn the mode switch to REMOTE ON. those components will operate (i.e. the fan
blades will turn) when those components
are energized and the unit is in standby op-
eration and using component test mode.
WARNING WARNING
Under no circumstances should ether or Caution and good electrical practices must
any other starting aids be used to start en- be used when working around and with
gine. high voltage circuits.
WARNING
WARNING
Any time service is being performed on
moving parts or high voltage components,
Make sure the power plug is clean and dry disconnect the negative battery and
before connecting to any electrical outlet/ standby power cables.
receptacle.
WARNING
WARNING Inspect battery cables for signs of wear, ab-
rasion or damage at every pre trip inspec-
Do not connect to any electrical outlet tion and replace if necessary. Also check
without checking that it meets the battery cable routing to ensure that clamps
460/3/60 and 30 Amp electrical require- are secure and that cables are not pinched
ments. or chafing against any components.
62-11389 1--2
WARNING WARNING
Carefully protect eyes from solvent when The Compressor Discharge Pressure
cleaning the fuel filter. Transducer does not have a Schrader valve
in the connecting fitting. Any discharge
pressure remaining in the compressor will
be released when removing the CDP.
WARNING
Do not direct water or steam into the gener-
ator openings. Do not allow any soap and
water solutions to enter the generator.
WARNING
Carrier Transicold does not recommend al-
lowing the compressor to pull less than 0
WARNING PSIG/BAR at any time.
High voltage (dielectric) testing must not be

performed to the machine without first ob-
serving National Electric Manufacturer’s WARNING
Association (NEMA) rules. The insulation of
this generator winding may be safely Ensure the START/RUN--OFF switch in in
checked by using a megohm meter. A high the OFF position and the power plug is re-
reading indicates good insulation. moved from the unit before removing the
compressor terninal box cover and wiring.
WARNING
Generators of the type used in this unit
WARNING
should not be “flashed”. Operation with ex-
ternal voltage source or momentary short- Do not unscrew cylinder head capscrews
ing of leads will damage the generator and all the way before breaking seal. Entrapped
may cause injury. pressure could result in injury.
WARNING CAUTION
Relieve internal pressure of replacement Use only ethylene glycol anti-freeze (with
compressor by slightly loosening the bolts inhibitors) in system as glycol by itself will
of both service valve flanges/blank valve damage the cooling system. Always add
pads and then lightly tapping the center of pre-mixed 50/50 anti-freeze and water to
the valve flanges/pads with a soft mallet to radiator / engine. Never exceed more than a
break the seal. 60% concentration of anti-freeze. Use a low
silicate anti-freeze meeting GM specifica-
tions GM 6038M for standard life coolant or
use Texaco Havoline extended life coolant
WARNING or any other extended life coolant which is
Dexcool approved and has 5/150 (5 years /
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a 150,000 miles) on the label.
pressure regulator. Cylinder pressure is
approximately 2350 psig (159.9 bar). Do not
use oxygen in or near a refrigerant system
as an explosion may occur. CAUTION
When changing oil filters, the new filters
should be primed (partially filled) with clean
WARNING oil if possible. If the filters are not primed,
the engine may operate for a period with no
Never run unit with discharge service valve oil supplied to the bearings.
frontseated.
CAUTION
WARNING
Service Mode MUST be used whenever re-
Never remove compressor fill plug with moving refrigerant charge, refrigerant leak
pressure in compressor. checking or evacuating.
1--3 62-11389
CAUTION CAUTION
The display and MessageCenter may be- Unit uses R404A and POE oil. The use of in-
have differently during the software loading ert gas brazing procedures is mandatory for
process, depending on the version of soft- all Carrier Transicold refrigeration units;
ware currently in the controller. DO NOT IN- otherwise compressor failure will occur.
TERRUPT THE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION For more information Refer to Technical
PROCESS ONCE IT HAS STARTED. Procedure 98-50553-00 Inert Gas Brazing
CAUTION CAUTION
Disconnect the negative battery cable prior
It is important that communications be- to testing the high voltage circuits. Isolate
tween the Microprocessor and the comput- the microprocessor by unplugging wires
er are not disturbed during the software going into it.
loading process. If using a laptop comput-
er, turn all energy saving features off. Turn
off any screen saver, or any hard drive time
out settings.
CAUTION
Disconnect AC voltage power supply plug
at the unit when checking battery charger.
CAUTION
Ensure that the clock you are using is ac- CAUTION
curate. Also, some customers are located in
different time zones from the repair loca- The mica shim must be used during disas-
tion. If you know the owners desired loca- sembly of the generator from the engine.
tion time, enter that time. If you don’t, enter Never attempt to remove the rotor from the
the current time at your location. stator. Leave the shim in place until the gen-
erator is re installed on the engine.
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not connect 12 VDC to the EVXV wires in
Do not over torque keypad screws. Torque an attempt to rotate the valve or irreparable
all screws to 11 inlbs (1.2 Nm). damage will occur.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Only a refrigerant drum that has previously
Do not leave the circuit energized for the full been used with R404A should be connected
5 minutes if full amperage is shown as the to this refrigeration unit.
intake air heater element life will be greatly
shortened.
CAUTION
The service valves are sealing off refrigerant
CAUTION from the rest of the system. Do not open
these valves until the compressor is ready to
Use only Carrier Transicold approved Poly- be returned to service.
ol Ester Oil (POE). Buy quantities of one
quart or less. When using this hygroscopic
oil, immediately reseal. Do not leave con-
tainer of oil open or contamination will oc-
CAUTION
cur. Only a refrigerant drum containing R404A
should be connected to this refrigeration
unit in order to pressurize the system.
CAUTION However, dry nitrogen may be used to in-
crease pressure. Any other gas or vapor will
An overcharge of compressor oil will re- contaminate the system which will require
duce system capacity and possibly cause additional purging and evacuation of the
internal compressor damage. high side (discharge) of the system.
62-11389 1--4
CAUTION CAUTION
Extreme care must be taken to ensure the Do not connect 12 VDC to the CSMV wind-
manifold common connection remains im- ings in an attempt to rotate the valve or irre-
mersed in oil at all times; otherwise, air and parable damage will occur.
moisture will be drawn into compressor.
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not bend the copper tubing on the con-
Do not vapor charge R404A systems. Only denser coil when installing the new con-
liquid charging through the king valve is ac- denser. Bend the unit tubing if tubes do not
ceptable. align correctly.
1--5 62-11389
1.3 SAFETY DECALS
62-11389 1--6
62--03957--01 High Voltage 62--03958--00 Heat Warning
62--60280--00 Standby Safety
1--7 62-11389
62-11389 1--8
9
SECTION 2
UNIT DESCRIPTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
WARNING
Be aware of HIGH VOLTAGE supplied by the The Vector 6500ST unit is a hybrid diesel/electric, fully
generator as the unit may start charged, pre-wired, refrigeration/heating “nosemount”
automatically. Before servicing the unit, unit. The unit is used on insulated refrigerated compart-
make sure the Start/Run--Off switch is in the ments to maintain cargo temperatures within very close
OFF position. Use discretion when servi- limits.
cing the unit. It may be necessary to
disconnect the negative battery and the Electrical power is supplied to the unit from a power plug
standby power cables for certain service or by the diesel engine/A-C generator which is driven by
procedures. NEVER dis--assemble the the engine. The generator provides nominal
generator: HIGH MAGNETIC FIELD INSIDE! 480V/3Ø/60Hz power when the engine is in high speed
This field can interfere with and cardiac im-
plants such as pacemaker and defibrillat- and nominal 350V/3Ø/45Hz in low speed.
ors.
Automatic evaporator coil defrosting is initiated by either
sensing the air pressure drop across the coil with a dif-
ferential air switch or with the defrost timer in the micro-
WARNING processor.
UNITS EQUIPPED WITH REMOTE TWO WAY The control box includes manual switches, micropro-
COMMUNICATION CAPABILITIES HAVE THE cessor, fuses, and associated wiring. The unit can be
ABILITY TO BE STARTED OR TURNED OFF equipped with an optional remote light bar which mounts
REMOTELY REGARDLESS OF THE SETTING separately on the front roadside corner of the refriger-
OF THE START / RUN-OFF SWITCH. ated compartment.
The unit is controlled locally and there can The temperature controller is a solid state micropro-
be no two-way communication when the cessor (Refer to Section 2.5). Once the microprocessor
Mode Switch on the Remote Monitoring
Control Box is in MAINTENANCE MODE. is set at the desired temperature, the unit will operate
Therefore, when performing any work on automatically to maintain the desired temperature with-
the unit place the mode switch in MAINTE- in very close limits. The control system automatically se-
NANCE MODE. After the unit is serviced, re- lects high and low speed cooling or high and low speed
turn the mode switch to REMOTE ON. heating as necessary to maintain the desired tempera-
ture within the refrigerated compartment.
This manual contains operating data, electrical data and
service instructions for the Vector 6500 ST refrigeration The auto Start--Stop operation provides automatic cycl-
system. ing of the diesel engine, which in turn offers an energy
efficient alternative to continuous operation of the en-
Additional support manuals are listed in Table 2-2. gine with control of temperature by alternate cooling and
The model/serial number plate is located inside the unit heating of the supply air (evaporator outlet air). The auto
on the frame as shown in Figure 2--2. Start--Stop feature is standard equipment.
Table 2-1 Model Chart
R-404A Engine Speed

Models Compressor Engine
LB KG High Low
NDP532*6JB0 14 6.4 06D 41cfm V2203--L--DI--E3B--CTD--5 1800 1350
Table 2-2 Additional Support Manuals
Manual Number Equipment Covered Type of Manual

62--11369 Vector 6500ST Parts LookUp System (PLUS disc)
62--11038 06D Compressor Service Parts List
62-- 11405 Vector 6500ST Operator’s Manual
62-- 11406 Vector 6500ST Easy To Run
2--1 62-11389
1
24
23 3
4
22
16
21
6
14 13
12
15 20
11 9 8
7
10
18 19
17 REAR OF COMPRESSOR
1. Condenser/Radiator 13.Compressor (C)

2. Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT 14.High Pressure Switch (HP1)
-- Behind Grille) 15.Discharge Pressure Transducer (CDP)
3. Engine Coolant Temperature (ENCT 16.Suction Pressure Transducer (CSP)
-- Behind Intake Air Heater) 17.Rear Unloader Solenoid Valve (UL2)
4. Intake Air Heater (IAH) 18.Compressor Electrical Box
5. Fuel Solenoid Actuator (FSA) 19.Compressor Discharge Temperature (CDT)
6. Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN) 20.Discharge Service Valve
7. Engine Oil Pressure Switch (ENOPS) 21.Front Unloader Solenoid Valve (UL1)
8. Lube Oil Fill & Dipstick 22.Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor (CST)
9. Starter Motor (SM) On Suction Line Under Insulation
10. Engine Oil Drain 23. Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV)
11. Generator (GEN) 24. Condenser Fans And Motors (CDM1 &CDM2
12. Compressor Sight Glass --Behind Condenser/Radiator)
Figure 2--1. Front View
62-11389 2--2
9
3
4
10
8
9 7
1. Exhaust System 7. Serial (Download) Port (SLP)

2. Coolant System 8. Model/Serial Number Nameplate
3. Engine Speed Control Unit (ENSCU) 9. Power Supply Receptacle (PSR) -- (under unit)
4. Air Cleaner 10. Lube Oil Filter
5. Control Box (See Figure 2--5.)
6. Display and Keyboard
Figure 2--2. Roadside View
2--3 62-11389
1
1. Defrost Air Switch (DAS) 5. Compressor Suction Service Valve

2. Receiver and Sight Glasses 6. Battery (BY --Location)
3. Filter Drier 7. Battery Charger (BTYC)
4. Liquid Line Service Valve 8. Fuel Filter
Figure 2--3. Curbside View
62-11389 2--4
9
1
2
3
12
10 11
6 EVXV IS LOCATED CLOSER

TO THE ROAD SIDE TUBE
SHEET ON LATER UNITS
1. Evaporator air nozzle 7. Evaporator Outlet Pressure Transducer (EVOP)

2. Supply Air Temperature Sensor (1SAT) 8. Evaporator Outlet Temperature Sensor (EVOT
3. Evaporator fan/motor assembly -- On Suction Line Under Insulation)
4. Evaporator high temperature switch (1EVHTS 9. Return Air Temperature Sensor (1RAT)
-- Located on roadside tube sheet 10. Electric Heaters (HTR1, HTR2)
5. Evaporator coil 11. Heat Exchanger
6. Electronic Expansion Valve (EVXV) 12. Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTT -- Located
on curbside tube sheet)
Figure 2--4. Evaporator Section -- Grille Removed
2--5 62-11389
1
27
2 3
28
4
29
5
30
6
7
26
8
9
25
10
24
23 11
12
22 13
21 14
15
20
16
CONTROL BOX
17
19
18
31
1. Heat Contactor 1 (1HTCON1) 18. Buzzer (B)

2. Fuse (F28) 19. Display
3. Fuse (F27) 20. Microprocessor (MP)
4. Fuse (F26) 21. Fuse -- Standby Contactor Power (F9)
5. Fuse (F12) 22. Microprocessor Power Fuse (F6)
6. Fuse (F11) 23. Power Supply Contactor (PSCON)
7. Fuse (F10) 24. Power Supply Contactor 2 (PSCON2)
8. Fuse (F8) 25. Generator Contactor (GENCON)
9. Fuse (F7) 26. Overload Ground Fault (OGF)
10. AC Current Sensor (CT2,3,4) 27. Condenser Motor Contactor (CDCON)
11. Phase Reversal Module (PRM) 28. Evaporator Motor Contactor (1EVCON)
12. Power Supply Contactor Relay (PSCONR) 29. Heat Contactor 2 (1HTCON2)
13. Generator Contactor Relay (GENCONR) 30. Compressor Contactor (CCON)
14. Compressor Contactor Relay (CCONR) 31. Run Control Relay (RCR -- Used With
15. Main Fuse (F5) Remote Control Panel Only)
16. Air Heater Relay (GPR)
17. Starter Solenoid Relay (SSR)
Figure 2--5. Control Box
62-11389 2--6
9
2.3 CONDENSING SECTION
The condensing section (Figure 2--1.) consists of an en-
gine driven generator and a semi--hermetic com-
pressor, condenser fan motors, condenser and radiator
coils, refrigerant controls, piping, wiring, defrost air
switch and associated components.
2.3.1 Condenser Coil
The condenser coil is a microchannel type and acts as a
heat exchanger in which the compressed refrigerant
gas is lowered in temperature and condensed into a li-
quid. Air movement over the condenser is provided by LED
two electric motor driven fans mounted in the condens-
ing section.
2.3.2 Engine
The engine (Refer to Section 2.8) drives the generator Figure 2--6. Engine Speed Control Unit
directly.
5) Fuel and Speed Actuator (FSA)
a. Engine Transducers and Sensors:
The FSA combines the fuel shutoff solenoid and speed
1) Engine RPM Sensor (ENRPM) control solenoid into one component. Engine speed is
controlled by varying rod position.
Provides the ENSCU with the engine RPM information
for speed control of the engine. The ENSCU then sends 6) Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN)
the information to the microprocessor to be displayed in The ENSSN provides the RPM signal to the ENSCU for
the unit Data List and then to be recorded in the Data Re- speed control. It is located on the front of the engine in
corder. It is located in the timing case cover of the engine the gear case cover.
above the oil filter. 2.3.3 Compressor
2) Engine Oil Pressure Switch (ENOPS)
The compressor assembly includes the refrigerant com-
This normally open switch allows the engine to operate pressor, suction and discharge service valves, high
when oil pressure is above 15 ¦ 2 psig (1 ¦ 0.1 bar). pressure switch, compressor discharge thermistor and
The switch will open and automatically stop the engine the suction and discharge pressure transducers. The
when pressure drops below 15 ¦ 2 psig (1.02 ¦ 0.1 compressor draws refrigerant gas from the evaporator
bar). There is a 15 second delay after the engine starts and delivers it to the condenser at an increased temper-
to allow the oil pressure to build up before the micropro- ature and pressure. The pressure is such that refriger-
cessor looks at the input from this switch. The switch is ant heat can be absorbed by the surrounding air at ambi-
located on the front of the engine below the fuel sole- ent temperatures.
noid. 2.3.4 Unloaders
3) Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT) The refrigeration compressor used is a 41cfm model
06D, equipped with unloaders as standard equipment.
Provides microprocessor with engine coolant tempera- Unloaders are used as a compressor capacity control to
ture information to be displayed and recorded in the unload the compressor during periods of reduced loads.
DataRecorder . The sensor is located on the starter side This provides closer temperature control and reduces
of the engine near the #4 Injector. power required to operate the compressor; thus reduc-
4) Engine Speed Control Unit (ENSCU) (See ing fuel consumption.
Figure 2--6.) a. Major Working Parts
The ENSCU is mounted on the air cleaner bracket. (See S Solenoid and valve system
Figure 2--2.) It provides the RPM signal to the
microprocessor. The unit has an alarm LED S Spring loaded piston type bypass control valve
incorporated within it which is used to diagnose failures
within the ESC system. See Section 10.5 for information S Spring loaded unloader check valve (located on
on diagnosing failures. the valve plate)
2--7 62-11389
4
5 7
11
6
2 3
1
10
8 12
9 13
14
15
1. Solenoid valve 9. Strainer

2. Valve stem 10. Suction manifold
3. Gas bypass port 11. Cylinder discharge valve
4. Spring guide 12. Valve plate
5. Spring 13. Cylinder suction valve
6. Piston 14. Discharge piston check valve assembly
7. Piston bypass valve 15. Discharge manifold
8. Bleed orifice
Figure 2--7. Compressor Cylinder Head Unloaded
b. Unloaded Operation (Figure 2--7.)
Pressure from the discharge manifold (item 15) passes When the pressure behind the piston has been reduced
through the strainer (9) and bleed orifice (8) to the back sufficiently, the valve spring will force the piston bypass
of the piston bypass valve (7). Unless bled away, this valve back, opening the gas bypass from the discharge
pressure would tend to close the piston (6) against the manifold to the suction manifold.
piston spring (5) pressure.
Discharge pressure in the discharge manifold will close
With the solenoid valve (1) energized the solenoid valve
the discharge piston check valve assembly (14) isolat-
stem (2) will open the gas bypass port (3).
ing the compressor discharge manifold from the individ-
Refrigerant pressure will be bled to the suction manifold ual cylinder bank manifold.
(10) through the opened gas bypass port . A reduction in
pressure on the piston bypass valve will take place be- The unloaded cylinder bank will continue to operate fully
cause the rate of bleed through the gas bypass port is unloaded until the solenoid valve control device is de-
greater than the rate of bleed through the bleed orifice (8). energized and the gas bypass port is closed.
62-11389 2--8
9
4
5 7 11
6
2 3
1
10
12
8
9 13
14
15
1. Solenoid valve 9. Strainer

2. Valve stem 10. Suction manifold
3. Gas bypass port 11. Cylinder discharge valve
4. Spring guide 12. Valve plate
5. Spring 13. Cylinder suction valve
6. Piston 14. Discharge piston check valve assembly
7. Piston bypass valve 15. Discharge manifold
8. Bleed orifice
Figure 2--8. Compressor Cylinder Head Loaded
c. Loaded Operation (Figure 2--8.)
Discharge pressure bleeds from the discharge manifold 2.3.5 Filter Drier
(item 15) through the strainer (9) and (8) bleed orifice to
the solenoid valve stem (2) chamber and then back of The drier is a cylinder shell containing a drying agent
the piston bypass valve (7). and screen. It is installed in the liquid line and functions
With the solenoid valve (1) de-energized the solenoid to keep the system clean and remove moisture from the
valve stem will close the gas bypass port (3). refrigerant.
Refrigerant pressure will overcome the bypass valve
spring (5) tension and force the piston (6) forward clos- 2.3.6 Receiver
ing the gas bypass from the discharge manifold to the
suction manifold (10).
Liquid refrigerant from the condenser drains into the re-
Cylinder discharge pressure will force open the dis- ceiver. The receiver serves as a liquid reservoir when
charge piston check valve assembly (14). Refrigerant there are surges due to load changes in the system; as a
gas will pass into the compressor discharge manifold. storage space when pumping down the system and as a
The loaded cylinder bank will continue to operate fully liquid seal against the entrance of refrigerant gas into
loaded until the solenoid valve control device is ener- the liquid line.
gized and the gas bypass port is opened. Refer to Sec- The receiver is provided with two sight glasses, for the
tion 5.6 for more information on Loaded Operation. observation of liquid level, and a fusible plug.
2--9 62-11389
2.3.7 Compressor Transducers and Sensors 2.4.1 Electronic Expansion Valve (EVXV)
a. Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer (CSP) The electronic expansion valve is an electronic device
which controls the flow of liquid to the evaporator ac-
Provides microprocessor with suction pressure infor- cording to changes in superheat to the refrigerant leav-
mation to be displayed, recorded in the DataRecorder ing the evaporator. The expansion valve maintains a rel-
and used to control the refrigeration system. It cannot be atively constant degree of superheat in the gas leaving
calibrated. It is located near the oil pump on the com- the evaporator regardless of suction pressure. The
pressor. valve has a dual function -- automatic expansion control
b. Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer and prevention of liquid return to the compressor.
(CDP) 2.4.2 Heat Exchanger
Provides microprocessor with compressor discharge The heat exchanger is the tube in tube type and is con-
pressure information to be displayed, recorded in the nected in the main suction line and liquid line. The cold
data recorder and used to control the refrigeration sys- suction gas is used to cool the warm liquid refrigerant
tem. It can be calibrated. It is located on the center cylin- within the heat exchanger. This results in greater sys-
der head of the compressor. tem capacity and efficiency.
2.4.3 Evaporator Coil
c. Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor
Transducer (CDT) The unit evaporator is a tube in fin type. The operation of
the compressor maintains a reduced pressure within
Provides microprocessor with compressor discharge the coil. At this reduced pressure, the liquid refrigerant
temperature information to be displayed, recorded in evaporates at a temperature sufficiently low enough to
the data recorder and used to control the refrigeration absorb heat from the air.
system. It is located on the center cylinder head of the
compressor. 2.4.4 Evaporator Transducers and Sensors
a. Evaporator Outlet Pressure Transducer (EVOP)
d. Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV)
Provides microprocessor with evaporator outlet suction
The CSMV opens and closes as required for capacity pressure information to be displayed, recorded in the
control of the refrigeration system cooling cycle. It is lo- data recorder and used to control the refrigeration sys-
cated in the suction line at the exit of the evaporator pod. tem. It cannot be calibrated. It is located in the evapora-
tor section near the electronic expansion valve in the
e. Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor (CST)
suction line.
Provides microprocessor with compressor suction tem- b. Evaporator High Temperature Switch (EVHTS)
perature information to be displayed, recorded in the
data recorder and used to control the refrigeration sys- EVHTS is a safety switch which turns off the electric
tem. It is located on the suction line near the service heaters if the temperature in the evaporator compart-
valve. ment reaches 130°F (54.4°C.) It is located on the road-
side evaporator support bracket above the coil.
f. Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT) c. Evaporator Outlet Temperature Sensor (EVOT)
The AAT is a temperature control probe which provides Provides microprocessor with evaporator outlet suction
the microprocessor with ambient air temperature infor- temperature information to be displayed, recorded in
mation to be displayed, recorded in the data recorder the data recorder and used to control the refrigeration
and used to control the refrigeration system. It is located system. It is located on the suction line near the elec-
behind the condenser grille. tronic expansion valve and is wrapped with insulating
tape.
2.4 EVAPORATOR SECTION d. Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor (1DTT)
The evaporator fits into a rectangular opening in the up- 1DTT is located on the curbside evaporator support
per portion of the front wall of the refrigerated compart- bracket above the coil. It senses the temperature of the
ment. When installed, the evaporator section is located evaporator and allows defrost initiation once the tem-
inside this refrigerated compartment, and the condens- perature falls below 40°F (4.4°C)
ing section is outside.
e. Return Air Temperature Sensor (1RAT)
The evaporator assembly consists of an evaporator coil, 1RAT is a temperature control probe which provides mi-
evaporator fan motor, electronic expansion valve, evap- croprocessor with return air temperature information to
orator coil heaters, heat exchanger, defrost termination be displayed, recorded in the data recorder and used to
sensor and supply and return air sensors (See control the refrigeration system. It is located in the cen-
Figure 2--4.) and high temperature safeties. ter of the return air grille.
Heating and defrost is accomplished by electric evapo- f. Supply Air Temperature Sensor (1SAT)
rator coil heaters.
1SAT is a temperature control probe which provides mi-
Automatic evaporator coil defrosting is initiated by either croprocessor with supply air temperature information to
sensing the air pressure drop across the coil with a dif- be displayed, recorded in the data recorder and used to
ferential air switch or with the defrost timer in the micro- control the refrigeration system. It is located in the sup-
processor. ply air nozzle.
62-11389 2--10
9
2.5 SYSTEM OPERATING CONTROLS AND S FETs (Field Effect Transistors) for switching
COMPONENTS
components on and off, and checking circuit
The temperature controller is a Carrier Transicold Ad- current
vance Microprocessor (Refer to Sections 2.5.3 and 3).
Once the microprocessor is set at the desired tempera- S Automatic Engine Starting. Manual engine starting
ture, the unit will operate automatically to maintain the exists in units built before April 2007.
desired temperature within very close limits.
S Functional Parameter locks
The microprocessor consists of two modules -- the con-
trol module (See Figure 2--9.) and the display and key- S Alarms are stored in microprocessor memory for
pad module (See Figure 2--10.). The control box in- future reference
cludes manual switches, a microprocessor, fuses, and
associated wiring. S New menu system to simplify keyboard and
Standard equipment includes an auto Start--Stop fea- enhance functionality
ture. This feature provides automatic cycling of the die-
sel engine, which in turn offers an energy efficient alter- 2.5.3 Component Description And Location
native to continuous operation of the engine with control
of temperature by alternate cooling and heating of the a. Control Module
supply air (evaporator outlet air).
The control module is housed in the control box on the
2.5.1 Multiple Languages lower roadside (right) corner of the unit, just inside the
lower roadside door. The control module contains re-
Messages in the MessageCenter can be displayed in placeable relays and fuses which are externally acces-
English, French, Spanish or Portuguese. sible. LEDs are located next to the three relays plugged
Press and hold the Select Key for 6 seconds to view or into the control module to indicate relay operation. Addi-
change the current language selection. See Section tional LEDs indicate operation of the FETs (Field Effect
3.15 for more information on Language Selection. Transistors).
2.5.2 Special Features The control module includes the logic board, program
memory, FETs, PC card slot, and necessary input / out-
The following special features are incorporated into the put circuitry to interface with the unit.
Carrier Transicold Advance Microprocessor:
S A MessageCenter which clearly displays all The logic board is located within the control module, and
does not contain any serviceable components.
information in dot matrix form.
S Unit Operation and Alarms are displayed in English
(not in codes) CAUTION
S Large LCD display
Under no circumstances should anyone at-
S Unit Data and Functional Parameters tempt to repair the Logic or Display boards.
Should a problem develop with either of
S Programmable Maintenance hourmeters these components, contact your nearest
Carrier Transicold dealer for replacement.
S PM Hourmeters are resettable from the keypad
S Bright LED alarm light Figure 2--9. shows the control module. The control mod-
ule has three relays and four fuses that are user acces-
S Bright LED mode lights sible. There are three 7.5 amp fuses and one 10 amp
fuse.
S Fully automated Pretrip
The PC card slot is also shown in Figure 2--9. This card
S Automated microprocessor Self-test slot is used with all Carrier Transicold PC cards. The mi-
croprocessor automatically detects the presence and
S DataRecorder type of PC card inserted and responds accordingly. The
different types of PC cards are:
S DataRecorder date and time can be set from the
S Download PC card for downloading unit data
keypad
S Auto Start-Stop S Option PC card for installing optional software pro-
grams
S Trip Start to record date/time of trip in
S Configuration PC card for setting the micropro-
DataRecorder memory cessor functions, configurations, and DataRecorder
configurations.
S PC card functionality for downloading data,
upgrading programming and setting up S Program PC card for upgrading the microprocessor
Configurations. (Refer to Section 6.2.1.) software.
2--11 62-11389
There are three LEDs associated with the function of the 2.) During download, the light will blink once per second
PC card slot. These are: and will blink every 1.5 seconds when the download
is complete.
• A green microprocessor Status LED which will blink
steadily once per second indicating that the micropro- • A red (PC) Card Fault LED blinks if there is a prob-
cessor is operating and will blink every 0.5 seconds if lem transferring data from the PC card that has been
there is no software or if it is loading software. plugged into the PC card slot. The red LED will continue
to blink until the PC card is removed. The LED will also
• A green (PC) Card Status LED which comes on blink if there is an error reading the card. The LED will
when there is a PC card inserted in the slot. This LED blink every 0.5 seconds during a software change -- ei-
will:
ther an upgrade or downgrade. It will blink every 1.0 sec-
1.) Blink every 0.5 seconds when data is being trans- onds during data download to PC card. It will blink every
ferred to or from the PC card, and will be on steady 2.0 seconds when either the Program or Configuration
when the operation is complete and the PC card may or Option cards is inserted and no action is taken. Check
be removed. the MessageCenter for description of error.
RUN RELAY (RR -- Board QC4 (+12V

OUTPUT TO RR) SPEED RELAY (SR -- Board
Relay K2) & LED28 Relay K1) & LED 27
PC CARD FAULT LED F3 QC3 (+12V OUTPUT TO SR)
(RED) (7.5A) F2 (10A)
1MP (WHITE) RELAY POWER

IN/OUTPUT QC8 (12+ VDC)
CONNECTOR
DC CURRENT
PC SENSOR (CT1)
CARD SLOT
LED30 (GPR)
2MP (BLACK)
IN/OUTPUT LED31 (SSR)
CONNECTOR
6MP, IN/OUTPUT
PC CARD STATUS CONNECTOR
LED (GREEN)
5MP, IN/OUTPUT
MICROPROCESSOR CONNECTOR
STATUS LED (GREEN)
4MP, IN/OUTPUT
MICROPROCESSOR CONNECTOR
QC9 (FET ARC
SUPPRESSION)
QC2 (GROUND
3MP (GREY) FROM BATTERY)
IN/OUTPUT QC1 (12+VDC FROM
CONNECTOR BATTERY)
FET LEDs F1 (7.5A)
Refer to Table 2-3
Refer to Section 11 for Plug Descriptions
Figure 2--9. Control Module
Table 2-3. Field Effect Transistors

(Transistors not listed are spares)
FET DESIGNATION FET DESIGNATION
FET1 Condenser fan motor contactor (CDCON) FET18 Buzzer (B)
FET2 Compressor contactor (CCON) FET19 Power supply contactor (PSCON)
FET3 Generator contactor (GENCON) FET20 Evaporator motor contactor (1EVCON)
FET7 Green Light Bar LED Array (LB) FET21 Heat contactor 2 (1HTCON2)
FET10 Heat contactor 1 (1HTCON1) FET22 Rear unloader (UL2)
FET14 Amber Light Bar LED Array (LB) FET23 Front unloader (UL1)
62-11389 2--12
9
MODE LIGHTS DISPLAY
-20 +34° F STANDBY
ENGINE
MessageCenter DOOR
-20 +34°F
STATUS OK
DEFAULT MESSAGE
MAY BE REPLACED BY
USER DEFINED
MESSAGE
DISPLAY and KEYPAD MODULE
Figure 2--10. Display and Keypad
2--13 62-11389
b. Display and Keypad NOTE
The Display and Keypad module is located for operator There is an opening between the Alarm and
access at the lower roadside corner of the unit. Start-Stop LEDs that is not used at this time.
The display board is mounted in the Keypad and Display MessageCenter
module. The display board includes the LCD display,
keypad, and keypad interface. The MessageCenter is used to show messages. Details
of the messages are described in Section 7.1 Message-
The Display and Keypad module provides the user with Center.
a panel to view and control the functions of the refrigera-
tion unit. The module consists of a switch, keypad, Mes- NOTE
sageCenter, and main display. Set points and other sys- Messages can be displayed in multiple lan-
tem information are selected using the keypad. The guages. See Section 3.15 for Functional Pa-
previous figure shows the Display and Keypad module. rameter settings.
Display
The main display has nine characters (seven seven- Switch Descriptions
segment characters and two nine-segment characters), ENGINE/STANDBY Switch (DES)
two decimal points, two commas, and a degree symbol.
The display is used to provide the user a set point and This switch is used to select mode of
refrigerated compartment temperature -- either in de- operation, either engine drive or standby
grees Centigrade or Fahrenheit. The comma symbols electric motor drive. When this switch is
are used as the decimal indicators in Europe. When placed in standby position, the electric
Metric Units is selected in the Functional Parameters, motor will not start until the oil pressure
the two comma icons are used instead of decimal safety switch (ENOPS) opens.
points. When English Units is selected in the Functional
Parameters, decimal points are used. START/RUN--OFF Switch (SROS)
Temperature display is right justified, with unused digits START/RUN-OFF Switch
blank. A negative sign will be displayed for all set point The START/RUN-OFF switch is a 12 VDC
and refrigerated compartment temperatures below input to the microprocessor. When placed in
Zero. A positive sign will be displayed for all set point the START / RUN position, this switch
and refrigerated compartment temperatures above provides power to the microprocessor. The
0° which will not have a sign in front of it. microprocessor performs a self-test (all
The user has the option as to whether to have the set segments of display are illuminated). Then set
point displayed with a decimal or comma. Only set point point and refrigerated compartment
is affected by this selection. All other temperatures and temperature are displayed. To stop the unit or
pressures will continue to be displayed with either a dec- remove power from the microprocessor,
imal or comma. Refer to Configurations Section 6.2. place the SR0S to the OFF position.
Indicator LEDs Key Descriptions

The display has six LEDs across the top to indicate op- UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW Keys
eration status. These indicators are:
These keys allow you to change the set
S Cool Indicator (Green) -- Turned on when the unit points or other displayed data of the system.
is in COOL mode. They also allow you to scroll through the Unit
Data List, Function Parameters List, Alarm
S Heat Indicator (Amber) -- Turned on when the unit
List, etc.
is in HEAT mode.
EQUAL Key (ENTER)
S Defrost Indicator (Amber) -- Turned on when the
The EQUAL key is used for many things in-
unit is in DEFROST mode. cluding entering a set point, changing a
S Start-Stop Indicator (Green) -- Turned on when the Functional Parameter, clearing alarms, and
Start-Stop mode has been selected. locking the data menu.
MANUAL MANUAL DEFROST Key
S Continuous Indicator (Green) -- Turned on when DEFROST
the Continuous mode has been selected. The MANUAL DEFROST key is used to ini-
tiate a defrost cycle when the proper condi-
S Alarm Indicator (Red) -- Off or flashes at a rate of tions are met.
0.5 seconds. ALARM LIST ALARM LIST Key
The ALARM LIST key allows you to view the
NOTE alarms stored in the microprocessor. The
When the unit is in NULL mode (fan only), the alarm list is displayed in the Mes-
mode indicators (COOL, HEAT and sageCenter. Pressing the ALARM LIST key
DEFROST) are all off. once displays the active alarm list. Each
62-11389 2--14
9
successive press cycles through the list to 2.5.4 Handling of PC Cards
the end. To view the inactive alarm list, Refer
to Section 3.12. PC cards can be used to upgrade software (Section
6.5.2), download recorder data (Section 6.7.1), set con-
START--STOP / CONTINUOUS Key figurations (Section 6.2.1) and Functional Parameters
START-- STOP/
CONTINUOUS This key allows you to change from Start-- (Section 6.7.7) and install optional features.
Stop operation to Continuous Run opera- While these cards are constructed for a rugged environ-
tion. In Start--Stop operation, when the mi- ment, they are not intended to be stored in a technician’s
croprocessor is in Off--Cycle mode, the unit toolbox.
will not be running. During Off--Cycle mode,
the microprocessor monitors refrigerated The label on each card clearly states that the card is to
compartment temperature, battery voltage be handled with care -- not to be bent, dropped or ex-
and engine coolant temperature and will re- posed to impact. Heat, moisture and direct sunlight
start the unit when needed. should be avoided.
SELECT SELECT Key PC cards are designed to be used in a wide temperature
range of --40 to +185°F (--40 to +85°C). When a PC card
Press the SELECT key to scroll through the is connected to an Advance microprocessor or com-
menu selections. One of the five standard puter at temperatures outside this range, data transmis-
and one optional menu selections will ap- sion between the card and the other device may not be
pear in the MessageCenter when the SE- performed correctly.
LECT key is pressed.
Retention of programmed data for extended periods of
The five standard selections are: time requires a temperature range of --4 to +149°F (--20
•PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW HOURMETERS-- to +65°C). When PC cards are exposed to temperatures
Displays the hours for individual hour me- outside of this range for several days data contained on
ters. Refer to Section 3.14. the card may be damaged.
•PRESS ↑↓ TO START PRETRIP -- Used PC cards should never be:
to initiate a pretrip. Refer to Section 3.4. • Dropped
•PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW DATA -- Displays • Bent
Unit Data. Refer to Section 3.13.
• Twisted
•PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW SETTINGS -- Dis-
plays unit Functional Parameter settings.
• Squeezed
Refer to Section 3.15. • Submersed in any liquid
•PRESS ↑↓ TO MARK TRIP START -- This • Exposed to electrostatic discharge
menu selection is only used with the Data
Recorder. It is used to record a Trip Start
• Exposed to intense ultraviolet light
event which is logged in the Data Recorder. • Exposed to nearby magnetic or electromagnetic
This records the time and date of the begin- fields
ning of the trip. Data can then be down- Low X--Ray exposure, i.e. that experienced while
loaded and reviewed by trip, making data re- passing through a security screen, should not harm the
view much easier. Refer to Section 3.10. card data. High X--Ray exposure, i.e. that experienced
•PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW PRINT MENU -- En- in a medical or dental environment may damage the
ables the user to use hand--held Strip Print card data. PC cards should not be kept in a shirt pocket
printer kit P/N 12--00543--10. contained a pocket screwdriver with a magnetic end.
The optional selection is: PC cards should be kept in a hard plastic jewel case
when not in use. Replacement cases P/N 58--50109--00
•PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW INTELLISETS -- Re- are available from Carrier Transicold’s Performance
fer to Section 3.19.1. Parts Group.
2--15 62-11389
2.6 ELECTRONIC MODULES
2.6.1 Overload Ground Fault Module (OGF)
Figure 2--11. OGF Module 2.7.2 Door Switch and Remote Switches
A unit has provisions to connect a Door Switch (DS)
The OGF is located in the control box on the relay panel and/or two remote switches (REMS1 and 2) directly to
assembly. The module has two electrical safety features the microprocessor.
in diesel and standby modes: The microprocessor will recognize switches with con-
1. Overload protection -- OGF will open at 40A tacts that are either open when the door is open, or that
are closed when the door is open. Additionally, the Con-
2. Ground fault protection -- OGF will open at 150mA figuration List gives you the ability to determine whether
current flow to ground. the switch will: enable the alarm only, enable the alarm
For each case, Alarm 100 -- “OVERLOAD GROUND and also shut the unit down, enable the alarm and put
FAULT” is activated and the unit shuts down. the unit into low speed while the door is open, or to have
no alarm and only record door openings and closings in
In the case of ground fault detection, the red LED on the the data recorder.
OGF module will be on continuously.
If the door or remote switch is configured to shut the unit
2.6.2 Phase Reversal Module (PRM) down when the door is open, the unit will shut down for a
minimum of three minutes. Additionally, there is an
Override Door/Remote Switch in the Functional Para-
meters (Refer to Functional Parameter List, Section
3.15.) When this parameter is set to YES, the Door/Re-
mote Switch Alarm will come on when the door is open.
However, the unit will not shut down. This feature is in-
cluded in the event of a door switch failure.
2.7.3 Out of Range Alarm
The Out Of Range Alarm is intended to notify the driver
when the refrigerated compartment temperature has
moved away from set point or when the unit is operating
at low cooling capacity, and the compartment temperat-
ure is not pulling down toward set point. The Out Of
Range Alarm may be configured as an Alarm Only, or as
Figure 2--12. Phase Reversal Module an Alarm and Unit Shutdown. (Refer to Section 6.2 Con-
figuration Mode).
The PRM phase reversal module is located in the con-
trol box on the standby panel assembly. If the unit shuts down due to a shutdown alarm, the Out
Of Range Alarm will come on when the refrigerated
In standby mode, the phase reversal module checks the compartment temperature has been out of range for 30
electrical phase and reverses if necessary. to 45 minutes regardless if the refrigerated compart-
ment temperature was ever within set point range or not.
2.7 OPTIONS
Generally, when the unit is running, the refrigerated
2.7.1 LED Light Bar compartment temperature must have first been In
The light bar is an external set of indicator lights which Range before the Out of Range Alarm can be triggered.
can be seen in the mirror from the cab of the tractor. It is In Range is defined as the temperature of the
controlled by the microprocessor. The green LED array refrigerated compartment having been within ± 2.7°F
indicates “STATUS OK”. The amber LED array indic- (1.5°C) of set point in the Perishable Range, or within +
ates “CHECK UNIT”. Amber follows the microprocessor 2.7°F (1.5°C) of set point in the Frozen Range.
fault light and alarms can be read on the microprocessor The point at which the actual Out of Range Alarm comes
display. on is determined by the Out of Range Functional Pa-
62-11389 2--16
9
rameter setting. Selections of 4°F (2°C), 5.5°F (3°C), allowing the unit time to bring the refrigerated compart-
7°F (4°C), and OFF are available. The OFF setting dis- ment temperature into range before the Out of Range
ables the Out of Range Alarm. All other settings allow Alarm can be activated.
the user to determine how far away from set point the re- If the unit is not heating or cooling correctly, the Out of
frigerated compartment temperature will move before Range alarm may come on when:
turning on the Alarm. The alarm will be activated after 30
minutes if the unit is still more than the number of de- S The unit is in cool and in pulldown mode (1RAT is
grees selected in the Functional Parameter list away still far away from set point) and if the Delta--T
from set point if the alarm is configured for Alarm Only. (1SAT minus 1RAT) is not at least --1.0°F (0.56°C)
The alarm will be activated and the unit will shutdown for 30 minutes OR
after 45 minutes if the alarm is configured for Alarm and
Shutdown. S The unit is in pullup mode (1RAT is still far away
from set point) and the unit is operating in heat and
In Sleep Mode, Pretrip, Component Test Mode, or if the the 1SAT is the same temperature or colder than
unit has a Door Switch or Remote Switch configured as 1RAT.
a Door Switch, and the door has been opened, the Out
of Range Alarm is disabled and will not come on. After 2.7.4 Remote Control Panel
exiting any of these modes, or closing the refrigerated The unit may be fitted with an optional remote control
compartment door, the refrigerated compartment tem- panel. The panel displays refrigerated box set point,
perature must again come In Range of the set point be- box temperature and operating mode (heat, cool or
fore the Out of Range Alarm can be activated. defrost). The set point may be set and the unit may be
The internal timer is inactive in Defrost or in a Start--Stop started and stopped using the remote panel.
Off Cycle. Once the unit leaves these modes, and goes This compact panels can be mounted to suit the
into a temperature control mode (HEAT, COOL, or individual operator’s preferences -- in the cab, on the
NULL), the Out of Range internal timer not start until the front bulkhead, or in the refrigerated box (including in the
temperature is out of range of set point. Once the com- wall itself). See Section 3.20 for more information on the
partment temperature is out of range, the timer will start, remote control panels.
Table 2-4. Engine Data
Engine Model V2203--DI--E3B--CTD--5

Displacement 135 in3 (2.2 liters)
No. Cylinders 4
Rated Horsepower 32 hp (24 KW) @1800 rpm
NOTE: See Table 3-1 for actual engine RPM settings
Weight (With Flywheel) 440 lbs (199.6 kg)
Coolant Capacity 2 gallons (7.6 liters) (50/50 mix -- never to exceed 60/40)
Starts to open 177 to 182°F (81 to 83°C )
Thermostat
Fully open 203°F (95°C)
Oil Capacity with Filter 15 quarts (14 liters)
1st stage:
2702 to 2915 psig (183.8 to 198.3 bar)
Injection Setting
2nd stage:
3271 to 3555 psig (222.6 to 241.9 bar)
Fuel Winter: Diesel No. 1 Summer: Diesel No. 2
Firing Order 1--3--4--2
Intake Air Heater Am-
42 amps at nominal12 VDC
perage
Valve Clearance (Cold)
0.0071 to 0.0087 inch (0.18 to 0.22 mm)
(Intake and Exhaust)
Compression Engine compression must be above 400 psig (27.2 bar) (each cylinder)
2--17 62-11389
2.8 ENGINE DATA NOTE
The only approved synthetic lube oil is Mobil
Delvac 1. The normal oil change intervals
Engine data is presented in Table 2-4 should be reduced if the equipment is operated
under extreme conditions such as in dirty envi-
ronments.
Refer to Section 9.1 for information on service intervals.
CAUTION 2.9 ENGINE SCREW THREADS
All threads used on the internal components on the dies-
Use only ethylene glycol anti-freeze (with el engine are metric.
inhibitors) in system as glycol by itself will
damage the cooling system. Always add 2.10 ENGINE AIR SYSTEM
pre-mixed 50/50 anti-freeze and water to The air cleaner prolongs the life and performance of the
radiator / engine. Never exceed more than a engine by preventing dirt and grit from getting into the en-
60% concentration of anti-freeze. Use a low gine and causing excessive wear on all operating parts. It
silicate anti-freeze meeting GM specifica- is the responsibility of the operator to give the air cleaner
tions GM 6038M for standard life coolant or
use Texaco Havoline extended life coolant equipment regular and constant attention in accordance
or any other extended life coolant which is with the instructions. (Refer to Section 9.9.6)
Dexcool approved and has 5/150 (5 years / Clean air is supplied to the engine through the air clean-
150,000 miles) on the label. er. The air is necessary for complete combustion and
scavenging of the exhaust gases. As the engine piston
goes through the intake stroke, the piston draws clean
fresh air down into the cylinder for the compression and
power strokes. As the engine goes through its exhaust
CAUTION stroke, the upward movement of the piston forces the
hot exhaust gases out of the cylinders through the ex-
haust valves and the exhaust manifold. If the air filter is
When changing oil filters, the new filters allowed to become dirty, the operation of the engine
should be primed (partially filled) with clean would be impaired.
oil if possible. If the filters are not primed,
the engine may operate for a period with no 2.11 COMPRESSOR DATA
oil supplied to the bearings.
Table 2-5. Compressor Data
2.8.1 Lubrication System Compressor Model 06D
No. Cylinders 6
a. Oil Pressure
No. Unloaders 2
Weight 325 lbs (147 kg)
40 to 60 psig (2.7 To 4.1 bar)
Oil Charge 7.6 pints (3.6 L)
(Engine in high speed) Approved Oil Mobil Arctic EAL 68
2.12 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA

b. Oil Pressure Safety Switch Setting Closes
a. Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer
(CDP)
15 ( ¦ 2) psig [1.1(¦.2) bar]
Range: 0 to 500 psig (0 to 34 bar)
b. Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer
c. Lube Oil Viscosity: (CSP)
Outdoor Temperature Range: --29.93 inHg/--14.7 psig to 100 psig ( (1 to
SAE 6.9 bar)
Fahrenheit Centigrade
c. Defrost Air Switch (DAS)
Below 32_ 0° 10W 30
Initiates Defrost:
32_ to 77_ 0_ to 25_ 10W 30 or
15W 40 1.40 ¦ .07 inch (35 ¦ 1.8 mm) WG
Over 77_ Over +25_ 10W 30 or d. Defrost Timer (microprocessor controlled)
15W 40 1.5h, 3h, 6h, or 12 hours
62-11389 2--18
9
e. Evaporator High Temperature Safety (EVHTS) h. High Pressure Switch (HP1)
Opens at: 130°¦ 1°F (55°¦ 0.5°C) Opens on a pressure rise at : 465 ¦ 10 psig (34 ¦ 0.7
bar)
Closes at: 100°¦ 1°F (37.8° ¦ 0.5°C)
f. Defrost Termination Thermistor (1DTT) Closes on a pressure fall at : 350 ¦ 10 psig (24 ¦ 0.7
bar)
Allows defrost initiation at temperatures below 40°F
(4.4°°C) i. Evaporator Outlet Pressure Transducer (EVOP)
Terminates defrost cycle at 55° (12.8°C) Range: 28 inHg / 13.8 psig to 100 psig ( (1 to 6.8 bar)
g. Receiver Fusible Plug Setting Closes at: Oil pressure above15 psig (1 bar)
430°F (221°C) Melting Point j. Unit Dry Weight: 2,020 lbs. (916 Kg)
2.13 ELECTRICAL DATA

2.13.1 Component Specifications
COMPONENT RATINGS
Voltage and Frequency at 390--590V, Nominal 460V 60 Hz
High Speed
Voltage and Frequency at 293--420, Nominal 345V 45 Hz
Generator Low Speed
Resistance 0.738 to 0.778 ohms phase to ground
Output at high speed 20.5 kVA at 0.84 PF at 1800 rpm
Standby Power Voltage 460/3/60 with a 30A Circuit Breaker required
Requirements Current
Gauge 10/4 AWG
Standby Extension Cord 50’ Min. to 75’ Max
Length
Full Load Amps (FLA) 17.5 amps at 460 VAC
Compressor Motor Locked Rotor 99 amps at 460 VAC
Winding resistance Approximately 2 ohms phase to phase
Full Load Amps (FLA) 1.9 Amps at 60 Hz at high speed
Horsepower 1.1 hp (820 watts) at 60 Hz
Condenser Fan Motors RPM 1700 rpm at 60 Hz
(2 Assemblies) Bearing lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required
Rotation Clockwise when viewed from shaft end
Resistance 20 to 21 ohms nominal
Full Load Amps (FLA) 1.9 Amps
Horsepower 1.35 hp (1007 watts) at 60hz
Evaporator Fan Motor RPM 3500 rpm at 60 hz
(1 Assembly) Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required
Rotation Clockwise when viewed from shaft end
Resistance 7 to 8 ohms nominal
Number of heaters 3 elements (1 assembly)
Resistance (cold) 196 ohms ±10 ohms pin to pin
Heater 1
Current (Low Speed) 2.6 Amps nominal each line
Current (High Speed) 3.4 Amps nominal each line
Number of heaters 4 elements (1 assembly)
Resistance (cold) 196 ohms ±10 ohms pin to pin
Heater 2
Current (Low Speed) 2.6 Amps nominal
Current (High Speed) 3.4 Amps nominal
Maximum output amps 20 Amps
Battery Charger
Nominal output voltage 14.8 VDC at 77°F (25°C)
Change 1010 2--19 62-11389

COMPONENT RATINGS
46 ohms (¦ 10 %) per winding measured between
the gray common wire and each of the other four
Electronic Expansion Valve Resistance wires
92 ohms (¦ 10 %) for any two windings in series oth-
er than the gray wire
Compressor Suction Modu- 72 to 84 ohms per winding
lation Valve Resistance
92 ohms (¦ 10 %) for any two windings
2.13.2 Component Resistance & Current Draw

Table 2-6. Component Resistance & Current Draw
Component Ohms Amps
Unloader 10.6 ± 0.3 Ohms 1.0 to 2.0 Amps
12VDC Relay 72 Ohms ±10% 0.14 -- 0.18 Amps
(GPR, SSR)
12VDC Relay 80 Ohms ±15% 0.12 -- 0.17 Amps
(PSCONR, GENCONR,
CCONR, RCR)
HTCON1, HTCON2, 48 Ohms ±10% 0.25 Amps ±10%
CDCON, 1EVCON
PSCON1, PSCON2, 15.5 Ohms ±10% 0.77 Amps ±10%
GENCON, CCON
Fuel Solenoid Actuator 2.8 Ohms ±10% @ 68°F (20°C) 4 Amps Max
(FSA)
Intake Air Heater Circuit 0.3 to 0.5 ohms 38 -- 46 Amps
Starter Motor Less than 1 ohm but more than 0 270 -- 380 amps
2.14 SAFETY DEVICES

System components are protected from damage caused by unsafe operating conditions by automatic shut--down of
the unit when such conditions occur. This is accomplished by the safety devices listed below:
Unsafe Conditions Safety Device Device Setting
Excessive current draw by microprocessor Fuse (F1) Opens at 7.5 amps
Excessive current draw by speed relay Fuse (F2) Opens at 10 amps
Excessive current draw by run relay Fuse (F3) Opens at 7.5 amps
Excessive current draw by battery output Fuse (F5) Opens at 80 amps
Excessive current draw by control circuit Fuse (F6) Opens at 15 amps
Excessive current draw by battery charger input Fuse, Time Delay (F7/8) Open at 3A*
Excessive current draw by generator /power sup- Fuse (F9) Opens at 10 amps
ply contactors
Excessive current draw heaters Fuse (F10 / F11 / F12) Open at 12 amps
Excessive current draw evaporator and condens- Fuse, Time Delay Open at 12 amps
er motors (F26/F27/F28)
Excessive temperature in evaporator High temperature thermo- Opens at 130_F (54.4_C)
stat (EVHTS) Closes at 100_F (37.8_C)
Excessive condenser fan motor winding Internal protector Auto reset
temperature
Excessive compressor motor winding temperature Internal protector Auto reset
Excessive evaporator motor winding temperature Internal protector Auto reset
High voltage over current or ground fault OGF Auto reset for over current
only
*6A Time Delay Fuse is used when there is a second battery charger
62-11389 2--20
9
2.15 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT DURING COOLING obtain maximum use of the evaporator heat transfer
surface.
When cooling, (See Figure 2--13.) the unit operates as The refrigerant pressure drop caused by the expansion
a vapor compression refrigeration system. The main valve is accompanied by a drop in temperature so the
components of the system are: the (1) reciprocating low pressure, low temperature fluid that flows into the
compressor, (2) air-cooled condenser, (3) electronic ex- evaporator tubes is colder than the air that is circulated
pansion valve, and (4) direct expansion evaporator. over the evaporator tubes by the evaporator fan. The
evaporator tubes have aluminum fins to increase heat
The compressor raises the pressure and the tempera-
transfer; therefore heat is removed from the air circu-
ture of the refrigerant and forces it into the condenser
tubes. The condenser fans circulate surrounding air lated over the evaporator. This cold air is circulated
throughout the refrigerated compartment to maintain
over the outside of the condenser tubes. The tubes have
the cargo at the desired temperature.
fins designed to improve the transfer of heat from the re-
frigerant gas to the air. This removal of heat causes the The transfer of heat from the air to the low temperature
refrigerant to liquify. Liquid refrigerant leaves the con- liquid refrigerant causes the liquid to vaporize.
denser and flows to the receiver. This low temperature, low pressure vapor passes
The receiver stores the additional charge necessary for through the evaporator outlet temperature and pressure
low ambient operation. The receiver is equipped with a sensors (EVOT and EVOP) which aid in calculation of
relief valve (See Section 2.12). superheat. The vapor then passes through the “suction
line / liquid line” heat exchanger where it absorbs more
The refrigerant leaves the receiver and flows through heat from the high pressure / high temperature liquid
the liquid line service valve to the subcooler. The sub- and then returns to the compressor through the com-
cooler occupies a portion of the main condensing coil pressor suction modulation valve (CSMV). The CSMV
surface and gives off further heat to the passing air. controls the compressor suction pressure thereby
The refrigerant then flows through a filter-drier where an matching the compressor capacity to the load.
absorbent keeps the refrigerant clean and dry.
2.16 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT -- HEATING AND DE-
The refrigerant flows to the suction line heat exchanger. FROSTING
Here the liquid is further reduced in temperature by giv-
ing off some of its heat to the suction gas. The compressor is turned off for all heating and defrost
cycles. Heating is always accomplished using electric
The liquid then flows to an electronic expansion valve resistance heaters. Defrost may be accomplished using
(EVXV) which reduces the pressure of the liquid and either electric heaters or return air. See Sections 5.4, 5.7
meters the flow of liquid refrigerant to the evaporator to and 5.12 for more information on heating and defrost.
2--21 62-11389
EVXV RELIEF VALVE
RECEIVER
EVOP HOST EVAPORATOR
EVOT
KING
VALVE
HEAT EXCHANGER
CSMV
LIQUID LINE
FILTER
CDP HP1 DRIER
CDT SUBCOOLER
DISCHARGE
SERVICE
VALVE CST
SUCTION
SERVICE
VALVE
CONDENSER
CSP
COMPRESSOR
DISCHARGE
LIQUID
HOT GAS LINE
SUCTION LINE
Figure 2--13. Refrigerant Circuit During Cooling
62-11389 2--22
SECTION 3
OPERATION
3.1 STARTING UNIT -- ENGINE OPERATION
WARNING
Under no circumstances should ether or any other starting aids be used to start engine.
MODE LIGHTS
MAIN DISPLAY
MessageCenter
-20 +34.5° F STANDBY
DOOR
ENGINE
I START/RUN
0 OFF
1. Place the ENGINE/STANDBY 2. Place the START/RUN - OFF switch

switch in the ENGINE position. (SROS) in the START/RUN position.
3. The microprocessor will then enter pretest,

perform preset (refer to Section 3.3) and
start automatically.
3--1 62-11389
3.2 STARTING UNIT -- ELECTRIC STANDBY OPERATION
WARNING
Be aware of HIGH VOLTAGE supplied by the generator as the unit may start automatically. Before
servicing the unit, make sure the START / RUN--OFF switch is in the OFF position. Use discretion
when servicing the unit. It may be necessary to disconnect the negative battery and the standby
power cables for certain service procedures. NEVER dis--assemble the generator: HIGH MAGNETIC
FIELD INSIDE! This field can interfere with and cardiac implants such as pacemaker and defibrillat-
ors.
WARNING
Make sure the power plug is clean and dry before connecting to any electrical outlet / receptacle.
WARNING
Do not connect to any electrical outlet without checking that it meets the 460/3/ 60 and 30 Amp
electrical requirements of the unit.
1. Ensure the Engine/Standby switch is in 2. Ensure the external power circuit breaker is
the STANDBY position and the Start/ off, connect standby cable to unit and then
Run--Off switch is in the OFF position turn the external power circuit breaker on.
-20 +34.5° F STANDBY
ENGINE
I START/RUN
0 OFF
3. Place the START / RUN - OFF I START/RUN

4. The unit will then enter pretest, perform
switch (SROS) in the START/RUN preset (refer to section 3.3) and start
position. 0 OFF automatically.
NOTE • The power supply cable and circuit breaker must

The unit is equipped with automatic phase re- comply with local electrical code and unit specifica-
versal which insures that the electric motors will tions. See 2.13.
run in the correct direction.
• The power supply cable must be equipped with a
For safe, reliable operation in electric standby ground connection.
mode, it is important to consider the following
guidelines:
• Repairs or maintenance to the supply voltage circuit
• NEVER connect the unit to a high voltage power should only be performed by licensed / authorized
source with the SROS in the START / RUN position. personnel.
62-11389 3--2
3.3 SELF TEST & PRESET
STANDBY
ENGINE
SELF TEST
When first powered up, the microprocessor will run a 3. If the IntelliSet option has been installed the active or
self test consisting of the following steps: modified IntelliSet or “INTELLISET INSTALLED
• All of the mode lights will illuminate. BUT NOT ACTIVE” will be displayed before the mi-
croprocessor continues on to the next step. Refer to
• All of the segments on the display will turn on. Section 3.19.1 for IntelliSet information.
• All of the liquid crystal diodes (LCDs) in the Messa- • If the microprocessor has been configured to display
geCenter will turn on to verify their operation. the hour meters, the Total Engine Hours, Standby
• The display will then show the set point temperature Run Hours and/or Total Switch On Hours will be
in the left three characters and the refrigerated com- displayed.
partment temperature in the right four characters.
The last character (after the degree symbol) shows • The microprocessor will then enter preset. During
the temperature units as “C” Centigrade or “F” Fahr- this procedure, an “SMV CLOSING” message will be
enheit. When set for °F, there is a decimal in the com- displayed as CSMV and the EVXV are brought to
partment Temperature. When set for °C, there is a unit starting positions.
comma in the compartment Temperature. • In engine operation, after preset, the intake air
• The MessageCenter will continue to the next applic- heater will energize (as required), the buzzer will
able step or: sound, and the engine will start. Refer to Section
1. If there are one or more Active alarms, the alarms 4.2.2 for intake air heater times.
must be cleared before the unit can start. Refer to • In standby operation, after preset, buzzer will
Section 3.11 for information on viewing active sound then the fans and compressor will start.
alarms.
2. If one or more Inactive alarms are stored, “INAC-
TIVE ALARMS IN MEMORY” will be displayed and
the Alarm LED will flash for 5 seconds, then turn off.
“CHECK AT NEXT SERVICE INTERVAL” will then
be displayed before the microprocessor continues
on to the next step. Refer to Section 3.12 for informa-
tion on viewing inactive alarms.
3--3 62-11389
3.4 PRETRIP
1. Place Start/Run--Off switch in the “START / RUN” position.
HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS
PPPP
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
TEST #1
MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
2. Press the SELECT key until the MessageCenter

displays “PRESS THE = KEY TO START PRETRIP” .
3. Press the = key to start PRETRIP.
4. Verify that during TEST#1 the complete display is turned on, that the buzzer comes
on and that all lights on the Light Bar come on.
5. The remainder of Pretrip will take 7 to 15 minutes, and will run itself automatically.
The PRETRIP mode is for checking unit operation and TIP

evaluating operation of all modes. It will indicate a failure The Pretrip test “PASS” results message will
when one is detected. stay displayed until a key is pressed, or until the
TIP Start/Run--Off switch is placed in the OFF posi-
tion.
A Pretrip can be started when the refrigerated
compartment is at any temperature.
The Pretrip test “FAIL” results message will
The MessageCenter displays the current test and the % stay displayed until the alarms are cleared
complete of the test. When the Pretrip tests are com-
plete the MessageCenter will display one of three differ-
ent messages: Once Pretrip is started, the control panel keys are dis-
abled until Pretrip is completed.
• “PRETRIP PASS” OR
• “PRETRIP FAIL IN TEST X” OR TIP
• “PRETRIP FAILED & COMPLETE”. Alarm light If “CAN NOT START PRETRIP” is displayed in
will be on. the MessageCenter, check to see if the unit is in
PC Mode (Refer to Section 6.1) or Defrost
Press the ALARM LIST key to review the alarms mode, or check the alarm list (Section 3.11) for
triggered by the Pretrip tests. active shutdown alarms.
62-11389 3--4
PRETRIP (Continued)
NOTE Test 1 -- Display And Sound Test
NOTE 1: Pretrip may be initiated any time the The microprocessor activates the LCD / LED display,
unit is running, or when the unit is off but the and both lights on the Light Bar. This test will last 5
START/RUN-OFF switch is in the seconds. All segments of the display, all LEDs on the mi-
START/RUN position. Pretrip will not start if croprocessor, both lights of the Light Bar, and the buzzer
there is an active shutdown alarm, or if the will be on during this test. This is the only portion of the
unit is in PC mode or in defrost. Pretrip check that requires the operator to determine
PASS or FAIL. A defective display and sound test is indi-
NOTE 2: Pretrip will run until completed, unless cated if: any LCD/LED segments are not visible, any
an alarm occurs that causes Pretrip to be LEDs or lights do not come on, or the buzzer does not
aborted. Only alarms that will result in other sound. Anything that fails during this test should be re-
erroneous alarms or will affect future paired at the conclusion of the Pretrip cycle. Pretrip will
Pretrip tests will allow Pretrip to be aborted. continue regardless of the outcome of this test. A faulty
display, light bar or buzzer will not affect the operation of
the unit, but will affect what is displayed during unit op-
eration.
TIP
Test 2 -- Amperage Check of 12VDC Electrical Com-
Pretrip may be stopped by the user by either ponents
turning the unit off then back on again, or by Check the amperage (current) draw of the following
pressing and holding the = key for 5 seconds.
“PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER” will appear in components:
the MessageCenter. • Battery DC Current
(All Components Turned Off)
• UL1 Front Unloader
Once Pretrip is started: If the unit is running, the micro- • UL2 Rear Unloader
processor will shut the unit down. • ENSCU
• CDCON
• CCON
NOTE • GENCON
Before completing Pretrip, the microprocessor • PSCON
looks at the status of alarms and if certain
alarms are active (for example: Low Fuel Warn- • EVCON
ing, Check Engine Oil Level, Check Coolant • HTCON1
Level, Check Coolant Temperature, PreTrip will
show “FAILED”, indicating that the unit is not • HTCON2
ready to be sent out for a load, but that the alarm • Intake Air Heater
list should be checked and all present alarm si-
tuations corrected.
Each component will be individually checked for proper
current draw. An alarm will be displayed for any compo-
nent testing outside the current range (amps).
Test 3 -- Refrigeration System Equalization Check
TIP With the engine and the unit off, the CSMV will open to
It is always a good idea to clear all alarms from 50% and the EVXV will open to 100% so that the pres-
both Alarm Lists before starting Pretrip. The sure in the refrigeration system can equalize. If the pres-
technician will then know that any alarms pressure does not equalize to within 80 psig (5.4 bar)
ent following Pretrip occurred during Pretrip, ALARM P171 -- CHECK EVAP & DISC PRESS-- will be
and are not old alarms that had not been activated.
cleared.
Test 4 -- Temperature Sensor Check
Check the condition of all of the system temperature
sensors.
Test 4 will last approximately 5 seconds. If a problem is
NOTE detected with any of the sensors, the corresponding
The operator MUST be present and validate alarm will be displayed.
this test by watching the microprocessor dis- NOTE
play during Test 1 -- Display Test. The micropro-
cessor will turn on all segments of the LCD and Tests 5, 6 an 7 are only performed when unit is
LED display. in Engine / Road mode. For Electric Standby
mode, pretrip will skip to Step 8.
3--5 62-11389
PRETRIP (Continued)
Test 5 -- Engine Low Speed Test 11 -- Check Compressor Suction Modulation
Valve (CSMV)
The engine starts up in Low Speed with condenser fans
on. The microprocessor verifies that engine rpm are in This test ensures that the CSMV is opening and closing
low speed range. If the engine is not operating within the properly. If suction pressure doesn’t change as
low speed range, the “CHECK LOW SPEED RPM” expected with CSMV closed then “CHECK SUCTION
alarm will be displayed. MOD VALVE” alarm will be displayed. This test may
take several minutes.
Test 6 -- Engine High Speed
Test 12 -- Electronic Expansion Valve (EVXV)
The engine switches to High Speed and energizes This test checks the operation of the EVXV. If valve
HTCON1 and HTCON2. The microprocessor verifies doesn’t test properly “CHECK EVAP SUPERHEAT”
that engine rpm are in high speed range. If the engine is alarm will be displayed.
not operating within the high speed range, the “CHECK
HIGH SPEED RPM” alarm will be displayed. Test 13 -- Unloaders
This test checks the operation of the unloaders. If suc-
Test 7 -- Engine Low Speed 2
tion and discharge pressures do not change when UL1
The engine switches back to Low Speed and heaters and UL2 are energized and de--energized, the “CHECK
turn off. The microprocessor verifies that engine rpm are UL1” or “CHECK UL2” alarm will be displayed.
in low speed range. If the engine is not operating within Test 15 -- Check For Other Alarms
the low speed range, the “CHECK LOW SPEED RPM”
alarm will be displayed. The alarm list is checked for any non-pretrip alarms that
may have occurred during the Pretrip test. If any
Test 8 -- Electric Heater Amperage Check operational alarms occurred, Pretrip will show FAIL, and
Will energize each heater individually and check for the technician will need to review the Alarm List and take
proper current draw. An alarm will be displayed for any necessary and appropriate action to clear them. Test 15
heater testing outside the current range (amps). will last about five seconds.
Pretrip Termination
Test 9 -- Evaporator Fan Motor Amperage Check
When the Pretrip cycle is completed, the unit will return
Will energize the evaporator motor contactor and check to normal temperature control operation.
for proper current draw. An alarm will be displayed if the “PRETRIP PASS” will be shown in the display until the
fan motors tests outside the current range (amps). operator presses any key. In the event that the Pretrip
Test 10 -- Condenser Fan Motors Amperage Check test triggered an alarm(s), the display will show either
“PRETRIP FAIL & COMPLETE” (if the entire Pretrip
Will energize condenser motor contactor and check for cycle was completed), or “PRETRIP FAIL IN TEST XX”,
proper current draw. An alarm will be displayed if fan (if the Pretrip cycle was aborted by an alarm before it
motors test outside the current range (amps). was completed).
62-11389 3--6
3.5 CHANGING SET POINT
-20 +34.5° F
SETPOINT CHANGED

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
1. With the set point displayed, press the UP ARROW or DOWN

ARROW key to change the set point to the desired value. The
MessageCenter will show “↑↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO
SAVE”.
2. Press the = key to save the new set point.
By default, set points of --22°F to +89.6°F (--30°C to Set point may be changed any time the Start/Stop--Off
+32°C) may be entered via the keypad. The micropro- switch is in the START/RUN position, or when the unit in
cessor always retains the last entered set point in PC Mode EXCEPT when:
memory. The microprocessor may be configured to • Viewing the Alarm List, Data List or Functional Para-
change the set point in either 0.1° (one--tenth of a de- meters OR
gree) or 1° (one full degree) increments by pressing and • When the unit is in Pretrip OR
releasing either the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW
key. • When the unit is in Sleep Mode
NOTE Pressing the = key will cause the new displayed set
point value to become active and “SETPOINT
The microprocessor may be configured with a CHANGED” will be displayed. If the new value is not en-
minimum and/or maximum set point other than
the default values listed above. “MAX SET- tered, after 5 seconds of no keypad activity, the entire
POINT HAS BEEN REACHED” or “MIN SET- display and Light Bar will flash for 15 seconds with “SET-
POINT HAS BEEN REACHED” will appear in POINT NOT CHANGED” displayed and then revert
the MessageCenter when either of these condi- back to the last entered set point. All other keys are ac-
tions are reached. tive at this time and if pressed while the display is flash-
ing, will stop the flashing, and perform the requested
function.
TIP
The set point may be changed quickly by press-
ing and holding the UP ARROW or DOWN AR-
ROW key. The longer the key is held, the faster
the setting will change.
3--7 62-11389
3.6 START--STOP OPERATION
START--STOP
LIGHT
-20 +34.5° F
START/STOP MODE SELECTED

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
1. Press the START--STOP/CONTINUOUS key until

the START--STOP Light on the microprocessor illu-
minates.
2. Verify that “START/STOP MODE SELECTED” is displayed on the MessageCenter and that
the START-STOP light is illuminated. The unit is now in Start-Stop operation.
Start--Stop is provided to reduce fuel or power con- If the unit fails to start after three start attempts,
sumption. This feature allows full automatic control of “FAILED TO START--AUTO MODE” alarm will be acti-
the unit starting and stopping by monitoring box temper- vated. While running, if the unit shuts down, an internal
ature, battery charging amps and engine coolant tem- counter keeps track of the shutdowns. Should the unit
perature (Engine Operation only). The main function of shut down three consecutive times without running a
Start--Stop Operation is to turn off the refrigeration sys- minimum of 15 minutes between shutdowns, the
tem near setpoint to provide an efficient temperature “FAILED TO RUN MINIMUM TIME” Alarm will be acti-
control system and to initiate a restart sequence after vated. The shutdown counter is cleared when the unit
certain conditions are met. The Start--Stop/Continuous has run for 15 minutes.
key is pressed to select between Continuous Run and NOTE
Start--Stop Operation. The corresponding LED will be In Standby Operation, the unit will stop for a
iluminated. Refer to Section 4.5.1 for more detailed in- minimum of 5 minutes instead of 15 minutes.
formation on Start--Stop Operation.
3.6.1 Start--Stop Parameters
The microprocessor may be configured with Start-Stop The selectable parameters used by the microprocessor to
operation tied to the set point ranges for frozen and per- determine when the unit will start or stop include:
ishable loads. The Start/Stop--Continuous key is locked • MINIMUM RUN TIME
out if “START-STOP LOCKED” appears in the Messa-
geCenter when the key is pressed and the unit is in • MINIMUM OFF TIME
Start--Stop Operation or “CONTINUOUS LOCKED” ap- • OVERRIDE TEMP
pears in the MessageCenter when the key is pressed
and the unit is in Continuous Run Operation. Refer to • MAXIMUM OFF TIME
Section 6.2.1 for Configuration information. • FROZEN SHUTDOWN OFFSET
62-11389 3--8
The microprocessor may be configured so that: 3.6.3 Charging Amps
• the same settings apply to any set point, or The microprocessor may be configured to monitor bat-
tery charging amperage in addition to battery voltage.
• the settings are different, depending on whether the The battery charging rate must be below the selected
set point is in the perishable range or in the frozen amp setting to allow the unit to cycle off.
range. The Configuration may be set from 1.0 to 10.0 Amps in
3.6.2 Restart Voltage 0.5 amp increments. A weak or defective battery may in-
dicate a suitable voltage charge while the alternator is
The microprocessor will restart the unit when a preset actually putting a high charging rate into it, then not be
minimum voltage is reached. The minimum voltage may sufficiently charged to restart the engine at the end of a
be configured from 11.5 to 12.8 Volts in 0.1V incre- Start-Stop Off Cycle.
ments. The factory setting for this Configuration is The factory setting for this Configuration is 6.5 amps.
12.2V. This is a general setting that may need to be adjusted for
A lower voltage selection may result in a longer off cycle the operating environment of the unit. Units operated in
(based on battery voltage) and possibly overall shorter colder ambient temperatures may require a lower set-
battery life. A higher voltage selection may result in a ting to force a higher charge in the battery prior to Start-
shorter off cycle (based on battery voltage) and possibly Stop Off Cycle. Units operated in warmer ambient tem-
overall longer battery life. peratures may use a higher setting.
As a battery ages, it is normal for it to require longer re-
charging periods. If the running time is gradually in-
creasing in Start-Stop operation due to the battery re-
quiring a longer charging period, this run time may be
shortened by raising the amp setting. (This may be
checked by reviewing downloaded data and looking at
the amp reading during prolonged engine Start-Stop On
Cycles.)
3--9 62-11389
3.7 CONTINUOUS RUN OPERATION
CONTINUOUS
RUN LIGHT
-20 +34.5° F
CONTINUOUS RUN MODE SELECTED

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
1. Press the START-STOP/CONTINUOUS

key until the CONTINUOUS RUN 2. Verify that “CONTINUOUS RUN MODE SELECTED”
Light on the microprocessor illuminates. is displayed on the MessageCenter and that the
CONTINUOUS RUN light is illuminated. The unit is
now in Continuous Run operation.
In the Continuous Run Mode, the unit will not shut down If the unit fails to start after three start attempts, Alarm
except in responce to a shut down alarm. Refer to Sec- 31 -- “FAILED TO START--AUTO MODE” -- will be activ-
tion 4.5.2 for more detailed information on Continuous ated. While running, if the unit shuts down, an internal
Run Operation. counter keeps track of the shutdowns. Should the unit
The microprocessor may be configured with Start--Stop shut down three consecutive times without running a
operation tied to the set point ranges for frozen and per- minimum of 15 minutes between shutdowns, the
ishable loads. The START-STOP/CONTINUOUS key is Alarm 30 “FAILED TO RUN MINIMUM TIME” Alarm will
locked out if “START-STOP LOCKED” appears in the be activated. The shutdown counter is cleared when the
MessageCenter when the key is pressed and the unit is unit has run for 15 minutes.
in Start-Stop Mode or “CONTINUOUS LOCKED” ap-
pears in the MessageCenter when the key is pressed
and the unit is in Continuous Run Mode. Refer to the
configuration table Section 6.2.
62-11389 3--10
3.8 SLEEP MODE

SLEEP MODE SETTINGS

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
TO ENTER SLEEP MODE

If the unit is equipped with IntelliSet, it can be placed in sleep mode by choosing IntelliSleep.
(refer to Section 3.19.1).
If the unit is not equipped with IntelliSet:

1. Press the SELECT key until the MessageCenter displays “PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW SETTINGS”.
2. Press the UP ARROW key until the Functional Parameter “SLEEP MODE SETTINGS” is
displayed in the MessageCenter. Press the ”=” key. ↑↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SAVE”
will show in the MessageCenter.
3. Press either UP or DOWN ARROW key until “SLEEP MODE: YES” is displayed. The Mes-
sageCenter will flash, indicating that a change has been made that has not been entered into
memory. Press the ”=” key. The setting is saved and the MessageCenter will stop flashing.
4. Additional Functional Parameter sub menu selections will now be available and may be saved
to memory following the key stroke sequence in the preceding step. Refer to the following
paragraphs for information on these settings.
TO EXIT SLEEP MODE
Place the START / RUN - OFF switch in the OFF position, then back to START / RUN.
Sleep Mode is generally used in cold ambients when the In Sleep and Standby Mode the unit will “Wake Up” and
trailer may be parked or not used and the unit is OFF for the battery charger will be energized to keep the battery
an extended period of time with no product inside the re- charged.
frigerated box. Many times units are difficult to start due
to a discharged battery, thickened engine oil, etc. after ADDITIONAL SUB MENUS
time in cold ambients. 1. “WAKE UP TIME”
There is NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL in Sleep a. When “WAKE UP TIME” is set to NO the unit will
Mode and it should never be used if the refrigerated box remain in Sleep Mode until it is taken out manually
contains perishable or frozen products. (refer to “TO EXIT SLEEP MODE” instruction
above).
In Sleep and Engine Mode the unit will “Wake Up” peri-
odically and run to keep the battery charged and the en- b. When “WAKE UP TIME” is set to YES the “SET
gine warm. WAKEUP TIME” menu will become available.
3--11 62-11389
Pressing the “=” key will allow the user to select the date If the unit is already running when Sleep Mode is se-
and time the unit is to automatically wake up. The wake lected, it will continue to run until the conditions de-
up time must be at least 1 hour and no more than 8 days scribed above are met.
from the time the clock is set. The following information
can be entered: While the unit is cycled off in Sleep Mode, “SLEEP
MODE, OFF/ON TO WAKE” will be displayed in the
MessageCenter. The display backlight will turn off after
S Month (1 to 12) 5 minutes.
S Day (1 to 31)
S Year (1998 to 2037) While in Sleep Mode, Unit Data and Alarm Lists may be
S Hour (0 to 23) viewed, and Functional Parameters may be viewed and
changed as necessary. However, Start--Stop/Continu-
S Minute (0 to 59) ous Run selections and set point can not be changed.
NOTE Manual Defrost and Pretrip can be initiated.
The clock is a 24 hour clock. Hours 1 thru 12 are
AM and hours 13 thru 24 are PM.
The unit will restart when engine coolant temperature
2.“RUN PRETRIP TEST AT WAKE” drops below 1°C (34°F) or if the battery voltage drops
a. When “PRETRIP TEST AT WAKE” is set to NO below the Configured battery restart value. (refer to
the unit will wake up at the designated time and con- Section 6.2.1)
trol to set point.
b. When “PRETRIP TEST AT WAKE” is set to YES.
the unit will wake up at the designated time, automat- NOTE (FOR ENGINE OPERATION ONLY)
ically run Pretrip and then control to set point. “PRE- In the event that the Engine Coolant Tempera-
TRIP PASS/FAIL” will remain in the MessageCenter ture sensor fails, Sleep Mode will operate as fol-
until it is manually cleared. lows:
If Sleep Mode is selected, when the unit is not running
during a Start-Stop Off Cycle, any remaining Minimum In ambients above 0°C (32°F), the unit will run
Off Time will be ignored, and the engine will start. It will as above, and will monitor battery voltage and
run for 4 minutes (minimum), until the engine coolant charging amps only (according to the Configur-
temperature is above 50°C (122°F), and the battery is ation setting).
fully charged (O.K. appears in the Data List voltage line,
and charging amps are less than the Configured set- In ambients below 0°C (32°F),, the unit will run
ting). While the unit is running in Sleep Mode, “SLEEP for 20 minutes minimum run time, then restart
WARNING: NO TEMP CONTROL” will flash in the Mes- every 60 minutes (maximum off time). Battery
sageCenter, and the Display (set point and refrigerated voltage and amperage will be monitored nor-
box temperature) will be off. mally.
62-11389 3--12
3.9 MANUAL DEFROST
DEFROST LIGHT
+34 dF
DEFROST CYCLE STARTED

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
1. Press the MANUAL DEFROST key. The DEFROST light will come on
and the MessageCenter will display “DEFROST CYCLE STARTED” for 5
seconds, or flash “CANNOT START DEFROST CYCLE” for five seconds.
When DEFROST mode CANNOT be manually initiated TIP

“CANNOT START DEFROST CYCLE” is displayed in
the MessageCenter. This will occur when: The Manual Defrost Key can be used at any
time to start a Defrost Cycle as long as the pre-
• 1DTT is above 40°F (4°C) OR ceeding conditions are met.
• The engine has not run 15 seconds after starting OR
• The unit is in PC Mode OR
NOTE
• The unit is in Pretrip OR
Refer to Section 5.12 for more detailed informa-
• There is an active shutdown Alarm. tion on DEFROST.
3--13 62-11389
3.10 TRIP START
-20 +34.5° F
TRIP START ENTERED

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
1. To mark the start of a trip in the data recorder, press the SELECT key until
The MessageCenter displays “PRESS = TO MARK TRIP START”.
2. Press the = key.
3. If trip start is acknowledged by the data recorder, “TRIP START ENTERED” will be dis-
played for five seconds and then the display will revert back to the normal display. Other-
wise “CANNOT ENTER TRIP START” will flash and then the display will revert back to
the normal display.
Trip Start places a time stamp in the data recorder memory to allow easy review of the data from the last trip, and to al-
low downloading data from a specific trip. A trip begins at a Trip Start and ends at the next Trip Start. Trip Start tells the
data recorder that the present date and time is the beginning of a new trip.
62-11389 3--14
3.11 VIEW ACTIVE ALARMS
ALARM LIGHT
-20 +34.5° F
NO ACTIVE ALARMS

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
1. Press the ALARM LIST key. If there are no active alarms, “NO AC-
TIVE ALARMS” will display for 5 seconds.
2. If there are active alarms, the alarm number will be displayed with the letter “A” in
front and the alarm message following. The last Alarm that occurred will be the first
Alarm displayed and so on.
3. Press the ALARM LIST or UP ARROW key to scroll through the list of alarms.
4. When you reach the end of the alarm list, “LIST END, = TO CLEAR ALARMS”
is displayed for five seconds.
5. To clear the alarm list, press the = key while “LIST END, = TO CLEAR ALARMS” is being dis-
played. “ACTIVE ALARMS LIST CLEAR” is displayed. This will move all Alarms to the
Inactive Alarm list.
Alarms are stored in the Alarm List in the micropro- TIP

cessor. Stored alarms may be viewed in the Message- Another way to clear active alarms is to turn the
Center. microprocessor OFF and then back ON using
the START/RUN -- OFF switch (SROS).
For a complete list of alarms, their meanings, and trou-
bleshooting refer to Section 8. TIP
“CHK WIRES FROM MICRO TO KEYPAD”
means there is a wiring problem between the
microprocessor and the display module.
3--15 62-11389
3.12 VIEW INACTIVE ALARMS
-20 +34.5° F
NO INACTIVE ALARMS

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
1. Press and hold both the ALARM LIST key and the UP ARROW key for six
seconds. If there are no inactive alarms, the display will read
“NO INACTIVE ALARMS” for five seconds.
2. If there are inactive alarms, the display will be ‘I’ in front of the alarm number and
message.
3. Press the ALARM LIST or UP or DOWN key to scroll through the list of alarms.
4. When you reach the end of the alarm list, “LIST END, = TO CLEAR ALARMS”
is displayed for 5 seconds.
5. To clear the active and inactive alarm list, press the = key while
“LIST END, = TO CLEAR ALARMS” is being displayed. “ALL ALARMS CLEAR” is displayed.
The microprocessor can hold up to 16 alarms in the For a complete list of Alarms and troubleshooting infor-
combined Active and Inactive Alarm lists. The lists can mation Refer to Section 8.
be read via the MessageCenter or using the
ReeferManager PC Program. There are two sections in TIP
the Alarm list, an Active Alarm Section and Inactive
Alarm Section. Alarms in these sections are in the order When alarms are cleared from the Inactive
Alarm List, both active and inactive alarm lists
in which the alarms activate and inactivate, respectively. are cleared.
On startup, all alarms are marked as inactive in the en-
tire list. If an inactive alarm becomes active, the alarm is
moved from the Inactive Alarm list to the Active Alarm If there is a safety shutdown,
list. “UNIT SHUTDOWN -- SEE ALARM LIST” will be
shown. Pressing the Alarm List key will bring any Active
As additional alarms occur, they will be placed first in the Alarms into the MessageCenter. Refer to Section 8 for a
Active Alarm list. Each alarm can only be present in ei- complete list of Alarms and their descriptions.
ther the Active or Inactive Alarm List at any given time.
As conditions change, alarms may be moved from the
Active Alarm list to the Inactive alarm list and back. NOTE
The Inactive Alarm List is also called the Techni-
Alarms are also recorded in the Data Recorder. They cian’s List. Only qualified refrigeration techni-
are recorded at the time they occur (become active), cians should access the inactive list. It is not in-
and the time they become inactive. tended for the use of drivers or operators.
62-11389 3--16
Table 3-1. Shutdown Alarms
SHUTDOWN ALARMS
SHUTDOWN ALARM ONLY
or may be
configured as
SHUTDOWN
(see configuration list
Section 6.2.1)
11 Low Engine Oil Pressure X
12 High Coolant Temperature X
13 High Discharge Pressure X
14 Electrical Circuit X
15 Battery Voltage Too High X
16 Battery Voltage Too Low X Alarm only if activated while
starting unit
17 High Comp Discharge Temp X
18 Low Refrigerant Pressure X Configurable Setting
19 Low Fuel Shutdown (Optional) Configurable X
Setting
20 Maximum Compressor Alarms (Optional) X
22 Low Suction Superheat X
23 A/C Current Over Limit X
27 High Suction Pressure Configurable X
Setting
Check Refrigeration System Configurable X
28 Setting
30 Failed To Run Minimum Time X
31 Failed to Start -- Auto Mode X
34 Engine Failed To Stop X
35 Check Starter Circuit X
39 Check Engine RPM Configurable X
Setting
41 Engine Stalled X
51 Alternator Not Charging Configurable X
Setting
53 Compartment Temp Out-of-Range Configurable X
Setting
57 Check Remote Switch 1 Configurable X
Setting
58 Check Remote Switch 2 Configurable X
Setting
61 Door Open Configurable X
Setting
75 Compressor Motor Overload X
76 Condenser Motor Overheated X
77 Evaporator Motor Overheated X
100 Overload/Ground Fault X
3--17 62-11389
Table 3-1. Shutdown Alarms (Continued)
SHUTDOWN ALARMS
♦122 Check Return Air Sensor ♦
♦123 Check Supply Air Sensor ♦
232 Set point Error X
233 Model # Error X
237 Functional Parameter Error X
238 Configurations 1 Error X
242 DIS PRESS Calibrate Error X
243 SUCT / EVAP Calibrate Error X
246 EEPROM Write Failure X
248 Config Mode / HP2 Error X
249 Microprocessor Error X
♦If Alarms 122 and 123 are both active and set point is in the perishable range [10.4°F(-12°C)] and higher -- the unit will
shut down. Otherwise, alarm only.
62-11389 3--18
3.13 UNIT DATA
-20 +34.5° F
PRESS ↑ ↓ TO VIEW DATA
MANUAL ALARM LIST START-STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
1. Press the SELECT key until the MessageCenter

displays “PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW DATA.”
2. By pressing the UP ARROW key, you will move through the Data
List beginning at the top and moving toward the bottom, or by
pressing the DOWN ARROW key, you will move through the
Data List beginning at the bottom, and moving toward the top.
3. The selected Data Item will remain in the

MessageCenter for ten seconds, then the default message (“STATUS OK”
or other customer specified message) will appear.
4. To lock an item in the MessageCenter for continuous viewing, press the =

key. The Data item will flash continuously to indicate it is locked.
5. Pressing the UP or DOWN ARROW key will unlock that item and move
to the next data item. Pressing the = key will unlock the item. After ten
seconds the default message will be displayed.
3--19 62-11389
Table 3-2. Unit Data
* Displays information or setting entered in the microprocessor Configurations
+ May or may not be displayed depending on Parameter/Configuration settings
DATA DEFINITION
SUCTION PRESSURE Compressor suction pressure
DISCHARGE PRESSURE Compressor discharge pressure
EVAPORATOR PRESSURE Leaving evaporator pressure
ENGINE COOLANT TEMP Engine coolant temperature
RETURN AIR TEMP Return (air entering evaporator) air temperature
SUPPLY AIR TEMP Supply (air leaving evaporator) air temperature
DELTA--T Return air temperature minus supply air temperature
AMBIENT AIR TEMP Ambient (air entering condenser) air temperature
DEFROST TERM TEMP Defrost termination temperature
SUCTION LINE TEMP Suction line temperature at the compressor
EVAP OUTLET TEMP Suction line temperature at the evaporator outlet
DISCHARGE TEMP Compressor discharge temperature
BATTERY Battery voltage
CURRENT DRAW Battery charging or discharging amps
ENGINE RPM Engine revolutions per minute
UNIT AC CURRENT #1 High voltage current draw on circuit #1.
UNIT AC CURRENT #2 High voltage current draw on circuit #2.
+ FUEL LEVEL % of fuel in tank. (This is only shown when 0% -- 100% sensor is config-
ured ON.)
SUCTION MOD VALVE % open of CSMV
EXPANSION VALVE % open of EVXV
START MODE AUTO if the engine will start automatically
MANUAL if the engine must be started manually
+ INSTALLED OPTIONS Applies only if unit has the IntelliSet option installed
INTELLISET INSTALLED
SOFTWARE REVISION Revision of the software that is operating the microprocessor
DISPLAY SOFTWARE REV Revision of the software that is operating the display
CONTROL SERIAL # Serial Number of the microprocessor
* TRAILER ID # ID (as entered by the user)
* UNIT SERIAL # Unit serial number
* UNIT MODEL # Unit model number (selected through configurations)
* DATALOGGER This is the current Date and Time that the Data Recorder is using. This
may be different than your actual time, depending on the Time Zone and
Daylight Savings Time selections made by the owner of the unit
+ HOURS TO ENGINE Number of engine hours until the next programmed engine maintenance
MAINT
62-11389 3--20
Table 3-2. Unit Data -- Continued
* Displays information or setting entered in the microprocessor Configurations
+ May or may not be displayed depending on Parameter/Configuration settings
+ HOURS TO S/B MTR Number of engine hours until the next programmed electric standby mo-
MAINT tor maintenance
+ HOURS TO UNIT MAINT Number of switch--on hours until the next programmed general unit
maintenance
+ TIME LEFT TO PM (1--5) Number of hours until the next programmed maintenance
* PRODUCTSHIELD SETUP: This will only show when IntelliSet is installed and ProductShield settings
must be ON.
+
S PRODUCTSHIELD Indicates if ProductShield Econo is OFF OR Go To Start--Stop OR Go
ECONO: To Continuous Run
SS ECONO MIN TEMP Minimum ambient temperature of range for activation of ProductShield
Econo (Will only be displayed if Econo is NOT OFF)
SS ECONO MAX TEMP Maximum ambient temperature of range for activation of ProductShield
Econo (Will only be displayed if Econo is NOT OFF)
SS ECONO DELTA--T Delta--T value for activation of ProductShield Econo (Will only be dis-
played if Econo is NOT OFF)
S PRODUCTSHIELD HIGH Indicates if Product Shield High Air is ON or OFF
AIR:
SS HIGH AIR MIN TEMP Minimum ambient temperature of range for activation of Product Shield
High Air (Will only be displayed if High Air is ON)
SS HIGH AIR MAX TEMP Maximum ambient temperature of range for activation of Product Shield
High Air (Will only be displayed if High Air is ON)
SS HIGH AIR DELTA--T Delta--T value for activation of Product Shield High Air (Will only be dis-
played if High Air is ON)
S PRODUCTSHIELD: Indicates the ambient temperature that is controlling ProductShield Win-
WINTER -- xx° ter (Will only be displayed if WINTER is NOT OFF)
* RANGE 1 LOCK OFF -- Temperature Range 1 Lock is turned off
CONTINUOUS -- The unit is set to operate only in Continuous Run when
+ the set point is set between Range 1 Minimum and Maximum Temperat-
ures
START--STOP -- When the set point is set between Range 1 Minimum &
Maximum Temperatures, the unit is set to operate only in Start--Stop
* RANGE 1 MINIMUM TEMP This is the lower limit for Range 1.
+
* RANGE 1 MAXIMUM TEMP This is the upper limit for Range 1.
+
* RANGE 2 LOCK OFF -- Temperature Range 2 Lock is turned off.
CONTINUOUS -- The unit is set to operate only in Continuous Run when
+ the setpoint is set between Range 2 Minimum and Maximum Temperat-
ures
START--STOP -- The unit is set to operate only in Start-Stop when the
setpoint is set between Range 2 Minimum and Maximum Temperatures
* RANGE 2 MIN. TEMP This is the lower limit for Range 2.
+
* RANGE 2 MAX. TEMP This is the upper limit for Range 2.
+
* REMOTE SENSOR (1--3) This will only show when optional sensors are configured ON. This is the
temperature at remote Temperature Sensor 1, 2, and 3.
+
3--21 62-11389
3.14 VIEW HOURMETERS
-20 +34.5° F
TOTAL ENGINE HOURS: 0 HRS

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
1. Press the SELECT key until the

MessageCenter displays
“PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW HOURMETERS”.
2. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to move
through the Hourmeter List.
3. Displayed hour meters will depend on unit configurations (See Section 6.2.1). Typical
displayed meters are: “TOTAL ENGINE HOURS”,
“STANDBY RUN HOURS” and “TOTAL SWITCH ON HOURS”.
4. Pressing the = key will access all other meters and display
“OTHER METERS AND COUNTERS”.
5. The selected hour meter will remain in the
MessageCenter for 10 seconds, then the default message (“STATUS OK”
or other customer specified message) will appear.
6. To lock an hourmeter in the MessageCenter for continuous viewing, press

the = key. The Data item will flash continuously to indicate it is locked.
7. Pressing any key on the keypad will unlock the item. Pressing the
UP or DOWN ARROW key will move to the next hourmeter.
Hour meters available when “OTHER METERS AND COUNTERS” is chosen are:
SMeters listed in Step 3 above. SHigh Speed Hours

SEngine Protect Hours SStart cycles
SSwitch On Protect Hours
SCompressor Run Hours
SSwitch On Standby Hours
SEngine Sleep Hours SMaintenance Days
SSwitch On Sleep Hours SAnd, up to 5 User Configurable meters
62-11389 3--22
3.15 FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS
-20 +34.5° F
PRESS ↑ ↓ TO VIEW SETTINGS

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
1. Press the SELECT key until the MessageCenter displays

“PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW SETTINGS”.
2. By pressing the UP ARROW key, you will move through the
Function List beginning at the top or by pressing the DOWN AR-
ROW key, you will move through the Function List beginning at
the bottom.
3. To change one of the Functions, bring the Function you wish to change into the MessageCenter,
and press the = key. “↑ ↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SAVE” will show in the MessageCenter.
Pressing either the UP or DOWN ARROW key will begin to change the function setting. The
MessageCenter will flash, indicating that a change has been made that has not been
entered into memory.
4. Continue pressing the UP or DOWN ARROW key until the desired value is displayed, then press
the = key. The MessageCenter will stop flashing. The new value is now in memory.
If the = key is not pressed within 10 seconds, the MessageCenter will change to
“FUNCTION NOT CHANGED”. This will appear for five seconds, then return to the last
Functional Parameter displayed. If no further keys are pressed, the default message will be
displayed another 10 seconds.
NOTE
The microprocessor may be configured with all of
the functions locked or individual functions may
have been locked. Any Function that is displayed
with a padlock symbol cannot be changed from the
keypad.
3--23 62-11389
Table 3-3 Functional Parameters
FUNCTIONAL
PARAMETER
SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION
NOTES: Selections in BOLD are the default settings. Also, Functional Parameter marked with an asterisk (*) may
not appear in the list for this unit, depending on how the microprocessor has been configured.
NO NO -- Normal engine speed operation.

SILENT MODE
YES YES -- Low engine speed operation. Used to disable high speed.
DEFROST IN- 1.5HRS The defrost timer will automatically put the unit into the defrost cycle at
TERVAL TIMER 3HRS the interval selected if DTT is below 40°F (4.4°C).
SET FOR 6HRS Shorter times are generally used for warm, humid products like pro-
12HRS duce.
Longer times can be used for dry and frozen products.
Set Start/Stop Parameters
Time and Temperature values that control Start--Stop Operation are set in this section.
The microprocessor may be configured so that: 1. the same settings apply to any set point = “Together”, or 2. the set-
tings are different, depending on whether the set point is in the perishable range or in the frozen range = “Separate”.
SIf “together” is configured, there will be five settings with only the fifth applicable to just frozen range.
SIf “Separate” is configured there will be nine settings four labeled perishable and five labeled frozen.
S MAX OFF TIME: OFF OFF -- There is no maximum off time.
10MINS
When a minute value is selected, this is the longest amount of time the
TO
255MINS
unit will remain off during a (Perishable or Frozen or both) Auto Start--
Stop Off Cycle. When this time expires, the unit will restart and run for
(in 1 minute incre- the Minimum Run Time, regardless of any temperature change inside
ments) the refrigerated box.
S OVERRIDE 3.6°F (2°C) This selects the override temperature for the Auto Start--Stop Off
TEMP: TO Cycle. During the Minimum Off Time, should the refrigerated box tem-
18°F (10°C) perature drift this far above or below set point in the Perishable Range,
or above set point in the Frozen Range, the microprocessor will over-
11°F (6°C) ride the Minimum Off Time, and restart.
(in 0.5°F or C incre-
ments)
S MIN OFFTIME: 10MINS This determines the minimum length of time the unit will remain off
TO whenever the unit cycles off in Auto Start--Stop Operation.
90MINS
20MINS
(in 1 minute incre-
ments)
S MIN RUN TIME: 4MINS This determines the minimum length of time the unit will run every time
TO the unit starts in Start--Stop Operation.
60MINS
(in 1 minute incre-
ments)
S FROZEN 0°C (0°F) This only applies to Frozen set points in Start--Stop operation.
SHUTDOWN TO This offset is the number of degrees below set point that the unit will
OFFSET 2°C (3.6°F) run before cycling off. This will allow for a lower average refrigerated
(in 0.5°F or C incre- box temperature when considering temperature rises during off cycles.
ments)
YES -- the microprocessor will control supply air temperature as Con-
figures when supply air temperature is warmer than 32°F (0°C)
PERISHABLE YES NO -- the microprocessor will control supply air temperature as Config-
SENSITIVE NO ures only when supply air temperature is warmer than 32°F (0°C)
PRODUCT
Refer to Section 5.9 for complete information on Perishable Sensitive
Product and Supply Air Configuration interaction.
62-11389 3--24
FUNCTIONAL
PARAMETER SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION
TEMPERATURE RETURN AIR The unit has both a Return Air Sensor and a Supply Air Sensor. This
CONTROL SUPPLY AIR selection determines if: only the return air sensor reading will be used
for calculating control actions OR only the supply air sensor reading
will be used for calculating control actions.
“Return Air” is generally selected for most products. If this parameter
is set to the “Supply Air” setting the microprocessor will control within a
narrower temperature band.
DISPLAY ENGLISH UNITS Temperatures will display in either English (°F) using decimal points to display
TEMPERATURE METRIC UNITS tenths of a degree OR or Metric (°C ) using commas to display tenths of a degree.
IN ...
DISPLAY ENGLISH UNITS Pressures will display in either English (psig) using decimal points to display
PRESSURE IN ... METRIC UNITS tenths of a pound OR or Metric (bar) using commas to display tenths of a bar.
ECO MODE NO -- Control for maximum capacity
NO
YES YES -- Control for maximum fuel economy in accordance with the Pro-
ductShield Configuration settings.
OUT OF RANGE Metric English This Functional Parameter will display if the optional Out Of Range Alarm/
ALARM: OFF OFF Shutdown feature is installed, refer to section 2.7.3 for additional information.
2°C 4°F It may be configured (refer to 6.2.1 for Configuration information) to
3°C 5°F trigger an Alarm only or trigger an Alarm and Shutdown.
4°C 7°F
The value entered here is the number of degrees away from set point
the box temperature may drift before the alarm or alarm and shutdown
action will be triggered. If set to OFF, the configured action is deactiv-
ated.
Low Speed Startup Minutes
Allows user to set the number of minutes the unit will run in low speed every time the engine starts.
SSTART/STOP OFF Allows user to set the number of minutes the unit will run in low speed
1 TO 255MINS every time the engine starts in Start/Stop operation.
SCONTINUOUS OFF Allows user to set the number of minutes the unit will run in low speed
1 TO 255MINS every time the engine starts in Continuous operation.
For complete instructions on entering and setting parameters for Sleep Mode refer to Section
SLEEP MODE 3.8.
* NO POWER NO *If the NO AC POWER Configuration is set to “Alarm & Shutdown” this
SWITCH TO YES parameter will not display
DIESEL
YES -- If the NO AC POWER Configuration is set to the “Switch To
Engine” (on power loss), setting this parameter to YES will confirm the
Configuration and the switch will be allowed.
NO -- If the NO AC POWER Configuration is set to the “Switch To
Engine”, setting this parameter to NO will override the Configuration
setting and shut the unit down when power is lost. The purpose of this
setting is to temporarily override the Configuration setting in situations
where switching to engine power is not desired.
3--25 62-11389
FUNCTIONAL
PARAMETER SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION
* RESET PM NO METERS TO *If the PM Hourmeter is configured OFF, this parameter will not display
HOURMETERS RESET
This Functional Parameter allows resetting of the PM Maintenance
OR
Expired Hour Meters Hour Meters when the hour meter has timed out, and preventative
maintenance has been performed.
Selecting RESET and pressing the ”=” key will de-activate the alarm,
and reset the hour meter for the next service interval. The amount of
S STANDBY RESET time added back into the meter before the next alarm trigger is de-
termined by the PM Hour Meter Reset value entered in the meter Con-
figuration.
S ENGINE RESET
If the hour meter has been configured as active, this menu item will
not appear.
S SWITCH ON RESET
If there are active maintenance hour meters and none have expired
and turned the alarm on, the MessageCenter will display “NO
S PM 1 Thru 5 RESET
METERS TO RESET.”
* OVERRIDE NO *If the Door Switch is configured “Switch Not Installed”, this parameter
DOOR YES will not display
SHUTDOWN
NO -- the microprocessor will respond to the door switch as configured
YES -- the configured action on opening of the door will be overridden
and the action will be alarm only. The purpose of this setting is to tem-
porarily override the Configuration setting in situations where shut-
down or speed change is not desired.
OVERRIDE NO *If the Remote Switch is configured “Switch Not Installed”, this para-
REMS1 or REMS2 YES meter will not display
NO -- the microprocessor will respond to the remote switch as con-
figured
YES -- the configured action for the switch will be overridden and the
action will be alarm only. The purpose of this setting is to temporarily
override the action in situations where shutdown is not desired.
ENGLISH ENGLISH-- All information displayed in the MessageCenter will be
shown in English.
LANGUAGE: ESPAÑOL FRANÇAIS-- All information displayed in the MessageCenter will be
IDIOMAS: shown in French.
LANGUE: FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL-- All information displayed in the MessageCenter will be
LINGUAGEM:** shown in Spanish.
PORTUGUÊS PORTUGUÊS -- All information displayed in the MessageCenter will be
shown in Portuguese.
**NOTE 1: This parameter can be quickly accessed by pressing and holding the Select Key for 6 seconds.
**NOTE 2: If the padlock is visible when accessing language from the Functional Parameter List, the language
cannot be changed. However, when accessing the language by pressing and holding the Select Key for 6
seconds the language can be changed even if the padlock is shown.
62-11389 3--26
3.16 LANGUAGE SELECTION
-20 +34.5° F
ESPAÑOL

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
1. Press and hold the SELECT key for 6 seconds

until MessageCenter displays current language
(ENGLISH, ESPAÑOL, FRANÇAIS or
PORTUGUÊS).
2. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key until the MessageCenter indicates

the desired language. Press the = key. The new language will now be ac-
tive.
If the = key is not pressed within 10 seconds, the MessageCenter will
change to “FUNCTION NOT CHANGED”. This will flash for 5 seconds,
then return to the current language. If no further keys are pressed, the de-
fault display will return in another 10 seconds.
TIP
If the language is set to one that the user
does not understand, press and hold the
“SELECT” key for 6 seconds to bring up
the Language Parameter so that it can be
changed.
3--27 62-11389
3.17 STOPPING UNIT
WARNING
Always place the START/RUN--OFF switch in the OFF position and turn off the high voltage pow-
er supply before disconnecting the high voltage power plug from the unit.
off STANDBY
ENGINE
1. To stop the unit, place the START / RUN -

OFF switch in the OFF position.
The diesel engine or compressor will stop and the micro- NOTE
processor will turn off. The Microprocessor Main Dis- The microprocessor will close the Electronic
play, MessageCenter, and all indicator LEDs will also Expansion Valve (EVXV) and the CSMV to
turn off. 0% open before turning off.
NOTE
Due to internal processing within the micro-
processor, turning the START/RUN--OFF
switch OFF then back to START/RUN will re-
sult in a 4 to 50 second delay between the
display going off and coming back on again.
62-11389 3--28
3.18 DATA RECORDING
The Advance microprocessor contains a built-in Data- d. User Area Data
Recorder with 512K of memory. The recorded data can
The User or service technician is able to enter a Com-
be downloaded from the DataRecorder using either Re- ment into the Data Recorder using ReeferManager Pro-
eferManager, a PC software program, or a Download gram.
PC card.
3.18.3 Sensor & Event Data
The DataRecorder reads the same input information as
the microprocessor (Functional Parameters, Configura- Sensors
tions, and Unit Data) at all times. The DataRecorder re- The following sensors may be recorded either with an
cords events as they occur, such as set point changes averaged reading, or snapshot or may not be recorded
and Defrost Initiation and Termination, and also records at all.
all data values including temperature and pressure sen- S Return Air Temperature
sors in either averaged or snapshot format. The details
are provided below. S Supply Air Temperature
S Ambient Air Temperature
3.18.1 Microprocessor Information
S Defrost Termination Temperature
The microprocessor information that is available to be
recorded is as follows: S Compressor Discharge Temperature
S Data Recorder Setup (Logging Intervals, S Engine Coolant Temperature
Events and Sensors)
S Compressor Discharge Pressure
S Data Recorder Time Clock Date / Time
S Compressor Suction Pressure
S Set points (And all set point changes.) S Compressor Suction Temperature
S ID Number S Evaporator Outlet Pressure
S Unit Serial Number S Evaporator Outlet Temperature
S Unit Model Number S Total AC #1
S Current System Mode S Total AC #2
S Functional Parameters S Battery Voltage

S Battery DC Current
S Microprocessor Configurations
S Engine RPM
3.18.2 Data Recording
Events (Selectable)
The Data Recorder data comes from four general cate-
gories of information: User may determine whether the following events are
recorded. All other events such as ON / OFF, Defrost
a. Microprocessor Information as described in Section start will be recorded.
3.18.1 above.
S Pretrip Start
b. Sensor Data
S Pretrip End
This information is recorded at pre--determined inter-
vals as a snapshot of the sensor at the time of the re- S Trailer ID
cording, or an averaged reading of the sensor readings
since the last recording. The user can determine which S Unit S / N
sensor(s) will be recorded, at what intervals, and wheth- S Unit Mode
er snapshot or averaged readings are preferred. (Snap-
shot readings of sensors are also taken at the time of a S Control Mode
shutdown alarm.)
Optional Sensors & Events
c. Event Occurrences
In addition to the above Sensors and Events, the Data
This information is any additional data that is recorded Recorder also has the capabilities to record the follow-
on a “when it occurs” basis. Events are recorded by the ing:
recorder as they occur. An Event is defined as some-
thing that happens (i.e. set point changed, Defrost Cycle S Remote Temperature Sensors 1, 2 and 3
Started, or Main Power On, etc.). hour meters are re- S Fuel Tank % Level
corded at midnight or the first time of day the switch is
turned to the ON position. S Door and Remote Switches
3--29 62-11389
DATA RECORDING (CONTINUED)
Time Intervals 3.18.4 Data Downloading
The following intervals are available for sensor record- The data within the DataRecorder can be downloaded
ing: from the DataRecorder by using either the ReeferMa-
nager, (a PC software program) and a download cable
S 2 Minutes connected to the download port (Refer to Section 6.1) or
with a Download PC card (Refer to Section 6.4). If a PC
S 5 Minutes card is used, the ReeferManager program is then used
to extract the data from the PC card, and place it on the
computer hard disk.
S 10 Minutes
3.18.5 Data Recorder Power--Up
S 15 Minutes The Data Recorder records data the entire time the
START / RUN--OFF switch is in the START / RUN posi-
S 30 Minutes tion. A configuration exists which allows the user to se-
lect either an additional 8 hours of sensor data to be re-
S 1 Hour corded after the START / RUN--OFF Switch is placed in
the OFF position, or to stop recording at the same time
S 2 Hours the SROS is placed in the OFF position. The factory set-
ting is to include the additional 8 hours of data. (See
S 4 Hours Configuration List Section 6.2.1.)
62-11389 3--30
3.19 OPTIONS
3.19.1 IntelliSet
+34 +34.5° F
APPLES ACTIVE

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
DURING START UP
Observe the MessageCenter during the power up process. If the unit is equipped with
IntelliSet, the name of the active or modified IntelliSet will be displayed for approxi-
mately 10 seconds before the engine starts.
DURING OPERATION
Press the SELECT key to view current IntelliSet. You will be prompted to press either the “=”
key or the UP or DOWN ARROW Key to scroll through list of IntelliSets. The current Intelli-
Set will have either the word ACTIVE or MODIFIED after it. MODIFIED indicates that one or
more of the IntelliSet settings (other than set point) have been changed. To change MOD-
IFIED to ACTIVE, press = key while the IntelliSet is shown in the MessageCenter.
The Advance Microprocessor offers over 48 parame- CREAM” is selected. With each selection, the micropro-
ters that may be set depending on the product being car- cessor automatically re--programs the settings to pro-
ried. IntelliSet allows the owner to pre--program specific vide the best temperature control, fuel economy, and
product settings into the microprocessor and give the performance for that particular product.
settings a name. The operator may then call up these
settings by simply selecting the IntelliSet name. NOTE
For example: Apples may require continuous operation
IntelliSet #31 is pre--programmed as
at 35°F (1.7°C) with a defrost every 3 hours while a load “IntelliSleep” which allows Sleep Mode (See
of cheese may require the same operation with set Section 3.8) to be entered by simply changing
points ranging from 35°F to 42°F (1.7°C to 5.6°C) and a to that IntelliSet.
load of ice cream requires Start--Stop operation at
--22°F (--30°C) with defrost at 12 hour intervals. The set- The ONLY way to exit from IntelliSleep is to se-
lect a different IntelliSet.
tings required for each product may be entered into the
microprocessor and then locked so they cannot be
changed. In the case of the cheese, the range of set
points may be locked, leaving the operator the ability to NOTE
change the set point within the locked range. The above settings are examples of possible
When a load of apples is going to be picked up, the oper- settings. Factory IntelliSets are available from
ator simply selects “APPLES” from the IntelliSet menu; the Information Website through your author-
for cheese, “CHEESE” is selected ; for ice cream, “ICE ized Truck/Trailer dealer.
3--31 62-11389
a. Changing IntelliSets -- With “=” Key Enabled
NOTE: If pressing the “=” key does not

bring up the IntelliSet message the mi-
croprocessor is not configured with this
feature. To view IntelliSets, refer to the
following section.
+34.0 +34.5° F
APPLES ACTIVE

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
1. PRESS the ”=” Key to display current IntelliSet.
2. Pressing the UP or DOWN ARROW key, to move through the IntelliSet List.
The current IntelliSet will have either ACTIVE or MODIFIED to the right of
the name.
3. To use a different IntelliSet, bring the desired IntelliSet into the Message-
Center and press the ”=” Key.
62-11389 3--32
b. Changing IntelliSets -- Without “=” Key Enabled
-20.0 +34.5° F
PRESS ↑ ↓ TO VIEW INTELLISETS

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
1. Press the SELECT key until MessageCenter

displays PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW INTELLISETS.
2. When the UP ARROW key is pressed, the Intel-
liSet List will scroll up, beginning at the bottom.
When the DOWN ARROW key is pressed, the
InteliSet List will scroll down, beginning at the
top. The current IntelliSet will have either AC-
TIVE or MODIFIED to the right of the name.
3. After selecting the new IntelliSet press the “=” key.
3--33 62-11389
3.19.2 DataTrak for Advance Microprocessors Carrier Transicold has worked with approved commu-
DataTrak allows remote communication providers (cel- nication providers with recommended installation loca-
lular, satellite, etc) to request data from the Advance mi- tions, and wiring connections to Carrier units. Instruc-
croprocessor and transmit it via their equipment to an- tions for installing this equipment is supplied by each
other location. This is typically done via the Internet to individual provider, and not by Carrier Transicold. Com-
any destination in the world. Some providers can also munications electrical harnesses and serial port split-
send commands via their equipment to the Advance mi- ters are available from Carrier Transicold Performance
croprocessor to change settings and the way the con- Parts Group (PPG).
troller is operating the unit. Communication Providers will connect into the wiring
DataTrak is an optional feature. The DataTrak option is harness at the SATCOM port. Testing the SATCOM port
installed by inserting a DataTrak PC Card into the PC may be done using a serial port to PC cable
Card slot of the microprocessor and following the on-- (22--01690--00) and the ReeferManager program. If Re-
screen instructions on the keypad. eferManager can communicate with the micropro-
The DataTrak Option installation can be confirmed by cessor the unit wiring and microprocessor are perform-
scrolling through the Unit Data List (see Section 3.13). ing normally and any communication problem is with the
DataTrak will be listed under the Installed Options head- provider’s equipment.
ing if it is installed.
Once DataTrak is installed, the Advance Micropro-
cessor must be properly configured for the provider that
will be connecting to it. This is done in the configuration
list (see section 6.2.1.) The Satellite Com configuration
can be set for “Qualcomm” or “Other”. If the provider is
“Qualcomm” then this selection must be made. All other
communications providers use the “Other” selection.
62-11389 3--34
3.20 Remote Control Panel
8 1 Control panel power on LED

9 2 System ON/OFF key
3 Manual defrost key
4 Control panel lock LED
5 HEAT mode LED
6 COOL mode LED
7 7 Up and down arrow keys
8 Set point display
9 Temperature display in C° or °F
6
1 2 3 4
TEMP. SET POINT

DISPLAY DISPLAY
WAITING FOR COMMUNICATION WITH MICROPROCESSOR
UNIT WAS TURNED OFF VIA REMOTE CONTROL
UNIT IN DEFROST MODE
TEMPERATURE SENSOR MALFUNCTION
P1 DISPLAYED WHEN SETTING PRE--SET SETPOINTS
NOTE:
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY (°C OR °F) IS DEPENDENT ON MICROPROCESSOR CONFIGURATION
The unit may be fitted with an optional remote control The remote control panel can be used to :
panel. The panel displays refrigerated box set point, Turn the unit on or off:
box temperature and operating mode (heat, cool or
defrost). The set point may be set and the unit may be S Check refrigerated box temperature
started and stopped using the remote panel.
S Check and change set point
This compact panels can be mounted to suit the
individual operator’s preferences -- in the cab, on the S Initiate manual defrost
front bulkhead, or in the refrigerated box (including in the
wall itself). S Check mode of operation
3--35 62-11389
a.Starting Unit with Remote Control Panel
NOTE
The unit can be shut down using either the remote panel or the main START / RUN--OFF switch. The SROS
must be in the “START /RUN” position in order for the remote panel to operate.
CAUTION
If the unit is to remain off for an extended perion of time the SROS must be placed in the OFF
postion to prevent a constant drain on the battery.
1. Place SROS in “START/

RUN” position.
2. Press The System ON/OFF Key.

Power Light Will illuminate.
b. Changing Set Point With Remote Control Panel
1. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW

key to increase or decrease set
point.
62-11389 3--36
c.Lock / Unlock the Remote Control Panel
LOCKING THE PANEL:

Press and hold the Carrier Logo for
approximately one second and then
release.
The lock indicator light will illuminate.
UNLOCKING THE PANEL:

Press the Carrier Logo for 10 seconds
The lock indicator light will de--energize.
CARRIER
LOGO
LOCK INDICATOR LIGHT
d. Pre--setting Set Point With Remote Control Panel

The control panel allows the user to pre--set 5 different temperatures.
NOTE
Once preset set points have been chosen, only those 5 designated set points can be used.
1. Place SROS in the “START /RUN” position.
3. Press UP ARROW for 10 sec-

onds. P1 will be displayed.
4. Set lowest set point required.
5. Press Carrier logo and P2 will

be displayed. Set next highest
temperature required.
6. Follow same procedure for the

next three temperatures.
2. Press Carrier logo and the lock light will illuminate.
3--37 62-11389
e. Removing Pre--Set Set Points With Remote Control Panel
1. Place SROS in the “START /RUN” position.
3. Press UP ARROW for 10 sec-

onds. P1 will be displayed.
4. Set temperature to lowest pre--set

set point and OFF will be displayed
2. Press Carrier logo and the lock light will illuminate.
62-11389 3--38
SECTION 4
ENGINE/STANDBY
4.1 INTRODUCTION on the engine coolant temperature (See Table 4-1) for
This section describes the engine operation in diesel up to 30 seconds in order to supply power to the air
and electric standby operation. The section also de- intake heater. (See Figure 4--1.) The buzzer will sound
scribes the refrigeration system running modes known for the last 5 seconds of the glow time, or if there is no
as automatic Start--Stop and Continuous Run. glow time, for 5 seconds, and then the starter will
Prior to the unit starting in either diesel engine or electric energize. The engine will crank until the engine reaches
standby operation (this includes initial start up, and at least 1000 rpm or cranks for a maximum of 10
re--starts from Start--Stop Off Cycles), the CSMV and seconds. The AHR will remain energized during the
EVXV are opened to equalize the compressor crank time, and will continue to heat for up to 3 minutes
discharge and suction pressures before the compressor after the engine starts (See Figure 4--1). Should the
starts.
engine fail to start during the first or second attempt, a
Once the system is equalized, the CSMV and EVXV will 15 second rest period will elapse before subsequent
both close (0% open).
start attempts. The RR will remain energized until the
4.2 ENGINE START--UP next starting sequence. The glow time remains the
4.2.1 Engine Cranking same for all start attempts.
Once the starting conditions are met, the start sequence
will begin by energizing the run relay (RR), UL1 and
UL2.The air heater relay (AHR) will energize depending
ENGINE
0 - 180 Seconds RUNNING
HEAT
10 - 20 MAX
HEAT & CRANK
SECONDS
5 SEC. BUZZER
SECOND
0 to 30 SECONDS PRE AND
CRANK THIRD
HEAT ATTEMPTS
15 Seconds
STOP
ENGINE
0 - 180 Seconds RUNNING
HEAT
10 - 20 MAX
HEAT & CRANK
SECONDS
FIRST
5 SEC. BUZZER ATTEMPT
0 to 30 SECONDS PRE
CRANK
HEAT
Figure 4--1. Auto Start Sequence
4--1 62-11389
4.2.2 Intake Air Heater Schedule NOTE
The glow heat time will vary in duration based on engine While the starter is engaged, if the engine speed
coolant temperature and how the microprocessor is con- is less than 50 RPM for more than 3 seconds,
figured. If Alarm 129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR the SSR will de--energize to stop the starter and
is active, the maximum glow heat times will be used. activates the CHECK STARTER CIRCUIT
alarm.
Table 4-1. Glow Heat Time
NOTE
Glow Heat Time in
Engine Coolant Temper- Seconds The unit will operate in low speed for a minimum
ature of 2 minutes before allowing high speed HEAT
Pre Heat Post Heat or COOL operation. If DEFROST is started, this
Less than 33_F (1.0_C) 30 180 override will be ignored, and the unit will go to
the correct speed for DEFROST.
33_F to 51_F (1.0_C to 20 120
11_C) 4.3.3 Initial Engine Operation
51_F to 78_F (11_C to 10 60 The unit starts in low speed and will switch to high speed
26_C)
as overrides allow. Refer to Section 4.6 for Speed Over-
Greater than 78_F (26_C) 0 0 rides.
After the engine has been running for approximately 15
4.3 STANDBY START--UP seconds, the GENCON relay will energize to provide
high voltage circuits to energize.
4.3.1 Standby Startup The condenser fans are immediately engaged when the
Once the starting conditions are met, the start sequence engine starts.
will begin by energizing the power source contactor
(PSCON) and the condenser fan contactor (CDCON). 4.4 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM START--UP
The buzzer will sound for 5 seconds and then the Once the engine running criteria have been met the
starting sequence will begin. (The buzzer will not sound compressor will start in 2 cylinders and may load to four
if the unit is operating in diesel engine mode, and the cylinders in 5 seconds and may load to six cylinders in
engine is already running.) The compressor will 30 seconds. Refer to Section 5.15 for a description of
energize after 3 seconds. The evaporator fan will Unloader Overrides that may change these start--up
energize 10 seconds after the compressor energizes. times.
4.3.2 Engine Running The evaporator fan motor will start 10 seconds after the
compressor has started if the suction pressure is lower
The engine is considered to be running when: than 100 psig (6.8 bar), or after a maximum of 20
seconds after the compressor starts.
a.Engine RPM are greater than 1000, and
The compressor and fan motors will only turn on when
b.The engine oil pressure switch contacts are the engine is operating in low speed.
closed within 15 seconds of the engine starting OR
Whenever the compressor comes on, it will run for a
If the RPM sensor is not reading correctly, and minimum of 3 minutes.
the engine is being started for the second or
third attempt, the engine is considered to be 4.5 RUNNING MODES
running when:
Two running modes are possible: automatic Start--Stop
a.For ambient temperatures at or above 32°F
(0°C) the engine oil pressure switch contacts are and Continuous Run modes. The user can toggle
closed. between the two modes by pressing the appropriate key
on the keypad. (Refer to Sections 3.6 and 3.7.)
b.For ambient temperatures below 32°F (0°C) the NOTE
DC charging current is more than ¦2 amps. The microprocessor may be locked so that the
unit will always operate in Start--Stop or in
Continuous Run whenever the set point is with-
NOTE in a specific range. Refer to Range Lock (Sec-
If either of these two cases occurs, alarm 130 tion 5.13) and ProductShield (Section 5.14) for
-- CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR will be ac- additional information.
tivated.
4.5.1 Start--Stop Operation
NOTE Start--Stop mode is provided to allow fuel--efficient con-
If the RPM sensor is not reading correctly and trol of refrigerated compartment temperature, while in-
either of these two cases above occurs, alarm suring that the refrigerated compartment temperature
130 -- “CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR” will does not drift too far away from set point. When the refri-
be activated. gerated compartment temperature gets close the set
62-11389 4--2
point, the refrigeration system will shut off. If the unit is been met, the compressor and fan motors will shut off. If
running in Diesel mode, this allows the diesel engine to the battery voltage is below the allowable limit for an off
shut down, saving fuel. If the unit is running in Standby cycle, the PSCON will remain energized to continue to
Electric mode, turning the refrigeration system off will charge the battery. When the battery charge is suffi-
reduce electrical energy usage as well. As the refriger- cient, the PSCON will de--energize to turn the battery
ated compartment temperature drifts away from set charger off..
point, the refrigeration system will turn back on. b. Start--Stop Operation Cycle On Conditions
a. Start--Stop Operation Cycle Off Conditions
A restart will be initiated when one of the following con-
Whenever the unit starts in Start--Stop Mode, it will con-
ditions occurs:
tinue to run until all four of the following criteria have
been satisfied. In Diesel mode, the refrigeration system 1) Normal restart 1: The Refrigerated Compart-
may turn off, but the engine may be kept running in order ment Temperature Has Exceeded Selectable Over-
to satisfy some of the conditions. ride Temperature
1) The refrigerated compartment temperature is The microprocessor continually monitors the refriger-
near set point. ated compartment temperature during the Minimum Off
The refrigerated compartment temperature must be Time. The unit will restart if the refrigerated compart-
ment temperature goes beyond the Override Temperat-
within ¦0.55°F (0.35°C) of set point when the set point ure (above or below set point in the perishable range or
is in the perishable range, and within +0.55°F (0.35°C) above set point in the frozen range). (In the frozen range
of set point when the set point is in the frozen range. if the refrigerated compartment temperature falls below
(See temperature control operating sequence diagrams set point, the unit will not restart.) The Minimum Off Time
and the Override Temperatures are selected in the mi-
Figure 5--3. and Figure 5--6.)
croprocessor Functional Parameter List (Refer to Sec-
tion 3.17). The default value is 30 minutes for the Minim-
2) The unit has run for the Minimum Run Time. um Off Time and 12.0°F (6.7°C) for the Override
Temperature.
The Minimum Run Time is selected in the microproces-
sor Functional Parameter List. (Refer to Section 3.15). 2) Normal restart 2: The Refrigerated Compart-
The default setting is 4 minutes. The purpose of this is to ment Temperature Has Exceeded Standard Over-
force the unit to run long enough to completely circulate ride Temperature
the air inside the compartment and to ensure that the After the Minimum Off Time has expired, the micropro-
product temperature is at set point before the unit cycles cessor continually monitors the refrigerated compart-
off. The refrigeration system or the heaters may shut off ment temperature. If the refrigerated compartment tem-
if the Minimum Run Time has not been met but criteria 1) perature goes more than +3.6°F(+2.0°C) away from set
(above) has been satisfied. However the engine and point (above or below set point in the perishable range or
evaporator fan must run for the Minimum Run Time be- above set point in the frozen range), the unit will restart.
fore shutting off. The Minimum Off Time is selected in the micropro-
3) The engine coolant temperature is above 122°F cessor Functional Parameter List (Refer to Section
(50°C). 3.17). The default setting is 30 minutes.
Similar to criteria 2), the refrigeration system may shut
3) Engine coolant temperature drops below the
off if criteria 1) has been satisfied; however the engine
restart temperature in the configuration list.
must run until the coolant temperature requirement is
satisfied. This condition is not monitored when the unit is If the Engine Coolant Temperature drops below the
operating in Electric Standby Mode. value set in the Configuration List for ENG TEMP FOR
4) The battery is fully charged. S/S RESTART (Refer to Section 6.2.1 for Configuration
settings), the engine will restart if the unit is set to oper-
The microprocessor will sense when the battery charge
ate in Diesel Engine Mode, and will run until all condi-
is correct. A good battery is defined as having approxim-
tions for shutdown are met. When the unit is set to oper-
ately 13.4 VDC at 75_F (23.9°C), and the charging rate
ate in Electric Standby Mode, this criteria will not cause
is below that selected in the Configuration List. Similar to
the unit to start.
criteria 2) and 3), the engine will run until the battery
charge requirement is met.
If Alarm 129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR is act-
When operating in Electric Standby Mode, battery ive, the unit will restart if the ambient air temperature
charge is monitored separately from operating the en- drops to 32°F(0°C) after the unit has been in the OFF
tire unit such as is done when operating in Diesel Engine cycle for 60 minutes. If the unit restarts due to this condi-
Mode. In Electric Standby Mode, the battery charger will tion, the Minimum Run Time will be at least 20 minutes,
be on whenever the unit is operating. When the Minim- regardless of the setting in the Functional Parameter
um Run Time and the Box Temperature criteria have list.
4--3 62-11389
4) Battery voltage falls below voltage selected in 4.5.2 Continuous Run Operation
the configuration list. (See Section 6.2.1) In the Continuous Run mode, the engine will not shut
down except for shut down alarms or if the engine stalls.
When the unit is set to operate in Diesel Engine Mode, Continuous Run mode is normally used for fresh produce
and the battery voltage falls below the setting, the en- and other temperature sensitive product loads. The Start-
gine will restart, and all criteria for an off cycle must be Stop /Continuous key is pressed to switch between Con-
met before the unit will go into another off cycle. tinuous Run and Start-Stop operating modes.
NOTE
When the unit is set to operate in Electric Standby The microprocessor may be locked so that the
Mode, and the battery voltage falls below the setting, the unit will always operate in Start--Stop or in Con-
PSCON will energize to turn on the battery charger. The tinuous Run whenever the set point is within a
PSCON will remain on for a minimum of 20 minutes and
specific range. Refer to Section 5.13 -- Range
until the battery voltage rises to a sufficient level (shows
O.K. in the unit data list). Lock and Section 5.14 -- ProductShield -- for
additional information.
NOTE
5) The Maximum Off Time has expired. The unit will remain in low speed until the engine
coolant temperature reads 79°F (26°C) in Con-
In some ambient conditions, there are times when the tinuous Run Mode. The High Speed Delay can
unit may be off for very long periods of time. To ensure be changed from OFF or from 1 to 255 minutes.
that the load stays within safe temperature ranges, the
Refer to Functional Parameters in Section 3.15.
Maximum Off Time may be used to force the unit to re-
start regardless of any change in refrigerated compart- The default setting is 0 minutes for Continuous
ment temperature. Maximum Off Time is selected in the Run operation.
microprocessor Functional Parameter List. The default
setting is OFF. 4.6 SPEED CONTROL OVERRIDES
NOTE
With the complex control systems in use with
NOTE the Advance Microprocessor, there are many
The unit may remain in low speed for some time different reasons the engine may be operating
after engine start--up when in the Start--Stop in either High Speed or Low Speed besides how
Mode due to the High Speed Delay Functional far the refrigerated compartment temperature
Parameter. The High Speed Delay is selected is away from set point. This section lists the dif-
in the microprocessor Functional Parameter ferent factors that determine the speed of the
List and can be set from 0 to 255 minutes. (Re- engine, in the order of their priority.
fer to Section 3.17) The default value is 10
minutes for Start--Stop operation. a. Force Low Speed
The microprocessor will force the unit to run in low
speed when:
TIP • When the ambient temperature is less than 0° F
While the unit is running, the status of the unit (--17.7° C) AND the unit is running in low speed with
battery can be readily checked by reading the the AC current is less than 8 Amps for 10 minutes the
Battery Voltage in the Data List. If “O.K.” ap- unit will remain in low speed until the ambient temper-
pears after the voltage reading, battery volts is ature is above 0° F (--17.7° C OR the AC current is
sufficient to allow the unit to cycle off. If “OK.” more than 8 amps for 10 minutes.
does not appear, this condition has not been • When the ambient temperature is less than 0.°F
met, and the engine / PSCON is not ready to (--17.7°C) AND the unit is running in either the Cool,
cycle/turn off. Null, or Defrost Cycles AND AC current is less than 12
Amps for10 seconds, the engine will be forced to low
c. Start--Stop Indicator speed. The unit will remain in low speed until the am-
bient temperature is above 0.°F (--17.7°C) OR the AC
current is more than 12 Amps for 10 minutes.
To indicate that the unit is in the Start--Stop mode, the
• When the ambient temperature is less than 77°F
Start--Stop LED indicator on the keypad will be illumi- (25°C) AND the unit is running in the Defrost cycle
nated. AND the engine has been running less than 30
minutes since the SROS was turned on, the unit will
d. Failed To Start -- Auto Mode remain in low speed until the ambient temperature is
above 77°F (25°C) OR the engine has run for a min-
imum of 32 minutes since the SROS was turned on.
If the unit fails to start after three start attempts, the
Alarm A31 --FAILED TO START--AUTO MODE will ap- b. Cargo Protect Mode:
pear in the MessageCenter, and the Alarm LED on the When both the return air sensor (1RAT) alarm and
Keypad will flash on and off once a second. the supply air sensor (1SAT) alarm are active, the unit
62-11389 4--4
will enter Cargo Protect Mode for temperature control. l. Frozen Set point:
The engine will run in low speed only for frozen set If the set point is in the frozen range, and the refri-
points. Refer to Section 5.10 for more information. gerated compartment temperature is below set point,
c. High Speed to Low Speed Delay: the microprocessor will call for low speed.
When the engine is operating in High Speed, and m. Low Suction Pressure:
the microprocessor calls for Low Speed, the engine will
remain in High Speed until the high voltage current draw When the unit is operating in 2 cylinder cool and the
is less than 22 Amps, or for 40 to 240 seconds before go- suction pressure falls to 4 inHg (0.14 Bar) for more than
ing to Low Speed. 20 seconds, the unit will be forced into low speed for a
minimum of 5 minutes, then remain in low speed until
d. Silent Mode: the suction pressure is greater than 4 inHg (0.14 Bar).
When Silent Mode is set for ON in the Functional
Parameter List, the unit will operate in low speed only. n. Start-Stop With A Perishable Set Point:
e. Low Speed Engine Coolant Warm-up: When the unit is operating in Start--Stop and all con-
ditions for an OFF Cycle are met except for set point, the
If the engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Alarm is engine will operate in High Speed to pull down to set
not active the engine will run in low speed until the cool- point and cycle off quicker.
ant is above 79_F (26°C).
NOTE
f. Defrost: Generally, the unit will go into an OFF cycle
Refer to Section 5.12 from High Speed when this condition occurs.
g. Door / Remote Switch Configured for Low Speed However, if one of the required conditions for
Alarm: shut down is no longer met during this time, (for
The unit will be forced into low speed if the door / re- example, the battery voltage drops below the
mote switch is open (active) and is configured for low configured value, or the charging amps in-
speed. crease above the configured value, or the en-
h. Auto Start/Stop Econo Mode: gine coolant temperature drops below 122°F
When the unit restarts from a Start--Stop OFF due (50°C), the engine may return to Low Speed op-
to low battery voltage, low engine coolant temperature, eration until the shut down condition is satisfied,
the Maximum Off Timer has expired, or the Minimum Off then shut down from Low Speed.
Time has expired, and the box temperature is more than
3.6°F (2°C) away from set point, the engine will run in o. High Speed Pulldown:
low speed for the same time as the Minimum Off Time
set in the Functional Parameter list (unless all conditions When the set point is in the perishable range, and
are met for another Off Cycle, and the engine shuts off in the unit is operating in Continuous Run, and the High
less time). If ProductShield Econo: Go To Continuous Speed Pulldown configuration is set for YES, the engine
becomes active during this time, the engine will go to will operate in High Speed until the refrigerated com-
normal speed operation until the next ON Cycle. (See partment temperature is within 0.4°F (0.2°C) of set
Section 5.14 for more information on ProductShield). point.
i. Low Speed Startup Diesel Engine Start: p. Product Shield High Air:
• When ProductShield High Air is configured ON, the
For the initial start of the unit, The engine will run in engine will operate in High Speed whenever the ambient
Low Speed for the time selected in the Low Speed air temperature is outside the Minimum / Maximum tem-
Startup Functional Parameter. Refer to Table 3-3 for perature range selected in the configuration list and, if
the list of Functional Parameters. This parameter can the Delta--T parameter is not set for OFF in the configu-
be adjusted from 0 to 10 minutes. The default settings ration list, the Delta--T of the unit must be greater than
are 0 minutes for Continuous Run and 10 minutes for the selected value. (See Section 5.14 for more informa-
Start/Stop. tion on ProductShield.)
j. High Speed Delay for Initial Compressor Opera- q. Range Protect:
tion:
When the unit is being operated in Range Protect
• The compressor must operate for 2 minutes before Mode and the refrigerated compartment temperature is
the engine will go to high speed. within the Range Protect values (selected in the Func-
k. High Speed Delay tional Parameter list) but the unit must continue to oper-
ate due to Minimum Run Time, battery voltage, battery
• When the unit is operating in low speed, and the mi- charging amps or Engine Coolant Temperature, the en-
croprocessor calls for high speed, the engine will con- gine will run in low speed until all conditions are met for
tinue to operate in low speed for the time specified by an Off Cycle. Range protect temperature ranges are
the High Speed Delay Configuration Setting. (Refer defined in the Functional Parameter list. (See
to Section 6.2.1 for Configuration List.) Table 3-3.)
4--5 62-11389
SECTION 5
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
5.1 INTRODUCTION
Temperature control is achieved by controlling engine speed, the compressor Front Unloader (UL1) ) and Rear
Unloader (UL2), CSMV, and electric heaters.
Temperature control attempts to maintain the compartment temperature at the chosen set point. At times the
compartment temperature may not be equal to the set point. This may be due to:
•the unit is still in the process of pulling down or up to set point OR
•the unit is in Start--Stop OFF mode
•the unit has recently terminated defrost
•the compartment door is open
•the product was not at set point when loaded
5.2 PERISHABLE AND FROZEN SET POINT RANGES

There are two ranges defined for set point.
a. Set points above +10.4°F (-12°C) are considered Perishable.
b. Set points of +10.4°F (-12°C) or below are considered Frozen.
Perishable Frozen
When the compartment tempera- When the compartment tempera-
Temperature Control And ture is near set point, the unit will ture is near set point, the unit will
Continuous Run cycle between HEAT, COOL and cycle between COOL and NULL to
NULL to maintain temperature. maintain temperature. Heaters are
not used.
Compartment temperature criteria Compartment temperature criteria
Temperature Control And is satisfied when the temperature is is satisfied when the temperature is
Start--Stop Off Cycle 0.5°F (0.3°C) above or below set less than 0.5°F (0.3°C) above set
point. point.
Unit will restart when compartment Unit will restart when compartment
temperature is above or below set temperature is above set point by
point by the restart value. Restart the restart value. Restart value dur-
value during the Minimum Off Time ing the Minimum Off Time is the
Start--Stop Restart is the Override Temperature se- Override Temperature selected in
lected in the Functional parameter the Functional parameter list. Re-
list. Restart value following the Mini- start value following the Minimum
mum Off Time is 3.6°F (2.0°C). Off Time is 3.6°F (2.0°C).
Unit will operate in low speed six
Cargo Protect Mode (Both 1RAT cylinder COOL. (Diesel)
and 1SAT sensor alarms are ac- Unit will shut down. Unit will operate in low speed two
tive.) cylinder COOL. (Standby)
5.3 PULLDOWN / PULL-UP MODE

During pulldown mode the unit will run in high speed COOL after high speed delay has expired. (Refer to Sections 5.6
for unloader control and 5.15 for unloader control overrides and the temperature control operating sequence diagrams
Figure 5--1. thru Figure 5--6.) During Pull--up Mode the unit will run in high speed HEAT after high speed delay has ex-
pired.
NOTE
During pulldown or pull--up the unit may be forced to run in low speed due to current operating conditions. Re-
fer to Section 4.6 for explanation of speed overrides.
5--1 62-11389
5.3.1 Pulldown or Pull-up will be initiated in any of the following conditions:
a. At engine start
b. Set point change
c. Operational mode change such as: Start-Stop, Continuous Operation
d. Defrost termination
e. If the system is running in Start-Stop Run Mode, the minimum run time has expired, and other conditions for
shutdown are met except that the compartment temperature has not reached set point.
f. Pretrip termination
5.3.2 Pulldown or Pull-up will end in the following conditions:
a. For Continuous Run Mode:
• When the 1RAT and 1SAT are equally spaced above and below set point AND ( 1SAT - 1RAT ) equals set point for
2
set points below 65°F (18.4_C), AND both supply and return air sensors are good
b. For Start--Stop Mode:
• When the selected control probe temperature is within ±0.5°F (0.3°C) of set point.
NOTE
When the system leaves Pulldown (COOL) or Pull--up (HEAT) modes, it will enter Demand Control. For set
points at or below 10.4°F (--12°C), the unit will operate in COOL and UltraFreeze. (Refer to Section 5.7) For
set points above 65° F (18.4°C), the unit will operate in COOL, HEAT, or NULL Mode.
5.4 HEAT MODE OPERATION

In HEAT Mode, the microprocessor will operate the unit controls as follows:
Engine Front (UL1) &

HTCON1 & HTCON2 CCON Speed Rear (UL2) CSMV EVXV
Unloaders
See Figure 5--1. thru Refer to
Figure 5--6. De--Energized Section 5.11 De--Energized 0% Open 0% Open
Start--Stop or Continuous Run Operation with ECO Mode OFF

HIGH SPEED LOW SPEED
HTCON1 Control Temp is more than 0.5°F (0.3°C) below Control Temp is less than 0.3°F (0.2°C) below
setpoint set point
HTCON2 Control Temp is more than 3.6_F (2.0_C) Control Temp is less than 3.2°F (1.8°C) below
below set point set point
Continuous Run Operation with ECO Mode ON

HIGH SPEED LOW SPEED
HTCON1 Control Temp is more than 1.4°F (0.8°C) below Control Temp is less than 1.3°F (0.7°C) below
set point set point
HTCON2 Control Temp is more than 3.6_F (2.0_C) Control Temp is less than 3.2°F (1.8°C) below
below set point set point
HEAT mode is not used for frozen set points.
62-11389 5--2
5.5 COOL MODE OPERATION
In COOL Mode, the microprocessor will operate the unit controls as follows:
Engine Front (UL1) &

HTCON1 & HTCON2 CCON Speed Rear (UL2) CSMV EVXV
Unloaders
Modulates
De--Energized Refer to See Figure 5--1. thru to control Modulates to
Energized Section 5.11 Figure 5--6. and Sec- temperat- control evaporat-
See Note Below tion 5.6 or superheat
ure
NOTE
When the unit is running in Continuous Run with a Perishable set point, it may be possible for the heater (HT1)
and the compressor to be on at the same time.
NOTE
The CSMV’s main function is to maintain the refrigerated compartment temperature at set point during
Continuous Run operation. It also may open or close -- although, not fully -- to meet the following constraints:
•CLOSE to keep the generator current below a value defined in the Configuration setting OR
•CLOSE to keep the discharge pressure below 435 psig (29.6 bar) OR
•OPEN to keep the suction pressure above --2 psig or 4 inHg (--0.14 bar) OR
•CLOSE to keep the supply air temperature above a certain value. (Refer to Section 5.9.)
The condenser fan may cycle On and Off to maintain discharge pressure above a minimum limit if the condenser
pressure control is On. (Refer to Section 6.2.1 for Configuration Settings.)
5.6 UNLOADER CONTROL OPERATION

To “LOAD,” or de-energize, a compressor unloader increases the capacity of the system by increasing the number of
cylinders pumping refrigerant in the compressor. To “UNLOAD,” or energize, a compressor unloader decreases the
capacity of the system by decreasing the number of cylinders pumping refrigerant. Refer to Section 2.3.3 for more
information on compressor unloaders.
When the compressor is fully loaded, it is operating on six cylinders. When the Rear Unloader (UL2) ) is unloaded (en-
ergized), the unit operates on four cylinders. When both the Front (UL1) and Rear (UL2) unloaders are unloaded (en-
ergized), the unit operates on two cylinders. The Rear Unloader (UL2) always unloads before the Front Unloader
(UL1). See Figure 5--3. and Figure 5--6. (Temperature Control Operating Sequence Diagrams) for unloader con-
trolling temperatures.
There are a number of different conditions which may cause the unloaders to be loaded or unloaded while the unit is
operating in COOL. Refer to Section 5.15 for explanation of unloader overrides.
5.7 DEMAND CONTROL LOGIC

DelFresh is an advanced method of temperature control for set points in the Perishable range. A modified version
based on DelFresh is used for frozen set points. DelFresh is active in Continuous Run mode, or in Start--Stop mode
when it is necessary for the engine to run after the compartment temperature reaches set point (due to minimum run
time, battery voltage, etc.) DelFresh produces a reduced capacity state by:
•throttling down the CSMV in COOL mode OR
•turning the compressor off but keeping the evaporator fans running (NULL mode) OR
•using 2 stages of electric Heat in HEAT mode
DelFresh uses the supply or return air sensor to control compartment temperature, while insuring that the supply air
temperature does not get too cold when a perishable set point is chosen. (See details in Perishable Sensitive Product
section Section 5.9).
The sensor that is selected under the Functional Parameters for temperature control is shown below as the selected
probe. The Temperature Control Probe is the sensor actually used by the microprocessor to perform the temperature
control. In the case of a bad probe, the remaining probe will be used for temperature control. If both probes are bad the
unit will run in Cargo Protect Mode.
5--3 62-11389
SELECTED PROBE TEMPERATURE CONTROL PROBE
Return Air Sensor Return Air Sensor -- for perishable and frozen set points
Supply Air Sensor for perishable set points
Supply Air Sensor
Return Air Sensor for frozen set points
5.7.1 Heat/Cool/Null Switching Operation

There are three possible modes for control temperatures. These are HEAT, COOL and NULL. (Refer to Sections 5.4
and 5.5 for descriptions of HEAT and COOL modes.) When not in pulldown, DelFresh controls the unit based on the
following: (See Figure 5--1. thru Figure 5--6. for the temperature control operating sequence diagrams.)
a. To exit NULL and enter COOL the active probe must be more than:
•0.4°F (0.2°C) above set point in Start--Stop or in Continuous Run with ECO mode OFF
•3.6 to 18°F (2 to 10°C) above set point in Continuous Run with ECO Mode ON. The value used will be the Start--
Stop Override Temperature selected in the Functional Parameter list
b. To exit COOL and enter NULL the active probe must be more than:
•0.4°F (0.2C) below set point in Start--Stop or in Continuous Run with ECO Mode OFF.
•Right at set point in Continuous Run with ECO Mode ON.
c. In addition, the active probe has to be below set point for a certain amount of time in order to exit COOL. This time
will be shorter if the active probe is further below set point. If the active probe is below set point by 1.8°F (1_C) it
would take about 8 minutes to satisfy this condition and enter NULL mode.
d. To exit NULL and enter HEAT, the active probe must be more than:
•0.5°F (0.3°C) below set point in Start--Stop or in Continuous Run with ECO Mode OFF
•1.4°F (0.8°C) below set point in Continuous Run with ECO Mode ON
e. To exit HEAT and enter NULL the active probe must be less than:
•0.4°F (0.2°C) below set point in Start--Stop or in Continuous Run with ECO Mode OFF
•1.3°F (0.7°C) below set point in Continuous Run with ECO Mode ON
5.7.2 Null Mode Operation
NULL Band consists of running the evaporator fan while keeping the compressor and heaters off. The CSMV and
EVXV are closed in NULL mode. The condenser fans will still run to cool the engine radiator.
62-11389 5--4
NOTE
The following temperature control operating sequence diagrams are after pulldown and do not show over-
rides.
RISING
High Speed REFRIGERATED
6 Cylinder COMPARTMENT
COOL TEMPERATURE
+3.6_F ( +2.0_C )
+3.2_F (+1.8_C )
Low Speed
6 Cylinder
COOL +1.8_F (+1.0_C )
+1.6_F (+0.9_C ) Low Speed
4 Cylinder COOL +1.1_F (+0.6_C )
+0.9_F (+0.5_C )
Low Speed +0.4_F (+0.2_C)
2 Cylinder
Set point Set point
-0.4_F (-0.2_C) NULL -0.4_F (-0.2_C)
-0.5_F (-0.3_C)
Low Speed HEAT

HTCON1
-3.2_F (-1.8_C )
-3.6_F (-2.0_C )
High Speed
FALLING HEAT
REFRIGERATED HTCON1 and 2
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
Sequence -- Perishable Range
5--5 62-11389
RISING
REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
High Speed
6 Cylinder +7.2 To 21.6_F (4.0 to 12_C)
COOL
+5.4 to 19.8_F
(3.0 to 11.0_C )
Low Speed +3.6_F ( +2.0_C )
4 Cylinder COOL
Set point Set point

NULL
-3.2_F (-1.8_C )
-3.6_F (-2.0_C )
High Speed
HEAT
HTCON1 and 2
FALLING
REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
Perishable Range
62-11389 5--6
RISING
REFRIGERATED
High Speed COMPARTMENT
6 Cylinder TEMPERATURE
COOL
+3.6_F ( +2.0_C ) ***
+3.2_F (+1.8_C )
Low Speed
6 Cylinder COOL **
+1.6_F (+0.9_C )
Low Speed **
4 Cylinder COOL*
+0.9_F (+0.5_C )
Low Speed **
2 Cylinder COOL *
+0.5_F (+0.3_C )
Off Cycle
Set point Set point
Off Cycle
-0.5_F (-0.3_C)
Low Speed
HTCON1 **
*** -3.2_F (-1.8_C )

-3.6_F (-2.0_C )
High Speed
HEAT
HTCON1 and 2
FALLING
REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
* Once the Minimum Run Time (Refer to Table 3-3.) has expired, the compressor may operate in 6
cylinders if current conditions allow
** Once the Minimum Run Time and High Speed Delay (Refer to Table 3-3.) have expired, the
engine may operate in high speed if current conditions allow
*** During the Minimum Off Time, the unit will restart at the Override Temperature is selected
in the Functional Parameter List (Refer to Table 3-3.)
Figure 5--3. Start-Stop Temperature Control Operating Sequence -- Perishable Range
5--7 62-11389
5.8 DEMAND CONTROL LOGIC FROZEN TEMPERATURE CONTROL
For frozen set points, a modified DelFresh temperature control is used to keep the unit from over cooling and driving
the compartment temperature far below set point. Except as noted in this section DelFreeze operates the same as
DelFresh. DelFreeze control will be used anytime a frozen set point is selected in either continuous or Start--Stop
operation.
5.8.1 Demand Control Logic Continuous Run
In Continuous Run operation the unit may cycle between COOL and NULL modes if conditions are such that the unit
has too much cooling capacity -- even with the CSMV almost closed. In this case, Cooling will end when the active
probe is 3.4°F (1.9°C) below set point. At this point NULL mode begins [if the ECO functional parameter is enabled,
Cooling ends at 0.4°F (0.2°C) below set point]. COOL mode will begin again when the active probe is 0.4°F (0.2°C)
above set point.
5.8.2 Demand Control Logic Start--Stop
In Start--Stop operation the microprocessor will control to set point by cycling the unit off when the compartment tem-
perature is within 0.5°F (0.3°C) of set point. Should the unit be required to continue to run after the compartment tem-
perature is satisfied -- due to either Minimum Run Time, low battery voltage, high charging amps or low engine coolant
temperature -- the DelFreeze logic will control the unit as if it were in Continuous Run and ECO Mode functional para-
meter ON until all conditions for an OFF cycle are met and the unit cycles off.
62-11389 5--8
NOTE
The following temperature control operating sequence diagrams are after pulldown and do not show over-
rides.
RISING
COOL TEMPERATURE
+3.6_F ( +2.0_C )
+3.2_F (+1.8_C )
Low Speed
+1.6_F (+0.9_C ) Low Speed

+0.9_F (+0.5_C )
Low Speed +0.4_F (+0.2_C)
2 Cylinder
Set point Set point
-0.4_F (-0.2_C)
NULL
FALLING
REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
Sequence -- Frozen Range
5--9 62-11389
RISING
REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
High Speed
6 Cylinder +7.2 To 21.6_F (4.0 to 12_C)
COOL
+5.4 to 19.8_F
(3.0 to 11.0_C )
Low Speed +3.6_F ( +2.0_C )
4 Cylinder COOL
Set point Set point
NULL
FALLING
REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
Frozen Range
62-11389 5--10
RISING
COOL TEMPERATURE
+3.6_F ( +2.0_C ) ***
+3.2_F (+1.8_C )
Low Speed
6 Cylinder COOL**
+1.6_F (+0.9_C )
Low Speed **
4 Cylinder COOL *
+0.9_F (+0.5_C )
Low Speed **
2 Cylinder COOL *
+0.5_F (+0.3_C )
Off Cycle
Set point Set point
Off Cycle
FALLING
REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
* Once the Minimum Run Time (Refer to Table 3-3.) has expired, the compressor may operate in 6
cylinders if current conditions allow
** Once the Minimum Run Time and High Speed Delay (Refer to Table 3-3.) have expired, the
engine may operate in high speed if current conditions allow
*** During the Minimum Off Time, the unit will restart at the Override Temperature selected in
the Functional Parameter List (Refer to Table 3-3.)
Figure 5--6. Start-Stop -- Temperature Control Operating Sequence -- Frozen Range
5--11 62-11389
5.9 SUPPLY AIR LIMIT CONTROL (Perishable Sensitive Product)
Under supply air temperature control the compressor suction modulating valve (CSMV) is modulated to maintain
supply air to a minimum in accordance with:
S the START--STOP SUPPLY AIR LIMIT Differential Configuration value
OR
S the CONTINUOUS RUN SUPPLY AIR LIMIT Differential Configuration value
AND
S the Perishable Sensitive Product Functional Parameter Setting.
The supply air limit temperature is determined by the formula: Set Point (SP) + Configured Differential Value (CDV) =
Target Supply Air Limit (TSAL).
The CDV may be set from --21.6 to 0∆F (--12 to 0∆C) in 0.5_C or F intervals. The factory default setting for Start--Stop
is --10.8∆F (--6.0∆C) while the factory default setting for Continuous Run is --9∆F (--5.0∆C).
Example 1:
English -- if SP is 35.6_F and the CDV is --10.5∆F the calculation would be:
35.5_F + (--10.5∆F) = 25.0_F
Metric -- if SP is 2_C and the CDV is --6∆C the calculation would be:
2_C + (--6∆C) = --4_C
Example 2:
English --If the set point is 50_F and the CDV is --10.5∆F the calculation would be:
50_F + (--10.5∆F) = 39.5_F
Metric -- If the set point is 10_C and the CDV is --6∆C the calculation would be:
10_C + (--6∆C) = +4_C
With the Perishable Sensitive Product Functional Parameter set at the default (NO) setting, supply air limit control is
not allowed until the supply air temperature: falls to 32.0_F (0_C) and then it will control to 32.0_F (0_C) OR to the
calculated limit (TSAL) if the calculated limit is below 32.0_F (0_C).
In example 1 above the CSMV would throttle to control the supply air temperature at 25.0_F (--4_C) while in example 2,
it will control to 32.0_F (0_C)
If the sensitivity of the product is such that temperatures must be maintained above freezing, the Perishable Sensitive
Product Functional Parameter is changed to YES. With this setting, the limit control will not allow supply air
temperature to fall below 32.0_F (0_C).
In example 1 above the CSMV would throttle to control the supply air temperature at 32.0_F (0_C) while in example 2,
control would begin when supply air temperature falls to 39.5_F (4_C).
NOTE
The pull down and diesel run time is heavily dependent on the Supply Air Limit Configuration Setting and res-
ultant calculated Target Supply Air Limit (TSAL). Expect longer pull down and engine run times when the Sup-
ply Air Limit Control Setting configured to smaller numerical values. Longer pull down times can also be ex-
pected if the Perishable Sensitive Product Functional Parameter is set to YES.
5.10 CARGO PROTECT MODE

When both the return air sensor (1RAT) alarm and the supply air sensor (1SAT) alarm are active, the unit will enter
Cargo Protect Mode for temperature control. When the set point is in the frozen set point range, the unit will run low
speed loaded cool in diesel mode and low speed fully unloaded COOL in electric standby mode.
“WARNING:NO TEMP CONTROL” will be displayed on the MessageCenter. The unit will shutdown when the set point
is in the perishable range. (Refer to Section 5.2 for a definition of perishable & frozen set points).
62-11389 5--12
5.11 ENGINE SPEED OPERATION
The engine will operate at two different speeds (low and high). Speed Control is based on the differences of Controlling
Temperature and set point as follows:
Start--Stop Operation or Continuous Run With ECO Mode OFF

Mode HIGH SPEED LOW SPEED
COOL Control Temp is more than 3.6_F (2.0_C) Control Temp is less than 3_F (1.8_C) above
above set point set point
HEAT Control Temp is more than 3.6_F (2.0_C) Control Temp is less than 3_F (1.8_C)
below set point below set point
NULL No Always
Continuous Run With ECO Mode ON

Mode HIGH SPEED LOW SPEED
COOL Control Temp is more than 3.6 to 18°F (2.0 to Control Temp is less than 3.6 to 18°F (2.0 to
10°C) above set point. The value used will be 10°C) above set point. The value used will be
the Start--Stop Override Temperature selected the Start--Stop Override Temperature selected
in the Functional Parameter list plus 3.6°F in the Functional Parameter list plus 3.2°F
(2.0°C). (1.8°C).
HEAT Control Temp is more than 3.6°F (2.0°C) Control Temp is less than 3_F (1.8_C)
below setpoint below set point
NULL No Always
5.12 DEFROST
Defrost is an independent cycle overriding cooling and heating functions in order to de-ice the evaporator as required.
When the unit is in defrost, the defrost LED will be on, the MessageCenter will display DEFROST CYCLE STARTED for the
first 5 seconds, then the default message will be displayed for the rest of the defrost Cycle. The compartment temperature
section of the MessageCenter will show “dF”. The set point will continue to be displayed on the left side. Compartment
temperature will not be displayed during defrost.
5.12.1 Evaporator Temperature Criteria For Defrost
Before a defrost cycle can be initiated, the Defrost Termination Temperature sensor (1DTT) must be below 40_F
(4.4_C). If the 1DTT alarm is active, defrost can be initiated if 1RAT is below 45°F (7.2°C). If both 1DTT and 1RAT
alarms are active, defrost can be initiated if1SAT is below 45°F (7.2°C).
5.12.2 Defrost Initiation
When one of the applicable criteria is met, defrost may be initiated by any of four different methods:
a. Defrost Interval Timer: The microprocessor contains an internal Defrost Timer (adjustable in the Functional Param-
eter list) which can be set using the keyboard (Refer to Section 3.15 Functional Change) or the ReeferManager PC
Program. The Defrost Timer may be set for 1.5, 3.0, 6.0, or 12.0 hour intervals. When the unit has run for the se-
lected amount of time, a defrost cycle will be initiated if the evaporator temperature criteria as defined in Section
5.12.1 have been met. The Defrost Timer is reset to zero whenever a defrost cycle ends (regardless of how it was
initiated), and begins counting down until the next defrost cycle. The microprocessor holds in memory the last en-
tered Defrost Timer interval.
The Defrost Timer only counts time when the engine is running and evaporator temperature criteria as defined in
Section 5.12.1 have been met. When the START/RUN--OFF switch is placed in the OFF position, the defrost timer
will be reset to zero. Units running in Start--Stop will not increment the timer during OFF cycles. For this reason, the
defrost timer can not attempt to initiate a defrost cycle during an OFF cycle. However, it is possible that the unit will
go into a defrost cycle very shortly after restarting from a Start--Stop OFF Cycle, if the timer expires at that point.
b. Defrost Air Switch: A Defrost Air Switch (DAS) measures the air restriction through the evaporator coil. As ice
forms and builds up, the air flow is restricted. Once enough ice builds up, the switch contacts will close, and initiate a
defrost cycle if the evaporator temperature criteria as defined in Section 5.12.1 have been met. The Defrost Air
Switch requires periodic testing and calibration. (Refer to Section 9.33.2.) In the case where the switch is out of
adjustment, it will either not put the unit into defrost as soon as needed, or it will attempt to put the unit into defrost
prematurely. In the first case, the defrost timer will help correct any icing problem.
5--13 62-11389
TIP
Ice is not the only thing that will cause the air pressure differential to increase across the evaporator coil.
Shrink wrap, paper, plastic bags, and other such items when caught in the return air stream and pulled up
against the evaporator coil or the return air grill can also cause the Defrost Air Switch contacts to close.
When looking at a unit for a Defrost Air Switch problem, be sure to inspect the condition and cleanliness of the
evaporator coil and the return air area.
c. Manual Defrost : The defrost cycle may be started at any time (providing that evaporator temperature criteria as
defined in Section 5.12.1 have been met) by pushing the MANUAL DEFROST key (Refer to Section 3.9).
d. Iced Coil: 1DTT reading is colder than the 1RAT reading by more than 36°F (20°C) for 15 minutes. The number of
consecutive defrosts initiated by this criteria is limited to 3.
NOTE
If three consecutive defrosts occur as a result of the Iced Coil criteria and the 1DTT reading is still colder than
the 1RAT reading by more than 36°F (20°C) check:
•coil for continued icing or debris at the inlet of the coil or the evaporator air nozzle
•accuracy of the 1DTT and 1RAT sensors (Refer to Section 9.36.)
5.12.3 Defrost Operation With Heaters(Normal Defrost)

In a normal defrost, the heaters and engine speed are set as follows:
SCS
HTCON1 HTCON2 (Engine Operation Only) 1EVCON
ENERGIZED ENERGIZED HIGH DE--ENERGIZED
NOTE
If 1RAT is greater than 95°F (35°C) or 1SAT is greater than 113°F (45°C) any time during the defrost, the heat-
ers will be de--energized and the engine will run at low speed. Normal defrost is then allowed if 1RAT goes be-
low 89.6°F (32°C) and 1SAT goes below 107.6°F (42°C).
5.12.4 Normal Defrost Termination

Defrost Termination: defrost will be terminated once any of the following conditions are met:
a. When the defrost termination temperature (1DTT) is above 55_F (12.8_C) and there is no 1DTT alarm. If the 1DTT
alarm is active, defrost will terminate 10 minutes after it starts.
b. A54 -- DEFROST NOT COMPLETE ALARM. The microprocessor also has a Defrost Cycle Timer which monitors
the total time of the Defrost cycle. This timer starts every time a Defrost Cycle is initiated and it keeps track of the
time that the system is actually defrosting. If the Defrost cycle does not complete within 45 minutes, the following
will occur:
• The Defrost cycle will be terminated.
• Defrost Override timer is activated which will initiate another defrost cycle in 1.5 hours regardless of the standard
Defrost Timer setting.
• A54 DEFROST NOT COMPLETE Alarm will be activated
NOTE
If the Defrost Air Switch (DAS) contacts are still closed at defrost termination or if the DAS calls for a defrost
cycle within eight minutes of the previous defrost cycle termination in two consecutive defrost cycles, the fol-
lowing will occur:
• The Defrost Air Switch (DAS) is ignored for defrost initiation until the unit has completed another defrost cycle in
which the DAS contacts were open at termination. (The manual defrost switch can always start a new Defrost
cycle.)
• A55 CHECK DEFROST AIR SWITCH Alarm is activated.
• A Defrost Override timer is activated which will initiate another defrost cycle in 1.5 hours regardless of the standard
Defrost Timer setting.
5.12.5 Normal Defrost Termination Sequence
The following sequence will be used to perform a transition from defrost to normal temperature control:
62-11389 5--14
a. Both heater contactors will be de--energized, the engine will go to Low Speed and compressor contactor will be
energized in that sequence. These events will occur within 10 seconds of each other.
a. The microprocessor will return to normal temperature control and the data recorder will record a Defrost Completed
Event.
5.12.6 Defrost Operation Without Heaters (Natural Defrost)
Natural Defrost is the process of defrosting the evaporator coil without the use of the heaters. The compressor and
refrigeration system are off and air continues to flow through the evaporator when:
•Defrost is initiated by the Defrost Air Switch AND
•The 1RAT temperature is greater than 39.2°F (4°C)
SCS
HTCON1 HTCON2 Engine Operation Only 1EVCON
DE--ENERGIZED DE--ENERGIZED LOW ENERGIZED
5.12.7 Natural Defrost Termination

Natural Defrost cycles always operate for a minimum of 5 minutes. Defrost will terminate when 1SAT is the same as or
warmer than 1RAT, or after a maximum of10 minutes. If the 1SAT becomes greater than or equal to the 1RAT during
the 5 minute minimum, the defrost cycle will terminate at the end of the 5 minutes.
5.12.8 Natural Defrost Termination Sequence
Since the engine is already at low speed and the heater contactors are de--energized, the microprocessor can
immediately return to normal temperature control and the data recorder will record a Defrost Completed Event.
5.13 TEMPERATURE RANGE LOCK 1 & 2

The unit can be locked into Start-Stop or Continuous Run operation for various set points. Two independent ranges are
available for selection, see Figure 5--7. and Figure 5--8. Each range can be set to lock the unit into either Start--Stop or
Continuous Run based on the current set point
Each Range has its own selectable minimum and maximum temperatures, which define the span of the range. If some
set point temperatures are contained in both ranges due to range overlap, the unit operation specified for Range 1 will
always have priority over the unit operation specified for Range 2.
Typically, both Range 1 and Range 2 are used to control different set point ranges when the unit is not equipped with
the IntelliSet option. For units with IntelliSet, because each IntelliSet is generally programmed for a specific product,
only Range Lock 1 is used to hold the unit in either the Start--Stop or Continuous Run Mode, and Range Lock 2 is left
OFF.
For example, if Continuous Run operation is ALWAYS required whenever the set point is between +28°F and +55°F
(--2.2°C and 12.8°C), Range 1 will be set for Continuous Run, with a Range 1 Minimum Temperature of +28°F (--2.2°C)
and a Range 1 Maximum Temperature of +55°F (12.8°C). Should Continuous Run operation ALWAYS also be
required with set points between --22°F (--30°C) and 0°F (--17.8°C), then Range 2 will be set for Continuous Run, with a
Range 2 Minimum Temperature of --22°F (--30°C) and a Range 2 Maximum Temperature of 0°F (--17.8°C). Any set
point outside of Range 1 or Range 2 will allow the user to change unit operation between Start--Stop and Continuous
Run.
5--15 62-11389
Range Lock 1 & 2
Range 2 is set for

0° to -22°F Range 1 is set for
(-17.8° to -30°C) +28° to +55°F
(-2.2° to +12.8°C)
Range 2 Range 1
°C -30 -23.3 -17.8 -12.2 -6.7 --1.1 4.4 10.0 15.6 21.1 26.7
°F -22 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Figure 5--7. Range Lock 1

In the example shown in Figure 5--7. Range 1 or Range 2 can be changed to lock the unit operation into Start-Stop. It is
primarily important to determine which range is to be Range 1 and which is to be Range 2 is when the ranges overlap.
In the example shown in Figure 5--8., the ranges will be set to lock all set points into Start-Stop, except for a small
range between +32 and +42°F ( 0 and 5.6°C) during which the unit will always operate in Continuous Run. Range 1
Minimum Temperature will be set for +32°F (0°C), and Maximum Temperature of +42°F (5.6°C). Range 2 will be set for
a Minimum Temperature of -22°F (-30°C) and a Maximum Temperature of +89.6°F (32°C).
Range 1 always has priority

when Range 1 & 2 overlap
Range 1 is set for 32° to 42°F
Range 2 is set for --22° to (0° to 5.6°C)
89.6°F Set for Continuous
(-30° to 32°C)
Set for Start-Stop
°C -30 -23.3 -17.8 -12.2 -6.7 -1.1 4.4 10.0 15.6 21.1 26.7
°F -22 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Figure 5--8. Range Lock 2
62-11389 5--16
5.14 PRODUCTSHIELD
NOTE
ProductShield does not operate within Sleep Mode.
ProductShield is a group of configuration settings within the microprocessor that are available in all Advance Micropro-
cessors that have the IntelliSet option installed. The ProductShield Modes work together with the various IntelliSets to
allow improved operating efficiency while providing customized product protection for up to 31 different commodities.
Each ProductShield setting allows the user to select an ambient temperature range in which to operate. The Minimum
and Maximum range values can be set to OFF, or any value from -20 to +119°F (-28.9 to +48.4°C ).
5.14.1 ProductShield Modes:
a. ProductShield: Econo Go To Start--Stop and Go To Continuous Run
ProductShield Econo allows the unit to automatically switch from Start--Stop operation to Continuous run or vice versa
based on a change in the ambient air temperature. This allows for maximum product protection while providing for fuel
savings -- depending on ambient conditions.
1) When the unit is set for Continuous Run, ProductShield Econo allows the unit to cycle OFF in Start--
Stop when:
• ProductShield Econo configuration is set to GO TO S / S (Refer to Section 6.2.1) AND
• The unit has run in Continuous Run for a minimum of either 15 minutes or the Minimum Run Time as selected in the
Functional Parameter list (whichever time is longer) AND
• The ambient temperature falls within the pre--programmed temperature range AND
• The unit is not already running in ProductShield Winter mode which forces the unit to operate in Continuous Run
only. (Refer to Section c. below) AND
• All the normal criteria for a Start--Stop Off Cycle (box temperature at set point, engine coolant temperature, battery
volts and charging amps) are met.
• Optionally, if the Econo Delta--T configuration is set for a numerical value and not set to OFF, the operator can
pre--program a maximum evaporator coil temperature differential (Delta--T) between the return air (1RAT) and supply
air (1SAT) sensors as an additional criteria for switching to Start--Stop. In this case, the unit must bring the Delta--T
below this pre--programmed setting before going to Start--Stop.
The product is probably cooled close to set point if the Delta--T is pre--programmed for a relatively low temperature [4
to 6°F (2.2 to 3.3°C)] and that setting has been reached. Reaching the low Delta--T setting is an indication that not
much heat is being removed from the product in order to maintain the Return Air Temperature.
Setting the Delta--T for a higher value [8 to 27°F (4.4 to 15°C)]) or leaving the setting OFF enables the unit to cycle into
an OFF cycle whether or not the unit is cooling at a higher capacity.
NOTE
In ProductShield Econo: Go to Start--Stop, the Delta-T must be lower than the value selected in order to enter
Start--Stop.
NOTE
If the unit is set for Continuous Run and ProductShield Econo is configured for GO TO CONTINUOUS or OFF,
the unit will remain in Continuous Run.
Once the microprocessor detects that the above criteria have been met, the unit will switch from Continuous Run to a
Start--Stop Off Cycle and remain Off for the Minimum Off Time as set in the Functional Parameter list. A restart will be
initiated when one of the following four conditions occurs:
a) Normal restart 1: The Refrigerated Compartment Temperature Has Exceeded Selectable Override Tem-
perature
The microprocessor continually monitors the refrigerated compartment temperature during the Minimum Off Time.
The unit will restart if the refrigerated compartment temperature goes beyond the Override Temperature (above or be-
low set point in the perishable range or above set point in the frozen range). The Minimum Off Time and the Override
Temperatures are selected in the microprocessor Functional Parameter List (Refer to Section 3.17). The default value
is 20 minutes for the Minimum Off Time and 11.0°F (6°C) for the Override Temperature.
b) Normal restart 2: The Refrigerated Compartment Temperature Has Exceeded Standard Override Tem-
perature
After the Minimum Off Time has expired, the microprocessor continually monitors the refrigerated compartment tem-
perature. If the refrigerated compartment temperature goes more than +3.6°F(+2.0°C) away from set point (above or
5--17 62-11389
below set point in the perishable range or above set point in the frozen range), the unit will restart. The Minimum Off
Time is selected in the microprocessor Functional Parameter List (Refer to Section 3.17). The default setting is 20
minutes.
c) Engine coolant temperature drops below 34_F (1_C).
If the Engine Coolant Temperature drops below 34°F (1_C), the unit will restart, and will run until all conditions for shut-
down are met.
If Alarm 129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR is active, the unit will restart if the ambient air temperature drops to
32°F(0°C) after the unit has been in the OFF cycle for 60 minutes. If the unit restarts due to this condition, the Minimum
Run Time will be at least 20 minutes, regardless of the setting in the Functional Parameter list.
d) Battery voltage falls below voltage selected in the configuration list. (See Section 6.2.1)
In some ambient conditions, there are times when the unit may be off for very long periods of time. To ensure that the
load stays within safe temperature ranges, the Maximum Off Time may be used to force the unit to restart regardless of
any change in refrigerated compartment temperature. Maximum Off Time is selected in the microprocessor
Functional Parameter List. The default setting is OFF.
When the unit restarts, it will return to Continuous Run operation for a minimum of 15 minutes or the Minimum Run
Time (as selected in the Functional Parameter list), whichever time is longer. The same ProductShield Econo: Go To
Start--Stop activation conditions must again be met in order for the unit to cycle OFF again. While the unit is running
and the set point is between 32 and 65.1°F (0 and 18.4°C), the FreshProtect settings (as selected in the Functional
Parameter list) will be effective.
When ProductShield Econo Maximum Temperature is set for OFF, and ProductShield Econo Minimum Temperature
is set for a temperature, the ambient air temperature will be considered to be “inside the range” whenever the ambient
air temperature is higher than the Minimum Temperature setting, with no upper limit.
When ProductShield Econo Maximum Temperature is set for a temperature, and ProductShield Econo Minimum
Temperature is set for OFF, the ambient air temperature will be considered to be “inside the range” whenever the
ambient air temperature is lower than the Max Temp setting, with no lower limit.
When ProductShield Econo Maximum Temperature is set for OFF, and ProductShield Econo Minimum Temperature
is set for OFF, the ambient air temperature will be considered to be “inside the range” at any ambient air temperature.
PRODUCTSHIELD ECONO: GO TO START/STOP EXAMPLES
The following examples apply in situations where all other Start--Stop conditions have been met. (Refer to Section
4.5.1..)
1. If the Econo Minimum Temperature is set to 30°F (-1.1°C) and the Econo Maximum Temperature is set to
40°F (4.4°C) and the ambient air temperature falls between these temperatures, the unit operation can change to
Econo Start--Stop.
OFF and the ambient air temperature is anywhere above 30°F (-1.1°C), the unit operation can change to Econo
Start--Stop.
3. If the Econo Minimum Temperature is set to OFF and the Econo Maximum Temperature is set to 40°F (4.4°C)
and the ambient air temperature falls anywhere below 40°F (1.7°C), the unit operation can change to Econo
Start--Stop.
4. If both the Econo Minimum and Econo Maximum Temperatures are set to OFF, unit operation can change to
Econo Start--Stop at any ambient temperature.
2) When the unit is set for Start--Stop, ProductShield Econo allows the unit to run in Continuous Run
when:
• ProductShield Econo configuration is set to GO TO CONTINUOUS (Refer to Section 6.2.1), AND
• The unit has run in Start--Stop for a minimum of 15 minutes OR the Minimum Run Time, whichever is longer as set
in the Functional Parameter list. (See Table 3-3) AND
• The ambient temperature falls outside the pre--programmed temperature range.
NOTE
If unit is set for Start--Stop and ProductShield Econo is configured for GO TO START / STOP or OFF, the unit
will remain in Start--Stop.
Once the microprocessor detects that the above criteria have been met, the unit will switch from Start--Stop to
Continuous Run for a minimum of 30 minutes. After 30 minutes the unit will return to Start--Stop when the ambient
temperature has fallen within the pre--programmed temperature range by ±3.6°F (±2°C).
62-11389 5--18
NOTE
Delta--T logic is not used or available when unit is configured for GO TO CONTINUOUS.
PRODUCTSHIELD ECONO: GO TO CONTINUOUS EXAMPLES

90°F (32.2°C) and the ambient air temperature falls outside these temperatures, the unit operation can change to
Econo Continuous Run.
2. If the Econo Minimum Temperature is set to 0°F (-17.8°C) and the Econo Maximum Temperature is set to OFF
and the ambient air temperature falls below 0°F (-17.8°C), the unit operation can change to Econo Continuous Run.
3. If the Econo Minimum Temperature is set to OFF and the Econo Maximum Temperature is set to 90°F
(32.2°C) and the ambient air temperature rises above 90°F (32.2°C), the unit operation can change to Econo
Continuous Run.
4. If both the Econo Minimum and Econo Maximum Temperatures are set to OFF, ProductShield Econo: Go To
Continuous can not operate because no range has been defined and it is therefore impossible for the ambient
temperature to be outside of range.
b. ProductShield: High Air
ProductShield High Air mode allows the unit to provide increased airflow by operating the engine in high speed. This
generally results in a reduced Delta-T. This can maximize product protection under difficult conditions while allowing
the unit to operate more efficiently during less demanding conditions.
When the Air Flow parameter (in the Functional Parameter list) is set for NORMAL, ProductShield High Air allows the
unit to run as required -- either High Speed or Low Speed depending on:
• How far the compartment temperature is away from set point AND
• Speed Override Conditions -- Refer to Section 4.6
When the ambient temperature falls outside the pre--programmed temperature range, ProductShield High Air mode
will be enabled, and the engine will go to high speed to provide high air flow within the refrigerated compartment.
The operator can also optionally pre--program a maximum evaporator coil temperature differential (Delta--T) between
the return air (1RAT) and supply air (1SAT) sensors as an additional criteria for switching to ProductShield High Air.
When the Delta--T setting is used, the unit must bring the Delta--T above this pre--programmed setting before going to
High Air Mode. The Delta--T setting is used to prevent ProductShield High Air from operating when the heat load on the
refrigeration unit is low.
NOTE
In ProductShield High Air, the Delta-T must be higher than the value selected in order to enter the mode.
PRODUCTSHIELD ECONO: HIGH AIR EXAMPLES

1. If the High Air Minimum Temperature is set to 0°F (-17.8°C) and the High Air Maximum Temperature is set to
90°F (32.2°C) and the ambient air temperature falls outside these temperatures, the unit operation can change to
High Air.
2. If the High Air Minimum Temperature is set to 0°F (-17.8°C) and the High Air Maximum Temperature is set to
OFF and the ambient air temperature falls below 0°F (-17.8°C), the unit operation can change to High Air.
3. If the High Air Minimum Temperature is set to OFF and the High Air Maximum Temperature is set to 90°F
(32.2°C) and the ambient air temperature rises above 90°F (32.2°C), the unit operation can change to High Air.
4. If both the High Air Minimum and High Air Maximum Temperatures are set to OFF, ProductShield Econo: High
air can not operate as no range is defined and it is impossible for the ambient temperature to be outside of range.
If the unit shuts down in Auto Start--Stop during High Air, it will not be in High Air when it restarts and will return to
normal operation for a minimum of 15 minutes. The original activation conditions must then be met in order for the unit
to return to High Air.
c. ProductShield: Winter
When the unit is set for Start--Stop operation, ProductShield Winter allows it to switch to continuous run when the
ambient air temperature falls below a pre--programmed temperature falling between 32 to --20°F (0 to --29°C). This
helps protect the unit from the possibility of fuel gelling and other cold weather issues.
NOTE
When the unit is operating in Continuous Run, the unit will not switch into ProductShield Winter.
When the unit is operating in Start--Stop and the microprocessor detects that the ambient temperature has dropped
below the pre--programmed temperature, the unit will switch into ProductShield Winter mode which will force the unit
5--19 62-11389
to operate in Continuous Run. The unit will continue to operate in Continuous Run for a minimum of 30 minutes. After
30 minutes, the unit will return to auto Start--Stop if the ambient temperature has risen more than 3.6°F (2°C) above the
pre--programmed ProductShield Winter temperature.
NOTE
All of the ProductShield settings may be viewed in the Data List (Refer to Section 3.13). For units with Intelli-
Sets, the Data List will reflect the ProductShield settings for the IntelliSet that is currently active.
5.15 UNLOADER CONTROL OVERRIDES

This section lists the different factors that determine the operation (de--energizing / loading and energizing / unloading)
of the unloaders in addition to the unloader control used by the temperature control described in section 5.6.
Unloaders operate in priority order for COOL mode ONLY (For example: Override a supersedes b and all lower over-
rides.):
The overrides will be allowed in Cargo Protect Mode only if the override does not use the return or supply temperature.
There is a minimum delay of 20 seconds between LOADING and UNLOADING cylinders under all operating condi-
tions except when the engine is starting.
When the Compressor is Off the Unloaders are always de--energized.
NOTE
In all of the following instances UL1 refers to the Front Unloader and UL2 refers to the Rear Unloader.
a. Low Generator Amp Draw:

When alarm A128 “LOW AC AMPS” is active the compressor will only operate on 2 or 4 cylinders.
b. High Discharge Pressure Or High Generator Amp Draw:
The microprocessor forces 2 cylinder operation whenever the compressor discharge pressure is above 429 psig
(29.2 bar) OR when the compressor amp draw is within 1 Amp of the maximum allowable generator current (Maximum
Allowable Generator Current is a Configuration Setting -- Refer to 6.2.1.)
c. Compressor Restart:
The microprocessor will force the compressor to run in 2 cylinders for 10 minutes when the compressor restarts
unless the compressor is restarting following a defrost cycle. If the compressor discharge temperature (CDT) be-
comes greater than 284°F (140°C.) or the system returns to pulldown mode (Refer to Section 5.3) the 10 minute will be
overriden and the unloaders will de--energize (load) as required.
d. Fan Motor Delay:
Whenever any fan motor has been energized, there will be a 3 second delay before either unloader is allowed to
de--energize (load).
e. 4 Cylinder Delay:
When the compressor suction pressure (CSP) is greater than 22 PSIG (1.5 Bar) AND the compressor is fully un-
loaded (operating on 2 cylinders), AND the conditions call for UL2 to be de--energized (loaded), there will be a 20
second delay while the CSMV closes down by 20% from the current setting. After UL2 loads the CSMV will go back to
normal control.
f. Two--Minute Delay:
When an unloader is energized (unloaded) due to a refrigeration system pressure override (overrides #f., g., h. or
i.), the unloader remains energized for a minimum of 2 minutes.
g. Compressor Startup:
• UL1 remains energized (unloaded) for a minimum of 10 seconds when the ambient is above 100°F (37.8°C) or 5
seconds when the ambient is at or below 100°F (37.8°C) after the compressor motor contactor is energized
• UL2 remains energized (unloaded) for a minimum of 60 seconds when the ambient is above 100°F (37.8°C) or 30
seconds when the ambient is at or below 100°F (37.8°C) (ambient is greater than 37.8°C) after the compressor motor
contactor is energized
62-11389 5--20
h. High Evaporator Pressure:
• UL2 will always be energized (unloaded) when the suction pressure is above the value shown in the chart below
for 1 minute, according to the current ambient temperature. For example, at an ambient temperature of 100°F (37.8
°C), UL2 will be energized when the suction pressure rises to approximately 75 psig (5 bar). UL2 can load as soon as
the pressure is 5 psig (0.3 bar) less than the value in the chart.
100
80
60
40
PSIG
20
0
90 100 110 120 130 140
Ambient Temperature ( °F)
Figure 5--9. Evaporator Pressure Chart
i. High Discharge Pressure:

• If the compressor discharge pressure reaches 450 psig (30.6 bar) [435 psig (29.6 bar) at some point soon after en-
gine start up] for more than 1 minute, UL2 will energize (unload) and remain energized until the compressor discharge
pressure drops below 430 psig (29.3 bar) [415 psig (29.6 bar) soon after engine start up.]
• If both unloaders are energized (unloaded), and the discharge pressure drops below 430 psig (29.3 bar), UL1 will
be de--energized (loaded)
j. Low Suction Pressure:
• If suction pressure falls below --2 psig or 4 inHg (0.14 bar) for more than 20 seconds, UL2 will be energized (un-
loaded)
• After 20 seconds: if suction pressure is still less than --2 psig or 4 inHg (0.14 bar), UL1 will be energized (unloaded),
OR
• Once the suction pressure rises above 5 psig (0.3 bar), UL2 will be de--energized (loaded) (after the 2--Minute
Delay mentioned above)
• If both unloaders are energized (unloaded), AND 20 seconds has elapsed since energizing (unloading) UL1 AND
the suction pressure rises above 5 psig (0.3 bar), UL1 will be de--energized (loaded)
k. High CDT:
If the compressor is operating with both unloaders energized (unloaded), and the CDT rises to 284°F (140°C),
UL1 will be de--energized (loaded), and will remain de--energized (loaded) until the CDT drops below 266°F (130°C)
for at least 2 minutes.
l. Cargo Protect Mode:
Refer to Section 5.10
m. Auto Start--Stop:
If the Off Cycle conditions have been met in Start--Stop Mode (Refer to Section 4.5.1) and the minimum run time
has expired, BUT the refrigerated compartment temperature is not at set point, both unloaders will be de--energized
(loaded) and the compressor will operate on 6--cylinders until the unit cycles off.
n. High Speed Pulldown:
When the set point is in the perishable range, and the unit is operating in Continuous Run, and the High Speed
Pulldown configuration is set for YES, then the compressor will operate with both unloaders de--energized (6--cylinder
loaded operation) until the refrigerated container temperature is within ± 0.4°F (0.2C) of set point.
o. Range Protect:
When the unit is operating in Range Protect, and the compartment temperature is within the specified temperature
range, but not all conditions for a Start--Stop Off Cycle have been met, the compressor will operate with both UL1 and
UL2 energized (unloaded) until the unit cycles off.
5--21 62-11389
SECTION 6
TECHNICIAN INTERFACE
6.1 PC MODE / DOWNLOAD PORT

PC Mode allows the user to access and download data All functions available from the keypad may be viewed
using a computer when the unit is not running and or changed using the ReeferManager Program, and a
without starting the eight--hour data recorder timer. personal computer (PC) connected to the download
Connecting a download cable (P/N 22-01737-00 port. Using the PC will provide additional programming
(6’ Long) or 22-01737-04 (20’ Long) to the download and configuring capabilities that will not be available
port with the START/RUN--OFF switch (SROS) in the through the keypad.
OFF position allows the Advance Microprocessor to The data recorder may also be configured and
power up and communicate with the computer. downloaded through the Download Port using the
ReeferManager Program.
6--1 62-11389
PC mode can be used for:
• Changing setpoint for the next load
• Changing any of the functional parameters for
C
the next load B
• Reading Engine hourmeters

D A
• Reading Maintenance hourmeters
E Insulated
• Resetting Maintenance hourmeters Jumper
• Viewing the Active and Inactive alarm lists
• Entering a Trip Start Download Port
• Keeping the microprocessor powered up after
turning the START/RUN-OFF switch to the
OFF position Jumper P/N 22-50180-00 WHITE WIRE
• Demonstrating the operation of the
microprocessor without the engine running
• Using any of the PC cards (Download,
Program, Configuration or Option)
To better utilize PC Mode, a PC Mode Jumper (CTD P/N

22-50180-01) is available. This jumper looks similar to
the Configuration jumper (Refer to Section 6.2), but has
a GREEN WIRE on it. With the unit off, locate the
download port. Remove the protective plug to gain
access to the wire terminals. Plug in jumper or connect
an insulated jumper wire to terminals C and E. WARNING
If the START/RUN --OFF switch is placed in the Do Not Allow Jumper Wire To Touch Any
START/RUN position, the microprocessor will go to Ground during microprocessor configura-
normal operation. If the unit is shut down with the PC tion and technician testing.
Cable or jumper still in place, the engine will shut down c. Place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the
and the microprocessor will remain powered up.
START/RUN position. The ALARM LED will come on
and the set point will appear, but the refrigerated com-
partment temperature will not and
WARNING “REMOVE JUMPER” will appear in the
MessageCenter for 10 seconds. Remove the jumper
Do not place the START/RUN--OFF Switch at this time.
(SROS) in the START/RUN position or the “ ↑ ↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SELECT” will appear
unit will start. in the MessageCenter for 10 seconds, or until either
the UP or DOWN ARROW key is pressed.
d. Press the UP ARROW key to scroll through the Main
6.2 MICROPROCESSOR CONFIGURATION AND Menu beginning at the top.
TECHNICIAN TEST MODES Press the DOWN ARROW key to scroll through the
(REMOVE JUMPER MODE) Main Menu beginning at the bottom.
a. Place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF posi- e. Select the Mode you wish to access, and press the
tion. = key. See the following pages for information on
these test modes:
b. With the unit off, locate the download port. Remove
the protective plug to gain access to the wire termi- SConfiguration Mode
nals. Plug in Jumper P/N 22-50180-00 or connect an SComponent Test Mode
insulated jumper wire between plug terminals A and
B. SService Mode
62-11389 6--2
6.2.1 Configuration Mode d. To change one of the Configurations, bring the Con-
NOTE figuration to change into the MessageCenter, and
press the = key.
To enter Configuration Mode Refer to Section “ ↑ ↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SAVE” will show in the
6.2. MessageCenter for 10 seconds Then the selected
a. “↑ ↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SELECT” will appear Configuration will flash, showing the current value.
in the MessageCenter. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to scroll through
the list of available selections for this Configuration.
b. Press the UP ARROW key to scroll through the Con-
figuration list beginning at the top. e. Once a new value is showing in the MessageCenter,
Press the DOWN ARROW key to scroll through the press the = key to save the selection. The
Configuration list beginning at the bottom. MessageCenter will stop flashing. The new value is
c. To read through the Configuration list, continue to now in memory.
press either the UP or DOWN ARROW keys. The list
is circular meaning that once the end is reached, it is f. Press the UP ARROW key to continue to scroll
repeated from the beginning. through the Configuration list.
CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION

VECTOR FAMILY Unit models are grouped into families. The correct
UNIT MODEL FAMILY ULTRA / ULTIMA family must be identified for the correct model num-
ber to be displayed in the next selection.
UNIT MODEL NUMBER # NDP532N6JB00 The correct model number must be selected for
Pick one of these two models from NDP532N0JB00 proper operation and control. This is also part of the
the Vector model family Unit Data where user can read the information.
Configuration mode is the only way user can write
information.
The unit S/N may be entered. This may be up to 11
UNIT SERIAL NUMBER # characters long. Numbers, Letters, and spaces are
available by scrolling through the available list.
The ID # may be entered. This may be up to 10
TRAILER ID # characters long. Numbers, Letters, and a space are
available by scrolling through the available list.
Hours from existing microprocessor can be installed

into replacement microprocessor.
SET NEW HOURS NOTE: Changes to these values may be made for
up to 60 minutes based on the real time clock.
This configuration only appears in the list until an
hourmeter reaches 25 hours.
NOTE: Refer to Section 4.2.2 for intake air heater
INTAKE HEATER
schedule.
GLOW TIME SHORT
LONG AND SHORT SETTINGS ARE NOT USED
LONG
FOR ENGINES WITH INTAKE AIR HEATERS
YES = When the compartment temperature has
been out--of--range for 45 minutes, the alarm light
OUT OF RANGE SHUTDOWN: will come on, and the unit will shut down.
(Refer to Section 2.7.3) YES / NO
NO = When the compartment temperature has
been out--of--range for 30 minutes, the alarm light
will come on and the unit will continue to run.
YES = All Functional Parameters in the function list
are locked in place.
PARAMETERS LOCKOUT: YES / NO NO = All Functional Parameters in the function list
can be changed using the keypad, unless individu-
ally locked out by Reefer Manager.
YES = When Alarm 39 is active the alarm light will
be on and the engine will shut off.
RPM ALARM SHUTDOWN: YES / NO
NO = When Alarm 39 is active the alarm light will
be on and the engine will continue to run.
6--3 62-11389
YES = When Alarm 18 is active the alarm light will
be on and the unit will shut off.
LOW PRESSURE SHUTDOWN: YES / NO
be on and the unit continue to run.
255 SECS This configuration determines the length of time the
LP SHUTDOWN DELAY: (0 -- 255 seconds) unit will continue to run before it is shut down after
the Low Pressure signal is received.
YES / NO YES = When Alarm 27 is active the alarm light will
be on and the engine will shut off.
HIGH SUCT PRESS SHUTDOWN
be on and the unit will continue to run.
YES / NO YES = When Alarm 28 is active the alarm light will
REFRIGERATION SYS be on and the engine will shut off.
SHUTDOWN NO = When Alarm 28 is active the alarm light will
be on and the unit will continue to run.
YES = The unit will shutdown and not restart when
COMPRESSOR ALARM Alarms 13, 17, 18 or 56 occur 3 times within 2
SHUTDOWN YES / NO hours.
(Special option card required)
NO = Normal shutdown rules for above alarms.
30 PSIG (2.0 BAR)
Pressure to maintain if discharge pressure trans-
SUCTION PRESSURE 0 -- 50 psig (0 to ducer is opened or shorted.
3.4 bar)
[in 1 psig (0.1 bar)
increments]
5.0A
The battery charging amps must be lower than the
CURRENT FOR S/S SHUTOFF 1A TO 10A value selected in order for the unit to cycle off in
(in 0.5A incre- Start--Stop or in Sleep Mode.
ments)
12.2V The engine will restart from a Start--Stop Off cycle
VOLTAGE FOR S/S RESTART 11.5 TO 12.8V or a Sleep Mode Off cycle when the battery drops
to this value.
YES = When alarm 51 is active the alarm light will
ALTERNATOR CHECK be on and the unit will shut off.
YES / NO
SHUTDOWN: NO = When alarm 51 is active the alarm light will be
on and the unit will continue to run.
YES = An Engine Oil Level Switch is installed.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL SWITCH YES / NO
NO = An Engine Oil Level Switch is not installed.
YES / NO YES = The low engine oil level alarm will shutdown
the unit.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL SHUTDOWN
NO = The low engine oil level alarm will not shut-
down the unit.
32°F (0°)C The engine will restart from a Start--Stop Off cycle
ENG TEMP FOR S/S RESTART --22 to 32°F or a Sleep Mode Off cycle when the engine coolant
(--12.2 to 0°C) temperature drops to this value.
YES = A Coolant Level Sensor is installed.
LOW COOLANT LEVEL YES / NO
NO = A Coolant Level Sensor is not installed..
62-11389 6--4
NO DEVICE NO DEVICE = There is no Low Fuel Level Sensor
installed in the fuel tank.
SWITCH SWITCH INSTALLED = A Low Fuel Level Switch is
FUEL SENSOR INSTALLED installed in the fuel tank.
0 TO 100% SEN- 0 to 100% SENSOR = A Low Fuel Level Sensor is
SOR installed in the fuel tank. The fuel level may be read
in the Unit Data list.
FUEL TANK SIZE OFF OFF = No Low Fuel Level Switch or 0 to 100%
30 GALLONS
Sensor is installed in the tank; OR
50 GALLONS
75 GALLONS A Low Fuel Level Switch or a 0 to 100% Sensor is
100 GALLONS installed in the tank, but the unit will not shutdown
due to a Low Fuel Level Alarm.
120 GALLONS
30 -- 120 GALLONS = When a Low Fuel Level

Switch is installed, and the LOW FUEL
LEVEL WARNING (alarm 1) is on, the unit
will shutdown (alarm 19) after a time delay
(Refer to chart below)
30 gal 30 min
50 gal 60 min
75 gal 90 min
100 gal 120 min
120 gal 150 min
OR
If a 0 to 100% Sensor is installed, the low fuel level
WARNING (alarm 1) will come on when the level
reaches 15% or less, and the unit will shutdown
(alarm 19) when the level reaches 10%.
25A Use factory default settings only.
DIESEL MAX GEN AMPS:xx.xA 10 TO 25 DO NOT OPERATE UNIT WITH DIFFERENT SET-
in 0.5A increments TINGS.
STANDBY MAX GEN AMPS:xx.xA 10 TO 22 DO NOT OPERATE UNIT WITH DIFFERENT SET-
STARTUP GEN MAX AMPS:xx.xA 10 TO 17 DO NOT OPERATE UNIT WITH DIFFERENT SET-
4A This is the difference between Diesel Max Gen Cur-
4 TO 10 rent at High Speed and Low Speed
DIESEL OFFSET MAX AMPS:xx.xA in 0.5A increments Use factory default settings only.
DO NOT OPERATE UNIT WITH DIFFERENT SET-
TINGS.
6--5 62-11389
OFF
5 Used in starting the system in standby from power
STANDBY STARTUP DELAY 10 up. This helps to prevent multiple units on the same
15 power drop from restarting at the same time.
20 SECONDS
YES = This hourmeter will be displayed during the
startup messaging sequence and will be in hour-
meter menu.
DISPLAY TOTAL ENGINE HR NO / YES
NO = This hourmeter will not be displayed during
the startup messaging sequence and will be shown
with the “other meters and counters”.
meter menu.
DISPLAY STANDBY RUN HR NO / YES
meter menu.
DISPLAY TOTAL SWITCH ON HR NO / YES
0FF = The Engine Maintenance Hour Meter is
DIESEL RESET VALUE 0FF turned off.
(Refer to Section 2.8 for oil change 50 TO 30,000 HRS 50 – 30,000 hrs = The value selected here will be
intervals) in 50 hr increments the number of hours between engine service inter-
vals.
0FF = The Standby Run Time Maintenance Hour
0FF Meter is turned off.
STANDBY RESET VALUE 50 TO 30,000 HRS 50 – 30,000 hrs = The value selected here will be
in 50 hr increments the number of hours between standby run time ser-
vice intervals.
0FF = The Switch--On Maintenance Hour Meter is
0FF turned off.
SWITCH ON RESET VALUE 50 TO 30,000 HRS 50 – 30,000 hrs = The value selected here will be
in 50 hr increments the number of hours between Switch--On service
intervals.
62-11389 6--6
OFF OFF = The PM 1--5 Maintenance Hour Meter(s) is
turned off.
ENGINE HOURS ENGINE HOURS = PM Meter will count engine
hours until the next service interval.
SWITCH ON SWITCH ON HOURS = PM Meter will count Switch
HOURS On Hours until the next service interval.
STANDBY HOURS STANDBY HOURS = PM Meter will count Run
PM (1--5) Time Hours until the next service interval.
START CYCLES START CYCLES = PM Meter will count how many
times the engine has started until the next service
interval.
HIGH SPEED HIGH SPEED HOURS = PM Meter will count how
HOURS many hours the unit operated in high speed until the
next service interval.
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE DAYS = PM Meter will count how
DAYS many days until the next service interval.
NOT DISPLAYED 0 = PM (1--5) is not being used.
ENGINE HOURS ENGINE HOURS = PM (1--5) is connected to the
OFF or engine hour meter. The reset interval will be (50 –
50 TO 30,000 HRS 30,000 hrs).
in 50 hr increments
SWITCH ON SWITCH ON HOURS = PM (1--5) is connected to
HOURS the switch on hour meter. The reset interval will be
OFF or (50 – 30,000 hrs).
50 TO 30,000 HRS
in 50 hr increments
STANDBY HOURS STANDBY HOURS = PM (1--5) is connected to the

PM (1--5) RESET INTERVAL OFF or Standby Run Time hour meter. The reset interval
50 TO 30,000 HRS will be (50 – 30,000 hrs).
in 50 hr increments
(This is not displayed unless the PM
meter is assigned to a counter in the START CYCLES START CYCLES = PM (1--5) is connected to the
previous configuration.) 1,000 TO 90,000 clutch cycle meter. This meter counts every time
CYCLES the engine starter engages. The reset interval will
OFF or be (1,000 to 90,000 cycles)
in 1,000 cycle in-
crements
HIGH SPEED HIGH SPEED HOURS = PM (1--5) is connected to
HOURS the high engine speed hour meter, which counts
OFF or only high speed engine hours. The reset interval will
50 TO 30,000 HRS be (50 – 30,000 hrs).
in 50 hr increments
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE DAYS = PM (1--5) is connected to
DAYS OFF or the real time clock in the data recorder and will
10 TO 990 DAYS count how many days until the next service interval.
in 10 day incre-
ments
6--7 62-11389
PRODUCTSHIELD SETUP YES This message will only appear if ProductShield is
Note: ProductShield is only available installed. The information set in the following config-
when IntelliSet is installed. urations can be read in the Unit Data List.
(Refer to Section 5.14 for more in-
formation on ProductShield.)
OFF OFF = ProductShield Econo is OFF
GO TO S/S GO TO START/STOP = Allows unit to be set for
and operate in Continuous Run until ambient tem-
perature falls within a user--defined range when
unit will go to Start--Stop. This allows fuel savings
while offering Continuous Run operation protection
when ambient is outside range. Unit will return to
Continuous Run when ambient goes beyond range.
GO TO CONT GO TO CONTINUOUS = Allows unit to be set for
•PRODUCTSHIELD ECONO and operate in Start--Stop until ambient tempera-
ture falls outside a user--defined range when unit
will go to Continuous Run. This provides continuous
air flow and good product protection for extreme
ambient temperatures. Unit will return to Start--Stop
when ambient comes back inside range.
The minimum range allowed for this selection is
10°F (5.5°C).This means that the MIN temperature
will never be closer to the MAX temperature than
10°
OFF OFF = There is no lower limit for this parameter.
--19°F to +119°F Select the lower limit of the ambient range desired
(--28.3°C to for this parameter. Refer to Section 5.14 for more
• ECONO MIN. TEMP +48.3°C ) information on Econo Min. Temp.
in 0.5°F or °C
increments
Default: 119°F
(48.3°C )
OFF OFF = There is no upper limit for this parameter.
• ECONO MAX. TEMP
--19°F to +119°F Select the upper limit of the ambient range desired
+48.3°C ) information on Econo Max. Temp.
• ECONO MAX. TEMP in 0.5°F or °C
increments
Default: 119°F
(48.3°C )
OFF OFF = Delta-T is not used in determining when the
unit will go into Econo: Go To Start/Stop mode.
• ECONO DELTA--T
(This parameter is not used for +3.6°F to +27.0°F Select the desired Delta--T value for activation of
Econo Go To Continuous) (+2°C to 15°C) ProductShield Econo: Go To Start/Stop mode.
in 0.5° C or °F in-
crements
62-11389 6--8
OFF OFF = The unit will operate normally in high and
low speeds.
ON ON = The unit will operate in high speed when the
•PRODUCTSHIELD HIGH AIR ambient air temperature falls OUTSIDE the mini-
mum / maximum temperature range (selected set-
tings for HIGH AIR MIN TEMP, HIGH AIR MAX
TEMP, AND HIGH AIR DELTA--T -- see below)
OFF OFF = There is no lower limit for this parameter.
--19°F to +119°F Select the lower limit of the ambient range desired
•HIGH AIR MIN. TEMP +48.3°C ) information on High Air Min. Temp.
in 0.5°F or °C
increments
Default: 119°F
(48.3°C )
OFF OFF = There is no upper limit for this parameter.
--19°F to +119°F Select the upper limit of the ambient range desired
•HIGH AIR MAX. TEMP +48.3°C ) information on High Air Max. Temp.
in 0.5°F or °C
increments
Default: 119°F
(48.3°C )
OFF OFF = Delta--T is not used for determining the ac-
tivation/de--activation of High Air Delta--T
•HIGH AIR DELTA--T +3.6° F to +27.0°F Select the desired Delta--T value for activation of
(+2°C to 15°C) ProductShield High Air
in 0.5° C or °F in-
crements
OFF OFF = ProductShield Winter is disabled.
--20°F to +32.0°F Select the desired ambient temperature for activa-
(--28.9°C to 0°C) in tion of installed ProductShield Winter. When ambi-
SPRODUCTSHIELD WINTER 0.5° C or °F incre- ent temperature falls below this selected value, the
ments unit will run in Continuous Run only. Refer to Sec-
tion 5.14 for more information on ProductShield
Winter.
OFF OFF = If both Range 1 & Range 2 Locks are off,
Start--Stop or Continuous Run may be selected.
If either Range 1 or Range 2 is not OFF, the unit
will operate in the selected mode whenever the set
point is within that range.
RANGE (1--2) LOCK START--STOP START--STOP = The unit will always operate in
Start--Stop whenever the set point is between the
minimum & maximum temperatures for that range
(see below).
CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS = The unit will always operate in
Continuous Run whenever the set point is between
the minimum & maximum temperatures for that
range (see below).
--22°F TO +89.6°F Select the lowest temperature desired for either
(--30°C to +32°C) Range 1 and / or Range 2.
RANGE (1--2) MINIMUM TEMP in 0.1°F or °C in-
crements
--22°F TO +89.6°F Select the highest temperature desired for either
(--30°C to +32°C) Range 1 and / or Range 2.
RANGE (1--2) MAXIMUM TEMP in 0.1°F or °C in-
crements
6--9 62-11389
--22°F TO +89.6°F Select the lowest temperature that will ever be used
(--30°C to +30°C) as set point. Set point can not be set lower than this
MIN SETPOINT in 0.1°F or C incre- value.
ments
--22°F TO +89.6°F Select the highest temperature that will ever be
(--30°C to +32°C) used as set point. Set point can not be set higher
MAX SETPOINT in 0.1°F or °C in- than this value.
crements
INSTALLED & INSTALLED & SHUTDOWN -- If standby power is
SHUTDOWN lost unit will shut down
NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED
NO POWER
DO NOT OPERATE WITH THIS SETTING
SWITCH TO EN- SWITCH TO ENGINE -- If standby power is lost
GINE diesel engine will start.
AUTO FRESH AIR EXCHANGE NOT INSTALLED Indicates if the Auto Fresh Air Exchange is
STANDARD installed. If AutoFresh Air hardware is not installed,
NOT AVAILABLE AT THIS TIME this configuration needs to be set to NOT
INSTALLED to prevent alarms from occurring.
SETPOINT SETPOINT -- Once the compartment temperature
has reached set point ±1.5°F (0.8°C), the Auto-
Fresh Air Exchange system will start to operate
based on the parameters selected in the Functional
AUTO FRESH AIR DELAY Parameter list.
NOT AVAILABLE AT THIS TIME
0-48 HOURS IN 0 to 48 Hours -- After this length of time, AutoFresh
1 HOUR Air Exchange will begin even though the compart-
ment temperature has never reached set point.
INCREMENTS
TOGETHER TOGETHER = When the Minimum Run Time, Mini-
mum Off Time, Maximum Off Time, and Override
Temperatures are set in the Functional Parameter
List, the same values will be used for both Frozen
and Perishable setpoints.
S/S PARAMETERS
SEPARATE SEPARATE = When the Minimum Run Time, Mini-
mum Off Time, Maximum Off Time, and Override
Temperatures are set in the Functional Parameter
List, different values may be entered for Perishable
and Frozen setpoints.
REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 1 --3 ON=A remote sensor has been added to the unit,
(Optional) and connected into the wire harness at Remote
NOTE: Sensor(s) must be set to be ON / OFF Temp Sensor 1 plug. This enables Remote Temp
recorded on DataRecorder. Sensor 1 to be read through the Data List.
OFF=There is no Remote Sensor in this unit.
62-11389 6--10
SWITCH NOT SWITCH NOT INSTALLED = There is no door
INSTALLED switch in the refrigerated compartment.
DOOR SWITCH: DOOR OPEN DOOR OPEN SWITCH OPEN = A Door Switch has
(Optional) SWITCH OPEN been installed on one of the compartment doors.
The switch contacts will be OPEN whenever the
door is OPEN.
NOTE: Door Switch must be set to DOOR OPEN DOOR OPEN SWITCH CLOSED = A Door Switch
be recorded on data recorder. SWITCH CLOSED has been installed on one of the compartment door-
s. The switch contacts will be CLOSED whenever
the door is OPEN.
ALARM ONLY ALARM ONLY = When Door Switch indicates that
the door is open, a warning alarm will be displayed
in the MessageCenter.
UNIT SHUTDOWN UNIT SHUTDOWN = When Door Switch indicates
that the door is open, a warning alarm will be dis-
played in the MessageCenter, and the unit will shut-
DOOR SWITCH UNIT SHUT- down.
DOWN:
(Optional) DATA RECORDER DATA RECORDER ONLY = The data recorder will
ONLY record every time the door is opened or closed.
There will be no alarms or messages displayed in
the MessageCenter.
LOW ENGINE LOW ENGINE SPEED = When Door Switch indi-
SPEED cates that the door is open, the engine will be
forced to low speed.
NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED = This remote switch is not
installed in this unit.
DOOR OPEN DOOR OPEN SWITCH OPEN = The Remote
SWITCH OPEN switch will be used as a refrigerated compartment
door switch. The switch contacts will be OPEN
whenever the door is OPEN.
DOOR OPEN DOOR OPEN SWITCH CLOSED = The Remote
REMOTE SWITCH(1-2) SWITCH CLOSED switch will be used as a refrigerated compartment
(Optional) door switch. The switch contacts will be CLOSED
NOTE: Sensor(s) on DataRecorder whenever the door is OPEN.
must also be set. SWITCH ON SWITCH ON CONTACTS OPEN = The Remote
CONTACTS OPEN switch will be used as a remote control switch. The
switch contacts will be OPEN whenever the switch
is in the ON position.
SWITCH ON CON- SWITCH ON CONTACTS CLOSE(D) = The Re-
TACTS CLOSE(D) mote switch will be used as a remote control switch.
The switch contacts will be CLOSED whenever the
switch is in the ON position.
ALARM ONLY ALARM ONLY = When Door switch indicates that
the door is open, a warning alarm will be displayed
in the MessageCenter.
UNIT SHUTDOWN UNIT SHUTDOWN = When Door switch indicates
that the door is open, a warning alarm will be dis-
played in the MessageCenter and the unit will shut-
REMOTE SWITCH (1-2) down.
(Optional) DATA RECORDER DATA RECORDER ONLY = The data recorder will
ONLY record every time the door is opened or closed.
There will be no alarms or messages displayed in
the MessageCenter.
LOW ENGINE LOW ENGINE SPEED = When Door switch indi-
SPEED cates that the door is open, the engine will be
forced to low speed.
6--11 62-11389
SET TIME The following will allow the Real Time Clock in the
Data Recorder to be set. The time set here can be
read in the Unit Data list.
• MONTH 1--12 Select the correct month of the year.
•DAY 1--31 Select the correct day of the month.
•YEAR 1998 -- 2037 Select the correct year.
•HOURS 0--23 Select the correct hour (0--11 is AM / 12--23 is PM)
•MINUTES 0--59 Select the correct minute.
NOT DISPLAYED NOT DISPLAYED = set point will not be shown with
a decimal. All other temperatures will still be dis-
played with a decimal.
DECIMAL
DISPLAYED DISPLAYED = set point will be shown with a deci-
mal and temperatures may be selected to a tenth of
a degree.
YES = When the START / RUN--OFF switch is
placed in the OFF position, the data recorder will
continue to record data for an additional 8 hours.
8 HR ADDITIONAL DATA: YES / NO
NO = When the START / RUN--OFF switch is
placed in the OFF position, the data recorder will
stop recording data.
YES = Condenser fan will cycle on & off as discharge
pressure rises or drops.
CONDENSER PRESS CONTROL YES / NO
NO = Condenser fan will be on when the engine is run-
ning and in standby when the compressor is running.
1 MIN
HIGH SPEED DELAY 0 TO 10 MINUTES Select the length of time unit remains in low speed
IN 0.5 MINUTE IN- before transitioning to high speed.
CREMENTS
SATELLITE COMM QUALCOMM QUALCOMM = The microprocessor is set to send
(Optional) Qualcomm communication messages.
(This configuration is only visible in
the microprocessor configuration list
when the DataTrak option is
installed in the microprocessor. It is OTHER OTHER = The microprocessor is set to send com-
always visible in the configuration munication messages to communication telematics
list in ReeferManager, although it is companies other than Qualcomm.
non-functional until the DataTrak op-
tion is installed.)
STANDARD STANDARD = The microprocessor is set to control

UNIT OPERATION:* over--the--road trailer refrigeration operation.
RAIL
See Note on Following Page RAIL = The microprocessor is set to control Rail
refrigeration operation.
• VEHICLE ID: ASSET If Rail is selected for Unit Operation, this indicates
This is only available when Unit Op- TRAILER type of vehicle in use. This selection will be used as
eration: “Rail” is selected in above the label text when displaying Trailer/Asset/Car ID
CAR for modification.
configuration.
•RAIL SHUTDOWN OVERRIDE: NO = When Alarm 30 or Alarm 31 occur, the unit
This is only available when Unit Op- will not automatically restart until the Alarms are
NO cleared.
eration: “Rail” is selected in above
configuration. YES YES = When Alarm 30 or Alarm 31 occur, the unit
See Note on Following Page will automatically restart after 4 hours.
•RAIL OVERRIDE RESTART: 1-20 If Rail is selected for Unit Operation and the Rail
This is only available when Unit Op- 3 Shutdown Override is in effect this indicates the
eration: “Rail” is selected in above number of restarts allowed.
configuration.
62-11389 6--12
NO YES = Allows access to the IntelliSet menu using
YES the = key.
ENABLE INTELLISET AT = KEY
NO = Allows access to the IntelliSet menu using the
SELECT key.
--21.6° to 0° F When Perishable Sensitive Product Functional
(--12° to +0°C) Parameter is set to ON the Supply Air Temperature
(in 0.5°F or °C in- is limited to set point minus the selected value
SUPPLY AIR LIMIT FOR S/S crements) when unit is in Start--Stop.
DEFAULT: 10.8°F
(--6°C)
--21.6° to 0°F (--12° When Perishable Sensitive Product Functional
to +0°C) Parameter is set to ON the Supply Air Temperature
(in 0.5°F or °C in- is limited to set point minus the selected value
SUPPLY AIR LIMIT FOR CONT crements) when unit is in Continuous.
DEFAULT: --9°F
(--5°C)
When active, this logic indicates if temperature lim-
its regulating the exit of pulldown mode are modi-
fied or not.
HIGH SPEED PULLDOWN ON / OFF ON = Unit will continue in High Speed until it
reaches set point.
OFF = Normal unit operation.
CONFIGS COMPLETE = TO EXIT Press the = key to exit Configuration Mode and
save changes.
NOTE • Rail Override Restart is the number of times

The following changes occur in the unit’s per- the unit can clear Alarms 30 or 31 after the
formance when Rail Mode is selected: unit has been off for the 4 hour off time. The
• The “Trailer ID” can now be changed in order factory setting is 3. Setting this number too
to more accurately define the vehicle carrying
high may result in a discharged or damaged
the unit. The choices ae: “ASSET”, “CAR”, or
battery if the unit never actually starts or fails
“TRAILER.”
to run long enough to charge the battery prior
• Rail Shutdown Override can be selected. to shutting down again.
When the Rail Shutdown Override con-
figuration is set to NO the unit will remain off until all
alarm(s) are manually reset in cases where:
the unit has unsuccessfully attempted to
start 3 times OR
the unit has shut down on an alarm 3 times.
When the Rail Shutdown Override con-

figuration is set to YES, the unit will restart and at-
tempt to continue to run when:
the unit has shut down 3 times OR the unit
has failed to start after 3 start attempts AND
either Alarm 30 or Alarm 31 is active AND
the unit has been off for 4 hours
6--13 62-11389
6.2.2 Component Test Mode The test may be stopped at any time by placing the
NOTE START/RUN--OFF switch in the OFF position, or by
pressing and holding the = key for 6 seconds. Should
To enter Component Test Mode Refer to
Section 6.2. you need more than 5 minutes, the timer may be reset to
5 minutes anytime during the test by pressing the = key.
The timer may only be reset once during each test. After
WARNING the 5 minute timer expires, the MessageCenter will
return to the Component Test Mode Menu and display
Voltage will be applied to high voltage com- the last component tested.
ponents (i.e. the fan motor contactor) and
those components will operate (i.e. the fan To retest the same component and circuit again, press
blades will turn) when those components the = key. To select another component to test, press the
are energized and the unit is in standby op- UP or DOWN ARROW key to view other components,
eration and using component test mode. and press the = key to select the desired component. To
go to Service Mode or Configuration Mode, select the
Component Test Mode allows the Technician to
Main Menu and press the = key.
energize individual circuits for five minutes at a time
while the unit isn’t running. The engine cannot start The only other keys that operate during Component
when the microprocessor is in Component Test Mode. Test Mode are the ALARM and SELECT keys. The
From the Main Menu, select Component Test Mode, alarm list is available for viewing any active or inactive
and press the = key. Use the UP or DOWN ARROW alarms. The SELECT key will only allow access to the
keys to scroll through the list when Current Draw item in the Data List.
“↑ ↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SELECT” appears in the When Component Test Mode is selected, the Main
MessageCenter. Press the = key to select the Display will show OFF.
component desired for testing. For example, if the Front
Unloader (UL1) Light is selected, the UL1 coil will be
energized, and the MessageCenter will display
“UL1 OFF IN 5 MINUTES”. The minutes will count down
to 0 at which time the UL1 circuit will be de-energized,
and the MessageCenter will display the last component
tested.
The following components may be tested during the Component Test Mode:
Component/Menu List MessageCenter FET LED Board LED

Green Light Bar LED Array LIGHT OFF IN X MINS 7
Amber Light Bar LED Array LIGHT OFF IN X MINS. 14
Front Unloader (UL1) UL1 OFF IN X MINS 23
Rear Unloader (UL2) UL2 OFF IN X MINS 22
Speed Relay SR OFF IN X MINS 27
Run Relay RR OFF IN X MINS 28
Buzzer BUZZER OFF IN X MINS 18
Intake Air Heater (Glow Heater Relay) RELAY OFF IN X MINS 30
Heater Contactor 1 HEATER CONT 1 OFF IN 5 MINS 10
Heater Contactor 2 HEATER CONT 2 OFF IN 5 MINS 21
Evaporator Motor Contactor EVAPORATOR CONT 1 OFF IN 5 20
MIN
POWER SUPPLY CONT OFF IN X 19
Power Supply Contactor MIN
COMPRESSOR CONT OFF IN X
Compressor Motor Contactor 1 MINS 2
CONDENSER CONT OFF IN X
Condenser Motor Contactor 1 MINS 1
GENERATOR CONT OFF IN 5 3
Generator Contactor MINS
Main Menu (To access Component Test
mode or Configuration mode)
NOTE
Electronic speed control modules can not be tested through the microprocessor. Refer to Section 10.5 for
Troubleshooting Electronic Speed Control
62-11389 6--14
6.2.3 Service Mode g. If the unit shifts to Charge Mode and
“CHARGE MODE – HOLD = TO EXIT” is displayed
in the MessageCenter while you are still recovering
CAUTION refrigerant, leak testing or evacuating the
refrigeration system, DO NOT CONTINUE. Exit
Service Mode MUST be used whenever re- Service Mode and then re-enter, making sure that
moving refrigerant charge, refrigerant leak “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” is
checking or evacuating. displayed in the MessageCenter before performing
any of these services.
NOTE
h. To exit Service Mode at any time, press and hold
The START/RUN--OFF switch MUST be in the
START/RUN position to keep the unit in Service the = key for 5 seconds.
Mode. If the switch is placed in the OFF posi- “EXITING SERVICE MODE” will then appear in
tion, the unit exits Service Mode and closes the the MessageCenter. When exiting Service Mode
CSMV to 0% open and de--energizes UL1. the microprocessor closes the CSMV and the
EVXV to 0% open and de-energizes UL1.
a. Service Mode is accessed via the Microprocessor
Configuration and Technician Test Mode Menus.
(Refer to Sections 6.2.1 and 6.2.2.) Press the = key
when “SERVICE MODE” appears in the
MessageCenter. 6.3 PC SUPPORT SOFTWARE
b. “ENTERING SERVICE MODE” will appear in the
MessageCenter and OFF will be displayed in the 6.3.1 ReeferManager And Reports
main display. The CSMV and the EVXV will be set
to 100% open and the Front Unloader (UL1) will be a. ReeferManager enables the user to do the
energized. following:
c. Once the CSMV and the EVXV are 100% open, • Monitor in real--time via the download port (an
“RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” is RS--232 connection) the current status of the
displayed in the MessageCenter. microprocessor inputs, outputs, refrigeration,
electrical, engine and temperature sensors
d. Refrigerant recovery, leak checking, or evacuation and alarms
may be performed on the unit at this time. Refer to
Service Procedures in Section 9.17. • Record sensor data to a file for diagnostic
purposes
e. When the refrigeration system is evacuated the
system pressure will go into a deep vacuum. While • Download microprocessor and data recorder
this is occurring, the MessageCenter will change to data via serial port communications
“EVAC/CHARGE MODE.” The position of the • Display, edit and send unit model number,
CSMV, EVXV and UL1 does not change in this serial number and trailer ID to the
mode. microprocessor
f. To prevent refrigerant migration to the compressor • Display, edit and send functional parameters
during charging, if all pressure transducers (CSP
and configuration settings to the
and CDP) drop below--9.8 psig or –20 inHg (0.68
bar), and then 2 of the 3 pressure transducers rise microprocessor and data recorder
above 5 psig (0.34 bar), the microprocessor will • Transfer hour meter values to replacement
close the CSMV and the EVXV to 0% open and microprocessors
de-energize UL1. When the valves are closed,
“CHARGE MODE – HOLD = TO EXIT” is displayed • Initiate Pretrip and Defrost operations
in the MessageCenter. The = key must be pressed • Support Dowload, Configuration and Program
and held for six seconds to exit Service mode or the PC Card operations
START / RUN-OFF switch can be be placed in the
OFF position and then back in the START/RUN • Provide a security log on system controlled by
position. a System Administrator
6--15 62-11389
b. The Reports Program enables the user to do the • In the next pop--up box, scroll down until you
following: find ReeferManager and click it once to
• Read .DCX download files from the Advance highlight it.
microprocessor
• Click on the Add / Remove button. A “Confirm
• Create various customized reports that File Deletion” or and InstallShield Wizard will
include setpoint, sensors, and events appear. If you are certain you have selected
• Create various customized graphical reports the correct program, click Yes, Next or OK
• Print numerical, graphical, and event reports buttons and follow the on--screen instructions.
• View and print refrigeration system historical • When ReeferManager has been uninstalled
settings and changes you will receive a confirmation pop--up
• Filter download data by date range and message. Clear it.
desired sensors and events d. Auto Install ReeferManager
• Search for a sensor or event of interest
NOTE
• Synchronize multiple graphical and numerical
windows to better understand historical If this is the first time that ReeferManager has
been installed onto a particular computer, Carri-
operation er Communications (CCN) must first be in-
• PC Setup enables the user to select how to stalled. If an earlier version of CCN has already
display various parameters for use in the been installed onto this computer AND the pro-
graph and text window. gram communications between the computer
and the Advance Microprocessor or DataLink
• Easily adjust x and y axis and color scheme module worked correctly, it is not necessary to
to accommodate various data uninstall and reinstall CCN. If the communica-
• Export data to a spreadsheet friendly format tions between the computer and the micropro-
cessor or DataLInk module did not work, unin-
such as MS Excel. stall and reinstall CCN.
NOTE • Close all programs and applications that are
The ReeferManager program does not support currently running.
USB port serial connections. In the event that a
notebook PC does not have a DB--9 serial port • Insert the ReeferManager CD--ROM into the
connector, an RS_232 serial port type II appropriate drive (usually D:\\)
PCMCIA card adaptor may be used to adapt • The CD--ROM will start running and
the notebook PC to the Carrier download cable.
For desktop PCs, a PCI bus RS--232 serial card automatically start the install program.
adaptor must be used to accomplish this task. • Click the button to install ReeferManager.
c. Uninstall earlier versions of ReeferManager And Follow the on--screen instructions, using the
Reports as follows: default settings.
All previous version of both ReeferManager and • Click the Finish button to close the install
Reports must be uninstalled prior to installing newer program.
versions of these programs.
• Remove the CD from the drive and store for
NOTE future use.
These instructions are intended to be generic • Reboot the computer to enable the programs.
and not specific to any computer. Because
ReeferManager can be installed on any com-
puter with any operating system (excluding
Vista) there will be some differences within
those operating systems from one version to
another. The wording may not be exactly the
same; however, the procedure below will work
for all operating systems mentioned.
• Click the Start button located at the lower left
corner of your computer screen.
• Move the mouse pointer up to Settings. A
secondary menu will slide out to the right.
Move the mouse pointer over and click on
Control Panel.
• With the pop--up box, there is an icon or line
item named Add / Remove Programs. Double
click it.
62-11389 6--16
6.4 DOWNLOADING DATA WITH THE PC CARD
1. Place the microprocessor in PC Mode (Refer to

Section 6.1), or place the START / RUN--OFF switch
in the START / RUN Position.
2. Insert a Download Card into the PC card slot
on the front of the microprocessor. Be certain
CAUTION that the instruction label is facing the “Caution”
label. Do not force card into slot.
3. The MessageCenter will show
“COPYING DATA--PLEASE WAIT”. While the
data is being copied, the green PC CARD
STATUS LED will flash.
4. When the copy is complete,
“COPY COMPLETE, REMOVE CARD X” (“X” is
the number of empty spaces remaining on the
card) will show in the MessageCenter. The PC
Card Status LED will be solid. You may then
remove the PC card. Do not remove the card
until prompted to do so.
5. When the card is removed, the MessageCenter
will return to the default message.
6. If any other messages appear, refer to Section 7.1
MessageCenter for an explanation of the error
message. If there is an error, the PC CARD FAULT
LED will be on until the card is removed.
7. Data must be copied from the Download Card onto a
computer drive before it can be viewed.
-20 +36F
COPYING DATA--PLEASE WAIT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
6--17 62-11389
6.5 INSTALLING NEW SOFTWARE
NOTE
All units should have the microprocessor software upgraded to 04.10.08 or other approved software released
for this model. Newer approved versions can be loaded as they are released.
6.5.1 Software Version Numbers
The first two digits of the software revision number (e.g. The third set of digits (e.g.“08”) is the actual release
“04”) indicates the major release. Major releases occur number. Production software is generally “00”.
when significant changes are made to the software. Preliminary production, test, and experimental versions
Whenever a major change to software is made and that will have a different number. The third set of digits does
software is installed into a microprocessor, it is not not affect the major or minor designation; therefore, the
possible to downgrade the software back to any lower software can still be installed into a microprocessor as
major release version. needed.
NOTE
The second two digits (e.g.“10”) indicate a minor Some preliminary production, test or experi-
release. Minor releases occur when new features, new mental versions may be the ONLY current ver-
models or other enhancements are added to the sion that will operate correctly in a particular
software. Software versions of newer or older minor unit. Until a new production version is an-
versions can be installed into a microprocessor as nounced, changing the software may result in
needed. incorrect unit operation.
62-11389 6--18
6.5.2 Using The Program PC Card to Install Software
TIP
Whenever performing a major operation to a microprocessor, such as installing new operating software, it is
always a good idea to start the unit and give it a quick check over prior to performing the operation.
NOTE
Once the unit shuts down to begin the software install process, the Compressor Suction Modulation Valve
(CSMV) and the Electronic Expansion Valve (EVXV) closing process begins. The software installation pro-
cesses will not begin until the CSMV and the EVXV are completely closed, which will delay the actual process
for about 45 seconds.
CAUTION
The display and MessageCenter may behave differently during the software loading process, de-
pending on the version of software currently in the microprocessor. DO NOT INTERRUPT THE SOFT-
WARE INSTALLATION PROCESS ONCE IT HAS STARTED.
1. Place the Microprocessor in PC mode (Refer to

Section 6.1), or place the START/RUN-OFF
switch in the START/RUN position.
2. Insert a Program PC card into the PC card slot
CAUTION
on the front of the microprocessor. Be certain
that the instruction label on Program PC card is
facing the “Caution” label on the
microprocessor. Do not force card into slot.
Hold the Program PC card at the end
opposite the plug end. Do not squeeze the
card in the middle while inserting. (See
Section 2.5.3 for PC card care)
3. The MessageCenter will show one of three different
messages:
Same SW: “= to Load, ↑ To Cancel”
Old SW: “= to Load, ↑ To Cancel”
New SW: “= to Load, ↑ To Cancel”
4. Verify by the message that you are
upgrading/downgrading the software according to
your intentions.
5. Press the = key to load the program. The MessageCenter will show
“ENGINE AND MICRO WILL STOP NOW.” If the engine is running, it will shut down. After about
45 seconds the MessageCenter backlight will dim and the message
“INSTALLING PROGRAM SOFTWARE” will be displayed. The Card Status LED adjacent to the
PC card slot will blink together with the Micro Status LED at a rate of 1/2 second on then
1/2 second off during this installation process. Once the entire program has been loaded, the
MessageCenter will show “INSTALL COMPLETE -- REMOVE CARD. At the same time, the
Card Status LED will stop blinking and be on solid, indicating that the software install is complete.
6. When the card is removed, the Microprocessor will power up as it was prior to inserting the card
(PC mode or unit running). Allow the Micro to completely power up (Main Display and
MessageCenter displaying appropriate messages) once after installing the new software before
turning the power off, or removing the PC mode jumper. DO NOT TURN THE START/RUN-OFF
SWITCH OFF DURING THE INITIAL START FOLLOWING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE.
6--19 62-11389
6.5.3 Using ReeferManager to Install Software f. Place the START/RUN--OFF switch in the
START/ RUN position. Wait for the Main Display and
MessageCenter to power up.
CAUTION g. Click on the Program Micro button. The
It is important that communications be- MessageCenter will go blank. If the engine was run-
tween the Microprocessor and the comput- ning, it will shut down. Nothing will happen for the first
er not be disturbed during the software 5--10 seconds, then the software will begin to load.
loading process. If using a laptop comput- The Microprocessor Status LED will start blinking at
er, turn all energy saving features off. Turn the rate of 0.5 seconds on and 0.5 seconds off.
off any screen saver, or any hard drive time
out settings. h. The % complete value on the computer screen will in-
crement itself as the program is loaded. The % com-
plete will stop several times during the loading pro-
NOTE cess for up to 15 seconds. This is normal. DO NOT
04.10 software and above can be installed us- STOP THE PROCESS. The time to load the program
ing either the preferred previously described is dependent upon the speed of the computer. This
Program PC card method or by using a minim- will generally take from 4 to 6 minutes.
um of ReeferManager 03.07 and a computer.
Existing Program PC cards may be upgraded to i. It is important that the program is not interrupted from
the latest software version by using the Reefer- the time the “Program Micro” button is clicked until the
Manager program. program is completely loaded. Once the % complete
The ReeferManager version 03.07 program is reaches 100%, the shutdown box will appear. Click
designed to be installed and operated on the fol- the OK button.
lowing Windows operating systems: Windows
95, 98, ME, 2000, and XP. The programs will j. The microprocessor will power up, and the unit will
not operate on Windows Vista. start. Allow the engine to start completely the first
time after loading software. DO NOT PLACE THE
Prepare the PC that will be used with START/RUN--OFF SWITCH IN THE OFF
ReeferManager as follows: POSITION DURING THE INITIAL START FOL-
• The screen saver must be turned off. LOWING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE.
• The battery should be capable of running the 6.5.4 Troubleshooting Software Loading
PC for 30 minutes, or the PC should be Problems
plugged into an electrical outlet.
If after loading the software program, the
• All battery saver features (hard drive time out, microprocessor does not power up, or the engine does
monitor time out, etc.) should be set to more not start, use the following to isolate the problem.
than 30 minutes.
a. Did the unit perform properly prior to loading the soft-
• The download cable must be connected to a ware? If not, the problem most likely is not a result of
9-pin COM port on the PC. USB to COM Port the software loading process.
adaptors will not work.
b. Check the Microprocessor Status LED near the PC
Follow these steps to use ReeferManager: Card slot on the microprocessor. It should be blinking
a. Connect the computer to the microprocessor using a continuously at the rate of 1 second on and 1 second
Download Cable. Once the cable is connected to the off. This is the “normal” heartbeat rate of the micro-
download port, the microprocessor will power up, and processor.
show “PC MODE”. c. If the Microprocessor Status LED is blinking at the
b. Start the program by double clicking on the rate of .5 seconds on and .5 seconds off, the micro-
MicroProgrammer icon on your computer desktop. processor is still in Program Mode, and the software
is not fully loaded into memory. Load the software
c. Click on the Load File button. The Open box will ap- again, being careful to follow each step completely in
pear on the screen. sequence.
d. Using the mouse, select the file you want to load (this
d. If the Microprocessor Status LED is not on at all,
will be a .bex file) by clicking once on it to highlight it.
check voltage to QC1 & QC2. Also check for voltage
e. Click the OK button. Watch the lower left message from the START / RUN--OFF switch at 5MPA1. If volt-
area of the program. Once the file is validated, the age and grounds check OK, the microprocessor may
Program Micro button will become active. be dead and require replacement.
6.6 RE-SETTING PM (PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE) HOURMETERS
TIP
PM hourmeters may be reset for the next maintenance interval from the Functional Parameter list using the
keypad.
62-11389 6--20
-20 +34.5° F
PRESS ↑ ↓ TO VIEW SETTINGS

DEFROST CONTINUOUS
1. Press the SELECT key until “PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW SETTINGS.”

appears in the MessageCenter.
2. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key until RESET PM
HOURMETERS is displayed.
3. Press the = key. “↑ ↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SELECT” will be displayed in the
MessageCenter.
4. If “NO HOURMETERS TO RESET” appears there are none to reset.
5. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key until the PM hourmeter you wish to reset is shown.
6. The MessageCenter will show the hourmeter name with the instructions
“= TO RESET,” followed by the number of hours or cycles that will be used for
the next service interval.
7. Press the = key to reset the hourmeter to the new value shown.
8. The name of the hourmeter and “RESET” will be displayed indicating that the reset was
successful.
9. Repeat steps 5-7 to Reset additional PM hourmeters
6--21 62-11389
RE--SETTING PM (PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE) HOURMETERS (Continued)
NOTE To turn on any of the Programmable PM hour meters,
The hourmeters must first be configured “ON” they must first be programmed to count one of the
(Refer to Section 6.2.1) available parameters from the list above. (For example,
PM 1 may be programmed to count start cycles.)
PM (Preventative Maintenance) hourmeters are Selecting OFF will completely disable the PM
provided to track unit operation and to notify the user Hourmeter. Once a selection is made, then a reset
when periodic preventative maintenance is due. Within interval may be selected. For hours, the PM Hourmeter
the Advance Microprocessor, there are eight PM may be set in 50 hour increments anywhere from 50 to
hourmeters available for use: 30,000 hours. For cycles, the PM Hourmeter may be set
• Engine in 1,000 cycle increments anywhere from 1,000 to
90,000 cycles. Selecting OFF instead of an interval will
• Standby also disable the PM Hourmeter.
• Switch On Maintenance Days are also available for customers who
• Five programmable hourmeters service their equipment by calendar days instead of
operating hours or cycles.
The programmable PM hour meters (PM1 – PM5) can be
configured to count any of the following: Once the PM hour meters are activated from the
Configuration List, they can be turned OFF or RESET
• Engine Hours for a new interval from the Functional Parameter List.
• Switch On Hours The PM hour meters may be reset using either a PC and
the ReeferManager program or the keypad. RESET is
• Standby Hours only available when the accumulated hours are more
• Start Cycles than 95% of the reset value for that Hourmeter. (For
example: the Engine PM Hourmeter Reset Interval is
• High Speed Hours 1000 hrs. Reset will be allowed anytime after 950 hours
have expired.)
• Compressor Run Hours
• Maintenance Days TIP
Factory default is OFF for all PM hour meters.
The PM hour meters are activated and the reset interval
is selected from the Configuration List. To turn on the To reset a PM hourmeter that has not expired and is not
Engine PM Hourmeter, select the desired maintenance found in the Functional Parameter list:
interval (in hours), and enter as the a. From the Configuration list, select the
“DIESEL RESET VALUE” in the Configuration List. PM hourmeter.
Selecting OFF will completely turn the Engine PM b. Press the = key to change.
Hourmeter off. The reset value selected here will be the c. Select OFF for the interval.
value used when the PM Hourmeter is reset from the d. Press the = key to enter.
Functional Parameter List. e. Press the = key to change.
f. Select the correct interval.
To turn on the Switch On PM Hourmeter, select the g. Press the = key to enter.
desired maintenance interval (in hours), and enter as h. Place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF posi-
the “SWITCH ON RESET VALUE” in the Configuration tion and then back to the START/RUN position.
List. Selecting OFF will completely turn the Switch On Check the Data list. The correct number of hours
PM Hourmeter off. should be showing as “HOURS TO ENGINE MAINT.”
62-11389 6--22
6.7 ADVANCE MICROPROCESSOR REPLACE- Prior to beginning work on the unit, be certain that the
MENT & CONFIGURATION SETUP current configuration file has been downloaded for the
customer, from the Carrier Transicold Information
Center, and written onto a Configuration PC Card, using
CAUTION the ReeferManager Program. If the original
microprocessor was equipped with the IntelliSet option,
Under no circumstances should a techni- this file will need to be on a Configuration Card in order to
cian electrically probe the processor at any install the IntelliSet parameters into the replacement
point, other than the connector terminals microprocessor. A computer is needed to enter the
where the harness attaches. Microproces- engine and switch on hours into the new
sor components operate at different volt- microprocessor. All settings -- including unit model
age levels and at extremely low current lev- number, Trailer ID, unit serial number, and operating
els. Improper use of voltmeters, jumper hours and cycles -- from the old microprocessor can be
wires, continuity testers, etc. could perma- installed into the new microprocessor using either the
nently damage the processor. keypad or a computer with the ReeferManager
program.
NOTE
CAUTION A single set of configurations, functional
parameters and data recorder settings can be
Most electronic components are suscepti- sent serially to the microprocessor using the
ble to damage caused by electrical static ReeferManager program. Multiple sets of set-
discharge (ESD). In certain cases, the hu- tings (IntelliSets) can only be sent to the micro-
man body can have enough static electric- processor by using a Configuration PC card.
ity to cause resultant damage to the compo-
nents by touch. This is especially true of the 6.7.1 Microprocessor Replacement
integrated circuits found on the trailer mi-
croprocessor. a. If possible, power the microprocessor up, either us-
ing a PC Mode Jumper, or by placing the
As mentioned above, some microprocessor inputs op- START/RUN--OFF switch in the START/RUN posi-
erate at voltage levels other than the conventional 12 tion. If the microprocessor will not power up, skip
VDC. Connection points and the associated approxi- ahead to step d.
mate voltage levels are listed below for reference only. b. Insert a Download PC Card into the PC Card slot and
Under no circumstances should 12 VDC be applied at download all data from the data recorder. If a Down-
these connection points. load Card is not available, data may also be down-
Grounded wrist cuffs are available from Carrier (P/N loaded using a download cable and the
07-00304-00). These should be worn whenever han- ReeferManager PC Program.
dling a microprocessor. c. Scroll through the DataList and make note of the fol-
Table 6-1. Connection Point Voltage lowing from the MessageCenter:
Connection Point Approximate Voltage • ID Number
AAT, CDT, 1DTT, ENCT, 2.5 VDC (Variable) • Unit Serial Number
1RAT, 1SAT
• Unit Model Number
Although there is less danger of electrical static dis-
charge (ESD) damage in the outdoor environment or in
• Engine Protect Hours
a repair shop -- where the processor is likely to be han- • Switch On Protect Hours
dled -- proper board handling techniques should always
be stressed. Advance Microprocessors should always • Engine Sleep Hours
be handled by the plastic cover and not the exposed • Standby Hours
printed circuit board. This not only precludes the possi-
bility of ESD damage, but also lowers the possibility of • Switch On Sleep Hours
physical damage to the electronic components.
• Compressor Run Hours
When field diagnosis of a Carrier Transicold Vector 6500
refrigeration unit determines that an Advance • High Speed Hours
Microprocessor is not performing properly and must be
replaced, the following steps MUST be taken to ensure
• Start Cycles
correct operation of the unit following the repair. • Date and Time
6--23 62-11389
d. Remove PC Jumper or place the d. Press the UP ARROW key again, and the ID field will
START/RUN--OFF switch to the OFF position. appear. Press the = key, then the UP ARROW key.
e. Remove negative battery cable from battery. You will see a blinking cursor in the field. Using the
Up or DOWN ARROW key, scroll through the Num-
f. Remove Connectors 1MP, 2MP, & 3MP from the out-
ber/Letter list, until the first letter / number of the ID
side of the Control Box.
you recorded above appears. Press the = key to en-
g. Open the keypad door by removing the screws at the ter that number / letter, and advance the cursor to the
bottom. Open the control box door and use the re- next place. Repeat this process until the entire ID
taining rod to hold the door open. number is entered. If the cursor is still blinking in a
h. Remove Connectors 5MP & 6MP inside the Control blank space after you are finished, slowly (wait 2--3
Box. Remove all wires from the Microprocessor. seconds between presses) press the = key to leave
i. Locate wire to 80A fuse that runs through the Current blanks in the remaining spaces. When you reach the
Sensor. Note the orientation of the wire through the end, the message
Current Sensor, to be certain that the wire is rein- “↑↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SELECT” will appear
stalled through the new Current Sensor in the same (i.e. XYZ5678).
direction. (Inserting the wire through the Current e. Now, press the DOWN ARROW key until
Sensor in the opposite direction will result in erro- “SET TIME” appears. Press the = key then the UP
neous current readings.) Remove wire from fuse ARROW key to enter that menu.
holder and gently pull through the Current Sensor.
j. Remove the screws holding the sides of the Micro- CAUTION
processor into the Control Box. Remove the single
screw holding the top of the microprocessor in place. Ensure that the clock you are using is ac-
curate. Also, some customers are located in
k. Pull the microprocessor back, and twist it out of the different time zones from the repair loca-
Control Box. tion. If you know the owners desired loca-
l. Install the new microprocessor by reversing steps a. tion time, enter that time. If you don’t, enter
thru k. the current time at your location.
6.7.2 Microprocessor Setup
f. When MONTH appears, press the = key, then the
NOTE UP ARROW key. The MessageCenter will begin to
Before starting the unit, the microprocessor flash, indicating that it is ready to accept changes.
must be configured for the unit family and model Use the UP or DOWN ARROW key to scroll through
it is installed in. This can be done at the unit the number list until the correct number of the current
keypad, or by using the ReeferManager pro-
gram. The steps below are used when setting month appears. Press the = key to enter that number
the microprocessor up from the keypad. for the month.
Generally, the microprocessor can be setup us- g. Press the UP ARROW key to go to Day.
ing a Configuration PC card; however, certain
parameters can not be set in this way. Those h. Using the same key presses as in f. and g. above,
parameters can be entered using the keypad or continue to enter the correct numerical value for the
the ReeferManager program. The steps below Day, Year, Hour and Minute. Hours are displayed
detail entering the data using the keypad. and entered as a 24 hour clock. 0 to 12 is AM. 13 to
a. Ensure that the new microprocessor is in place, all 24 is PM.
wires connected and the negative battery cable is re- i. When you are finished, the MessageCenter will dis-
connected. play “PRESS = TO SAVE TIME CHANGES”.
b. Place the START/RUN--OFF switch in the
START/RUN position. The microprocessor will im- NOTE
mediately go into the Configuration List so that the
If you do not press the = key the time changes
correct model number can be selected. Using the UP you just made will not be saved.
or DOWN ARROW keys, scroll through the list until
the correct Model Number appears (verify the j. Press the UP ARROW key to go to
Model/Serial Plate on the unit). Press the = key to “SET NEW HOURS”. Press the = key then the Up
enter the new model number. Arrow key to enter that menu.
c. Press the UP ARROW key again, and the Unit Serial
Number field will appear. Press the = key, then the
UP ARROW key. You will see a blinking cursor in the
field. Using the UP or DOWN ARROW key, scroll
through the Number/Letter list, until the first letter of
the serial number you recorded above appears.
Press the = key to enter that letter and advance the
cursor to the next place. Repeat this process until the
entire Unit Serial Number is entered
(i.e. MAL12345678).
62-11389 6--24
k. The first hourmeter is Engine Protect Hours. Press 6.7.3 Configurations Via Keypad
the = key to select this meter. The cursor will be blink-
ing on the ten-thousands place. Press the UP or a. Refer to Section 6.2 for a list of available micropro-
DOWN ARROW key to select the correct value, then cessor Configurations. Refer to Section 6.2.1 for in-
press the = key. If the correct number in any of the structions on how to access them.
locations is 0 (zero), just press the = key to enter 0 as
the value and move the cursor to the next place. For
example, if you are entering 567 hours, you will press
the = key twice to leave a 0 for the first two numbers, NOTE
then use the UP and DOWN ARROW key to scroll Units equipped with IntelliSet MUST have the
through the numbers to enter the correct hours. settings installed using ReeferManager and a
When the correct hours for Engine Protect Hours Configuration PC Card.
has been entered, press the = key to advance to the IntelliSet settings CANNOT be installed by us-
next hourmeter. If an invalid number is entered, a ing either the keypad, or by using a laptop com-
warning message will flash in the MessageCenter. puter.
For example, you can not enter a higher number of
hours for Engine Protect than the number of Switch
On Hours. 6.7.4 Functional Parameters Via Keypad
NOTE a. Refer to Section 3.15 for list of available Micropro-

None of the “Total” hourmeters are listed. When cessor Functional Parameters and for directions on
the hours for all the hourmeters are entered, the how to access them.
microprocessor will add the correct hours to-
gether and calculate the Total Engine Hours, b. Leave the microprocessor powered up as you con-
and Total Switch On Hours. When the end of the tinue with the next section.
list is reached “PRESS = TO SAVE HOURS”
will be displayed. Pressing the = key will save
the hours, and return you to the configuration 6.7.5 DataRecorder Via
list. ReeferManager PC Program
If you do not press the = key, none of the time
hours or cycles you just entered will not be
saved. NOTE
Hour meters may be changed for 60 minutes If the factory settings are used, you can skip this
following the initial hour entry. If an error has section and proceed to Hourmeter Setup.
been made, be certain to correct it within the 60
minute time period. Following that time, the
hourmeters will count the appropriate hours a. Refer to Section 3.18 for list of DataRecorder Set-
because the unit switch is on and the unit is op- ups.
erating, and no further manual changes will be
allowed.
b. Power up the microprocessor. If it is not already pow-
ered up, refer to directions under Microprocessor
NOTE Setup – Functional Parameters via Keypad, Section
After the configuration settings are complete 6.7.4 above.
use the UP or DOWN ARROW keys until
“CONFIGS COMPLETE, = TO EXIT” is dis- c. Connect your computer to the download port of the
played in the MessageCenter. Press the = key
to save. unit (use cable 22--001737) and start the
ReeferManager program. You will need
ReeferManager version 03.07.00 or higher.
NOTE
If a Configuration card will be used to configure
the microprocessor, skip ahead to CONFIGU-
RATION CARD, Section 6.7.7 If the Configura- NOTE
tions and Functional Parameters will be set ReeferManager 03.07.00 is REQUIRED in or-
from the keypad, continue with following steps der to view, change and send new features to
6.7.3 and 6.7.4 and from the microprocessor.
6--25 62-11389
d. In ReeferManager, go to the Serial Operations Tab, 6.7.7 Configuration / IntelliSet PC Card
and then click on Data Recorder/Microprocessor
setup button.
a. Place the START/RUN--OFF switch in the OFF posi-
e. Select the Sensors to be recorded and whether you
tion to power down the microprocessor and to take it
wish averaged or snapshot recordings (averaged is
out of Configuration Mode.
recommended for all temperature sensors; snap-
shot is recommended for voltage, amperage, &
RPM). b. Power the microprocessor up by either placing the
START/RUN--OFF switch in the START/RUN posi-
f. When the setup is correct, press the Send button to tion or by inserting a PC Mode jumper into the Down-
send the new settings to the microprocessor. load Port.
g. From the “Confirm Send Information” Pop Up, check
the data you want to send and un-check the data you c. Insert the Configuration PC Card into the PC Card
don’t want to send. Click the OK button. slot in the microprocessor and watch the
MessageCenter. When the MessageCenter shows
h. Verify that the settings were sent by waiting for the “CFG, = TO LOAD, ↑ TO CANCEL”, press the
confirmation pop up message. = key. It will take 10 – 15 seconds to load the
IntelliSets from the card. “LOADING INFO” will be
NOTE displayed during this time. When finished, the Mes-
If the data recorder date and time were not set sageCenter will show “ALL INFO LOADED – RE-
earlier, they can be set from this screen by click- MOVE CARD”. Remove the PC Configuration Card.
ing on Tools>Set Date and Time.
i. Leave the microprocessor powered up as you con- d. The MessageCenter will show
tinue with the next section. “MICRO WILL RESET AND RESTART NOW”, the
display will go blank, then come back on after a few
6.7.6 Engine And Switch--on Hour Meters Via seconds.
ReeferManager PC Program
a. Start the ReeferManager program. Go to the Serial
Operations Tab. NOTE
When the microprocessor powers up the dis-
b. Click on DataRecorder/Microprocessor Setup but- play will show
ton. “PRESS = TO VIEW INTELLISETS”. The unit
c. In the upper left menu bar, click on Microprocessor will not start until one of the new IntelliSets has
Tools>Set New Micro Hours. been selected.
d. At this screen, enter all hours recorded in step b. of e. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to scroll
Section 6.7.1. Send the new readings to the micro- through the list of IntelliSets. Pressing the UP
processor. ARROW key will bring the first IntelliSet name into
the Message Center.
NOTE
Hours can only be entered into the micropro- f. Move to the desired IntelliSet and press the = key.
cessor until either the Total Engine Hours or the The desired IntelliSet will automatically become act-
Total Switch On Hours reach 25. However, in ive and the unit will be able to be started.
the case of incorrect hours being entered,
changes can be made for 60 minutes after the 6.7.8 Microprocessor Final Checkout
initial change has been made -- regardless of
the number of hours entered. Once the 60 min-
utes has expired, and either of the total hour- a. Start the unit and allow it to run for a few minutes.
meters reaches 25 hours, no further changes
can be made. b. While the unit is running, scroll through the Data List
of the microprocessor. Verify that all the data that
The 60 minute grace period is based on the was recorded in Step b. of Section 6.7.1 is now accu-
Real Time Clock in the data recorder. That is
why it is important that the Real Time Clock is rately displayed in the Data List. Also verify that the
set to the correct time prior to setting the hour correct date and time are being displayed.
meters.
c. Initiate a Pretrip test. Allow the unit to complete the
e. Your computer may now be disconnected and turned Pretrip and check for any alarms. Make any neces-
off or you can continue setting up the configurations. sary repairs before returning the unit into service.
62-11389 6--26
6.7.9 Replacing Display Bezel Assembly NOTE
Eleven Phillips head screws are used to retain
Display Bezel Assembly Removal the keypad to the bezel: (8) 3/4” Lg. screws
around the perimeter of the keypad and (3) 3/8”
a. Place the START/RUN--OFF switch in the OFF posi- Lg. blunt tip screws in the center of the keypad.
tion and disconnect the negative battery cable. At- Four 3/8” Lg. Phillips head screws are used to
tach a grounded wrist strap (CTD P/N 07--00304--00) retain the display board to the keypad.
and ground it to a good unit frame ground.
b. Open the roadside side door containing the NOTE

Keypad/Display Assembly. Unplug the display cable All gaskets must be replaced any time the
from the 10--pin harness. keypad is removed from the bezel. All replace-
ment display bezel assembly kits are packaged
c. Loosen and remove the (4) hex head 1/4--20 bolts with replacement gaskets.
holding the bezel bracket to the door and lay the bezel
assembly on a clean work surface. a. Remove the old gasket from the door mounting
bracket.
d. Loosen and remove the (4) 5mm x 20mm lg hex head b. Ensure that the surface is completely free of any old
bolts holding the bezel assembly to the bracket. Care- gasket material and apply the new gasket (included in
fully separate the bezel assembly from the bracket. the kit) to the bracket.
Disconnect the wiring harness from the display board
c. Plug the wire harness into the new display board and
and the START/RUN--OFF switch.
reconnect the wires to the START/RUN--OFF switch.
Display Bezel Assembly Installation d. Secure the bezel to the control door with the (4) 5mm
(CTD P/N 91--00312--02SV) X 20mm lg. hex head bolts. Torque bolts to 26 in. lbs.
(2.9 Nm).
e. Fasten bezel and bracket assembly to unit side door
using (4) hex head 1/4--20 bolts.
CAUTION f. Reconnect wire harness (10--pin connector) from the
microprocessor.
Do not over torque keypad screws. Torque g. Reconnect negative battery cable and run Pretrip to
all screws to 11 inlbs (1.2 Nm). check unit operation.
6--27 62-11389
DETENT SPRINGS DETENTS
DISPLAY WINDOW
KEYPAD DOOR DISPLAY BEZEL
WINDOW GASKET
DISPLAY BOARD
WINDOW TO BEZEL
GASKET
NOTE: GASKET IS
NOTCHED
KEYPAD BOARD FOR CLEARANCE AROUND
DETENTS.
MOUNTING BRACKET/CONTROL BOX GASKET
Figure 6 --1. Display Module Assembly
62-11389 6--28
SECTION 7
MESSAGECENTER
7.1 MESSAGECENTER MESSAGES

The following table lists all of the messages which do not appear in other lists in this manual and a description of their
meaning. Refer to Section 8 for a list of Alarm messages. Refer to Section 3.13 for a list of Unit Data messages. Refer
to Section 3.15 for a list of Functional Parameter messages. Refer to Section 6.2.1 for a list of Configuration
messages.
MessageCenter MESSAGES
Message Description
↑↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO LOCK This message is used when viewing Unit Data. Use the UP and
DOWN arrow keys to move through the Data list. Press the = key
to lock a Data item in the MessageCenter.
↑↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SAVE Press the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll through menu selec-
tions available in this mode. When you reach the desired selection,
press the = key to store new value in microprocessor’s memory.
↑↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SELECT Press the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll through menu selec-
tions available in this mode. When you reach the desired selection,
press the = key to select it.
= TO INSTALL, INSTALLS LEFT XX An Option PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot. Press
the = key to install the option into the microprocessor. The number
of installs remaining on the PC Card will be shown.
ACTIVE This message will appear in the MessageCenter along with the cur-
rent IntelliSet indicating that the IntelliSet is active and none of its
settings have been modified.
ACTIVE ALARM LIST CLEARED The list of active alarms in the microprocessor has been erased.
(This does not remove alarms from the data recorder.)
ALL ALARMS CLEARED The list of active and inactive alarms in the microprocessor alarm
lists have been erased. (This does not remove alarms from the
data recorder.)
ALL INFO LOADED -- REMOVE CARD All data has been loaded into the microprocessor from the PC
Card. The card may be safely removed from the microprocessor.
BACK TO CONFIGS Pressing the = key with this message showing will return the user
to the main microprocessor Configuration list.
BACK TO FUNC PARAMS Pressing the = key with this message showing will return the user
to the main Functional Parameter list.
BAD PC CARD OR CARD SLOT The microprocessor has detected a problem with either the PC
card or the PC card slot.
BUZZER OFF IN X MINS The Buzzer circuit has been energized in Component Test mode.
The Buzzer circuit will continue to be energized for the number of
minutes shown.
CALIBRATION UNSUCCESSFUL An attempt to calibrate the discharge transducer failed.
CANNOT ENTER TRIP START Cannot enter Trip Start. A problem has been detected within the
Data Recorder.
CANNOT START DEFROST CYCLE Due to current unit conditions, the defrost cycle cannot be started.
Refer to Defrost Sections 3.9, 5.12, and 9.33.
CANNOT START PRETRIP Due to current unit conditions a Pretrip test cannot be started. Re-
fer to Pretrip Section 3.4.
CANNOT DOWNLOAD -- BATTERY TOO Data cannot be downloaded and software upgrades are prohibited
LOW when battery voltage is below 7.0 volts. This message will be dis-
played until the serial cable is removed.
CARD FULL, REMOVE CARD The PC Downloader Card is full. There is no additional room to
download information from the microprocessor. You may safely re-
move the PC Card from the slot.
CARD LOCKED -- REMOVE CARD The lock switch on the PC Card is in the “Locked” position. To use
the PC Card, move the switch to the “Unlocked” position.
7--1 62-11389
Message Description
CARD REMOVED, DATA NOT COPIED The PC Card was removed before all data was copied onto the
card.
CARD REMOVED, REINSERT CARD The PC Card was removed from the card slot before the operation
was completed. Reinsert the PC Card into the card slot to perform
the operation.
CFG: =TO LOAD,↑ TO CANCEL A Configuration Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot.
Press the = key to load configurations or IntelliSets into micropro-
cessor.
CHANGE INTELLISET TO EXIT The IntelliSleep Intelliset is active. Alternates with
“INTELLI--SLEEP MODE” at 5 second interval whether unit is run-
ning or not.
CHARGE MODE--HOLD=TO EXIT Service mode has the refrigeration system set so that it can be
charged with refrigerant through the king valve. Press the = key to
manually exit, or wait until the charging is complete.
CHECK AT NEXT SERVICE INTERVAL The unit needs to be checked at next service interval.
There is currently an active non--shutdown alarm in the alarm list.
CHECK DOOR Door switch indicates that trailer or rail car compartment door is not
closed.
CHECK FUEL LEVEL The level in the fuel tank is very close to empty.
(Requires Optional Sensor)
CHK WIRES FROM MICRO TO KEYPAD There is a communication signal lost between the keypad/display
and the microprocessor. Check and test the wiring to the keypad/
display
COMPONENT TEST MODE Pressing the = key while this message is being displayed will allow
user access to Component Test mode.
CONFIG ERROR, REMOVE CARD There was an error configuring the microprocessor with the Config-
uration PC Card. Remove the PC Card from the slot.
CONFIGS COMPLETE,= TO EXIT The user has reached the end of the Configurations List. Pressing
the UP or DOWN ARROW key will start list over. Press the = key
to exit Configuration List.
CONFIGURATION MODE Press the = key to enter Configuration Mode.
CONFIGURATION NOT CHANGED New configuration selection was not entered (saved) within the 5
second time limit.
CONTINUOUS LOCKED The current set point is within a range that has been locked into the
Continuous Run mode. Start--Stop can not be selected.
CONTINUOUS RUN MODE SELECTED The unit operating mode has been changed from Start-Stop to
Continuous Run.
COPY COMPLETE, REMOVE CARD XX A DownLoad PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
all data from the Data Recorder has been copied onto the PC Card.
You may safely remove PC Card from the slot. XX = number of
empty download slots remaining on the card.
COPY ERROR, REMOVE CARD XX A DownLoad PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot and
an error occurred while the data was being copied onto the PC
Card. You may safely remove the PC Card from the slot.
XX indicates the number of empty download slots remaining on the
card.
COPYING DATA--PLEASE WAIT A DownLoad PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot and
all data from the Data Recorder is being copied onto the PC Card.
DO NOT REMOVE THE CARD WHILE THIS MESSAGE IS BE-
ING DISPLAYED.
DATA RECORDER FAILURE The microprocessor has stopped recording Unit Data.
DEFROST CYCLE STARTED The unit has gone into defrost.
DOOR OPEN The refrigerated compartment door is open.
DOOR OPEN -- LOW SPEED The refrigerated compartment door is open forcing the unit to run in
low speed.
62-11389 7--2
Message Description
ENTERING SERVICE MODE The initial message for Service Mode.
EVAC / CHARGE MODE The unit is in Service Mode, and the refrigeration system is ready
to be evacuated then charged with refrigerant. Refer to Section
6.2.3.
EXITING PRETRIP MODE Pretrip has been aborted either by user or by a pretrip alarm.
EXITING SERVICE MODE Service Mode has been turned off and unit is returning to normal
operation.
FUNCTION NOT CHANGED The = key was not pressed in the allotted amount of time to select
the new Functional Parameter setting. The new setting was not
stored and the old setting will be used.
HOUR METERS NOT CHANGED Indicates that no changes have been made to the hour meters in
either the configuration or functional parameter lists.
INACTIVE ALARMS IN MEMORY There are inactive alarms in the microprocessor alarm list which
have not yet been cleared.
INSTALLED, REMOVE CARD XX An Option PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
the option has been installed in the microprocessor. The PC Card
may safely be removed from the slot. XX indicates the number of
option installations remaining on card.
INSTALLING OPTION, PLEASE WAIT An Option PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
the option is being installed in the microprocessor. DO NOT RE-
MOVE THE CARD WHILE THIS MESSAGE IS BEING DIS-
PLAYED.
INSTALL STOPPED, REINSERT CARD An Option PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
the install process has been stopped by the PC Card not being fully
inserted in the slot, or by being removed. Remove and reinsert PC
Card to continue.
INTELLI--SLEEP MODE The IntelliSleep Intelliset is active. This message alternates with
“CHANGE INTELLISET TO EXIT” at 5 second interval whether unit
is running or not
KEYPAD LOCKED--BATTERY TOO LOW Once the battery voltage goes below 7.0 Volts for 10 seconds, all
of the keys on the keypad will be locked.
LIST END, = TO CLEAR ALARMS The end of the Alarm list has been reached. Pressing the = key will
clear the Alarm list.
LOADING INFO A Configuration PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot,
and information from the Config card is being loaded into the micro-
processor. DO NOT REMOVE THE CARD WHILE THIS MES-
SAGE IS BEING DISPLAYED.
MAIN MENU Consists of Configuration Mode, Component Test and Service
Modes.
MAX SETPOINT HAS BEEN REACHED Maximum set point allowed by configuration settings has been
reached.
MICRO WILL RESET & RESTART NOW The microprocessor Program software has just been changed, or a
new configuration has been programmed into the microprocessor.
The microprocessor will turn itself off then on again (similar to a
computer reboot) in order for the changes to be effective.
MICRO WILL STOP IN XXX SECONDS The START / RUN--OFF switch has been turned OFF and the sys-
tem valves are closing. The display will turn off when the count
down reaches zero.
MIN SETPOINT HAS BEEN REACHED Minimum Set Point allowed by configuration settings has been
reached.
MODIFIED This message will appear in the MessageCenter along with the cur-
rent IntelliSet indicating that the IntelliSet is active and one or more
of its settings have been modified.
NEW SW: = TO LOAD, TO ↑ CANCEL A Program PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
the program on the PC Card is a newer version than what is al-
ready loaded in the microprocessor. Press the = key to load the
program.
7--3 62-11389
Message Description
NO ACTION TAKEN, REMOVE CARD A Program PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
no key presses have been made to install the program into the mi-
croprocessor. The PC Card may be safely removed from the slot.
NO ACTIVE ALARMS There are no active alarms in the microprocessor Alarm List.
NO DATA ON CARD, REMOVE CARD A Program or Configuration PC Card has been inserted into the PC
Card slot, and no valid data is present on the PC Card. The PC
Card may safely be removed from the unit.
NO DATA TO COPY, REMOVE CARD A Download PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
there is no valid data in the Data Recorder to copy onto the PC
Card. The PC Card may safely be removed from the unit.
NO INACTIVE ALARMS There are no inactive alarms in the Alarm List
NO INSTALLS LEFT, REMOVE CARD An Option PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and all
install options have been used. The PC Card may safely be re-
moved from the unit.
OLD INTELLISETS--USE REEFERMAN The IntelliSets that are on the Configuration PC Card were written
with too old of a PC Program, like ServiceManager. The software in
the micro requires IntelliSets to be written to the Configuration PC
Card using ReeferManager. Rewrite the information to the card us-
ing ReeferManager, then use it in the microprocessor again
OLD SW:CANNOT LOAD--REMOVE A Program PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
CARD the major version of the program on the PC Card is an older vers-
ion than what is already loaded in the microprocessor. Software
with older major versions can not be loaded into the micropro-
cessor. Remove the PC Card. (Refer to Section 6.5.1 for software
version description.)
OLD SW, = TO LOAD, ↑ TO CANCEL A Program PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
the minor version of the program on the PC Card is an older ver-
sion than what is already loaded in the microprocessor. Press the =
key to load the older program. (Refer to Section 6.5.1 for software
version description.)
PC MODE START/RUN-OFF switch is OFF, the PC mode Jumper is con-
nected and engine is not running in order to enter PC mode.
PM DUE Preventative Maintenance is now due on the unit.
PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW DATA Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to scroll through the Data
List.
PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW SETTINGS Press the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll through Functional Pa-
rameter Settings.
PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW PRINT MENU Press the UP or DOWN arrow key to view the Strip Print setup
menu.
PRESS = TO MARK TRIP START Press the = key to mark the start of the trip in the Data Recorder.
PRESS = TO START PRETRIP Press the = key to begin pretrip tests.
PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW INTELLISET Press the UP or DOWN arrow key to view IntelliSet list. This mes-
sage will appear after IntelliSets are installed into the micropro-
cessor, and the unit can not be started until an IntelliSet is selec-
ted.
PRETRIP FAIL & COMPLETED The Pretrip test is completed, and some of the pretrip tests did not
pass. Check the Alarm List for pretrip alarms.
PRETRIP FAIL IN TEST XX Some of the pretrip tests did not pass and the pretrip was not com-
pleted. Check the Alarm List for pretrip alarms.
PRETRIP PASS All of the pretrip tests were ok.
PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER Pretrip has been stopped by user.
PRODUCTSHIELD: HIGH AIR ON The unit is operating in ProductShield High Air which overrides nor-
mal unit speed operation. Refer to Section 5.14.1.b.
PRODUCTSHIELD: WINTER ON The unit is operating in ProductShield Winter which overrides nor-
mal unit operation. Refer to Section 5.14.1.c.
62-11389 7--4
Message Description
PRODUCTSHIELD: ECONO ON The unit is operating in ProductShield Econo which overrides nor-
mal unit Start--Stop or Continuous Run operation. Refer to Section
5.14.1.a.
READY TO INSTALL SOFTWARE The microprocessor has been forced into Program Install Mode. If
this message does not clear after loading the current version of
software, check for a shorted circuit between 5MP5 and 5MP6.
RECOVER / LEAK CHK / EVAC MODE This message will be displayed when the unit is in Service Mode
and the system is ready for recovery and leak testing.
REMOVE CARD -- BATTERY TOO LOW If a PC card is inserted when battery is below 7.0 volts this mes-
sage will be displayed until card is removed.
REMOTE SWITCH 1 (2) OPEN Remote switch is open. May be connected to a trailer or rail car
compartment door or a remote control switch.
REMOTE SWITCH 1 (2) OPEN -- LOW Shows that the remote switch is open and that the unit is running in
SPEED low speed. Switch may be connected to a trailer or rail car compart-
ment door or a remote control switch.
REMOVE JUMPER The Configuration/Technician Test Mode has been entered. Re-
move the jumper wire before continuing.
SAME SW, = TO LOAD, ↑ TO CANCEL A Program PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot and
the program on the PC Card is the same as the program currently
in the microprocessor. Press the = key to reload the same program
or press the UP ARROW key to cancel and remove card.
SERVICE MODE Selection in Configuration and Technician Test Modes which is
used when servicing the refrigeration system. Refer to Section
6.2.3.
SETPOINT CHANGED The new set point has been entered (saved into microprocessor
memory), the new set point will be used.
SETPOINT NOT CHANGED The new set point has NOT been entered (NOT saved into micro-
processor memory), the old set point will be used.
SETTING SMV: XXX % The START/RUN--OFF switch has been placed in the
START/RUN position and the CSMV is opening.
SLEEP MODE, OFF / ON TO WAKE The unit is cycled off in Sleep Mode. Place the
START/RUN--OFF switch in the OFF position, then back to the
START/RUN position to wake the microprocessor up.
SLEEP WARNING: DOOR OPEN The unit is configured for Rail Mode and the unit is in Sleep Mode
and a refrigerated compartment door is open. The unit will start as
needed for Sleep Mode.
SLEEP WARNING: NO TEMP CONTROL The unit is running in Sleep Mode to charge the battery and (in en-
gine operation) warm the engine coolant. It is not running to provide
temperature control.
SLEEP WARNING: REMS1(2) OPEN The unit is configured for Rail Mode and the unit is in Sleep Mode
and a remote switch is open. The switch may be connected to a
refrigerated compartment door or to a remote control switch. The
unit will start as needed for Sleep Mode.
SMV CLOSING: WAIT XXX SECONDS Power Up and the CSMV is closing. XX indicates the number of
seconds remaining until valve is fully closed.
START MODE: AUTO or MANUAL Indicates whether the unit is in Auto Start or Manual Start mode
START STOP LOCKED The set point has been locked into the Start--Stop mode. Continu-
ous Run can not be selected.
START/STOP MODE SELECTED Start--Stop Mode has been selected.
STATUS OK The unit is operating correctly.
TEST #1 to #15 Pretrip is currently running this test and is x% complete.
TIME SELECTION NOT CHANGED A time change was started but not entered (saved) in Configuration
List.
TRIP START ENTERED The Trip Start marker has been placed in the Data Recorder.
7--5 62-11389
Message Description
UNIT BATTERY TOO LOW The unit battery has dropped below 7 volts for more than 10 sec-
onds.
UNIT SHUTDOWN -- DOOR OPEN The unit has shut down because the refrigerated compartment door
is open.
UNIT SHUTDOWN -- SEE ALARM LIST An active shutdown alarm has shut the unit down.
UNIT SHUTDOWN -- RMS1(2) The unit has shut down because switch is open. May be connected
to a door or a remote control switch.
UNKNOWN CARD -- REMOVE CARD A defective PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot. The
microprocessor can not recognize any data on the card. The card
may be safely removed from the microprocessor.
WARNING: DIESEL RESTART ON When electric power is not available while the unit is operating in
Electric Standby mode, the unit will switch to diesel operation.
WARNING: NO TEMP CONTROL Both 1RAT and 1SAT alarms are on and unit is running with a set-
point in the frozen range in low speed six cylinder cool.
WRONG UNIT TYPE, REMOVE CARD A config PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot. The unit
model family type on the PC card is not in the same unit family type
as the microprocessor. The card may be safely removed from the
microprocessor.
62-11389 7--6
SECTION 8
ALARM TROUBLESHOOTING
8.1 INTRODUCTION TO ALARM TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The Alarm Troubleshooting Guide should be used If the message CHK WIRES FROM MICRO TO
whenever an alarm occurs. Alarms will appear in the KEYPAD appears in the MessageCenter, there is a
Message Center and will begin with the alarm number. communication error between the keypad and the
Alarms are listed in the Troubleshooting Guide by alarm microprocessor. With no communication, there will not
number. be an associated alarm. Should this occur, check the
wire connections behind the keypad assembly, at the
When an alarm occurs, look through both Active and
keypad itself (remove the rear cover from it to check),
Inactive alarm lists in the microprocessor. (See Note 1
and at connector 5 on the microprocessor. Check for
Section 8.2 ) and make note of all alarms.
microprocessor status led blinking at 1 second rate (1
Before beginning to actually troubleshoot a unit, visually second ON and 1 second OFF).
inspect the unit, in particular the area of the unit that is When working on the refrigeration system, an
causing a problem. In many cases the cause of the accurately calibrated manifold test set should always be
problem will be obvious once a visual inspection is installed. It is not always necessary to connect an
performed. For those cases where the cause of the additional high pressure gauge to the liquid line service
problem is not obvious, this troubleshooting guide will be valve. The MessageCenter, under DATA, will display
of assistance. suction pressure, discharge pressure and evaporator
Usually you should begin troubleshooting with the first pressure.
alarm that appears in the active alarm list. Other alarms In high or low ambients it may be necessary to cool or
in the list may have contributed to the occurrence of the warm the refrigerated compartment temperature before
first alarm. The first alarm that appears is the last alarm performing specific tests providing that the
that was recorded. compartment is not loaded with perishable product.
The check items in the troubleshooting guide are listed
in order of their likeliness of occurrence and ease of WARNING
testing. We recommend that you follow the order in
which they are presented; however, there may be times Be aware of HIGH VOLTAGE supplied by the
when situations or experience directs you to use a generator as the unit may start
different order. For example, if the trailer or rail car is automatically. Before servicing the unit,
loaded, you may want to perform all the condensing unit make sure the START / RUN--OFF switch is
in the OFF position. Use discretion when
checks first, even though some evaporator section servicing the unit. It may be necessary to
checks may be listed before them. disconnect the negative battery and the
As you go through the troubleshooting steps, you will standby power cables for certain service
find the cause of the problem. When you find and correct procedures. NEVER dis--assemble the
the problem, it is not necessary to continue through the generator: HIGH MAGNETIC FIELD INSIDE!
remainder of the steps. Some active alarms will clear plants such as pacemaker and defibrillat-
(inactivate) themselves automatically once the cause ors.
has been corrected. You then only need to go to the
inactive list to clear all alarms before verifying the
remainder of the unit operation. Alarms that do not WARNING
inactivate themselves automatically must be cleared
manually. (See Note 1 Section 8.2 ) UNITS EQUIPPED WITH TWO WAY COMMU-
NICATION CAPABILITIES HAVE THE ABILITY
When you are finished making repairs, run the unit TO BE STARTED OR TURNED OFF REMOTE-
through a Pretrip cycle and verify that no further active LY REGARDLESS OF THE SETTING OF THE
alarms occur. Also, both alarm lists should be cleared so START/RUN-OFF SWITCH.
that there are no “old” alarms in memory when the unit The unit is controlled locally and there can
leaves your repair facility. be no two-way communication when the
Mode switch on the Remote Monitoring
Control Box is in MAINTENANCE MODE.
Therefore, when performing any work on
the unit, place the Mode switch in MAINTE-
NANCE MODE. After the unit is serviced, re-
turn the Mode switch to REMOTE ON.
8--1 62-11389
8.2 NOTES
Note 1 Active alarms will always be in the Alarm List. Note 3 Many checks will be made with the
They will have an “A” in front of the alarm microprocessor powered up, but with no
number. Active alarms may be inactivated by outputs to the unit components. The unit may
going to the end of the Active Alarm list. be put into PC Mode to do this. For additional
“LIST END, = TO CLEAR ALARMS” will information see PC Mode -- Section 6.1.
appear in the MessageCenter. Pressing the =
key will clear or inactivate the alarms. This Note 4 Sensors may be tested at the component
moves the alarm to the Inactive Alarm list, if plug using an ohmmeter. If required, sensor
the condition that caused the alarm has been circuits may be tested at the 1MP plug.
corrected. When Shutdown Alarms are Remove plug from Microprocessor and,
cleared, the unit will attempt to restart (if the using an ohmmeter, test resistance of
microprocessor is set for auto-start). When circuits. Be careful not to damage the
non-Shutdown Alarms are cleared, there will connector pins. (Refer to Section 9.36 for
be no noticeable change in the unit’s chart of resistances for different sensors.)
operation.
Note 5 The Defrost Air Switch, Engine Oil Level
The Inactive Alarm list is reached by first
Switch, Fuel Level Sensor, Door Switch, or
pressing and holding the Alarm List key, then
the UP Key, and holding both of them for 3 HP1 can be tested as components alone. If
seconds. Alarms in this list will begin with “I” required, the circuits may be tested at the
(Inactive) followed by the alarm number. 2MP plug. Remove plug from Microprocessor
and using the wiring schematic, check for
Clearing alarms from the Inactive Alarm list voltage at the appropriate terminal.
will also clear alarms from the Active Alarm
List. Go to the end of the Inactive Alarm List. Note 6 Some tests can only be conducted while the
“LIST END, = TO CLEAR ALARMS” will show unit is operating. The unit may be started au-
in the Message Center. Press = to clear all tomatically in either Diesel or Electric by plac-
alarms from both lists. ing the Diesel/Electric Switch in the desired
Note 2 Many electrical circuits may be tested by operating position, then placing the SROS in
powering the circuits without starting the en- the START/RUN position.
gine. This can be done by first setting the NO
POWER configuration to the ALARM &
SHUTDOWN selection, then leaving the unit
disconnected from any Standby Power, pla-
cing the Diesel/Electric Switch in the Electric
position, and placing the SROS in the
START/RUN position. In this mode, the Run
Relay will be energized and the unit will re-
main off.
62-11389 8--2
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
8.3 DRIVER / OPERATOR ALARMS
1 LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING
Note: This is an optional alarm which will not occur unless a fuel level sensor is present and configured ON.
• TRIGGER ON: Fuel level is 15% or less for more than 30 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Alarm only.
Standby operation: this alarm will not activate in standby operation.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the fuel level is above 17% for more than 30 seconds, or
alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (see reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check For Low Fuel Level
a. Check fuel level in the fuel tank. Add fuel as needed to the fuel tank.
2 Check Fuel Level Sensor
a. Inspect fuel level sensor& No physical damage to switch.
connector pins & terminals. No damaged or corroded pins in plug.
b. Check fuel level sensor operation Energize circuit. See Note 2 Page 8.2.
c. Check for voltage at the fuel level Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
sensor plug between pins for
BLACK (SP24) negative and RED
(SPK5) positive wires.
d. Reconnect the fuel level sensor Voltage should be greater than 0 VDC and less than
harness. Check for voltage at 5 VDC, unless the probe is completely dry.
harness plug between pins for
BLACK (SP24) negative and
WHITE (1MP26.) in the
microprocessor harness and
ground.
e. Check continuity of the wire from Place the SROS in the OFF position prior to
the harness plug, pin C to the micro- checking for continuity. Must be less than 10 ohms.
processor plug 1MP26.
3 Check Circuits With Test (Substitute) Sensor
a. Substitute known good sensor and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for
30 seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new sensor if
necessary)
8--3 62-11389
Alarm
2 LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Note: This is an optional alarm which will not occur unless an oil level sensor is present and configured ON.
• TRIGGER–ON: Engine oil level is sensed approx. 4 or more qts. (3.8 or more liters) low for longer
than 30 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Alarm only or (if configured for shutdown) engine and unit
shutdown.
Standby operation: Alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit
off, then back on again.
1 Check Engine Oil Level
a. Check engine oil dipstick. Add engine oil as needed to fill.
2 Check Engine Oil Level Switch
a. Inspect engine oil level switch & No physical damage to switch.
b. Check engine oil level switch Contacts open when level is more than 7 qts (6.6
operation. liters) low.
Contacts closed when level is less than 4 qts (3.8
liters) low.
3 Check Engine Oil Level Switch Harness
a. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
connector pins & terminals. (See No damaged or corroded pins.
wiring schematic Section 11.)
b. Check for shorted circuit in Energize circuit (See Note 2 Page 8.2.) DO NOT
harness, and continuity through START UNIT.
the harness. Battery voltage reading (12--13 VDC) between wires
in plug.
4 Check Oil Level Switch
a. Drain oil level to approximately
3--4 quarts (3--4 liters) low.
Remove switch
b. Visually and physically inspect Must be securely fastened to center rod.
upper and lower float stops. Must move up and down freely.
62-11389 8--4
Alarm
3 LOW COOLANT LEVEL
Note: This is an optional alarm which will not occur unless a coolant level sensor is present and configured ON.
• TRIGGER ON: Engine coolant level is 1 or more quarts (.95 or more liters) low for more than 30
seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Alarm only.
Standby operation: Will not activate in standby.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit
1 Check For Low Coolant Level
a. Check engine coolant level in the Add coolant as needed to the coolant reservoir and
coolant bottle. to the fill tube on the radiator.
b. Check coolant hoses for leaks or Repair all leaks and breaks as necessary
breaks.
Add coolant as needed to the coolant reservoir and
to the fill tube on the radiator.
2 Check Engine Coolant Level Switch
a. Inspect engine coolant level switch No physical damage to switch.
& connector pins & terminals. No damaged or corroded pins in plug.
b. Check harness wiring to plug. Verify wires are in correct plug orifice.
c. Check engine coolant level switch Energize circuit. (See Note 2 Page 8.2.) DO NOT
operation. START UNIT.
d. Check for voltage at harness plug Voltage should be 12 volts at harness plug between
between pins A and B. pins A and B.
e. Check continuity of the wire from Place the SROS in the OFF position prior to
the harness plug, pin C to the checking for continuity. Must be less than 10 ohms.
microprocessor plug 2MP15.
3 Check Circuits With Test (Substitute) Switch
a. Substitute known good sensor and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for 30
seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new sensor.)
8--5 62-11389
Alarm
8.4 SHUTDOWN ALARMS
11 LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
• TRIGGER–ON: Engine oil pressure is below 12 psig (0.82 bar) for longer than 5 seconds while the
engine is running.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset or Alarm may be manually reset via Keypad or by turning the unit
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
active alarm(s). (See Note 1 Page 8.2.) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active
active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check For Low Engine Oil Level Alarm
a. Check for alarm 2. Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
cleared to continue.
2 Check Engine Oil Level
a.Check engine oil dipstick. Add engine oil as needed to fill.
3 Check Engine Oil Pressure Switch
a. Inspect switch & connector pins & No physical damage to switch.
terminals. No damaged or corroded pins in plug.
b. Check engine oil switch operation. Contacts closed when oil pressure is above 15 psig
(1.02 bar.)
Contacts open when oil pressure is below 12 psig
(0.82 bar.)
4 Check Engine Oil Switch Harness
b. Check for shorted circuit in harness, With the SROS in the OFF position, check the volt-
and continuity through the harness. age reading at the harness plug terminals. Reading
should be 0 VDC.
Energize circuit. (See Note 2 Page 8.2.) Battery volt-
age reading (12--13 VDC) between wires in plug.
5 Check Engine Oil Pressure
a. Connect mechanical oil gauge. Oil pressure must be greater than 15 psig (1.02 bar.)
62-11389 8--6
Alarm
12 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE
• TRIGGER–ON: If system in engine mode: For ambient temperatures below 120°F (48.9°C) Engine
coolant temperature is above 230°F (110°C), or Ambient temperatures above 120°F (48.9°C),
engine coolant temp is over 241°F (116°C), or Engine coolant temperature is between 230°F and
241°F (110°C and 116°C) for more than 5 minutes.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset after 15 minutes if the engine coolant temp falls below 212°F
(100°C), or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Coolant Level
a. Check coolant level in overflow Level must be in the normal range.
bottle.
b. Check coolant level in radiator Level must be at the top of the radiator fill tube.
Do not remove the cap from a hot
radiator; if the cap must be
removed, do so very slowly in order
to release the pressure without
spray.
c. Inspect connecting tube between Connections must be airtight. No leakage or holes in
overflow bottle and radiator. tube.
2 Check For Bad Eng Coolant Sensor Alarm
a. Check for Alarm 129. Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
3 Check Freeze Point Of Coolant
a. Use Coolant Tester to check Must be between 40% to 60% Ethylene Glycol to
concentration of anti-freeze water mixture.
mixture.
4 Check Airflow Through Radiator / Condenser Coil
a. Inspect condenser / radiator fins. Fins must be straight. 90% or more of the coil
surface must be undamaged. No “dead” air spaces.
Condenser / Radiator coil must be clean.
b. Check condenser fan rotation / Fans should operate correctly. Air should be directed
operation. in through the grill, and into the engine compartment.
5 Check Water Pump Belt
a. Check engine water pump belt. No Glazing, no cracking, no slipping.
6. Check Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
a. Inspect Engine Coolant Tempera- No damage to sensor.
ture Sensor & connector. No damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector.
b. Check Engine Coolant Temperatu- 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
re Sensor resistance. complete table of temperatures and resistance
(See Note 4 Page 8.2) values.
Additional steps on the next page.
8--7 62-11389
Alarm
12 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE
7. Check Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Wiring
b Check voltage at the Engine Cool- Voltage reading should be 2.5 ± 0.1 VDC.
ant Temperature Sensor connector
with the microprocessor powered
up.
8. Check Engine Cooling System
a. Compare actual engine tempera- Temperature must be within ±20°F (±11.1°C.)
ture to the microprocessor reading.
b. Test operation of engine coolant Must operate correctly.
thermostat.
c. Check water pump operation. No seepage at weep hole. Bearings tight and quiet.
Impeller firmly attached to shaft.
d. Check cooling system for scale, Coolant must be clean & clear. No foreign particles or
sludge, rust, etc. substances in it. Flush & clean the coolant system as
necessary.
e. Check water pump bypass hose to Must be clear and open.
thermostat housing for internal
blockage.
62-11389 8--8
Alarm
13 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE (ALARM 75 WILL ALSO ACTIVATE)
• TRIGGER–ON: Compressor discharge pressure is over 465 psig (31.6 bar.)
Standby operation: Refrigeration system shutdown and alarm with PSCON
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset after 15 minutes if the compressor discharge pressure falls below
350 psig (23.8 bar), or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off,
then back on again.
1 Check System Pressures
a. Install Manifold Test Set and check Suction & Discharge Pressures must have the same
and compare compressor reading on gauges & on microprocessor display.
discharge & suction pressures with Pressures must be in the normal range for ambient &
those shown on the refrigerated compartment temperature conditions.
microprocessor.
NOTE: Microprocessor suction (CSP) and evap-
orator (EVOP) pressure readings have a maxi-
mum value of 100 psig (7.5 bar) The actual suc-
tion pressure must be lower than 100 psig in or-
der to perform this test.
2 Check For Refrigerant Overcharge
a. Check refrigerant level in the Level must be between upper & lower sight glasses
receiver tank. with a refrigerated compartment temperature of 35°F
(1.0C) or lower.
3 Check Airflow Through Condenser Coil
Condenser / Radiator coil must be clean.
b. Check airflow (with unit running.) Even airflow through the entire coil.
No “dead” spots.
c. Check condenser fan rotation / Both fans should operate correctly. Air should be
operation. directed in through the grill, and into the engine
compartment.
4 Check HP1 Switch
b. Check switch operation. Contacts open when compressor discharge pressure
(Refer to Section 2.12 for pressure is above cut-out point ± 10 psig (±0.68 bar.)
settings.) Contacts closed when compressor discharge
pressure is below cut-in point ± 10 psig (±0.68 bar.)
5 Check HP1 Switch Harness
b. Check for shorted circuit in harness, Energize Circuit. (See Note 2 Page 8.2.) Battery
and continuity through the harness. voltage reading (12--13 VDC) between wire
HP1A--SPKS and between HP1B to Ground.
8--9 62-11389
Alarm
12 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE (ALARM 75 WILL ALSO ACTIVATE) (Continued)
6 Perform Pretrip Check
a. Run Pretrip & check for alarms. Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared
before proceeding.
7 See Refrigeration Trouble Shoot- Discharge Pressure must be in normal range for the
ing Section 10.4. current ambient and refrigerated compartment
temperature conditions.
62-11389 8--10
Alarm
14 ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
• TRIGGER–ON: AC Current Sensor 1 is greater than 40A or AC Current Sensor 2 is greater than
40A for 3 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Alarm will not activate.
Standby operation: Refrigeration system shutdown and alarm with PSCON
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes if the AC current sensor readings are less than
38 amps or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning unit off then back on.
1 Check Generator Voltage (If Used When Alarm Occurred)
a. Check voltage at GENCON L1--L2, Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.13.2.
L1--L3, L2--L3.
2 Check Power Source Voltage (If Used When Alarm Occurred)
a. Check voltage at PSCON L1--L2, Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.13.2.
L1--L3, L2--L3.
3 Check Voltage Output From Contactors
a. Check voltage at GENCON T1--T2, Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.13.2.
T1--T3, T2--T3.
b. Check voltage at CCON with Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.13.2.
compressor operating. T1--T2,
T1--T3, T2--T3.
4 Verify AC Current Sensor Accuracy
a. Place the SROS in the Unit AC Current #1 and #2 reading in Data List must
START / RUN position. be 0.0  1.0 amp.
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared be-
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. fore proceeding.
6 Check High Voltage Components Amp Draw (Single--Temp Units Only)
a. Check condenser fan amp draw for
CDCON on all 3 legs.
b. Check evaporator fan motor amp
draw for 1EVCON on all 3 legs.
The unit must be running for these tests to be
c. Check compressor amp draw for
CCON on all 3 legs. performed. Refer to Section 2.13 for correct electrical
values.
d. Check Lower Evaporator Heater
amp draw for 1HTCON1.
e. Check Upper Evaporator Heater
8--11 62-11389
Alarm
15 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO HIGH
• TRIGGER–ON: Voltage at the microprocessor is greater than 17 VDC.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: refrigeration system shutdown and alarm with PSCON
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset after 15 minutes when the voltage at the microprocessor is
between 11 and 14 VDC, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off,
then back on again.
1 Check Battery Voltage
a. Test voltage at battery with unit Must be between 12--16 VDC.
off.
b. Test voltage at battery with unit Must be between 12--16 VDC.
running.
2 Check Battery Charger Voltage
a. Test voltage at battery charger Must be between 12--16 VDC.
output terminal with unit off.
b. Test voltage at battery charger Must be between 12--16 VDC.
output terminal with unit running.
3 Check Voltage At Microprocessor
a. Check voltage reading at Energize circuit. (See Note 2 Page 8.2.)
microprocessor input (QC1+ to Must be between 12--16 VDC.
QC2--.)
b. Check voltage reading on Must be within 0.5 VDC of reading obtained in 3a
microprocessor display. (above.)
62-11389 8--12
Alarm
16 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO LOW
• TRIGGER–ON: Voltage at the microprocessor is less than 10 VDC (except when the engine starter
is engaged.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Unit Shutdown & Alarm. Alarm condition only if activated while starting unit.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset after 15 minutes when the voltage at the microprocessor is
between 11 -- 14 VDC, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then
back on again.
1 Check For Alarm 51
a. Check for “Alternator Not Charging Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
Alarm”. (Note: The A51 name is cleared to continue.
carried over from unit models with
alternators. For the Vector Model,
Alarm 51 indicates that the solid
state battery charger is not per-
forming correctly.
a. Inspect battery cable ends and Must be clean and tight.
posts.
b. Test voltage at battery with unit off. Must be above 11 VDC.
c. Test voltage at battery with unit Must be above 11 VDC.
running.
d. Test specific gravity of battery. (Check for battery specifications.)
e. Perform load test on battery. (Check for battery specifications.)
(Follow battery manufacturer’s
procedure.)
3 Check Voltage At Microprocessor
a. Check voltage reading at Must be above 11 VDC.
microprocessor input (MPQC1+ to
MPQC2--).
b. Check voltage reading on Must be within 0.5 VDC of reading obtained in 3a
microprocessor display. (above.)
8--13 62-11389
Alarm
17 HIGH COMP DISCHARGE TEMP
• TRIGGER–ON: Discharge sensor alarm not active AND:
Ambient temp below 120°F (48.9°C) and discharge temp was between 310 to -- 349°F
(154.4 to -- 176.7°C) for 3 minutes, or
Ambient temp above 120°F (48.9°C) and discharge temp was between 340 to -- 349°F
(171.1 to -- 176.7°C) for 3 minutes, or
Discharge temp ever reaches 350°F (176.7°C.)
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset after 15 minutes with Ambient temp below 120°F (48.9°C) the
discharge temp falls below 300°F (148.8°C), or Auto Reset after 15 minutes with Ambient temp
above 120°F (48.9°C) the discharge temp falls below 330°F (165.4°C), or alarm may be manually
reset via Keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check For Bad Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor
2 Check Refrigerant Charge
a. Check for undercharged system. Level must be above lower sight glass.
3 Check Airflow Through Condenser Coil
Condenser/Radiator coil must be clean.
b. Check airflow (with unit running). Even airflow through the entire coil
No “dead” spots
4 Check CSMV
a. Check compressor suction See procedure “How To Check CSMV,” Section 9.29.
modulation valve.
a. Install Manifold Test Set and Suction & Discharge Pressures must have the same
check and compare compressor reading on gauges & on microprocessor display.
discharge & suction pressures NOTE: Microprocessor suction (CSP) and evap-
with those shown on the
microprocessor display.
7 Check Compressor Reed Valves & Gaskets
a. Remove compressor heads & Must be in good condition. Install new parts and
inspect condition of all reeds & gaskets as required.
gaskets.
8 Check Expansion Valve (EVXV)
a. Check operation of valve. Refer to Section 9.15
9 Check System For Non-Condensables
a. Check refrigeration system for No non–condensable gas(es) may be present. (Refer
non-condensable gas(es). to Section 9.19.4.)
62-11389 8--14
Alarm
18 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
• TRIGGER–ON (A):
Both Front (UL1) and Rear (UL2) Unloaders are energized AND unit is in engine mode AND in low
speed AND compressor is running AND low suction pressure shutdown delay in configurations has
elapsed since energizing UL1 AND Suction Pressure is less than --10 in. Hg (0.3 bar). (Note: The
MessageCenter does not display in.Hg. This alarm triggers on when the display shows less than
--4.7 psig.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: alarm only or (if configured for shutdown) engine and unit
shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: alarm only or (if configured for shutdown) refrigeration
system shutdown and alarm with PSCON still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: If alarm only, auto reset when either UL1 or UL2 is de--energized. If unit and
system shut down and alarm, auto reset after 15 minutes. Alarm may be manually reset via keypad
or by turning the unit OFF, then ON again.
1 Check Refrigerant Charge
a. Check for undercharged system. Level must be above lower sight glass.
a. Install Manifold Test Set and check Suction pressure must be above 3 psig (0.2 bar.)
and compare compressor
discharge & suction pressures with Suction & Discharge Pressures must have the same
those shown on the microprocessor reading on gauges & on microprocessor display.
display. NOTE: Microprocessor suction (CSP) and evap-
3 Manually Defrost Unit
a. Defrost unit and terminate Typical defrost cycle time is 5--20 minutes.
automatically. Suction pressure should rise gradually during cycle.
5 Check Unloader Operation
a. Check Front (UL1) and Rear (UL2) See Alarms 85 and 86.
Unloaders.
6 Check CSMV
a. Check compressor suction See procedure “How To Check CSMV.” Refer to
modulation valve. Section 8.23 .
8--15 62-11389
Alarm
18 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE (Continued)
7 Check Evaporator Section
a. Check evaporator section, return Good Air Flow.
air bulkhead, air chute, cleanliness Return air not restricted.
of evap. coil. Air chute in good condition.
No damage to evaporator fan motor assemblies.
Evap. coil clean.
Evap. fan rotation ok.
8 Visually Inspect Unit
a. Visually inspect unit for damage to All tubing from the receiver to the evaporator section
the liquid line causing a restriction is in good condition
or any signs of temperature drop There is no temperature drop at the drier or any-
at the drier. where on the liquid line
9 Check Expansion Valve (EVXV)
a. Check operation of EVXV. Refer to Section 9.15.
62-11389 8--16
Alarm
19 LOW FUEL SHUTDOWN
This is an optional alarm. This alarm will not occur unless a fuel level sensor is present and configured ON
and a fuel tank size must be selected.
• TRIGGER ON: Fuel level is 10% or less for more than 1 minute AND the unit is operating on diesel
AND Alarm 126 is not active.
shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when fuel level is above 12% for more than 1 minute, or alarm may
be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check For Low Fuel Level Warning Alarm
a. Check for alarm 1. Must be cleared.
a. Check fuel level in tank. Add fuel as needed to the fuel tank.
3. Check Low Fuel Level Sensor
a. Inspect Low Fuel Level Sensor & No damage to sensor.
connector at Sensor and at con-
nections to engine harness at the No damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector.
condensing unit. All connections are tight & have heat shrink if re-
quired.
b. Check Low Fuel Level Sensor. Refer to Section 9.36 for sensor check out proced-
ure.
4. Check Low Fuel Level Sensor Wiring
b Check voltage at the Low Fuel Voltage reading should be 12 -- 13 VDC between ter-
Level Sensor connector with the minals FLSA and FLSB.
microprocessor powered up.
Voltage reading should be between 0 -- 5 VDC be-
tween FLSC and Ground.
8--17 62-11389
Alarm
20 MAXIMUM COMPRESSOR ALARMS
• TRIGGER ON: Option must be installed and alarm must be enabled by configuring the Compressor
Alarm Shutdown to YES. Alarms 13, 17, 18, 27, 28, 29 or 56 individually occur 3 times within the
last 2 hours of engine running time.
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Reset from inactive alarm list only. Can not be reset by turning switch OFF
and then ON again.
1 Determine Which Alarm Caused This Alarm To Be Active.
a. Check active alarm list for One or more of these alarms will be present.
Alarm #’s 13, 17, 18, 27, 28, 29, or
56.
b. Follow the steps for the alarm(s) All alarms condition must be fixed.
found above, and correct the alarm
condition.
2 Reset Alarm
a. Reset all alarms from the inactive All alarms must be cleared to start unit.
alarm list.
22 LOW SUCTION SUPERHEAT

• TRIGGER ON: Compressor suction superheat (Compressor Suction Temperature (CST) minus sat-
urated temperature for Compressor Suction Pressure ( CSP) is less than 9°F (5°C) for more than 2
minutes.
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by
turning the unit off, then back on again.
a. Install Manifold Test Set and check Suction & Discharge Pressures must have the same
and compare compressor dis- reading on gauges & on microprocessor display.
charge & suction pressures and
evaporator outlet pressure with NOTE: Microprocessor suction (CSP) and evap-
those shown on the microprocessor orator (EVOP) pressure readings have a maxi-
display. mum value of 100 psig (7.5 bar) The actual suc-
2 Check For Restricted Evaporator Airflow
a. Check for restricted evaporator Check for proper Evaporator Fan operation (Refer to
airflow in all enabled Section 9.11.)
compartments.
Check for correct Evaporator Fan rotation.
Check defrost air switch setting and hoses. Refer to
Section 2.12.
Check for restricted bulkhead or air chute installation.
62-11389 8--18
Alarm
22 LOW SUCTION SUPERHEAT (Continued)
4 Check Compressor Suction Temperature (CST) and Evaporator Outlet Temperature
(EVOT) sensors (All Units)
a. Inspect CST & connector. No damage to sensor.
No damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector.
b. Check CST resistance. 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
(See Note 4 Page 8.2.) complete table of temperatures and resistance
values.
c. Check voltage at harness connec- Must be 2.5 ± 0.5 VDC. This verifies microprocessor
tion to CST. output to sensor, and wiring connections from sensor
to microprocessor.
d. Inspect EVOT & connector. No damage to sensor.
No damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector.
e. Check EVOT resistance. 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
(See Note 4 Page 8.2) complete table of temperatures and resistance
values.
f. Check voltage at harness connec- Must be 2.5 ±0.5 VDC. This verifies microprocessor
tion to EVOT. output to sensor, and wiring connections from sensor
to microprocessor.
5 Check EVXV
a. Check operation of EVXV Refer to Section 9.15.
8--19 62-11389
Alarm
23 A/C CURRENT OVER LIMIT
• TRIGGER ON: The high voltage amp draw is over the limit shown in the table below for more than
10 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: refrigeration system shutdown and alarm.
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by
turning the unit OFF, then back ON.
1 Perform Pretrip Check.
2 Check Configurations for Correct Maximum Amps Settings
a. Check DIESEL MAX GEN AMPS Setting should be 24 -- 26 Amps. Maximum recom-
configuration setting. mended setting is 28 Amps. Minimum recommended
setting is 22 Amps.
a. Check STANDBY MAX GEN AMPS Setting should be 22 -- 26 Amps. Maximum recom-
configuration setting. mended setting is 28 Amps. Minimum recommended
setting is 22 Amps.
a. Check STARTUP MAX AMPS con- Setting should be 15 -- 19 Amps. Maximum recom-
figuration setting. mended setting is 19 Amps.
a. Check DIESEL OFFSET MAX Setting should be 4 -- 6 Amps. Maximum recom-
AMPS configuration setting. mended setting is 6 Amps.
3 Check For Electrical Failure In System
a. Check electrical motors. Visually inspect condenser and evaporator fan mo-
tors for damage to motor or fan blade, or for foreign
material obstructing the movement of the motor. Lis-
ten for noise caused by failed bearing or motor ob-
struction.
b. Check for defective wiring. Check for discolored wiring at contactors and loose
connections.
c. Check for defective contactor. Remove and replace any suspected contactor(s).
62-11389 8--20
Alarm
23 A/C CURRENT OVER LIMIT (Continued)
4 Check High Voltage Components Amp Draw
a. Check condenser fan amp draw on
all legs.
These checks must be made with the unit operating.
b. Check evaporator fan motor amp WARNING
draw for Compartment 1 on all 3
legs. Caution and good electrical practices must
be used when working around and with
c. Check compressor amp draw on all high voltage circuits.
3 legs.
d. Check Compartment Heater amp Verify that all three actual amperage readings for
draw for 1HTCON1. each component are within 10% of each other, and
e. Check Compartment 1 Heater are within the values shown in Section 2.13.
5 Check Generator Voltage (If Used When Alarm Occurred)
a. Check voltage at GENCON Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.13.
L1--L2, L1--L3, L2--L3.
6 Check Power Source Voltage (If Used When Alarm Occurred)
a. Check voltage at PSCON L1--L2, Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.13.
L1--L3, L2--L3.
7 Check Voltage Output From Contactors
a. Check voltage at GENCON Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.13.
T1--T2, T1--T3, T2--T3.
b. Check voltage at CCON with com- Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.13.
pressor operating. T1--T2, T1--T3,
T2--T3.
8 Verify AC Current Sensor Accuracy
9 Defective Overload Ground Fault (OGF) Detector
a. Opens prematurely. Remove and replace.
10 Verify AC Current Sensor Accuracy (CT2 & CT3)
Condition
Diesel High / Low Speed
30A
or Standby Cool
Diesel High Speed Heat 18A
Diesel Low Speed or
14A
Standby Heat
Diesel High Speed Heat
16A
Defrost
Diesel Low Speed or
12A
Standby Heat Defrost
Diesel High Speed Null or
8A
Fan Defrost
Diesel Low Speed or
Standby Null or Fan De- 8A
frost
8--21 62-11389
Alarm
27 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE
• TRIGGER ON: The refrigeration system is running and the suction pressure has been greater than
98 psig (6.7 bar) for more than 10 minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Engine operation: alarm only or (if configured for shut
down) engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when suction pressure is less than 75 psig (5.1 bar) for 5 minutes
and configured for Alarm Only, or Auto Reset after 15 minutes if configured as a Shutdown Alarm
or,
a. Install Manifold Test Set and check Suction pressure must be above 3 psig (0.2 bar.)
discharge & suction pressures with Suction & Discharge Pressures must have the same
those shown on the microprocessor reading on gauges & on microprocessor display.
display. NOTE: Microprocessor suction (CSP) and evap-
2 Check For Refrigerant Overcharge
a. Check refrigerant level in the Level must be between upper & lower sight glasses
receiver tank. with a refrigerated compartment temperature of 35°F
(1.0C) or lower.
4 Check EVXV
a. Check wiring and connections to No physical damage to harness. No damage or
EVXV. corroded pins. Connector tight on valve.
b. Check operation of EVXV. Refer to Section 9.15.
5 Check Compressor.
a. Perform Pump--Down Test. Must hold a vacuum and not equalize in a short peri-
Refer to Section 9.16.3. a. thru c. od of time
b. Cover condenser and build--up Must be able to pump up to 400 psig (27.2 bar.)
discharge pressure.
c. Disassemble and inspect
compressor valve plates, reeds, Must be intact, clean, and in good working order.
pistons, etc.
6 See Refrigeration Trouble Shooting Section 10.4
62-11389 8--22
Alarm
28 CHECK REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
• TRIGGER ON: The refrigeration system is running and the discharge pressure is less than 5 psig
(0.34 bar) higher than suction pressure for more than 10 minutes.
shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when discharge pressure is more than 20 psig (1.36 bar) above the
suction pressure when in alarm only, or auto reset after 15 minutes when shutdown is configured or
1 Verify Compressor Is Running.
a. Check compressor Amp draw -- Check all three voltage legs. Readings must be in the
CCON T1--T2, T1--T3, T2--T3. range as shown in Section 2.13.
a. Install Manifold Test Set and check Suction pressure must be above 3 psig (0.2 bar)
discharge & suction pressures with Discharge pressure must be more than 5 psig (0.3
those shown on the microprocessor bar) higher than the suction pressure.
display.
Suction & Discharge Pressures must have the same
reading on gauges & on microprocessor display.
NOTE: Microprocessor suction (CSP) and evap-
4 Check Compressor.
a. Perform Pump--Down Test. Must hold a vacuum and not equalize in a short peri-
Refer to Section 9.16.3. a. thru c. od of time
b. Cover condenser and build--up Must be able to pump up to 400 psig (27.2 bar.)
discharge pressure.
c. Disassemble and inspect
compressor valve plates, reeds, Must be intact, clean, and in good working order.
pistons, etc.
5 See Refrigeration System Troubleshooting, Section 10.4.
8--23 62-11389
Alarm
8.5 START UP / ENGINE ALARMS
30 FAILED TO RUN MINIMUM TIME
• TRIGGER–ON: The unit has shut down on an alarm 3 times without having run for at least 15
minutes between each shutdown (not including Door shut downs.)
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on
again. If the Unit Operation configuration is set to Rail Mode, this alarm will reset after 4 hours.
Refer to Section 6.2.1 for more information on Rail Mode.
alarm(s). (See Note 1 Page 8.2) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check For Alarms
a. Check for shut down alarms. Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm(s)
62-11389 8--24
Alarm
31 FAILED TO START -- AUTO MODE
• TRIGGER–ON: Engine has tried to start three times unsuccessfully in the auto start mode.
• UNIT CONTROL: Unit Shutdown & Alarm
again. If the Unit Operation configuration is set to Rail Mode, this alarm will reset after 4 hours.
Refer to Section 6.2.1 for more information on Rail Mode.
alarm(s). (See Note 1) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm occurs.
Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check For Flash Code on Engine Speed Control Unit (ENSCU).
a. Check for flash codes on the Refer to Electronic Speed Control Diagnostic tables --
ENSCU. Figure 10--1. thru Figure 10--4. There must be no
LED flashing alarm codes occurring to continue.
2 Check Fuel Level in Tank.
a. Check fuel gauge on tank. Fill tank as needed.
3 Check For Alarms
a. Check for the following alarms: Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
71 Check for Bad F2 or F3 Fuse cleared to continue.
alarm.
40 Check Glow Plug alarm.
35 Check Starter Circuit alarm.
4 Check ENSCU Power
a. Check run relay. Unit in component test mode -- run relay ON (Refer
to Section 6.2.)
b. Check Run Relay LED. Must be ON.
c. Check voltage to ENSCU. Must have +12 VDC between
ENSCU13 and ENSCU19 and between
ENSCU24 and ENSCU19 with Run Relay energized
d. Inspect Fuel Solenoid Actuator No damage to FSA.
(FSA) & connector pins & terminals No damaged or corroded pins.
e. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
f. Check Splice Pack 6 (SP6) (See No corrosion or oxidation.
wiring schematic Section 11.) 12 VDC reading to + battery cable.
5 Check Fuel System
a. Check fuel system prime. No air in fuel system.
b. Check fuel flow. Unrestricted fuel flow through system.
6 Check Engine Air–intake System
a. Check air filter indicator. Flag must not be visible.
b. Inspect air intake system. Hoses & tubes in good condition.
No kinks or restrictions.
8--25 62-11389
Alarm
31 FAILED TO START -- AUTO MODE (Continued)
7 Check For Correct Engine Oil
a. Check for correct oil viscosity Refer to Section 2.8.
(weight) for conditions. Must be correct for ambient conditions.
8 Check Engine Exhaust System
a. Inspect the exhaust system. Must be clear and unobstructed.
9 Check Engine
a. Check engine compression. Refer to Section 2.8.
62-11389 8--26
Alarm
34 ENGINE FAILED TO STOP
• TRIGGER–ON: In engine mode, engine is turning more than 500 RPM for 20 seconds after unit
shut down or cycled off or Oil Pressure Switch is closed longer than 20 seconds after unit shut
down or cycle off.
again.
alarm(s). (See See Note 1 Page 8.2) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
1 Check For Engine Running
a. Verify that engine is still running. Engine should not be running.
2 Check For Bad Engine RPM Sensor Alarm
3 Check Engine Oil Pressure Switch
b. Check engine oil switch operation. Contacts closed when oil pressure is above 15 psig
(1.02 bar.)
Contacts open when oil pressure is below 12 psig
(0.82 bar.)
4 Check Engine Oil Switch Harness
b. Check for shorted circuit in harness,
Energize circuit. (See Note 2 Page 8.2.)
and continuity through the harness.
Battery voltage reading (12--13 VDC) between wires
in plug.
5 Check Fuel and Speed Actuator (FSA) & Circuit
a. Check Run Relay LED. LED 28 must be OFF.
b. Check voltage at harness to 0 VDC between
ENSCU. ENSCU13 and ENSCU19 and between
ENSCU24 and ENSCU19
c. Check FSA plunger. Must be free to move to the stop position (extended
out of the solenoid.)
8--27 62-11389
Alarm
35 CHECK STARTER CIRCUIT
• TRIGGER–ON: Engine speed fails to reach 50 RPM during 2 start attempts.
• RESET CONDITION: Change unit to standby operation or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or
by turning the unit off, then back on again.
alarm(s). (See Note 1 Page 8.2) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
1 Check That Engine Has Actually Started
a. Check that engine starts, runs for a If NO, continue with Step 2 below.
few seconds then shuts off. If YES, check wiring to RPM sensor for a broken
wire.
2 Check Starter Relay Circuit
a. Check operation of starter solenoid Energize Circuit. (See Note 2 Page 8.2.)
relay. Relay contacts closed when SSR85 is grounded.
b. Check relay socket and terminals. No signs of discoloration from overheating.
No corrosion.
c. Check voltage to starter solenoid Negative lead on 85, Positive lead on 86 = 12 VDC.
relay. Negative lead on Gnd, Positive lead on 87 & 30 = 12
VDC.
d. Inspect wiring to starter solenoid No physical damage to wiring or battery cable end.
and starter motor. No damaged or corroded terminals.
e. Check voltage to starter solenoid. Must be above 11.5 VDC.
f. Check voltage to starter motor. Must be above 10 VDC while cranking.
3 Check Fuel and Speed Actuator (FSA) & circuit
a. Check Run Relay LED LED 28 must be ON.
b. Check for 12 VDC on the Run Relay Must be 0 VDC
circuit
c. Check SPK20 for voltage Must be 12 VDC
d. Check ENSCU terminals 13 & 15 for Must be 12 VDC
voltage
e. Check FSA plunger Must be free to move
4 Check Starter
a. Inspect starter and wiring. No damage or corrosion.
Wiring and battery cable must be clean and tight
b. Check resistance of starter motor. See Section 2.13.2.
c. Check amperage draw of starter. See Section 2.13.2.
a. Inspect battery cable ends and Must be clean and tight.
posts. No corrosion.
b. Test voltage at battery with unit off. Must be above 11 VDC.
c. Test specific gravity of battery. Must be 1.225 or higher.
d. Perform load test on battery. (Follow battery manufacturer’s procedure and
guidelines.)
6 Check For Correct Engine Oil
a. Check for correct oil viscosity Refer to Section 2.8.
(weight) for conditions. Must be correct for ambient conditions.
62-11389 8--28
Alarm
36 CHECK COOLANT TEMPERATURE
• TRIGGER–ON: Coolant temperature is below 32°F (0°C) after the engine has been running for 5
minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when coolant temperature is less than 36°F (2.2°C) or alarm may be
manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
alarm(s). (See Note 1 Page 8.2.) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
1 Check Coolant Temperature
a. Check temperature of coolant or Must be above 32°F (0°C)
upper radiator hose
2 Check Engine Coolant Sensor
a. Check resistance of engine coolant Refer to Section 2.13.2
sensor (See Note 4 Page 8.2.)
b. Check harness and control box No physical damage to harness
connector pins and terminals. (See No damaged or corroded pins
c. Check voltage at harness connec- Must be 2.5 ± 0.5 VDC. This verifies microprocessor
tion to ENCT. output to sensor, and wiring connections from sensor
to microprocessor.
8--29 62-11389
Alarm
37 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM
• TRIGGER–ON: The microprocessor is set for low engine speed operation, and RPM being read by the
microprocessor are not correct. The correct RPM are:
Less than 1200 or greater than 1500 for more than 60 seconds (120 seconds when the microprocessor
calls for a change from high speed to low speed, or when the unit first starts)
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if microprocessor is set for low engine speed operation and RPM
are:
Between 1220 to 1480 for 60 seconds, or Alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the
unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Model Number
a. Verify that the model number on the Enter the correct number in the data list. (Refer to
Unit Data label matches the model Section 3.13.)
number shown in the
microprocessor Unit Data list.
2 Check For Proper Voltage To The Engine Speed Control Unit (Enscu) Pin 16. Check
For Proper Voltage With Unit Running.
a. Check ENSCU 16. 0 VDC between ENSCU 16 and ENSCU 19 (GND.)
3 Check Fuel And Speed Actuator (FSA)
a. Check fuel and speed actuator. Must move in and out freely.
4 Force Low Speed operation
a. Using Functional Parameters, set Unit will run in low speed. RPM must be within range
the Low Speed Start Up Delay to 10 shown above for each specific model. Adjust speed
minutes. linkage as needed.
b. Check operation of Speed Relay LED 27 must be OFF.
LED.
c.Check voltage at engine speed Must be 0 VDC.
control unit (ENSCU) pin 16.
5 Check Engine RPM
a. Check actual engine RPM using Refer to Section 2.8.
hand held tachometer. Adjust engine linkage setting as needed.
b. Compare actual RPM with those Both readings within ± 50 RPM.
shown on display.
6 Check Engine Air–Intake System
7 Check Engine Fuel System
a. Check fuel tank level. Must have enough fuel to run engine.
b Check fuel lines. Connections are tight and not leaking.
No kinks or sharp bends in the lines.
c Check fuel screen. Fuel screen is located in the inlet fitting to the lift
pump. Screen must be clean.
d Check fuel filters. Fuel filters must be clean and allow full flow of fuel
through them.
62-11389 8--30
Alarm
38 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM
• TRIGGER–ON: The microprocessor is set for high engine speed operation, and engine RPM are:
Less than 1650, or greater than 2075 for more than 60 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if microprocessor is set for high speed operation and RPM is
between 1670 and 1930 for 60 seconds or change unit to standby operation or alarm may be
manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again or alarm may be manually
reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
number shown in the
Microprocessor Unit Data list.
2 Check for proper voltage to the Engine Speed Control Unit (ENSCU) pin 16. Check for
proper voltage with unit running.
a. Check ENSCU 16. 12 VDC between ENSCU 16 and ENSCU19.
b. Check circuit from ENSCU 16 to Must be 12 VDC at MPQC3 and ENSCU16.
microprocessor connection
MPQC3.
3 Check Fuel And Speed Actuator (FSA) plunger
a. Check plunger on fuel and speed Must move in and out freely.
actuator. Spring tension must hold rod firmly extended and in
place.
4 Check FSA Harness
connector pins & terminals. (See No damaged or corroded pins or terminals.
b. Check resistance of Fuel and Refer to Section 2.13.2.
Speed Actuator.
5 Force High Speed Operation
a. Place unit in continuous run and The microprocessor will call for High Speed
adjust set point to at least 15 operation.
degrees away from refrigerated
compartment temperature, and a
temperature greater than 20°F
(5.6°C). If the unit does not
immediately go into High Speed, set
the AIRFLOW Functional
Parameter to HIGH.
b. Check operation of Speed Relay LED 27 must be ON. (If LED 27 is not on, the
LED. microprocessor is not calling for High Speed
operation. Check Speed Overrides in Section 4.6 for
more information.)
c. Check voltage on the engine speed Must be 12-14 VDC
control unit (ENSCU) pin 16.)
8--31 62-11389
Alarm
38 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM (Continued)
6 Check Engine RPM
shown on display.
62-11389 8--32
Alarm
39 CHECK ENGINE RPM
• TRIGGER–ON: In engine mode and Alarm 130 is not active and engine rpm is less than 1150 or
greater than 2000 for 5 minutes or engine rpm drops to less than 1100 for 2 seconds after the
engine rpm has been greater than 1250.
shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if engine rpm is greater than 1150 and less than 2000 for 5
minutes or after 15 minutes if the engine has been shutdown or change unit to standby operation or
number shown in the
microprocessor Unit Data list.
2 Check For Flash Code On Engine Speed Control Unit (Enscu)
ENSCU. Figure 10--1. thru Figure 10--4..
3 Refer To Electronic Speed Control Diagnostic Tables (Refer To 10.5)
a. Check plunger on fuel and speed Must move in and out freely.
actuator. Spring tension must hold rod firmly extended and in
place.
4 Check Fuel System
a. Check for Alarm 1. Fill tank as needed.
Fuel not gelled.
c. Check fuel system prime. No air in fuel system.
6 Force Low Speed Operation
a. Using Functional Parameters, set Unit will run in low speed. RPM must be within range
the High Speed Delay for at least 10 shown above for each specific model. Adjust speed
minutes so the unit starts in low linkage as needed.
speed.
b. Check operation of Speed Relay LED 27 must be OFF when the microprocessor is
LED. calling for Low Speed.
8--33 62-11389
Alarm
39 CHECK ENGINE RPM (Continued)
7 Check Low Speed Engine RPM
shown on display.
8 Force High Speed Operation
a. Place unit in continuous run and The microprocessor will call for High Speed
adjust set point to at least 15 operation.
degrees away from refrigerated
compartment temperature, and a
temperature greater than 20°F
(5.6°C) If the unit does not
immediately go into High Speed, set
the AIRFLOW Functional
Parameter to HIGH.
b. Check operation of Speed Relay LED 27 must be ON. (If LED 27 is not on, the
LED. microprocessor is not calling for High Speed
operation. Check Speed Overrides in Section 4.6 for
more information.)
9 Check high speed engine RPM
shown on display.
62-11389 8--34
Alarm
40 CHECK GLOW PLUGS (This alarm applies to the Intake Air Heater)
• TRIGGER–ON: Engine operation: Intake Air Heater amperage is less than 25 Amps, or greater
than 55 Amps after 14 seconds of glow time (NOTE: This can only occur when the
Engine Coolant Temperature is below 50°F (11°C) due to the glow time allowed.
See Table 4-1 for glow times.)
Standby operation: This alarm will not activate in standby operation.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if glow plug amperage is between 4 to 55 amps for at least 14
seconds during the glow cycle, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off,
then back on again.
number shown in the micropro-
cessor Unit Data list.
2 Check Glow Configuration
a. Verify that the Glow configuration is INTAKE HEATER must be the selection (Refer to
set to INTAKE HEATER. Section 6.2.1 for configuration settings.)
3 Check Air Intake Heater circuit
a. Inspect glow plug (air intake heater) No signs of discoloration from overheating.
relay & socket. No corrosion.
b. Check operation of Glow Plug (Air Use Component Test Mode to energize the Glow
Intake Heater) Relay. Plug (Intake Air Heater) Relay. (Refer to Section
6.2.2.)
LED 30 must be ON.
CAUTION:
Do not leave the circuit energized for the
full 5 minutes if full amperage is shown as
the intake air heater element life will be
greatly shortened.
c. Check Air Intake Heater circuit am- Press the Select Key. In Component Test Mode, only
perage. the Glow Plug (Air Intake Heater) Amps will be dis-
played.
d. Check voltage to Air Intake Heater. Must be 11 VDC or higher.
4 Check Air Intake Heater circuit wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box con- No physical damage to harness.
nector pins & terminals. (See wiring No damaged or corroded pins.
schematic Section 11.)
b. Check connection at Intake Air Ring terminal is tight on terminal.
Heater. No signs of overheating.
8--35 62-11389
Alarm
41 ENGINE STALLED
• TRIGGER–ON: The engine is running, RPM sensor is good, and engine speed is less than 10
RPM; or
The engine is running, RPM sensor alarm is ON, and the Oil Pressure switch contacts are open.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine Operation: Engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
Standby Operation: This alarm will not activate in standby operation.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Restart after 15 minutes, or Alarm may be manually reset via keypad or
alarm(s). (See Note 1 Page 8.2.) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
1 Check For Alarm 130 -- Check RPM Sensor
a. Check for alarm 130. When Alarms 130 and 41 occur at the same time,
generally the engine has run out or is running out of
fuel. This causes the engine RPM to surge and drop.
Check fuel tank and add fuel as necessary.
Check fuel lines between the fuel tank and the fuel
pump inlet for drawing air in.
2 Check For Flash Code On Engine Speed Control Unit (ENSCU)
ENSCU. Figure 10--1. thru Figure 10--4.
All flash codes must be cleared before continuing.
3 Was Engine Shut Off Manually?
a. Check for external cause. Correct problem.
4 Check For Bad F2 Or F3 Fuse Alarm
5 Check Fuel System
a. Check for Alarm 1. Fill tank as needed.
Fuel not gelled.
c. Check fuel system prime. No air in fuel system.
d. Check fuel system check valve from Check valve must hold fuel and not leak back.
filter to injection pump.
6 Check Fuel Speed Actuator (FSA)
a. Check Run Relay LED. LED 28 must be ON.
b. Check voltage to ENSCU module. Use Component Test Mode to energize Run Relay.
(Refer to Section 6.2.2.)
Must have 12.0 VDC or higher reading between
ENSCU 13 and 19.
c. Inspect ENSCU module connector No damaged or corroded pins
pins & terminals. Wires plugged in.
d. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
e. Check resistance of FSA. Refer to Section 2.13.2.
f. Check operation of FSA. Plunger must move in when energized.
62-11389 8--36
Alarm
41 ENGINE STALLED (Continued)
7 Check Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN)
8 Check Electrical System Amperage
a. Check the configuration setting for Must be set for 22 -- 26 Amps
Diesel Max Gen Amps.
b. Check the configuration setting for Must be set for 4 Amps
Diesel Offset Max Amps.
c. With the unit operating, check all 3 Must be no more than 26 Amps.
high voltage circuits for amperage.
9 Check engine air–intake system
10 Check engine exhaust system
11 Check engine
a. Check Injection pump timing. Timing must be correct.
b. Check engine valve adjustment. Rocker arm clearance must be correct.
c. Check engine compression. Compression must be above 400 psig (27.2 bar.)
12 Check refrigeration system
a. Check discharge & suction Must be within normal operating range for conditions.
pressures.
8--37 62-11389
Alarm
8.6 WARNING / STATUS ALARMS
51 ALTERNATOR NOT CHARGING (UNIT BATTERY NOT CHARGING)
• TRIGGER–ON: Unit is running on either engine or standby and the current flow is more than
--1.0 amps (discharge) between the battery charger and the battery for 3 continuous minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: alarm only or (if Alternator Check Shutdown configuration
is set to YES (configured for shutdown)) engine and unit shutdown and
alarm.
Standby operation: alarm only regardless of configuration setting.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset (if not shut down) when alternator is charging if not shutdown or
change unit to standby operation or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off,
then back on again.
alarm(s). See Note 1 Page 8.2. Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
1 Check Microprocessor Current Sensor
a. Check microprocessor current Power up microprocessor in PC Mode. (See Note
value. 6.1.) Must be --2.0 to 1.5A with no load.
2 Check Wire Direction Through Current Sensor
a. Visually inspect wire at current Must go through current sensor in the direction of the
sensor. arrow on the sensor toward the F--5 (80A) fuse.
3 Check Battery Charger Wiring
a. Check output & ground wire (unit Negative lead on Ground terminal
OFF.) Positive lead on Output terminal = same as battery
voltage.
b. Check battery charger input. Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.13.
Must be between the two red Wires.
c. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
d. Check output and ground wire When the unit is started, battery voltage at the bat-
voltages (unit running.) tery will begin near 12.0 VDC, and slowly rise toward
13.5 VDC as the battery charges.
NOTE: Do not test for voltage at the output connec-
tor of the battery charger without the connector being
connected to the battery. Without the battery con-
nected any reading will be very inaccurate. (Refer to
Section 8 for more information on checking battery
charger.)
4 Check For Add–on Equipment Drawing Too Much Current
a. Check amperage of added–on All add–on components & accessories must draw
components & accessories. less than 20 Amps.
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. before proceeding.
62-11389 8--38
Alarm
53 BOX TEMP OUT--OF--RANGE
• TRIGGER–ON:
Alarm Only:
Condition One: If the unit is not running in Sleep Mode and the refrigerated compartment
temperature has been in range [within ±2.7°F (±1.5°C) for perishable set points or +2.7°F (±1.5°C)
for frozen set points] at least once since the unit was started and is now further away from set point
than the limit set in the functional parameters for the Out--of--Range Value [ 4°, 5°, or 7°F (2°, 3°, or
4°C)] for 15 continuous minutes (30 minutes following a defrost cycle) OR
Condition Two: (NOTE: If SAT is not configured on, or if either the RAT or SAT alarm is active
(A122 or A123), Condition 2 can not trigger this alarm on.) If SAT is configured ON and the unit is
running in COOL and the DeltaT (SAT minus RAT) is not greater than --1°F (--0.56°C) for 30
continuous minutes or if the unit is running in HEAT and the SAT is not greater than the RAT for 30
continuous minutes OR
Condition Three: If a shutdown alarm occurs and the RAT temperature is further away from set
point than the limit set in the functional parameters for the Out--of--Range value [ 4°, 5°, or 7°F (2°,
3°, or 4°C)] for more than 30 continuous minutes regardless if the refrigerated compartment
temperature has been in--range or not.
Shut Down & Alarm:

Condition One: When configured for shutdown the unit will shut down when the conditions for
Alarm Only Condition One are met for 45 continuous minutes.
Condition Two: When configured for shutdown the unit will shut down when the conditions for
Alarm Only Condition Two are met for 30 continuous minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation:
If the microprocessor is not configured for shutdown, alarm only.
If the microprocessor is configured for shutdown the engine and unit will shutdown and
alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Condition 1: Auto Reset when the refrigerated compartment temperature is
within ±2.7°F (±1.5°C) of set point;
Condition 2: Auto Reset when the DeltaT is greater than --1°F (--0.56°C); or
For either Condition, alarm may be manually reset via Keypad OR by turning the unit off, then back
on again.
NOTE: For Condition One, the temperature criteria for this alarm is reset, and the refrigerated compartment
temperature must again go In--Range before this alarm can be triggered if any of the following occur:
•Pretrip is started.
•Set point is changed.
•A door switch or remote switch is installed and configured as a door switch, and the switch is opened indicating
that the compartment door has been opened.
NOTE: The15, 30, or 45 minute timer is reset and starts again whenever:
•The unit cycles off and restarts in Start--Stop.
•The unit goes into and comes out of Defrost.
NOTE: This alarm does not go into the Inactive alarm List when it becomes inactive or is cleared.
NOTE: This alarm will not be used in Sleep Mode.
Troubleshooting steps begin on the next page.
8--39 62-11389
Alarm
53 BOX TEMP OUT--OF--RANGE (Continued)
1 Check Compartment Doors
a. Inspect all trailer compartment Must be closed, no air leakage.
doors.
2 Defrost Evaporator
a. Initiate Manual Defrost Cycle. Must terminate automatically.
All ice cleared from all evaporator coils.
3 Check For Any Shutdown Alarm(s)
a. Check the Alarm List for any Shut- Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
down Alarms. cleared to continue.
4 Check For Low Refrigerant Pressure Alarm
5 Check Refrigerant Level
a. Visually check refrigerant level in Must be at correct level. Refer to Section 9.19.
receiver tank.
a. Install Manifold Test Set and check Suction & Discharge Pressures must be in the
system pressures. normal range. Suction & Discharge Pressures must
have the same reading on gauges & on micro
display.
7 Check Evaporator Airflow Alarm
a. Check for alarm 56. Must be corrected and cleared to continue.
9 Check For Low Delta--T
a. Read Delta--T from Unit Data List. In Cool, the Delta--T must be greater than(cooling
more than) --1°F (--0.56°C.)
In Heat the Delta--T must be greater than 0 (1SAT
must be higher than 1RAT.)
62-11389 8--40
Alarm
54 DEFROST NOT COMPLETE
• TRIGGER–ON: Defrost cycle did not complete within 45 minutes
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only. While this alarm is active, the Defrost
Timer will be set to initiate a defrost cycle 90 minutes (1.5 hours) of unit running time after the alarm
comes on.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when defrost cycle is started again, or alarm may be manually
2 Check For Defective Defrost Sensor Location/Correct Installation
a. Has sensor fallen from location? Must be corrected to continue.
3 Check Evaporator Fan Contactor(s)
a. Check that contactor(s) is not Must disengage evaporator fan in each enabled
energized and that the contacts are compartment during defrost.
not stuck closed in defrost.
4 Check Evaporator Heater Current Draw
a. Check Compartment 1 Heater These checks must be made with the unit operating.
amp draw for HTCON1
WARNING
Caution and good electrical practices must
be used when working around and with
b. Check Compartment 1 Heater high voltage circuits.
amp draw for HTCON2
Verify that all three actual amperage readings for
each component are within 10% of each other, and
are within the values shown in section 2.13.
8--41 62-11389
Alarm
55 CHECK DEFROST AIR SWITCH
• TRIGGER–ON: The defrost air switch has called for a defrost cycle within 8 minutes of a defrost
termination for 2 consecutive defrost cycles. (The air switch contacts were closed continuously for
15 seconds before the defrost cycle was started.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only. While this alarm is active, the defrost
air switch will NOT be used to initiate a defrost cycle; however the Defrost Timer will initiate a
defrost cycle 90 minutes after the alarm comes on, and the manual defrost switch will remain
operative.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when defrost cycle terminates correctly, and the air switch does
not call for a defrost cycle within the 8 minutes following defrost termination, or alarm may be
1 Check Defrost Air Switch
a. Inspect switch & connector pins & No damaged or corroded pins.
terminals.
b. Check switch setting and resistance Refer to Section 2.12.
of switch contacts. Contacts closed with pressure applied to high side.
Contacts open with no pressure applied.
2 Check Switch Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box See Note Note 5 on page 8--2.
connector pins & terminals. (See No physical damage to harness.
wiring schematic Section 11.) No damaged or corroded pins.
3 Check Air Switch Hoses
a. Inspect air hoses to switch. No kinks or other obstructions.
No holes.
Connected to correct nipple.
4 Check Condition Of Evaporator
a. Visually inspect evaporator Coil must be clean and cleared of ice or any other
following defrost. material.
5 Perform Pretrip
6 Check Evaporator Pressure Drop
a. Check pressure reading with Refer to Section 9.33.2.
Magnehelic Gauge.
7 Check Evaporator Contactor
a. Check Evap Fan operation for each Must disengage fan.
enabled compartment in defrost. All evaporator fans must be turned off.
8 Check Condition Of Refrigerated Compartment & Load
a. Check condition of refrigerated Doors must be closed, and door seals must seal and
compartment doors & seals. prevent outside air from leaking in.
b. Check condition of product. If it is
warm and moist, frequent defrost
cycles can be expected.
62-11389 8--42
Alarm
59 DATALOGGER NOT RECORDING
• TRIGGER–ON: No data is being recorded by the data recorder.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad.
1 Clear Alarm
a. Clear Active Alarm(s). Alarms Clear.
b. Check for Active Alarm If Inactive, download all data & retain.
re--occurrence. If Active, go to next step.
2 Microprocessor Defective
a. Download previous data using Data retrieval OK.
Download PC Card, or
b. Replace microprocessor & set New microprocessor in place.
Configurations, Functional
Parameters, Enter hours from
removed microprocessor, set
Maintenance Hour Meters, and
Data Recorder Setup.
NOTE: Specific configurations or IntelliSet settings may be found on the TransCentral Website (Authorized
Carrier Transicold Dealers only.)
8--43 62-11389
Alarm
60 DATALOGGER TIME WRONG
• TRIGGER–ON: The real time clock in the Data Recorder does not contain a valid date.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when the Data Recorder Real Time Clock is reset, or alarm may
be manually reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Real Time Clock
a. Check Real Time Clock in the Data Must show correct date and time. Change as needed
List, or using ReeferManager or (Configuration List).
Service Manager.
2 Reset Microprocessor
a. Turn main switch off for 30 seconds, Microprocessor powers up OK.
then turn on.
b. Check for valid Real Time Clock Valid date and time in memory.
reading in Data List. Alarm is cleared automatically.
c. Real Time Clock can not be Replace microprocessor.
changed.
3 Microprocessor Defective
a. Download previous data using Data retrieval OK.
Download PC Card, or
b. Replace microprocessor & set New microprocessor in place.
Configurations, Functional
Parameters, Enter hours from
removed microprocessor, set
Maintenance Hour Meters, and
Data Recorder Setup.
62-11389 8--44
Alarm
61 DOOR OPEN
• TRIGGER–ON: Trailer or rail car compartment door has been open for more than five seconds.
NOTE:
SThis alarm is disabled for Shutdown when the ’Unit Operation’ configuration is set for Rail
and the unit is operating in Sleep Mode.
SShut down may be overridden in the Functional Parameter list.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only, or may be configured to shut unit down or operate the unit in Low
Engine Speed.
• RESET CONDITION:
Alarm Only: Auto Reset after the door has been closed for more than five seconds.
Shutdown: Auto Reset after three minutes (minimum off time for door open condition) and the door has
been closed for more than five seconds.
1 Check To See If Refrigerated Compartment Side Or Rear Door Is Open
a. Inspect refrigerated compartment Refrigerated compartment door(s) must be closed.
doors.
2 Check Wiring
a. Visually inspect wiring to door Wiring must be connected.
switch.
b. Visually inspect condition of switch Must not be damaged.
c. Check voltage at door switch con- 0 Volts with the SROS in the OFF position.
nector. 12 Volts with the SROS in the START / RUN posi-
tion.
d. Check voltage from door switch to Check with the door open and the door closed.
Microprocessor Must have 0 Volts with the door in one position and
12 Volts with the door in the other position.
3 Check Door Switch
a. Check switch operation. Contacts must Open & Close as door is opened and
closed.
4 Check Configurations
a. Verify that Configuration is set for Must be correct for type of door switch.
the type of switch being used (i.e.
when Door is open, switch contacts
are closed; etc.)
5 Temporary Solution Tip
a. In the event of a defective switch In the Functional Parameter list set OVERRIDE
that can not be repaired or replaced, DOOR SHUTDOWN to YES.
and the switch is forcing the unit into
a Shutdown, this alarm may be tem-
porarily overridden by setting the
correct Functional Parameter.
8--45 62-11389
Alarm
8.7 ELECTRICAL ALARMS
71 BAD F2 OR F3 FUSE
• TRIGGER–ON: One or more of the following fuse circuits have been open for more than 2
seconds: F2, F3
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Alarm Only. If the engine shut off, see troubleshooting
steps below to correct.
Standby operation: Additional verification required if the “No Power” configu
ration is set for “Installed and Shut Down” the refrigeration system will shut
down with the alarm on and PSCON still energized.
again.
1 Check Unit Operation
a. Did engine shut down? Yes Check F3.
No Check F2.
2 Check Fuses
a. Locate blown fuse(s). Will have open circuit.
b. Verify fuse size. Refer to Section 2.14.
Must be correct rating for circuit. (See wiring
schematic. Section 11.)
c. Inspect fuse & fuse holder. Terminals tight; No signs of overheating, melting or
discoloration.
3 Check Circuit
a. Check amperage draw on Speed Refer to Section 2.13.2.
Relay circuit.
b. Check amperage draw on Run Refer to Section 2.13.2.
Relay circuit.
62-11389 8--46
Alarm
73 NO POWER--CHECK POWER CORD
• TRIGGER–ON: In standby mode AND no AC power
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: this alarm will not activate in engine operation.
Standby operation: if the “No Power” configuration is set for “Installed and
Shut Down” the refrigeration system will shut down with the alarm on and
PSCON still energized.
If the “No Power: configuration is set for “Switch to Engine” and the “No
Power--Switch to Diesel” functional parameter is set to “Yes”, the unit will re
main off for 5 minutes, then restart on Engine power.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when AC power is present AND configuration is set to shutdown
or if the user changes the switch to standby operation or alarm may be manually reset via keypad
or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Circuit Breaker On The Main Supply
a. Check circuit breaker. 30A supply circuit breaker -- Must be on.
b. Check the voltage in the plug. 460V / 3 / 60Hz.
2 Check Power Cord
a. Inspect connections in the socket Connections must be tight.
and the plug.
b. Inspect the cable. Cable must not be frayed, cut or damaged.
3 Check For Power In The Control Box
a. Check for voltage at PSCON All three readings must be 460V 10% .
L1--L2, L2--L3, L1--L3.
b. Check for voltage at PSCON2 All three readings must be 460V 10%.
L1--L2, L2--L3, L1--L3.
4 Check Connections
a. Check for bad connections in the Connections and wire crimps must be tight.
control box.
5 Check Phase Reversal Module (PRM)
a. Check for voltage at 5MP04. Must be +12 VDC.
b. Check Phase Reversal Module for See Section 9.30. Replace PRM if defective.
correct operation.
8--47 62-11389
Alarm
75 COMP MOTOR OVERLOAD
• TRIGGER–ON: Compressor Motor Internal Protector (IPC) circuit is open.
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when motor overload input is within limits, or change to engine
operation, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check For A--13 (High Pressure) (Check Download)
a. A13 will always cause this alarm to Review steps for A13 and correct if necessary.
activate.
2 Check For Power At 4MP1
a. If 12VDC. Alarm should have cleared itself.
b. If no power (0VDC.) Test IP circuit from compressor motor to
microprocessor.
3 Check IPC circuit
a. Use Component Test Mode to ener- FET 2 will be on.
gize CCON circuit (Refer to Section
6.2.2.)
b. Check IPC harness to microproces- 12 VDC on terminals 8 & 9 at the compressor (white
sor. wires.)
c. Check SP15. There should be 12 VDC from HP1 to SP15 to IPC.
d. Test continuity through IPC. Should be 0 Ohms. If compressor body is extremely
warm, allow it to cool off, then recheck IPC continuity.
e. Test IP circuit from compressor mo- 12 VDC at 4MP1.
tor to microprocessor.
4 Check Compressor Motor Contactor
a. Inspect the wire connections to the No signs of overheating of the contactor. Wiring is
contactor. routed correctly to the contactor.
b. Check tightness of the contactor Tighten with screwdriver and check for discoloration
wire connections. of wires.
5 Perform Pretrip
6 Check Compressor Motor Operation
a. Turn the unit ON in Engine or Check voltage and current on each phase (voltage
Standby mode. and amperage must be within allowable range (Refer
to Section 2.13)
62-11389 8--48
Alarm
76 CONDENSER MOTOR OVERHEATED
• TRIGGER–ON: One or both of the condenser fan motor Internal Protectors (IP--CDM1 AND 2) cir-
cuit is open.
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when motor overload input is within limits, or change to engine
operation, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Condenser Fan Blades for Free Operation
a. Visually inspect condenser fan Fan blade must be in good condition.
blades for any foreign material or No sticks or other material obstructing it’s movement
damage or anything that will pre- No ice build--up preventing blade rotation.
vent the blade and motor from turn-
ing freely
a. If 12VDC. Alarm should have cleared itself.
b. If no power (0VDC.) Continue with step 2 below.
3 Check IPC circuit
a. Check MPQC9. There should be 12 VDC from MPQC9 to Ground.
b. Use Component Test Mode to ener- FET 1 will be on.
gize CDCON circuit. (Refer to Sec-
tion 6.2.2.)
c. Unplug the connector to condenser 12 VDC between pin 4 and pin 5 indicates the open
fan motor 1 (CDM1) and check circuit is in the IP for CDM1.
voltage on pins 4--5 in the engine
harness connector.
d. Test continuity through CDM1 IP at Should be 0 Ohms. If condenser fan motor 1 is
pins 4--5 in the fan motor harness extremely warm, allow it to cool off, then recheck IP
connector. continuity.
e. Test continuity through IPC. Should be 0 Ohms. If either condenser fan motor is
extremely warm, allow it to cool off, then recheck IPC
continuity.
f. Test IP circuit from condenser fan 12 VDC at 4MP2.
motor wires to microprocessor.
4 Check Condenser Fan Motor Contactor
a. Inspect the wire connections to No signs of overheating of the contactor. Wiring is
the contactor. routed correctly to the contactor.
wire connections. of wires.
5 Perform Pretrip
8--49 62-11389
Alarm
76 CONDENSER MOTOR OVERHEATED (Continued)
6 Check Condenser Fan Motors
a. Disconnect power plug at motor. Test IP circuit for continuity using ohmmeter.
If open, remove and replace motor.
If closed, then an intermittent IP circuit is suspect.
Check phase to phase and phase to ground for short
or open circuits. Refer to Section 2.13.
If motor tests good, check the DC IP circuit to
microprocessor.
7 Check Motor Operation
a. Turn the unit ON. Check current on each phase (must be less than
shown on Section 2.13.)
Check voltage on each phase (must be within voltage
limits shown in Section 2.13.)
62-11389 8--50
Alarm
77 EVAP MOTOR OVERHEATED
• TRIGGER–ON: The evaporator fan motor Internal Protectors (IP--EVM1 AND 2) is open.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Evaporator will shut down. All other enabled
compartments will continue to run.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset after a 15 minute off time when motor overload input is within
limits, or change to engine operation, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the
unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Evaporator Fan Blades for Free Operation
a. Visually inspect evaporator fan for Blower wheel must be in good condition.
any foreign material or damage or No sticks or other material obstructing its movement
anything that will prevent the blade No ice build--up preventing blade rotation.
and motor from turning freely
b. If 12VDC Alarm should have cleared itself.
a. If no power (0VDC) Continue with step 2 below.
3 Check IPC Circuit
a. Use Component Test Mode to ener- FET 20 will be on.
gize Evaporator Motor Contactor
circuit. (Refer to Section 6.2.2.)
b. Unplug the connector to the evapo- 12 VDC between pin 4 in the engine harness
rator fan motor and check voltage connector and Ground.
on IP--EVM (white) wire.
c. Check MPQC9. There should be 12 VDC from MPQC9 to Ground.
d. Test continuity through IPC. Should be 0 Ohms. If the evaporator fan motor is
extremely warm, allow it to cool off, then recheck IPC
continuity.
e. Test IP circuit from evaporator fan 12 VDC at 4MP3
motor junction box to microproces-
sor.
4 Check Evaporator Fan Motor Contactor
a. Inspect the wire connections to No signs of overheating of the contactor. Wiring is
the contactor. routed correctly to the contactor.
wire connections of wires.
5 Perform Pretrip
8--51 62-11389
Alarm
77 EVAP MOTOR OVERHEATED (Continued)
6 Check Evaporator Fan Motor
a. Disconnect power plug at motor Test IP circuit for continuity using ohmmeter
If open, remove and replace motor
If closed, then an intermittent IP circuit is suspect.
Check phase to phase and phase to ground for short
or open circuits. Refer to Section 2.13.
If motor tests good, check the DC IP circuit to
microprocessor.
7 Check Motor Operation
a. Turn the unit ON Check current on each phase (must be less than
shown on Section 2.13).
Check voltage on each phase (must be at within lim-
its shown in Section 2.13.)
62-11389 8--52
Alarm
83 CHECK REMOTE DEFROST LIGHT
• TRIGGER–ON: Defrost light current (amp) draw is higher than 0.8 Amps.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when Defrost light current (amp) draw is normal, or alarm may be
1 Check Defrost Light (if used)
a. Inspect Defrost light & socket. No damaged or corroded pins.
b. Check light bulb. Should have 4.8 ¦ 0.2 Ohms of resistance.
Replace with known good bulb
2 Check Defrost Light Wiring
a. Inspect Defrost Light circuit The Defrost Light Circuit is not used with this model.
(3MP20 (See wiring schematic However it is available for external / optional devices
Section 11.) that require a signal that the unit is operating in the
Defrost Cycle. Any device that is connected to this
circuit can trigger this alarm if the Trigger--On
parameters are exceeded.
84 CHECK REMOTE ALARM LIGHT

• TRIGGER–ON: Remote Alarm light current (amp) draw is higher than 0.8 Amps.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when Alarm light current (amp) draw is normal, or alarm may be
1 Check 2--Light Bar Wiring
a. Inspect Remote 2-- Light Bar No damaged or corroded pins.
connector and wiring harness.
b. Inspect harness & control box See Note 2 & Note 6 on Page 8.2.
2 Check 2--Light Bar
a. Check operation of 2--Light Bar Refer to Section 9.32.1 for information on testing the
2--Light Bar.
8--53 62-11389
Alarm
85 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT
• TRIGGER–ON: Front Unloader (UL1) Coil current (amp) draw is higher than 2.0 Amps.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when the UL1 Coil current (amp) draw is normal, or alarm may
1 Check Front Unloader (UL1) Coil
a. Inspect Front Unloader (UL1) coil No damage to coil
& terminals No damaged or corroded pins
b. Check resistance of coil Refer to Section 2.13.2. Cannot be opened (infinite

ohms), shorted (Zero Ohms) or shorted to ground.
c. Check amp draw of coil. Refer to Section 2.13.2. Use ammeter.
2 Check Front Unloader (UL1) Current Draw
a. Use Component Test Mode to test Refer to Section 2.13.2 for normal current values.
actual current draw of the circuit. View current draw in Data List.
3 Check Front Unloader (UL1) Coil Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box See Note 2 & Note 6 Page 8.2.
86 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT

• TRIGGER–ON: Rear Unloader (UL2) Coil current (amp) draw is higher than 2.0 Amps.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when the UL2 Coil current (amp) draw is normal, or alarm may
1 Check Rear Unloader (UL2) Coil
a. Inspect Rear Unloader (UL2) coil & No damage to coil.
terminals. No damaged or corroded pins.
b. Check resistance of coil. Refer to Section 2.13.2. Cannot be opened (infinite

2 Check Rear Unloader (UL2) Current Draw
3 Check Rear Unloader (UL2) Coil Wiring
62-11389 8--54
Alarm
89 CHECK REMOTE AUTO LIGHT
• TRIGGER–ON: Remote Auto light current (amp) draw is higher than 0.8 Amps.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when Auto light current (amp) draw is normal, or alarm may be
1 Check 2--Light Bar Wiring
a. Inspect Remote 2-- Light Bar No damaged or corroded pins.
connector and wiring harness.
b. Inspect harness & control box See Note 2 & Note 6 on Page 8.2.
2 Check 2--Light Bar
a. Check operation of 2--Light Bar Refer to Section 9.32.1 for information on testing the
2--Light Bar.
91 CHECK HTCON1 RELAY COIL

• TRIGGER–ON: Heater Contactor 1 (HTCON1) coil current is more 5 Amps
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit
1 Check HTCON1
a. Inspect heater contactor relay coil No damage to coil.
and terminals. No damaged or corroded pins.
b. Check contactor coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.13.2. Cannot be opened (infinite
2 Check HTCON1 Current Draw
3 Check HTCON1 Wiring
8--55 62-11389
Alarm
92 CHECK 1HTCON2 RELAY COIL
• TRIGGER–ON: Heater contactor 2 (1HTCON2) coil current is more than 5 Amps
1 Check 1HTCON2
a. Inspect heater contactor coil and No damage to coil
terminals No damaged or corroded pins
b. Check contactor coil resistance Refer to Section 2.13.2. Cannot be opened (infinite
2 Check 1HTCON2 Current Draw
3 Check 1HTCON2 Wiring
wiring schematic Section 11.) No damaged or corroded pins
62-11389 8--56
Alarm
93 CHECK START UP BUZZER
• TRIGGER–ON: The Buzzer circuit is shorted. (The Buzzer output from the microprocessor is nega-
tive, so the circuit will not be shorted to ground, but is shorted either within the Buzzer itself, or to a
positive wire.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when Buzzer amp draw is normal, or alarm may be manually
1 Check Buzzer
a. Inspect Buzzer & wire No damage to buzzer.
connections. No damaged or corroded pins.
b. Check resistance of buzzer. Refer to Section 2.13.2. Cannot be opened (infinite
2 Check Buzzer Wiring
3 Check Buzzer Current Draw
94 CHECK COMP CONTACTOR 1

• TRIGGER–ON: Compressor motor contactor relay (CCONR) coil current is excessive.
1 Check CCONR
a. Inspect compressor contactor No damage to coil.
relay coil and terminals. No damaged or corroded pins.
2 Check CCONR Wiring
3 Check CCONR Current Draw
8--57 62-11389
Alarm
95 CHECK CDCON RELAY COIL
• TRIGGER–ON: Condenser fan motor contactor coil (CDCON) current is more than 5 Amps
1 Check CDCON
a. Inspect condenser fan contactor No damage to coil.
coil and terminals. No damaged or corroded pins.
2 Check CDCON Current Draw
3 Check CDCON
96 CHECK GENCONR RELAY COIL

• TRIGGER–ON: Generator contactor relay coil (GENCONR) current is more than 5 Amps
1 Check GENCONR
a. Inspect generator contactor relay No damage to coil.
2 Check GENCONR Current Draw
3 Check GENCONR Wiring
62-11389 8--58
Alarm
98 CHECK HIGH TEMP THERMOSTAT
• TRIGGER–ON: With the SROS in the START / RUN position the 1EVHTS circuit is open.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm AND no heat allowed.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when the 1EVHTS circuit is okay for 15 minutes, or alarm may be
1 Check Evaporator Area For High Temperature
a. Check Evaporator temperature us- EVHTS opens when the temperature of the
ing a test thermometer. evaporator becomes very high (Refer to Section 2.12
for temperature). (For example, if the heaters are on
when the fan is not running.) If the temperature of the
evaporator section is very warm (hot), it will have to
cool down before the EVHTS closes.
2 Check High Temperature Thermostat (EVHTS)
a. Inspect high temperature thermo- No damage to switch.
stat and connector. No damage or corrosion in connector.
3 Check High Temperature Contacts
a. Contacts must be closed when Must be 0 (zero) Ohms. Cannot be opened (infinite
temperature is normal. Unplug ohms) or shorted to ground.
EVHTS and check for continuity.
b. Check for power on MPQC9. 12 VDC at MPQC9
Unplug EVHTS and check for continuity
12 VDC at EVHTS pin A.
Visually inspect and repair SP52 as needed.
99 CHECK STANDBY CONTACTOR

• TRIGGER–ON: Standby motor contactor relay (PSCONR) current is higher than normal. (See
Table 2-6).
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only. In engine operation, the unit will con-
tinue to operate. In Standby the refrigeration system will not operate.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when the PSCONR Coil current (amp) draw is normal, or alarm
may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check PSCONR
a. Inspect standby contactor relay No damage to coil.
2 Check PSCONR Current Draw
3 Check PSCONR Wiring
8--59 62-11389
Alarm
100 OVERLOAD/GROUND FAULT
• TRIGGER–ON: The SROS is in the START / RUN position and the overload and ground fault
detector is reading more than 40 Amps on any A/C current leg OR there is A/C voltage leaking to
ground of more than 150 mAmps.
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset in engine mode. Alarm may be manually reset via Keypad or,
alarm may be reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check (Overload Ground Fault Detector (OGF) LED
a. Visually inspect the LED for being LED is On -- Ground Fault is detected. Start with
On or Off. Step 3 below.
LED is Off -- Circuit Overload is detected. Start with
Step 2 below.
2 Check For Electrical Overload
a. Check high voltage amp draw from Must be less than 40 Amps.
GENCON if running on engine or
PSCON2 if running on standby.
3 Check For High Voltage Short To Ground
a. Check for ohm reading from T1, T2 Reading must be greater than 25.000 Ohms.
and T3 of ALL High voltage
contactors to ground.
b. Perform Megohmmeter test on all See Section 9.6.
high voltage circuits.
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Note during which test Alarm 100 occurs.
Pretrip & check for any new alarms.
b. Further test circuit from Step a. Use a megohmmeter to test.
above.
5 Check Overload / Ground Fault Device
a. With the engine OFF and standby Must have 12 VDC at HC19 and 2MP26.
power disconnected, place the
SROS in the START / RUN position. Refer to Section 9.31.2 for checking OGF.
62-11389 8--60
Alarm
8.8 SENSOR ALARMS
121 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT) is not within the range of --53 to +158°F
(--47° to +70° C.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: A value of 122°F (50°C) will be used for any cal-
culations.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when Ambient Air Sensor is in range or alarm may be manually
resetvia keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Ambient Air Sensor
a. Inspect Ambient Air Sensor & No damage to sensor.
connector. No damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector.
b. Check Ambient Air Sensor 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
resistance (See Note 4 Page 8.2.) complete table of temperatures and resistance
values.
2 Check Ambient Air Sensor Wiring
b. Power microprocessor up (See Voltage should be 2.5 VDC volts at harness plug be-
Note 2 and Note 3 Page 8.2). tween pins.
Disconnect sensor from harness.
Check for voltage at harness plug
between pins.
8--61 62-11389
Alarm
122 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Return Air Temperature Sensor (RAT) is not within the range of --53 to +158°F (--47
to +70° C.)
• UNIT CONTROL:Engine and standby operation:
If Alarm 123 -- Check Supply Air Sensor -- is not active: alarm only and switch to supply air control.
If Alarm 123 is active and the functional parameter Temperature Control is set for Return Air and
the set point is in the perishable range: alarm and shut down.
If Alarm 123 is active and set point is frozen: alarm and unit will operate in reduced capacity COOL
mode. (See Section 5.5.)
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when Return Air Sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually
1 Check Return Air Sensor (1RAT)
a. Inspect Return Air Sensor & No damage to sensor
connector. No damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector
b. Check Return Air Sensor resistance 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
(See Note 4 Page 8.2.) complete table of temperatures and resistance
values.
2 Check Return Air Sensor Wiring
connector pins & terminals. (See No damaged or corroded pins
between pins.
62-11389 8--62
Alarm
123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Supply Air Temperature Sensor (SAT) is not within the range of --53 to +158°F
(--47 to +70° C.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby:
If Alarm 122 is not active and functional parameter Temperature Control is set for Supply Air and
the set point for Compartment 1 is in the perishable range: alarm only and switch to return air
control.
If Alarm 122 is active: set unit control as described in Alarm 122.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when Supply Air Sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually
1 Check Supply Air Sensor (1SAT)
a. Inspect Supply Air Sensor & No damage to sensor.
b. Check Supply Air Sensor 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
resistance. (See Note 4 Page 8.2.) complete table of temperatures and resistance
values.
2 Check Supply Air Sensor Wiring
between pins.
8--63 62-11389
Alarm
124 CHECK DEFROST TERM 1 SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor (DTT) is not within the range of
--53 to +158°F (--47 to +70° C.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby:
If Alarm 122 is not active: Alarm and RAT will be used for defrost initiation and a heat defrost will
end after 10 minutes.
If Alarms 122 and 123 are also both active: alarm and defrost will not be allowed.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when DTT1 is in range or, alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Defrost Termination Temperature (DTT) Sensor
a. Inspect Defrost Termination Tem- No damage to sensor.
perature Sensor & connector. No damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector.
b. Check Defrost Termination Tem- 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
perature Sensor resistance. complete table of temperatures and resistance val-
(See Note 4 Page 8.2.) ues.
2 Check DTT Sensor Wiring
b. Power microprocessor up (See Voltage should be 2.5 VDC volts at harness plug
Note 2 and Note 3 Page 8.2). between pins.
between pins.
62-11389 8--64
Alarm
125 CHECK COMP DISCHARGE SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor is not within the range of
–40 to +392°F (--40 to +200°C.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Alarm Only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when Compressor Discharge Sensor is in range or, alarm may be
1 Check Compressor Discharge Sensor (CDT)
a. Inspect Compressor Discharge No damage to sensor.
Sensor & connector. No damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector.
b. Check Compressor Discharge (Refer to Table 9--7 for complete resistance chart)
Sensor resistance. (See Note 4 100,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.)
Page 8.2.)
2 Check Compressor Discharge Sensor Wiring
Wiring schematic Section 11.)
between pins.
8--65 62-11389
Alarm
126 CHECK FUEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
• TRIGGER–ON: The fuel level reading (in the data list) is less than 2% for 30 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Alarm Only.
Standby operation: This alarm does not activate in standby.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when fuel level is sensed above 4% for 30 seconds or, alarm may
a. Check fuel level in the fuel tank. Add fuel as needed to the fuel tank.
2 Check Fuel Level Sensor
a. Inspect fuel level sensor& No physical damage to sensor.
b. Check fuel level sensor operation. Energize circuit (See Note 2 Page 8.2.) DO NOT
START UNIT.
c. Check for voltage at harness plug Voltage should be 12 volts at harness plug between
between pins for BLACK (SPK6) pins for BLACK (SP24) and RED (SPK5) wires.
and RED (SPK5) wires.
d. Check continuity of the wire from Place the SROS in the OFF position prior to
the harness plug, pin C to the checking for continuity. Must be less than 10 ohms.
microprocessor plug 1MP26.
3 Check Fuel Level Sensor Calibration
a. Check fuel level sensor calibration. Refer to Section (9.9.2) for sensor calibration
procedure.
4 Check Circuits With Test (Substitute) Sensor
a.Substitute known good sensor and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for 30
seconds.
b.Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new sensor.)
NOTE: If new sensor is not available, the sensor may be configured OFF temporarily. Refer to Section 6.2.1 --
Configurations.)
62-11389 8--66
Alarm
127 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor is not within the range of--53 to +158°F
(--47 to +70° C.)
1 Check Suction Temp Sensor (CST)
a. Inspect Suction Temp Sensor & No damage to sensor
connector No damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector
b. Check Suction Temp Sensor 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
values.
2 Check Suction Temp Sensor Wiring
connector pins & terminals. (See No damaged or corroded pins
between pins.
128 AMPS MEASURE
• TRIGGER–ON: The compressor is on and AC Current Sensor 1 or 2 is less than 5 amps for 10
seconds OR If the difference between AC Current 1 and AC Current 2 is greater than 10 amps for
10 seconds.
• RESET CONDITION: Change unit to standby operation when AC Current Sensor 1 and 2 is greater
than 7 amps for 5 minutes AND difference between AC Current 1 and AC Current 2 is less than 7
amps for 5 minutes OR alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then
back on again.
a. Check the NO POWER This alarm will occur when NOT INSTALLED is se-
configuration.. lected and the Diesel / Electric Switch is set to Elec-
tric, and the SROS is placed in the START / RUN
position.
3 Check Current Draw
a. Use a clamp around A/C ammeter Must be 1.0 Amp of reading in Data List.
to check amps at power wires.
b. Check A/C amps with compressor Must be greater than 5 Amps.
running.
c. Compare A/C Amp readings Maximum allowable difference is 10 Amps.
between L1--L2--L3.
8--67 62-11389
Alarm
129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT) is not within the range of
--58 to +266°F (--50 to +130°C.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Alarm Only.
Standby operation: This alarm does not activate in standby.
1 Check Engine Coolant Sensor (ENCT)
a. Inspect Engine Coolant Sensor & No damage to sensor.
b. Check Engine Coolant Sensor 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) SeeTable 9--7for
resistance. (See Note 4 Page complete table of temperatures and resistance
8.2.) values.
2 Check Engine Coolant Sensor Wiring
between pins.
62-11389 8--68
Alarm
130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Engine mode only. If ambient temperature is above 32°F (0°C), and this is the
second or third start attempt, and the engine oil pressure switch is closed (oil pressure good), and
engine RPM is sensed at less than 1000; OR, if ambient is below 32°F (0°C) and the DC amp draw
is more than 2 amps, and this is the second or third start attempt, and engine RPM is sensed at
less than 1000.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only and engine will be considered running.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset in Auto Start when engine RPM are greater than 1,000 or alarm
may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Alarm List
a. Check for Alarm 41. When alarms 41 and 130 occur at the same time,
generally, the engine has run out or is running out of
fuel. This causes the engine to surge. Check fuel in
tank and add fuel as necessary.
Check fuel lines between the fuel tank and the fuel
pump inlet to endure air is not being drawn in.
2 Check Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN)
a. Inspect circuit from ENSCU No damage to sensor or wiring.
terminal 3 to microprocessor No damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector.
connection 2MP18 & connector.
b. Compare actual engine RPM with Must be ± 20 RPM.
that shown on the display using Must be a steady reading.
hand held tachometer.
c. Check for 12 VDC between Must be 12 VDC.
ENSSN 12V terminal & ENSSN
ground.
d. Check for 12 VDC at ENSSU Must be 12 VDC.
terminal 25 to ground
3 Check Circuits With Test Sensor
a. Substitute known good sensor and Must be within ± 20 RPM of reading on tachometer.
check Unit Data List reading
(Refer to Section 3.13).
8--69 62-11389
Alarm
131 CHECK EVAP TEMP SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Evaporator Outlet Temperature (EVOT) Sensor is not within the range of
--53 to +158°F (--47 to +70°C.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby: alarm only and superheat for EVXV will be calculated using
SAT.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when Evap Temp Sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually
1 Check Evap Temp Sensor
a. Inspect Evap Temp Sensor & No damage to sensor.
b. Check Evap Temp Sensor 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
8.2.) values.
2 Check Evap Temp Sensor Wiring
Note 2 and Note 3 Page 8.2) Dis- tween pins.
connect sensor from harness.
between pins.
62-11389 8--70
Alarm
133 CHEK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 1
• TRIGGER–ON: Remote Temperature Sensor 1 (REMSN1) is not within the maximum range of --53
to +158°F (--47 °to +70°C.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when Remote Temperature Sensor 1 is in range or, alarm may be
1 Check Remote Temp Sensor 1
a. Inspect Remote Temp Sensor 1 & No damage to sensor.
b. Check Remote Temp Sensor 1 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
values.
2 Check Remote Temp Sensor 1 Wiring
between pins.
8--71 62-11389
Alarm
134 CHECK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 2
• TRIGGER–ON: Remote Temperature Sensor 2 (REMSN2) is not within the maximum range of
--53 to +158_F (--47° to +70°C.)
8.2.) values.
between pins.
62-11389 8--72
Alarm
135 CHECK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 3
• TRIGGER–ON: Remote Temperature Sensor 3 (REMSN3) is not within the maximum range of
--53 to +158_F (--47° to +70°C.)
resistance. (See Note 4 Page complete table of temperatures and resistance val-
8.2.) ues.
b. Power up microprocessor. (See Voltage should be 2.5 VDC volts at harness plug
between pins.
8--73 62-11389
Alarm
8.9 Pretrip ALARMS
P141 PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER
• TRIGGER–ON: Pretrip cycle was stopped by user before the Pretrip cycle ended automatically.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Alarm Only.
again.
alarm(s).See Note 1 Page 8.2. Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
1 Check For Any Pretrip Alarms
a. Scroll the alarm list for any Active Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
Pretrip alarms. cleared to continue.
2 Rerun Pretrip Check (If Desired)
a. Clear Active Alarm List, then run Unit running in Pretrip mode. Check for any new
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. alarms.
b. Allow to terminate automatically. Pretrip cycle operates normally.
P144 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT

• TRIGGER–ON: Normal Amps for the Front Unloader (UL1) Circuit is 0.75 to 2.0 Amps. The circuit
tests outside this range.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Pretrip will fail and display “PRE--TRIP FAIL AND
COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip mode is started again, or alarm may be manually reset
via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Front Unloader (UL1)
a. Check amp draw of coil. Use Component Test Mode to test. (Refer to Section
6.2.2.)
Refer to Section 2.13.2 for amp values.
View current draw in Data List.
b. Check resistance of Front Unloader Refer to Section 2.13.2.
(UL1) coil.
2 Check Front Unloader (UL1) And Circuit
a. Inspect Front Unloader (UL1) and No damage or corrosion.
wiring. Connector fits together tightly, no moisture inside.
b. Check operation of Front Unloader Use Component Test Mode to energize circuit. (Refer
(UL1) FET (23). to Section 6.2.2.) LED must be ON.
Energize circuit (See Note 2 Page 8.2) LED must be
ON.
c. Check voltage to Front Unloader Must be 11 VDC or higher across the 2 wires.
(UL1).
3 Check Front Unloader (UL1) Circuit Wiring
62-11389 8--74
Alarm
P145 CHECK SPEED SOL CIRCUIT
• TRIGGER–ON: Normal Amps for the Speed Solenoid Circuit is 0 to 1.0 Amps. The circuit tests out-
sidethis range.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip mode is started again or alarm may be manually reset
via keypad or by turning the unit off then back on again.
2 Check Speed Circuit To ENSCU And FSA
a. Check voltage to ENSCU and amp Use Component Test mode to energize the Speed
draw of engine speed control circuit Relay. (Section 6.2.2)
(ENSCU) pin 16 and MPQC3 on the Refer to Section 2.13.2 for amp values.
microprocessor. View current draw in the Unit Data list. (Refer to Sec-
tion 3.13).
Check voltage at ENSCU16 and ground. Must be 11
VDC or higher.
b. Check operation of Speed Relay LED 27 must be ON when the Speed Relay is ON in
LED component Test Mode.
3 Check Engine Speed Control Unit (ENSCU)
a.Check resistance of FSA Refer to Section 2.13.2. With FSA unplugged, ohm
spec is 3 to 4 ohms, ± 10%.
b. Inspect ENSCU and wiring No physical damage to harness.
No damaged or corroded pins
No damage to ENSCU
c. Check operation of Speed Relay LED 27 must be ON.
LED.
d. Check voltage to ENSCU pin 16 Must be 11 VDC or higher.
4 Check ENSCU Circuit Wiring
connector pins & terminals (See No damaged or corroded pins
wiring schematic)
8--75 62-11389
Alarm
P151 CHECK GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT (This applies to the Intake Air Heater)
• TRIGGER–ON: Normal Amps for the Intake Air Heater Circuit is 23 to 70 Amps after 15 seconds.
The circuit tests outside this range.
2 Check Glow Configuration
a. Verify that the Glow configuration is INTAKE HEATER must be the selection (Refer to
set to INTAKE HEATER. Section 6.2.1 for configuration settings.)
3 Check Intake Air Heater Circuit
a. Inspect glow plug (intake air heater) No signs of discoloration from overheating.
relay & socket. No corrosion.
b. Check operation of Glow Plug (air Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 6.2.2)
intake heater) Relay. to energize the (Glow Plug) circuit to the air intake
heater. LED 30 must be ON.
c. Check voltage to intake air heater. Must be 11 VDC or higher.
d. Check Glow Plug (air intake heater) While still in Component Test mode (Refer to Section
circuit Amps. 6.2.2) with the Intake Air Heater Relay energized.
View current draw in the Unit Data list. (Refer to Sec-
tion 3.13.)
4 Check Intake Air Heater Circuit Wiring
62-11389 8--76
Alarm
P152 CHECK FUEL SOLENOID CIRC
• TRIGGER–ON: Normal Amps are 0.2 to 4.5 Amps for ESC engines (including possible electric fuel
pump). The circuit tests outside this range.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip mode is started again, or Alarm may be manually reset
2 Check Fuel And Speed Actuator (FSA)
a. Check resistance of FSA. Refer to Section 2.13.2. With FSA unplugged, ohm
spec is 3 to 4 ohms, ± 10%.
b. Check amp draw between MPQC4 Use Component Test Mode (Section 6.2.2) to test.
& terminal 13 and 15 of the ENSCU. Energize the Run Relay which will energize the
ENSCU.
tion 3.13.)
c. Check operation of Run Relay. While still in Component Test Mode, with the Run
Relay energized, LED 28 must be ON.
d. Check voltage to FSA. While still in Component Test Mode, with the Run
Relay energized, check for 12 VDC between engine
speed control unit (ENSCU) pins 13 and 19.
12 VDC between ENSCU pins 15 and 19
3 Check FSA & Circuits
a. Inspect FSA and wiring. No physical damage to harness.
No damaged or corroded pins.
No damage to solenoid.
8--77 62-11389
Alarm
P153 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Return Air Temperature Sensor (1RAT) is not within the range of --53 to +158°F
(--47 to +70°C.)
COMPLETED”.
1 Check Return Air Sensor (1RAT)
a. Inspect Return Air Sensor & No physical damage to harness.
connector. No moisture, damaged or corroded pins.
1MP Plug is connected tightly to microprocessor. No
wires are pushed back through plug.
b. Check Return Air Sensor 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
resistance. complete table of temperatures and resistance
(See Note 4 Page 8.2.) values.
2 Check Return Air Sensor Wiring
3 Check Return Air Sensor Connector
a. Locate and inspect Return AirSen- No physical damage.
sor connector. No moisture or corrosion.
between pins.
62-11389 8--78
Alarm
P154 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Supply Air Temperature Sensor (1SAT) is not within the range of --53 to +158°F
(--47 to +70°C.)
COMPLETED”.
alarm(s). See Note 1 Page 8.2.) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
1 Check Supply Air Sensor (1SAT)
a. Inspect Supply Air Sensor & No physical damage to harness.
b. Check Supply Air Sensor 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
2 Check Supply Air Sensor Wiring
3 Check Supply Air Sensor Connector
a. Locate and inspect Supply Air No physical damage.
Sensor connector. No moisture or corrosion.
Note 2 and Note 3 Page 8.2) Dis- tween pins.
connect sensor from harness.
between pins.
8--79 62-11389
Alarm
P155 CHECK COOLANT TEMP SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT) is not within the range of
--58 to +266°F (--50°to +130°C.)
COMPLETED”.
alarm(s). See Note 1 Page 8.2. Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm oc-
curs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Engine Coolant Sensor (ENCT)
a. Inspect Engine Coolant Sensor & No damage to sensor.
connector. No moisture, damage or corrosion in connector.
b. Check Engine Coolant Sensor res- 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
istance. (See Note 4 Page 8.2.) complete table of temperatures and resistance
values.
2 Check Engine Coolant Sensor Wiring
between pins.
P156 CHECK BATTERY VOLTS

• TRIGGER–ON: Battery voltage is less than 11 VDC or greater than 17 VDC.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND
COMPLETED”.
1 Check for Battery Voltage Too High Alarm
Test battery charger output. (Refer to Section 2.13.)
Test battery condition.
Check wiring connections between battery and
battery charger.
2 Check for Battery Voltage Too Low Alarm
Test battery charger output. (Refer to Section 2.13.)
Test battery condition.
Check wiring connections between battery and
battery charger.
62-11389 8--80
Alarm
P157 CHECK BATTERY CURRENT
• TRIGGER–ON: With all circuits off current flow of more than 1.5 amps is detected in the electrical
circuits.
NOTE: If this alarm occurs, Pretrip Test #2 will not be performed. You will need to run pre--
trip again.
COMPLETED”.
1 Check Battery Current Draw.
a. Observe current draw on Must show between 1.0 and --1.5 Amps.
microprocessor display.
(See Note 3 Page 8.2.)
2 Check No Load Current Draw
a. Check current draw at 12 VDC Energize circuit. (See Note 2 Page 8.2.)
current sensor at microprocessor.
b. Check microprocessor current Remove wire from inside current sensor and check
reading with no load. current draw in Unit Data List. Must be between 1.0
and --1.5 Amps.
3 Check Individual Circuits
a. Isolate individual circuits and test Must be in range. (Refer to Section 2.13.2.)
amp draw.
8--81 62-11389
Alarm
P158 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT) is not within the range of --53 to +158°F
(--47 to +70°C.)
COMPLETED”.
1 Check Ambient Air Sensor (AAT)
a. Inspect Ambient Air Sensor & No damage to sensor.
connector. No moisture, damage or corrosion in connector.
b. Check Ambient Air Sensor 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
2 Check Ambient Air Sensor Wiring
3 Check Ambient Air Sensor Connector
a. Locate and inspect Ambient Air No physical damage.
between pins.
62-11389 8--82
Alarm
P159 CHECK DEFROST TERM 1 SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor (DTT) is not within the range of
--53 to +158°F (--47 to +70°0 C.)
COMPLETED”.
1 Check Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor
a. Inspect Defrost Termination Tem- No damage to sensor.
perature Sensor & connector. No moisture, damage or corrosion in connector.
b. Check Defrost Termination Tem- 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
perature Sensor resistance. (See complete table of temperatures and resistance val-
Note 4 Page 8.2.) ues.
2 Check Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor Wiring
3 Check Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor Connector
a. Locate and inspect Defrost Ter- No physical damage.
mination Temperature Sensor con- No moisture or corrosion.
nector.
b. Power microprocessor up (See Voltage should be 2.5 VDC volts at harness plug
between pins.
8--83 62-11389
Alarm
P160 CHECK DISCHARGE TEMP SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor (CDT) is not within the range of
--40 to +392°F (--40 to +200°C. )
COMPLETED”.
1 Check Compressor Discharge Temp Sensor (CDT)
a. Inspect Compressor Discharge No damage to sensor.
Temp Sensor & connector. No damage or corrosion in connector.
b. Check Compressor Discharge 100,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--8 for
Temp Sensor resistance. complete table of temperatures and resistance
2 Check Compressor Discharge Temp Sensor Wiring
between pins.
62-11389 8--84
Alarm
161 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR (CST)
• TRIGGER–ON: Suction Temp Sensor (CST) is not within the maximum range of --53 to +158°F
(--47 to +70°C.)
COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when suction temperature sensor is in range or, alarm may be
1 Check Suction Temp Sensor
a. Inspect Suction Temp Sensor & No damage to sensor.
b. Check Suction Temp Sensor 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
resistance. (See Note 4 Page 8.2.) complete table of temperatures and resistance
values.
2 Check Suction Temp Sensor Wiring
3 Check Suction Temp Sensor Connector
a. Locate and inspect Suction Temp No physical damage.
between pins.
8--85 62-11389
Alarm
P164 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT
• TRIGGER–ON: Normal Amps for the Rear Unloader (UL2) Circuit is 0.75 to 2.0 Amps. The circuit
tests outside this range.
COMPLETED”.
1 Check Rear Unloader (UL2)
a. Check amp draw of coil. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 6.2.2)
to test.
View current draw in Data List.
b. Check resistance of Rear Unloader Refer to Section 2.13.2.
(UL2) coil.
2 Check Rear Unloader (UL2) And Circuit
a. Inspect Rear Unloader (UL2) and No damage or corrosion.
wiring. Connector fits together tightly, no moisture inside.
b. Check operation of Rear Unloader Use Component Test Mode to energize circuit (Refer
(UL2) FET (22). to Section 6.2.2.) LED must be ON.
c. Check voltage to Front Unloader Must be 11 VDC or higher across the 2 wires.
(UL2).
3 Check Rear Unloader (UL2) Circuit Wiring
62-11389 8--86
Alarm
P171 CHECK EVAP & DISC PRESS
• TRIGGER–ON: During Test 3, prior to the engine starting, the SMV and the EVXV are both opened
to allow the refrigerant system high and low side pressures to equalize. The compressor discharge
pressure is less than 170 psig (11.6 bar), and the evaporator pressure is more than 80 psig (5.4
bar) less than the discharge pressure. [This alarm will not become active when the discharge pres-
sure is above 170 psig (11.6 bar.)]
COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when LSV2 output is active, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check that King Valve is open
a. Verify that the liquid line service King Valve must be backseated to proceed.
valve is fully backseated.
2 Check CSMV
a. Inspect CSMV & wire connections. No damage to coil.
No damage, moisture, or corrosion in pins.
Connections all plugged in securely.
b. Check CSMV coil resistance. See Section 9.29 for checking CSMV coil.
c. Check CSMV operation using Must perform correctly.

check out procedure (See Section
9.29.2.)
d. Check microprocessor for opening Place microprocessor into PC Mode (See Note 3
CSMV. Page 8.2).
Unit Data List must show CSMV opening to 50%.
3 Check EVXV
a. Visually inspect EVXV for Check to see if coil is seated on valve properly.
damage.
b. Inspect EVXV coil and wire No physical damage to harness.

connections No damaged or corroded pins.
c. Check coil resistance See Section 9.15 for checking EVXV coil.
d. Check EVXV operation See Section 9.15 for checking and servicing EVXV.
e. Check basic refrigeration system Pressures normal. Compressor operation normal.
f. Check the EVXV electrical system Check for good continuity in all circuits from
microprocessor to EVXV.
g. Inspect component and wire No physical damage to harness.
connections
h. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
8--87 62-11389
Alarm
P171 CHECK EVAP & DISC PRESS (Continued)
a. Install Manifold Test Set and check Suction and Evaporator Outlet pressures must be
and compare compressor dis- above 3 psig (0.2 bar.)
charge & suction pressures with
those shown on the microprocessor Suction, Evaporator Outlet & Discharge Pressures
display. must have the same reading on gauges & on micro-
processor display.
NOTE: Microprocessor Suction (CSP and Evapo-
rator (EVOP) pressure readings have a maximum
value of 100 psig (7.5 bar.) The actual pressure
must be lower than 100 psig in order to perform
this test.
62-11389 8--88
Alarm
P174 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM
• TRIGGER–ON in Test #5: With Speed Relay turned off, engine RPM are NOT between 1250 and
1450.
• TRIGGER–ON in Test #7: 15 seconds after the High Speed Pretrip Test #6, engine RPM have NOT
dropped back to the low speed range as shown above.
Note: This test will be skipped if the RPM sensor alarm (A130) is active.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Pretrip will fail and display “PRE--TRIP FAIL AND
COMPLETED”.
Standby Operation: This test is not made.
2 Check the Fuel and speed actuator
a.Check FSA plunger. Must move in and out freely.
b. Check engine speed arm & linkage. Must move freely.
3 Verify low speed operation (See Note 6 Page 8--2)
a. Set Functional Parameter “LOW LED 27 must be OFF.
SPEED START” for a high number
(30 to 90) then start the unit.
Set Functional Parameter back
to original setting after
completing repairs.
b. Check operation of Speed Relay LED 27 must be OFF.
LED.
c. Check voltage to FSA. Must be 0 VDC.
d. Check for voltage on engine speed Must be 12 VDC.
control unit (ENSCU) pin 22.
4 Check for proper voltage to the Engine Speed Control Unit (ENSCU) Pin 16 Based On
Requested Speed From The Microprocessor
a. Check voltage at pin 16 with unit Must be 0 VDC.
running.
5 Check engine RPM
shown on display.
6 Check engine intake air system
8--89 62-11389
Alarm
P175 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM
• TRIGGER–ON: With Speed Relay turned on (voltage at the Engine Speed Control Unit for high
speed operation, engine RPM are NOT between 1700 and 1900.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Pretrip will fail and display “PRE--TRIP FAIL AND
COMPLETED”.
Standby Operation: This test is not made.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip mode is started again, or Alarm may be manually reset
via Keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
2 Check the fuel and speed actuator
a. Check FSA plunger. Must move in and out freely.
b. Check engine speed arm & linkage. Must move freely.
3 Force high speed operation (See Note 6 Page 8--2)
a. Set Functional Parameter “LOW LED 27 must be ON.
SPEED START” to zero and adjust
set point at least 10°F (5.6°C)
above or below refrigerated
compartment temperature then
start the unit.
Set Functional Parameter back
to original setting after
completing repairs.
b. Check operation of Speed Relay. LED 27 must be ON.
c. Check voltage to FSA. Must be 12--14 VDC.
d. Check resistance of FSA. Refer to Section 2.13.2.
e. Check amp draw of FSA. Use Component Test Mode to energize the Speed
Relay circuit. (Section 6.2.2.)
tion 3.13.
f. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
4 Check for proper voltage to the Engine Speed Control Unit (ENSCU) Pin 16 Based On
Requested Speed From The Microprocessor
a. Check voltage at pin 16 with unit Must be 12 VDC when the microprocessor is calling
running. for high speed.
5 Check engine RPM
shown on display.
62-11389 8--90
Alarm
P175 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM (Continued)
6 Check engine air-intake system
8--91 62-11389
Alarm
P177 CHECK EVAP SUPERHEAT
• TRIGGER–ON: After microprocessor closes the EVXV to 0%, evaporator pressure fails to drop by
20 psig (1.36 bar) or fails to go below 0 psig / bar OR the EVXV appears not to be opening to the
full capacity position.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Pretriprip will fail and display “PRE--TRIP FAIL
AND COMPLETED”.
alarm(s).See Note 1 Page 8.2. Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm oc-
1 Check EVXV
a. Visually inspect EVXV for Check to see if coil is seated on valve properly.
damage.
b. Inspect EVXV coil and wire No physical damage to harness.

connections. No damaged or corroded pins.
c. Check coil resistance. See Section 9.15 for checking EVXV coil.
d. Check EVXV operation. See Section 9.15 for checking and servicing EVXV.
e. Check basic refrigeration system. Pressures normal. Compressor operation normal.
f. Check the EVXV electrical Check for good continuity in all circuits from micro to
system. EVXV.
g. Inspect component and wire No physical damage to harness.
connections.
h. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
62-11389 8--92
Alarm
P178 CHECK UL1
• TRIGGER–ON: The pressure differential between suction and discharge pressures did not change
as expected when the Front Unloader (UL1) was de-energized / loaded (discharge pressure should
rise and suction pressure should drop) or when it was energized / unloaded (discharge pressure
should drop and suction pressure should rise.
COMPLETED”.
viakeypad or by turning the unit off then back on again.
1 Check wiring to DPT & SPT
a. Verify that correct wires are con- Plugs to transducers are the same. The correct wire
nected to each transducer. plug must be connected to the proper transducer.
2 Check for Check UL1 Alarm
a. Check for alarm 85 or P144. Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
3 Confirm Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer Is Working
a. Check CSP. Attach manifold gauge set and compare CSP reading
from microprocessor display.
Repair and Replace if required.
processor display.
this test.
5 Check Front Unloader (UL1) Operation -- Unit must be running
(See Note 6 Page 8--2)
a. Check operation of Front Unloader See Section 9.22
(UL1).
Unloader must load and unload properly.
8--93 62-11389
Alarm
P180 CHECK SUCTION MOD VALVE
• TRIGGER–ON: After microprocessor attempts to close CSMV, suction pressure fails to drop below
4in. Hg (--0.14 bar.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL IN
TEST 11”.
1 Check Software Revision Level
a. Upgrade software. Revision level must be 04.06.00 or higher.
nected to each transducer. plug must be connected to the proper transducer.
b. Verify that correct transducer is be- Mechanical connections to transducers are the
ing used in each position. same.
The Discharge Transducer should have a RED mark-
ing dot on it.
The Suction Transducer should have a BLUE mark-
ing dot on it.
3 Check Compressor Operation
a. Check compressor operation. See Section 10.7 for compressor testing.
If compressor does not pass all tests, repair or re-
place compressor.
4 Check Suction Modulating Valve
a. Visually inspect CSMV. No damage to valve.
b. Inspect CSMV coil and wire con- No damage to coil.
nections. No damaged or corroded pins.
c. Check CSMV operation using Must perform correctly.
check out procedure (See Section Remove and replace piston and coil assembly if re-
9.29.2.) quired. See Section 9.29.
62-11389 8--94
Alarm
P186 CHECK EVAP OUTLET TEMP
• TRIGGER–ON: Evaporator Outlet Temperature Sensor is not within the maximum range of
--53 to +158°F (--47 to +70°C.)
COMPLETED”.
1 Check Evaporator Outlet Temperature Sensor
a. Inspect evaporator outlet Sensor & No physical damage to harness.
b. Check evaporator outlet Sensor 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 9--7 for
2 Check Evap Outlet Sensor Wiring
between pins.
8--95 62-11389
Alarm
P187 CHECK HEATER 1 CIRCUIT
This device is checked twice in Pretrip -- once in Test 2 and again in Test 8.
• TRIGGER–ON TEST 2: Normal amps for the 1HTCON1R relay coil are 0.05 to 1.0 Amps (12
VDC). The circuit tests outside this range.
• TRIGGER–ON TEST 8: Normal amps for the 1HTCON1 heaters are 1.0 to 3.5 Amps (460 VAC).
COMPLETED”.
1 Determine Which Test This Alarm Occurred In
a. Review active alarm list. Make a note of all alarms.
b. Clear active alarm list.
c. Restart and monitor Pretrip. Stop Pretrip during Test #3 by holding = Key for 6
seconds.
d. Review active alarm list for Alarm If alarm is present, follow steps 2 thru 4 If alarm is
187. not present, follow steps 5 thru 10.
2 Check 1HTCON1R
a. Inspect heater contactor coil and No damage to coil.
wire connections. Wire connections to contactor coil are tight.
No damaged or corroded wires to contactor coil.
b. Check contactor coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.13.2.
3 Check 1HTCON1R Amp Draw
a. Check HTCON1R amp draw. Use Component Test Mode (Section 6.2.2) to test.
12 VDC
Refer to Section 2.13.2 for amp values. View current
CIR- draw in Data List.
CUIT
4 Check 1HTCON1R Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box con- See Note 2 & Note 6 Page 8.2.
nector pins & terminals. (See wiring No physical damage to harness.
schematic Section 11.) No damaged or corroded pins.
5 Check Evaporator High Temperature Switch (EVHTS)
a. Inspect for open EVHTS per wiring If open, replace switch as required.
schematic Section 11.
62-11389 8--96
Alarm
P187 CHECK HEATER 1 CIRCUIT (Continued)
6 Check Amp Draw of 1HTCON1 Heater Circuit
a. With the unit running and calling for Must be within range shown in Section 2.13 for all
Heat, use a clamp on ammeter to three legs.
check the current draw of all 3 legs.
b. Check fuses for heater elements. F10, F11, and F12 must not be blown.
c. Check voltage at 1HTCON1 con- Must be within range shown in Section 2.13 for
tacts. L1--L2, L1--L3, and L2--L3.
Must be within range shown in Section 2.13 for
T1--T2, T1--T3, and T2--T3.
7 Check Heater Elements
a. Check heater elements with the unit No visual physical damage.
460 Off. Remove and replace if damaged.
VAC
b. Check heater element Ohms. Check from “T” terminals on HTCON1 contactor. See
CIR-
section 2.13 for correct Ohm ratings.
CUIT
8 Check Heater Element Connections
a. Inspect high voltage heater con- No corrosion, water damage or burning /
nections at evaporator. discoloration.
Remove, repair, or replace if required.
b. Disconnect heater element plug. Heater resistance per Section 2.13.
Remove and replace heaters if required.
a. Inspect plugs, plug seal and con- No corrosion, water damage or burning /
nectors. discoloration.
Remove and replace if required.
9 Verify Accuracy of AC Current Sensor
a. Place SROS in the OFF position. Must have 0 AC1 Amps and 0 AC2 Amps in Unit
Put microprocessor in PC Mode. Data List.
See Note 6 Page 8.2.
8--97 62-11389
Alarm
P188 CHECK HEATER 2 CIRCUIT
• TRIGGER–ON TEST 2: Normal amps for the 1HTCON2 contactor coil are 0.05 to 2.0 Amps (12
• TRIGGER–ON TEST 8: Normal amps for the 1HTCON2 heaters are 1.0 to 3.5 Amps (460 VAC).
COMPLETED”.
seconds.
d. Review active alarm list for Alarm If alarm is present, follow steps 2 thru 4 If alarm is
188. not present, follow steps 5 thru 10.
2 Check 1HTCON2
a. Inspect heater contactor coil and No damage to coil.
wire connections. No damaged or corroded pins.
3 Check 1HTCON2 Amp Draw
a. Check 1HTCON2 amp draw. Use Component Test Mode (Section 6.2.2) to test.
12 VDC Refer to Section 2.13.2 for amp values. View current
CIR- draw in Data List.
CUIT 4 Check 1HTCON2 Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box con- See Note 2 & Note 6 on Page 8.2.
nector pins & terminals. (See wiring No physical damage to harness.
schematic Section 11.) No damaged or corroded pins.
5 Check Evaporator High Temperature Switch (EVHTS)
a. Inspect for open EVHTS per wiring If open, replace switch as required.
schematic Section 11.
62-11389 8--98
Alarm
P188 CHECK HEATER 2 CIRCUIT (Continued)
6 Check Amp Draw of 1HTCON2 Heater Circuit
Heat, use a clamp on ammeter to three legs.
check the current draw of all 3 legs.
b. Check fuses for heater elements F10, F11, and F12 must not be blown.
c. Check voltage at 1HTCON2 con- Must be within range shown in Section 2.13 for
T1--T2, T1--T3, and T2--T3.
460
VAC 7 Check Heater Elements
CIR- a. Check heater elements with the unit No visual physical damage
CUIT Off. Remove and replace if damaged
b. Check heater element Ohms Check from “T” terminals on HTCON2 contactor. See
section 2.13.1 for correct Ohm ratings.
8 Check Heater Element Connections
a. Inspect high voltage heater con- No corrosion, water damage or burning /
nections at evaporator. discoloration.
8--99 62-11389
Alarm
P189 CHECK EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR
• TRIGGER–ON TEST 2: Normal amps for the 1EVCON contactor coil are 0.05 to 2.0 Amps (12
• TRIGGER–ON TEST 9: Normal amps for the Evaporator Fan motor are 0.7 to 3.5 Amps (460
VAC). The circuit tests outside this range.
COMPLETED”.
seconds.
d. Review active alarm list for Alarm If alarm is present, follow steps 2thru 4 If alarm is not
189. present, follow Steps 5 thru 8
2 Check 1EVCON
a. Inspect Evaporator Fan Motor coil No damage to coil.
and wire connections. No damaged or corroded pins.
3 Check 1EVCON Amp Draw
12 VDC
CIR- a. Check 1EVCON amp draw. Use Component Test Mode (Section 6.2.2) to test.
CUIT Refer to Section 2.13.2 for amp values. View current
draw in Data List.
4 Check 1EVCON Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box See Note 2 & Note 6 on Page 8.2.
62-11389 8--100
Alarm
P189 CHECK EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR (Continued)
5 Check Amp Draw of 1EVCON Evap Fan Motor Circuit
a. With the unit running in either HEAT Must be within range shown in Section 2.13 for all
or COOL use a clamp on ammeter three legs.
to check the current draw of all 3
legs.
b. Check fuses for evaporator fan mo- F18, F19, and F20 must not be blown.
tor.
c. Check voltage at 1EVCON con- Must be within range shown in Section 2.13 for
T1--T2, T1--T3, and T2--T3.
460 6 Check Evaporator Fan Motor
VAC a. With the unit off, visually check fan No visual physical damage.
CIR- motor and blower wheel. No blockage to blower wheels.
CUIT Blower wheels spin freely.
b. With the unit off, check the resist- See Section 2.13 for correct resistance.
ance of the evaporator fan motor Resistance (Ohms) must be in range.
windings. No continuity from any high voltage lead to ground.
7 CheckEvaporator Fan Motor Connections
a. Inspect high voltage fan motor con- No corrosion, water damage or burning / discolor-
nections at evaporator. ation.
8--101 62-11389
Alarm
P190 CHECK CONDENSER FAN MOTOR
• TRIGGER–ON Normal amps for the Condenser Fan Motors are 0.8 to 3.5 Amps (460 VAC).. The
circuit tests outside this range.
COMPLETED”.
1 Check Amp Draw of Condenser Fan Motor Circuit
HEAT or cool use a clamp on am- three legs.
meter to check the current draw of
all 3 legs. If higher than normal amps are read, the wiring for
the motors must be separated, and each motor
tested individually.
b. Check fuses for condenser fan mo- F18, F19, and F20 must not be blown.
tors.
c. Check voltage at CDCON contacts. Must be within range shown in Section 2.13 for
L1--L2, L1--L3, and L2--L3.
T1--T2, T1--T3, and T2--T3.
2 Check Condenser Fan Motors
460 a. Check condenser fan motors. No visual physical damage.
VAC No blockage due to debris.
CIR- Remove and replace if required.
CUIT b. With the unit off, visually check fan No visual physical damage.
motors and fan blades. No blockage to fan blades.
Fan blades spin freely.
c. With the unit off, check the resist- See Section 2.13 for correct resistance.
ance of the condenser fan motor Resistance (Ohms) must be in range.
windings. No continuity from any high voltage lead to ground.
3 Check Condenser Fan Motor Connections
a. Inspect high voltage connections at No corrosion, water damage or burning / discolor-
the condenser fan motors. ation.
62-11389 8--102
Alarm
P191 CHECK UL2
• TRIGGER–ON: The pressure differential between suction and discharge pressures did not change
as expected when the Rear Unloader (UL2) was de-energized / loaded (discharge pressure should
rise and suction pressure should drop) or when it was energized / unloaded (discharge pressure
should drop and suction pressure should rise.
COMPLETED”.
nected to each transducer plug must be connected to the proper transducer.
2 Check for Check UL2 Alarm
a. Check for alarm 86 or P164 Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
cleared to continue
processor display.
this test.
4 Check Rear Unloader (UL2) Operation -- Unit must be running. (See Note 6)
a. Check operation of Rear Unloader See Section 9.22.
(UL2)
Unloader must load and unload properly.
8--103 62-11389
Alarm
P206 CHECK CONDENSER FAN CIRCUIT
• TRIGGER–ON : Normal amps for the CDCON contactor coil are 0.05 to 2.0 Amps (12 VDC). The
circuit tests outside this range.
COMPLETED”.
1 Check CDCON
a. Inspect CDCON contactor coil and No damage to coil.
wire connections. No damaged or corroded pins.
2 Check CDCON Amp Draw
a. Check CDCON contactor coil amp Use Component Test Mode (Section 6.2.2) to test.
draw. Refer to Section 2.13.2 for amp values. View current
draw in Data List.
3 Check CDCON Wiring
P207 CHK COMPRESSOR CONTACT CIRC

• TRIGGER–ON: Normal amps for the CCONR and CCON relay coils are 0.0 to 1.0 Amps (12 VDC).
COMPLETED”.
viakeypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check CCONR
a. Inspect CCONR and CCON No damage to coil.
contactor coils and wire No damaged or corroded pins.
connections.
b. Check contactor coil resistance Refer to Section 2.13.2.
2 Check CCONR Amp Draw
a. Check CCONR and CCON contac- Use Component Test Mode (Section 6.2.2) to test.
tor coil amp draw. Refer to Section 2.13.2 for amp values. View current
draw in Data List. FET 2 On.
b. Listen for CCON to pull in. If CCON contactor pulls in, CCONR and CCON are
OK.
If CCON contactor does not pull in, check for voltage
at CCON coil. 12 VDC indicates defective CCON
coil. No voltage -- check CCONR.
3 Check CCONR Wiring
62-11389 8--104
Alarm
P208 CHECK GENERATOR CONT CIRC
• TRIGGER–ON: Normal amps for the GENCONR and GENCON coils are 0.0 to 1.0 Amps (12
COMPLETED”.
1 Check GENCONR
a. Inspect GENCONR and GENCON No damage to coil.
contactor coils and wire connec- No damaged or corroded pins.
tions.
2 Check GENCONR and GENCON Amp Draw
a. Check GENCONR and GENCON Use Component Test Mode (Section 6.2.2) to test.
contactor coils amp draw. Refer to Section 2.13.2 for amp values. View current
b. Listen for GENCON to pull in. If GENCON contactor pulls in, GENCONR and
GENCON are OK.
If GENCON contactor does not pull in, check for volt-
age at GENCON coil. 12 VDC indicates defective
GENCON coil. No voltage -- check GENCONR.
3 Check GENCONR Wiring
8--105 62-11389
Alarm
P209 CHECK STANDBY CONT CIRCUIT
• TRIGGER–ON: Normal amps for the PSCONR relay coil and PSCON or PSCON2 contactor coils
0.0 to 1.0 Amps (12 VDC). The circuit(s) test outside this range. (During this test either PSCON or
PSCON2 will be tested depending on the phase reversal module.)
COMPLETED”.
NOTE: IF PRETRIP IS DONE IN STANDBY MODE, THIS PRETRIP ALARM WILL GENERATE MANY
OTHER PRETRIP ALARMS. THEREFORE, IT SHOULD BE ADDRESSED FIRST
1 Check PSCONR
a. Inspect PSCONR, PSCON and No damage to coils.
PSCON2 contactor coils and wire No damaged or corroded pins.
connections.
b. Check contactor coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.13.2 for resistance values
2 Check PSCONR, PSCON, and PSCON2 Amp Draw
a. Check PSCONR, PSCON and Use Component Test Mode (Section 6.2.2) to test.
PSCON2 contactor coils amp draw. Refer to Section 2.13.2 for amp values. View current
b. Listen for PSCON or PSCON2 to If PSCON or PSCON2 contactor pulls in, PSCONR
pull in. and PSCON or PSCON2 are OK.
If PSCON or PSCON2 contactor does not pull in,
check for voltage at Phase Reversal Module (PRM)
“N” terminal. 12 VDC indicates defective PSCON or
PSCON2 coil. No voltage -- check PSCONR and
PRM. (Refer to Section 2.13.2).
3 Check PSCONR, PSCON, PSCON2 and PRM Wiring
62-11389 8--106
Alarm
8.10 MAINTENANCE ALARMS
223 ENGINE MAINTENANCE DUE
• TRIGGER–ON: The Engine Maintenance Hour Meter time has expired.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only. Alarm Light will NOT be turned on.
1 Check Unit Maintenance Records
a. Schedule unit into service facility for Must be done soon!
maintenance.
2 Perform Maintenance
a. Perform appropriate engine & unit Follow instructions on proper maintenance form.
maintenance.
3 Reset Engine Maintenance Hour Meter
a. Check that the Engine Maintenance Reset Interval in Configuration List as required.
Hour Meter interval is set for your
requirements.
b. Reset Engine Maintenance Hour Hour Meter is reset in the Functional Parameter list.
Meter for the next service interval. Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
Section 9.1.
224 STANDBY MAINTENANCE DUE

• TRIGGER–ON: The electric motor Hour Meter time has expired.
maintenance.
maintenance.
3 Reset Standby General Maintenance Hour Meter
a. Check that the Standby Reset Interval in Configuration List as required.
Maintenance Hour Meter interval is
set for your requirements.
b. Reset Standby Maintenance Hour Hour Meter is reset in the Functional Parameter list.
Section 9.1.
8--107 62-11389
Alarm
225 GENERAL MAINTENANCE DUE
• TRIGGER–ON: The General Maintenance Hour Meter time has expired.
maintenance.
maintenance.
3 Reset General Maintenance Hour Meter
a. Check that the General Reset Interval in Configuration List as required.
Maintenance Hour Meter interval is
set for your requirements.
b. Reset General Maintenance Hour Hour Meter is reset in the Functional Parameter list.
Section 9.1.
226 SERVICE SOON--PM #1 DUE

• TRIGGER–ON: The Maintenance Hour Meter #1 time has expired.
maintenance.
maintenance.
3 Reset Maintenance Hour Meter #1
a. Check that Maintenance Hour Reset Interval in Configuration List as required.
Meter #1 interval is set for your
requirements.
b. Reset Maintenance Hour Meter #1 Hour Meter is reset in the Functional Parameter list.
for the next service interval. Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
Section 9.1.
62-11389 8--108
Alarm
maintenance.
maintenance.
requirements.
Section 9.1.

maintenance.
maintenance.
requirements.
Section 9.1.
8--109 62-11389
Alarm
maintenance
maintenance.
requirements.
Section 9.1.

maintenance.
maintenance.
requirements.
Section 9.1.
62-11389 8--110
Alarm
8.11 MICROPROCESSOR ALARMS
232 SETPOINT ERROR
• TRIGGER–ON: There is an error in the set point that is stored in the microprocessor memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Unit Shutdown & Alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when a valid set point is entered, or alarm may be manually reset
1 Check Set Point
a. Check set point setting. Must be between --22 and +89.6° F (--30°C and
b. Enter new set point. +32°C)
a. Place the SROS in the OFF position The microprocessor powers up OK and the latest set
for 30 seconds, then back to point appears in the display.
START / RUN.
b. Valid set point can not be entered. Replace microprocessor.
233 MODEL # ERROR

• TRIGGER–ON: There is an error in the Model Number that is stored in the microprocessor memory
• UNIT CONTROL: Unit Shutdown & Alarm
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset only when a valid Model number is entered.
a. Check Model Number in Must be a valid Model Number from Configuration
microprocessor. List.
b. Enter correct Model Number. From Configuration List, select correct Model
Number.
a. Place the SROS in the OFF position Microprocessor powers up OK.
for 30 seconds, then back to
START / RUN.
b. Check for valid Model number in Valid number is present.
Data List. Alarm is cleared.
c. Valid model number can not be Replace microprocessor.
entered.
8--111 62-11389
Alarm
237 FUNCTION PARAMETERS ERROR
• TRIGGER–ON: There is an error in one or more of the Functional Parameters that are stored in the
microprocessor memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Incorrect Functional Parameter(s) will be automatically set for default value.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when valid Functional Parameters are entered, or alarm may be
manually reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Functional Parameters
a. Check Functional Parameters. All must be set for selectable values.
a.Place the SROS in the OFF position Microprocessor powers up OK.
START / RUN.
b. Check for valid Functional Parame- Valid number is set for all parameters.
ters in Functional Parameters List. Alarm is cleared.
c. Valid Functional Parameter(s) can Replace microprocessor.
not be entered.
62-11389 8--112
Alarm
238 CONFIGURATIONS 1 ERROR
• TRIGGER–ON: There is an error in the Configuration settings that are stored in the microprocessor
memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Incorrect Configuration(s) will be automatically set for default value.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when valid Configuration(s) are entered, or alarm may be
manually reset by turning the unit off, then back on again
a. Check Configurations. All must be set for selectable values.
2 Check Software Version
a. Check Microprocessor Software Upgrade to the latest version of software. Newer ver-
version. sions of ReeferManager may contain configurations
that were not present in older versions of Micropro-
cessor software.
3 Reconfigure Microprocessor
a. Send settings to Microprocessor. Using ReeferManager and a Configuration PC Card,
write the desired configuration file to the PC Card,
then load the file into the Microprocessor. Allow the
Microprocessor to reboot itself.
START / RUN.
b. Check for valid Configuration set- Values are set correctly for all parameters.
tings in Configuration List. Alarm is cleared.
c Disconnect positive battery cable Microprocessor powers up OK.
from the battery, wait 30 seconds,
then reconnect and place the SROS
in the START / RUN position.
d Check for valid Configuration Values are set correctly for all parameters.
settings in Configuration List. Alarm is cleared.
c. Valid Configurations can not be Replace microprocessor.
entered.
8--113 62-11389
Alarm
242 DIS PRESS CALIBRATE ERROR
• TRIGGER–ON: There is an error in the Compressor Discharge Pressure Sensor Calibration value
stored in memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when the Discharge Pressure Sensor is calibrated successfully,
or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Discharge Pressure Reading
a. Check Discharge Pressure Must read valid data.
Reading.
2 Calibrate Discharge Pressure Sensor
a. Calibrate Discharge Pressure Calibration successful.
Sensor.
b. Discharge Pressure Sensor can not Replace microprocessor.
be successfully calibrated.
243 SUCTION/EVAP CALIBRATE ERROR

• TRIGGER–ON: There is an error in the Suction / Evaporator Pressure Sensor Calibration value
stored in the microprocessor memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when the Suction / Evaporator Pressure Sensor is calibrated
successfully, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on
again.
1 Check Suction / Evaporator Pressure Reading
a. Check Suction / Evaporator Must read valid data.
Pressure Reading.
2 Calibrate Suction / Evaporator Pressure Sensor
a. Calibrate Suction/Evaporator Calibration successful.
Pressure Sensor.
b. Suction/Evaporator Pressure Sensor Replace microprocessor.
can not be successfully calibrated.
62-11389 8--114
Alarm
245 CANNOT SAVE SETTING
• TRIGGER–ON: There is an error in sending and saving new settings in the Microprocessor
memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via Keypad or by turning the unit off, then back
on again.
1 Check Microprocessor Software Revision
a. Check Microprocessor Software Will be a 6 digit number.
Revision.
a. Place the SROS in the OFF position Will be a 6 digit number.
for 30 seconds, then back to Upgrade to the latest version.
START / RUN.
b. Check Active Alarm List. Alarm is cleared -- microprocessor is OK.
c. Alarm 245 can not be cleared. Unit will operate, but changes to the settings will not
be retained in the microprocessor memory. Replace
microprocessor.
246 EEPROM WRITE FAILURE

• TRIGGER–ON: here is an error in the ability to write information to be stored in the memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via Keypad or by turning the unit off, then back
on again.
1 Check Microprocessor
a. Check set point setting. Must be between --22°F to +89.6°F (--30°C to
+32°C.)
b.Enter new set point. Must be between --22°F to +89.6°F (--30°C to
+32°C.)
a. Turn main switch off for 30 seconds, Microprocessor powers up OK.
then turn on.
b. Alarm 246 remains active. Replace microprocessor.
8--115 62-11389
Alarm
248 CONFIGURATION MODE / HP2 ERROR
• TRIGGER–ON: EEPROM configuration is out of range.
• UNIT CONTROL: Shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset only when valid info is available for the microprocessor are
entered.
Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the alarm(s).
See Note 1 Page 8.2. Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm occurs.
1 Check microprocessor
a. Check set point setting. Must be between --22°F to +89.6°F (--30°C to
+32°C.)
b. Enter new set point. Must be between --22°F to +89.6°F (--30°C to
+32°C.)
c. Check Functional Parameters. All settings must be valid.
2 Reset microprocessor
START / RUN.
62-11389 8--116
Alarm
249 MICROPROCESSOR ERROR
• TRIGGER–ON: Microprocessor Input Conversion Error.
• UNIT CONTROL: Shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when input conversions are valid, or Alarm may be manually
reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the alarm(s).
See Note 1 Page 8.2. Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm occurs.
1 Check Microprocessor
a. Check Temperature Sensor Data Must be valid reading for RAT, SAT, AAT, etc.
b. Check for any Active Sensor Must all be cleared.
Alarms
2 Check Microprocessor & Unit Wiring
a. Check Wiring to Micro and at input Must not be miss wired to allow 12 VDC on any of
devices to the micro. the sensor input circuits.
a. Turn START/RUN-OFF switch off Microprocessor powers up OK
for 30 seconds, then turn back on.
8--117 62-11389
SECTION 9
SERVICE
WARNING CAUTION
Any time service is being performed on Unit uses R404A and POE oil. The use of in-
moving parts or high voltage components, ert gas brazing procedures is mandatory for
disconnect the negative battery and all Carrier Transicold refrigeration units;
standby power cables. otherwise compressor failure will occur.
For more information Refer to Technical
Procedure 98-50553-00 Inert Gas Brazing
WARNING
Voltage will be applied to high voltage com- CAUTION
ponents (i.e. the fan motor contactor) and
those components will operate (i.e. the fan When changing oil filters, the new filters
blades will turn) when those components should be primed (partially filled) with clean
are energized and the unit is in standby op- oil if possible. If the filters are not primed,
eration and using component test mode. the engine may operate for a period with no
oil supplied to the bearings.
WARNING
WARNING
Be aware of HIGH VOLTAGE supplied by the
generator as the unit may start UNITS EQUIPPED WITH TWO WAY COMMU-
automatically. Before servicing the unit, NICATION CAPABILITIES HAVE THE ABILITY
make sure the Start/Run--Off switch is in the TO BE STARTED OR TURNED OFF REMOTE-
OFF position. Use discretion when servi- LY REGARDLESS OF THE SETTING OF THE
cing the unit. It may be necessary to Start/Run--Off switch.
standby power cables for certain service The unit is controlled locally and there can
procedures. NEVER dis--assemble the be no two-way communication when the
generator: HIGH MAGNETIC FIELD INSIDE! mode switch on the Remote Monitoring
This field can interfere with and cardiac im- control box is in MAINTENANCE MODE.
plants such as pacemaker and defibrillat- Therefore, when performing any work on
ors. the unit, place the mode switch in MAINTE-
NANCE MODE. After the unit is serviced, re-
turn the mode switch to REMOTE ON.
CAUTION
NOTE
Use only Carrier Transicold approved Poly- To avoid damage to the earth’s ozone layer, use
ol Ester Oil (POE). Buy quantities of one a refrigerant recovery system whenever remov-
quart or less. When using this hygroscopic
oil, immediately reseal. Do not leave con- ing refrigerant. When working with refrigerants
tainer of oil open or contamination will oc- you must comply with all local government envi-
cur. ronmental laws, U.S.A. EPA section 608.
9--1 62-11389
9.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE and filter changes, fuel and air filter replacement,
coolant replacement and pretrip inspections.
For the most reliable operation and for maximum life, Maintenance should be performed according to the
your unit requires regular maintenance. This includes oil following schedule:
Table 9--1 Maintenance Schedule
REFERENCE
SYSTEM OPERATION
SECTION
a. Daily Maintenance
Pre Trip Inspection -- before starting 9.2
Pre Trip Inspection -- after starting 9.2
Run Microprocessor Pretrip 3.4
Check Engine Hours Check
b. Every Service Interval or Yearly
Engine 1. Check lube oil and filter schedule (refer to Section d.of this table) 9.9.3
2. Check low oil pressure switch Check
3. Clean crankcase breather 9.9.7
4. Check engine speeds Check
5. Check water pump belt Check
Fuel System 1. Clean fuel pump strainer 9.8
2. Change fuel filter 9.8
3. Check fuel heater (if equipped) ------
Cooling 1. Check cooling system maintenance schedule (refer to Section e. of 9.9.1
System this table) . If replacement is not required, check antifreeze concentra-
tion using a refractometer (CTD P/N 07--00435--00)
2. Clean condenser/radiator fin surface 9.9.1 and 9.35
3. Check water pump Check
4. Check water temperature sensor 2.8
Exhaust Sys- 1. Check mounting hardware Check
tem 2. Check muffler and exhaust pipes Check
Air Intake 1. Change air cleaner element Change
System 2. Check and reset air filter indicator (if equipped) 9.9.6
Starting 1. Clean battery connections and cable ends Check/Replace
Circuit 2. Check battery hold down clamps Check/Replace
3. Check battery condition Check
4. Check starter operation Check
Charging 1. Check battery charger output voltage 2.13
Circuit 2. Check battery charger amperage 2.13
A.C. 1. Check voltage output 2.13
Generator 2. Check amperage output 2.13
3. Check condenser and evaporator fan amperages 2.13
4. Check compressor amperage 2.13
5. Check heater amperages 2.13
6. Perform insulation resistance verification for high voltage wiring,
refer to megohmmeter test procedure 98--50264.
Unit 7. Check unit mounting bolts Check
8. Check engine and compressor mounting bolts Check
9. Check door latches & hinges Check
10.Check switches and electrical connections Check
11. Check all electrical ground connections Check
12.Check control box/relay box condition Check
62-11389 9--2
REFERENCE
SYSTEM OPERATION
SECTION
b. Every Service Interval or Annually (Continued)
Refrigeration 1. Check air switch and calibrate 2.12
System 2. Check & clean evaporator coil and defrost drain hoses 9.34
3. Connect gages and check refrigerant pressure Check
4. Check manual defrost operation Check
Electrical 1. Check all ground connections for tightness Check
System 2. Check all ground connections for corrosion Check
3. Check Stand--by plug for signs of wear or damage Check
4. Perform microprocessor Pretrip 3.4
c. Every 10,000 Hour Maintenance
Perform complete annual Preventive Maintenance and the following:
Fuel System 1. Clean and adjust injector nozzles. Engine Service Guide
d. Oil Change Intervals

Oil Type Oil Change / Standard Filter Change Oil Change / ESI Filter Change
Petroleum 2000 hours or 1 yr 3000 hours or 2 yrs
Mobile Delvac 1* Oil = 4000 hours or 2 yr / Filter = 1 yr 4000 hours or 2 yr
* Mobil Delvac1 is the only approved synthetic oil. Maximum oil drain interval is two (2) years.
e. Coolant Change Intervals

Coolant Type Service Interval
Standard 6000 hours or 2 yr
Extended Life 12000 hours or 5 yr
These maintenance schedules are based on the use of approved oils and regular Pretrip inspections of the unit.
Failure to follow the recommended maintenance schedule may affect the life and reliability of the refrigeration unit.
9--3 62-11389
9.2 PRE TRIP INSPECTION
The following pretrip inspection should be performed before every trip and at regular maintenance intervals.
WARNING
Inspect battery cables for signs of wear, abrasion or damage at every pre trip inspection and replace if
necessary. Also check battery cable routing to ensure that clamps are secure and that cables are not
pinched or chafing against any components.
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE OK ADJUST
Drain water from bottom of fuel tank j j
Drain water from water separator on fuel filter (if applicable) j j
Check radiator coolant level j j
Check condenser/radiator for cleanliness j j
Check air cleaner and hoses j j
Check engine oil level j j
Check condition of water pump belt j j
Check battery fluid level (if applicable) j j
Check battery cables and terminals j j
Check evaporator coil for cleanliness j j
Check bulkhead and retrun air screen j j
Check all defrost water drains j j
Place in continuous rnu and start unit j j
IMMEDIATELY AFTER STARTING ENGINE OK ADJUST
Check fuel lines and filters for leaks j j
Check oil lines and filters for leaks j j
Check coolant hoses for leaks j j
Check exhaust system for leaks j j
Check condenser fan for proper airflow. j j
Check evaporator fan for proper airflow. j j
Check for unusual noises j j
MICROPROCESSOR PRETRIP PASS FAIL
Initiate Pretrip j j
List Alarms occurring during Pretrip
AFTER OPERATING UNIT FOR 15 MINUTES OR MORE OK ADJUST

Check refrigerant level j j
Check compressor oil level j j
Check for proper temperature control j j
Check auto start--stop operation j j
Initiate defrost and allow to terminate j j
Check engine speeds j j
62-11389 9--4
OPERATE UNIT IN HIGH SPEED COOL AND RECORD (From Microprocessor Unit Data List)
Suction Pressure Compr Disch Temp Unit Serial #
Discharge Pressure Battery Voltage Unit Model #
Evaporator Pressure Current Draw (DC) Datalogger Date/Time
Engine Coolant Temp Unit AC Current #1 Hrs to Engine Maint
Return Air Temp Unit AC Current #2 Hrs to S/B Motor Maint
Supply Air Temp CSMV % Hrs to Unit Maint
Delta--T EVXV % Time Lsft to PM1
Ambient Air Temp Software Rev Time Lsft to PM2
Defrost Term Temp Display Software Rev Time Lsft to PM3
Suction line Temp Controller Serial # Time Lsft to PM4
Evap Outlet Temp Trailer ID # Time Lsft to PM5
FINAL OK ADJUST
Review Functional Parameters j j
Download Recorder Data j j
Enter Trip Start In Microprocessor j j
9--5 62-11389
9.3 GRILLE INSERT REMOVAL. b. Remove the 2 bolts on top of the grille insert.
Removal of insert will ease in condenser coil cleaning.
(Refer to Section 9.35). c. Swing insert down and lift out of locating holes.
a. Remove the 3 bolts on each side of the grille insert,
See Figure 9--1. d. Reverse above steps to install new grille insert.
GRILLE INSERT MOUNTING BOLTS SURROUND
GRILLE INSERT
LUBRICATE LATCHES AND PINS
Figure 9--1. Grille Insert Removal And Door Latch Maintenance
62-11389 9--6
9.4 SURROUND REMOVAL
a. Place the Start/Run--Off switch in the OFF position c. Remove the bolts that secure the surround to the unit.
and disconnect the starter.
b. Open both side and front doors. d. Reverse above steps to install new surround.
SURROUND MOUNTING BOLTS
REMOVE DECAL PLATE TO

ACCESS UNIT MOUNTING STUD.
SURROUND MOUNTING BOLTS
Figure 9--2. Surround Removal
9--7 62-11389
9.5 DOOR LATCH MAINTENANCE AND 9.5.2 Side Door Latch Cable Replacement
REPLACEMENT
a. Remove circular clip that secures the cable to the
Proper maintenance is important for smooth operation paddle assembly.
of the latch assembly and the latch pins that are moun-
ted on the unit’s frame (See Figure 9--1.). In order to b. Remove the lower cable from the paddle assembly
keep the movable parts clean and lubricated, CTD re- and the lower latch.
commends the use of a de--greasing cleaner and LPS 2
lubricant. This lubricant should be available at any local NOTE
automobile and truck parts suppliers.
The lower cable is threaded through the upper
9.5.1 Front Door Latch Cable Replacement cable eyelet and the lower latch assembly.
a. Remove circular clip that secures the cable to the (See Figure 9--3.)
paddle assembly.
b. Slide cable from paddle and rotate other end out of
c. Remove the upper cable from the upper latch.
latch assembly.
c. Reverse above steps to install new cable. d. Reverse above steps to install new cable.
UPPER CABLE
REMOVE CIRCULAR CLIP

UN--THREAD THE LOWER
CABLE FROM THE UPPER
CABLE AND
LATCH ASSEMBLY PADDLE ASSEMBLY
Figure 9--3. Side Door Latch Lower Cable Removal
62-11389 9--8
9.6 TESTING HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUITS
A megohmmeter test instrument (commonly known as a f. Continue testing each of the red wires on 1EVCON
Megger) can be purchased locally at most electrical T2 and T3 terminals. Each should measure greater
supply centers. This test requires a meter that can be than 500 MΩ. If not, follow the procedure outlined in
set to 1000V. Step e. above.
g. For annual Preventative Maintenance inspections, all
CAUTION high voltage contactor connections must be tested on
their T1, T2 and T3 terminals. See Figure 9--5. The
Disconnect the negative battery cable prior fuses and the Overload Ground Fault Module (OGF)
to performing this test. Isolate the micro- do not need to be tested.
processor by disconnecting all connectors
and wires going to it.
1 8 7
9.6.1 Megohmmeter Test Procedure
2
a. Connect one of the megohmmeter leads to the unit
ground plate (PE plate) inside the control box. See
Figure 9--4.
3
Figure 9--4. Megohmmeter Connection to Ground

Plate
b. Connect the remaining lead to the red wire at the T1
terminal of the evaporator motor contactor
(1EVCON). See Figure 9--5.
c. Set the megohmmeter reading to 1000V.
d. Turn on the meter and record reading. It should be 5 6
greater than 500 MΩ. 4
e. If the reading is less than 500 MΩ check for the short
1. Evaporator motor contactor 1EVCON
to ground by: 2. Evaporator heater contactor 2 (1HTCON2)
SVisually inspecting the tested component for any 3. Compressor contactor (CCON)
poor connections or chafed wires 4. Generator contactor (GENCON)
5. Power supply contactor 2 (PSCON2)
SIsolating the component and wire harness. 6. Power supply contactor 1 (PSCON1)
SRetesting the harness and component (i.e. the mo- 7. Evaporator heater contactor 1 (1HTCON1)
8. Condenser motor contactor (CDCON)
tor windings) with the megohmmeter to determine
where the short to ground is located Figure 9--5. High Voltage Contactors
9--9 62-11389
9.7 PRIMING FUEL SYSTEM 9.8 SERVICING FUEL PUMP
9.8.1 Mechanical Pump.
9.7.1 Mechanical Fuel Pump
The fuel filter (See Figure 9--7.) may become plugged or
The mechanical fuel lift pump is mounted on the engine restricted with foreign particles or wax as a result of
next to the injection pump. This pump has a manual using the wrong grade of fuel or untreated fuel in cold
plunger for priming the fuel system when the fuel tank weather. This will cause the engine to lose capacity. The
has been run dry. (See Figure 9--6.) filter must be cleaned on a regular schedule such as unit
pre-trip or when the oil and fuel filters are changed.
To prime the fuel system, use the following steps: (Refer to Section 9.1).
a. Turn the bleed valve (red) counter-clockwise until ful-

ly opened.
1
b. Turn the top of the manual fuel pump plunger counter-
clockwise to unlock it. S-L-O-W-L-Y (up/down once
per second) pump the manual plunger until positive
pressure (resistance) is felt. This may take up to 200
strokes. This will indicate fuel flow.
2
c. Continue to pump S-L-O-W-L-Y (up/down once per
second) approximately 100 more strokes to fill the fil-
ter and bleed the air out of the lines. 3
4 2
d. Start engine. It may be necessary to continue to
pump until the engine starts.
1. Filter
e. Depress and turn the top of the manual plunger clock- 2. Nut
wise to lock in place. 3. Copper Rings
4. Banjo Fitting
f. When engine is running smoothly, turn bleed valve
clockwise until fully closed. Figure 9--7. Mechanical Fuel Pump
a. Turn nut counter-clockwise to loosen and remove it
(Item 2, Figure 9--7.).
b. Remove banjo fitting (Item 4) and let it hang loose.
Discard copper rings (Item 3) and replace with new
ones.
Red Fuel
c. Turn filter (Item 1) counter-clockwise and remove.
Bleed Valve
Check and clean.
d. To install reverse above steps.
9.8.2 Electrical Pump -- Optional.
To Check or Replace Filter
a. Remove 3 screws from cover (item 1, Figure 9--8.).
b. Remove cover, gasket and filter.
WARNING
Manual Fuel
Pump Plunger Carefully protect eyes from solvent when
cleaning the fuel filter.
c. Wash filter in cleaning solvent and blow out with air
pressure. Clean cover.
Figure 9--6. Priming Fuel Pump d. To Install reverse above steps.
62-11389 9--10
4) Run engine and drain system while warm. Rinse sys-
1. Cover tem three times after it has cooled down. Refill sys-
2. Gasket tem with water.
3. Filter 5) Run engine to operating temperature. Drain system
3 again and fill with 50/50 water/anti-freeze mixture.
(see Caution Note and Refer to Section 2.8)
2
NEVER POUR COLD WATER INTO A HOT EN-
1 GINE, however hot water can always be added to a
cold engine.
9.9.2 Fuel Level Sensor (FLS)
An optional fuel level sensor supplies an input signal to

the microprocessor as to the % of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank. The microprocessor then turns on the Check
Fuel Level alarm when the level reaches 15%, and (if
configured to do so) turns the engine off when the level
Figure 9--8. Electric Fuel Pump (Optional) reaches 10%.
9.9 ENGINE SERVICE AND COMPONENTS The sensor has the capability of sending from 0% to
100% of the fuel level to the microprocessor. The fuel
9.9.1 Cooling System tank level will be displayed in the Unit Data list.
Air flows through the condenser and radiator. They must a. Verify that the sensor wiring is correct and connected
be internally and externally clean for adequate cooling. properly.
(Refer to Section 9.9.9)
b. Check voltage at the Fuel Level Sensor with the Start/
Run--Off switch in the START/RUN position.
CAUTION c. Voltage between wires FLS A SP5 and FLS B SP6
should be 12.5 and 13.5 VDC. Do not disconnect
Use only ethylene glycol anti-freeze (with these wires from the sensor.
inhibitors) in system as glycol by itself will
damage the cooling system. Always add d. Disconnect the white wire 1MP26--FLSC (output)
pre-mixed 50/50 anti-freeze and water to ra- from the sensor. Voltage between the negative wire
diator/engine. Never exceed more than a and the output wire should be 0 VDC when the sens-
60% concentration of anti-freeze. Use a low ing element is dry and out of the fuel.
silicate anti-freeze meeting GM specifica-
tions GM 6038M for standard life coolant or e. When the sensor is immersed into the fuel, the volt-
use Texaco Havoline extended life coolant age reading between the negative (FLS B SP6)
or any other extended life coolant which is
Dexcool approved and has 5/150 (5 and1MP26--FLSC wires increases up to 5 VDC when
years/150,000 miles) on the label. the fuel has reached the full mark.
a. Servicing the Cooling System:

SUPPLY GROUND SUPPLY
1) Remove all foreign material from the cooling fins of VOLTAGE
the condenser/radiator coil. Compressed air or water VOLTAGE
may be used as a cleaning agent.
OUTPUT
NOTE
Draining the coolant from the engine petcock
will leave approximately 1 quart (.9 liters) of
coolant in the block.
OUTPUT
2) Drain coolant completely by removing lower radiator CONNECTOR SENSOR
hose and radiator cap.
3) Install hose and fill system with clean, untreated wa- A -- BLACK WIRE
ter. B -- RED WIRE
NOTE C -- GREEN WIRE
Only clean water should be used to flush the
cooling system. Do not use any radiator flush or
detergents to clean the radiator. Figure 9--9. Fuel Level Sensor Wiring
9--11 62-11389
9.9.3 Engine Oil And Oil Filter a. Engine Oil And Fuel Flow Diagrams
To check the engine oil level:
Run the unit to bring the engine
up to operating temperature, 5
Cap shut the unit off, and unscrew 6
Dipstick the cap/dipstick. Wipe the dip- 3
stick clean and insert the cap
into the oil fill tube without 2
threading it into the oil fill tube.
Remove the dipstick again and
check oil level. DO NOT add oil 1 4
if the level is in the “safe” range.
If needed, add oil as indicated
by markings on dipstick until
level is in the “safe” range.
QTS 2 1 SAFE
11
a. To Change Engine Oil and Filter:
1) Warm up the engine and then stop it by placing the 10
Start/Run--Off switch in the OFF position. 9 8
2) Remove drain plug from oil pan and drain engine oil
using Oil Drain Tool (CTD P/N 68-15763-00).
3) Lightly oil gasket on new filter before installing. Tight- 7
en 3/4 to 1 of a turn after the seal makes contact.
1. Fuel Tank 6. Fuel Warmer
2. Fuel Supply Line (Optional)
CAUTION 3. Electric Fuel Pump 7. Fuel Bleed Valve
(Optional) 8. Injection Pump
When changing oil filters, the new filters 4. Mechanical Lift Pump 9. Injector Nozzles
oil if possible. If the filters are not primed, 5. Fuel Filter 10. Fuel Leak-off Line
the engine may operate for a period with no 11. Fuel Return Line
oil supplied to the bearings. Figure 9--10. Fuel System Diagram
4) Replace filter and add lube oil. (Refer to Section 2.8.)
Warm up engine and check for leaks. 4
1 5
9.9.4 Engine Oil Filter
After warming up the engine, stop engine, place shallow
drain pan under filter and remove filter. Lightly oil gasket
on new filter before installing. Tighten per the filter 2
manufacturer’s directions.
3
CAUTION
When changing oil filters, the new filters
oil if possible. If the filters are not primed, 1. Engine Block
the engine may operate for a period with no 2. Oil Pan
oil supplied to the bearings. 3. Full Flow Oil Filter
4. Engine Oil Connection
Replace filter(s) and add lube oil. (Refer to Section 2.8) 5. Oil Pressure Switch
Warm up engine and check for leaks. Figure 9--11. Lube Oil Flow Diagram
62-11389 9--12
9.9.5 Electronic Speed Control The FSA combines the fuel shutoff solenoid and speed
Refer to Section 11 for schematic wiring diagram. Refer control solenoid into one component. Engine speed is
to Section 10.5 for ESC diagnostic alarms and controlled by varying rod position.
diagnostic trees.
The ENSSN provides the RPM signal to the ENSCU for
speed control. It is located on the front of the engine in
the gear case cover.
9.9.6 Air Cleaner
a. Inspection
The air cleaner should be inspected regularly for leaks.

A damaged air cleaner or hose can seriously affect the
performance and life of the engine. The air cleaner is de-
signed to effectively remove contaminants from the air
stream entering the engine. An excessive accumulation
of these contaminants in the air cleaner will impair its op-
eration; therefore, a service schedule must be set up
and followed. The air cleaner filter element requires re-
placement when dirty.
1) Check all connections for mechanical tightness. Be

sure filter outlet pipe is not fractured.
ENSSN FSA 2) In case of leakage and if adjustment does not correct
the trouble, replace necessary parts or gaskets.
Figure 9--12. Electronic Speed Control Swelled or distorted gaskets must always be re-
Components placed.
Engine speed is controlled by three components: the
engine speed control unit (ENSCU), the fuel and speed 3) Air Filter Service Indicator
actuator (FSA) and the engine speed sensor (ENSSN).
The ENSCU is located on the air cleaner bracket. (See An air cleaner indicator is connected to the engine air in-
Figure 2--2.) It provides the RPM signal to the take manifold. Its function is to indicate when the air
microprocessor. The unit has an alarm LED cleaner requires replacement. During operation: when a
incorporated within it which is used to diagnose failures plugged air cleaner causes the intake manifold pressure
within the ESC system. to drop to 20” (500 mm) WG, the indicator will move to
the red line. The air cleaner should then be replaced and
the indicator reset by pressing the reset button.
b. Service Procedure
1) Release 2 clips on air cleaner housing and remove

bottom cover.
2) Remove filter element, wipe inside of air cleaner

LED housing clean and install new filter element.
3) Wipe inside of bottom cover clean and re-install.
4) Re-secure 2 clips on air cleaner housing and close

Figure 9--13. Engine Speed Control Unit roadside door.
9--13 62-11389
9.9.7 Crankcase Breather NOTE
To avoid short--circuiting the heater, ensure that
The engine uses a closed type breather with the
breather line attached to the cylinder head cover. (See the heater and the heater lines are vertical
Figure 9--14.) when assembling the heater to the side of the
The breather assembly should be cleaned once a year intake manifold.
or at every 2000 hours maintenance interval (whichever
comes first). See Table 9--1 9.9.9 Water Pump V--Belt
2 1 WARNING
3
moving parts, disconnect the negative
battery and standby power cables.
Water Pump Belt

4
1. Screw
2. Breather Cover
3. Breather Valve
4. Breather Tube
Figure 9--14. Engine Crankcase Breather
9.9.8 Intake Air Heater

The total circuit amp draw for the air heater circuit is
checked during a Pretrip cycle. Refer to and Table 2-6
for amperage and resistance values.
a. Troubleshooting The Intake Air Heater (IAH)
1) Disconnect the lead.
2) Measure the resistance between the + terminal and
the heater body. Figure 9--16. Water Pump V--Belt
3) If the resistance is infinity or shorted, the intake air
heater is faulty and should be replaced. The water pump v-belt is driven by a sheave on the
engine crankshaft. Frayed, cracked or worn belts must
be replaced. This belt is a one time use only type and
requires no tension adjustment. To replace belt turn the
+ TERMINAL engine manually while guiding belt onto the pulley.
9.10 EVAPORATOR HEATERS

9.10.1 Description
HEATER BODY
The evaporator coil heaters are energized through the
power supply or the AC generator driven by the diesel
engine. They are used to defrost or heat the evaporator
coil.
9.10.2 Testing And Replacing Heater Assemblies
Figure 9--15. Intake Air Heater
b. Replacing The Intake Air Heater WARNING

1) Remove the inlet hose.
2) Disconnect the lead. moving parts or high voltage components,
disconnect the negative battery and
3) Remove the flange and the intake air heater. standby power cables.
62-11389 9--14
a. Remove the lower back panel. (on the side closest to the evaporator coil). Ensure
that all wires are clear of heater rods.
b. Determine which heater assembly(s) needs to be re-
placed as a result of a Pretrip test. Disconnect the 9.11 EVAPORATOR BLOWER AND MOTOR
suspect heater assembly(s) and check pin to pin res-
istance on each assembly before replacing. Correct The evaporator blower circulates air throughout the
values should be that shown in Section 2.13.1. refrigerated compartment. The air is drawn through the
bottom of the evaporator coil where it is either heated or
c. Remove (3) brackets holding heaters to evaporator cooled and then discharged out of the nozzle into the
coil. compartment. (Refer to Section 2.15.) The blower
motor bearings are factory sealed and do not require
d. Remove and replace faulty heater assembly. If re-
additional grease.
moving assembly with drain pan heater, carefully re-
move drain pan heater from the clips of the drain pan.
e. When reinstalling brackets torque to 6 to 7 ftlbs (8.1 to WARNING
9.5 Nm). Rods should move freely from side to side
when installed. Any time service is being performed on
f. Route and secure electrical cables along the lower disconnect the negative battery and
side of the heat exchanger at the 5 o’clock position standby power cables.
6
5
8
9
10
11
1. Access panel 7. Motor

2. Access grill 8. Motor connector
3. 10 mm Bolts 9. Plate
4. Nozzle 10. 15/16 “ Bolt
5. 10 mm Bolts 11. 10 mm Bolts and bracket
6. Supply Air Sensor
Figure 9--17. Evaporator Blower Assembly
9--15 62-11389
a. Replacing Blower Assembly (See Figure 9--17.)
1) From inside of trailer, remove back panel (Item 1) and
WARNING
the access grill (Item 2) by removing (30) 10 mm bolts
(Item 3). Any time service is being performed on
2) Disconnect wires to motor at the 6 pin connector disconnect the negative battery and
(Item 8). standby power cables.
3) Remove (10) bolts holding the nozzle in place (Items a. Replacing Condenser Fan Assembly (See
4 and 5). Pull supply air sensor (Item 6) from nozzle. Figure 9--18.)
Remove nozzle (Item4).
1) Open the front door.
4) Unscrew the (4) bolts (Item 11) that lock brackets on
2) Disconnect wiring to motor at the 6 pin connector.
each side of plate (Item 9).
3) Loosen the four securing bolts (Item 2) on aluminum
5) Slide plate out to remove assembly from trailer unit. frame as shown in Figure 9--18. -- one on each of the
6) Remove bolt (Item 10) from fan blade using impact (4) corners. If middle divider (Item 4) needs to be re-
gun. moved or handle interferes with fan removal on curb
side, it can be removed with one top bolt and a clip at
7) To remove motor (Item 7), remove (4) 1/4--20 bolts the bottom that holds the divider in place (Item 5).
that hold motor to plate.
4) Remove condenser motor/fan assembly, remove (4)
8) Complete the assembly in reverse order of removal. bolts on the motor/fan assembly.
5) The motor and fan blade are factory assembled & bal-
9.12 CONDENSER FAN AND MOTOR anced as an assembly. Do not disassemble the mo-
ASSEMBLIES tor/fan assembly as they can not be field balanced.
Always Install / replace the motor/fan as an assembly.
The condenser fans pull air through the condenser coil
and discharges over the engine. The motor bearings are 6) Install the condenser motor/fan assembly in reverse
factory sealed and do not require additional grease. order of removal.
2
3
4
1
MOTOR
1. Fan Assembly Mounting Bolts 4. Divider

2. Frame Mounting Bolts 5. Divider Mounting Clip
3. Divider Mounting Bolt
Figure 9--18. Condenser Fan Assembly
62-11389 9--16
9.13 BATTERY CHARGER (BTYC) 9.14.2 Preventive Maintenance and
Operating Precautions
9.13.1 Description
The battery charger is powered by the generator or WARNING
standby power and charges the 12 VDC battery. It is loc-
ated next to the battery in the lower curbside corner of Be aware of HIGH VOLTAGE supplied by the
the unit. (See Figure 2--3.) generator as the unit may start
automatically. Before servicing the unit,
make sure the Start/Run--Off switch is in the
9.13.2 Checking Battery Charger OFF position. Use discretion when servi-
NOTE standby power cables for certain service
The battery must be in good condition before procedures. NEVER dis--assemble the
doing the following test. generator: HIGH MAGNETIC FIELD INSIDE!
plants such as pacemaker and defibrillat-
ors.
a. Run the unit with the battery charger connected to the
battery as usual.
WARNING
NOTE
If there is no battery connected to the charger Do not direct water or steam into the gener-
output wires, the battery charger cannot be ator openings. Do not allow any soap and
water solutions to enter the generator.
properly tested.
b. Using a clamp--on ammeter on the +12 VDC output WARNING

wires of the battery charger. If charging current is be-
tween 3 and 21 Amps the battery charger is function- High voltage (dielectric) testing must not be
ing correctly. performed to the machine without first ob-
serving National Electric Manufacturer’s
c. If charging Amps = 0 check the AC input voltage to the Association (NEMA) rules. The insulation of
charger. The AC input voltage range should be this generator winding may be safely
checked by using a megohm meter. A high
between 350 and 600 VAC. reading indicates good insulation.
d. If there is no AC voltage, stop the unit and, if required,
disconnect the standby plug. NOTE
Always test suspect generators with a
megohmmeter. (Refer to Section 9.6.1.)
CAUTION
Disconnect AC voltage power supply plug
at the unit.
WARNING
Generators of this type should not be
e. Check battery charger fuses and inspect fuse holder “flashed.” Operation with external voltage
wire connections. Inspect plugs, pins and wires at source or momentary shorting of leads will
charger connections. damage the generator and may cause in-
jury.
f. If input voltage, wiring connections and the fuses are
good, replace the battery charger. Costly repairs and down time can usually be prevented
by operating electrical equipment under conditions
which are compatible with those at which the equipment
9.14 GENERATOR (GEN) was designed. Follow the instructions outlined below to
ensure maximum efficiency of the electrical equipment.
9.14.1 Description a. Cooling
The generator delivers AC power to the battery charger, Keep all cooling parts clean. DO NOT EXCEED
the compressor and condenser and evaporator fan mo- TEMPERATURE RISE OF 176_F (80_C) ABOVE A
tors. 104_F (40_C) AMBIENT. This ensures that the NEMA
Class “F” insulation will not be damaged. DO NOT
When the unit is in heating or defrost mode, the genera- EXCEED RATED LOAD except as specified for the
tor also delivers the AC power to the heater elements lo- equipment. OPERATE GENERATOR AT RATED
cated on the evaporator coil. SPEED. Failure to operate generators at rated load or
9--17 62-11389
speed will cause overheating and possible damage to
windings due to over voltage or current.
b. Drying the Generator Windings
Generators that have been in transit, recently steam
cleaned, or in storage for long periods may be subjected
to extreme temperature and moisture changes. This
5.
can cause excessive condensation, and the generator
windings should be thoroughly dried out before bringing
4.
the generator up to full nameplate voltage. If this
precaution is not taken, serious damage to the
generator can result.
Always test suspect motors, or generators described
above, with a megohmmeter (Refer to Section 9.6.1).
Do not set voltage higher than rating on wiring insulation
in order not to prevent insulation breakdown during 6.
testing. Test each winding to ground, looking for very
high megohmmeter readings. Also test each phase to
phase winding looking for a low ohm reading but with
equal reading across all phases. 4. Disconnect ground wire.
9.14.3 Generator Removal 5. Disconnect the 2 generator sensors (if existing.)

6. Cut the generator cables. (Leave the same length as
WARNING new generator wires.)
Be aware of HIGH VOLTAGE supplied by the

generator as the unit may start
make sure the Start/Run--Off switch is in the 7.
OFF position. Use discretion when servi-
standby power cables for certain service
procedures. NEVER dis--assemble the
generator: HIGH MAGNETIC FIELD INSIDE!
plants such as pacemaker and defibrillat- 8.
ors.
8.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
10.
3.
9.
2.
7. Unbolt snubber. Unplug SCM module.

8. Remove the engine frame bolts (Leave front bolt on
pump side loose.)
9. Place the engine support tool (P/N
2. Remove the engine oil fill cap. 86--04751--00.)
3. Remove exhaust pipe. 10.Unbolt battery cable clamps.
62-11389 9--18
13.
11.
16.
15.
11. Remove fuel filter assembly. Unclamp hoses.

13.Pull the harness on the top of generator out of the
way.
14.Swing out the engine.
15.Remove the fan cover (4 bolts)
16.Remove the fan blade. (1 screw)
CAUTION
The mica shim must be used during disas-
sembly of the generator from the engine.
12. Never attempt to remove the rotor from the
stator. Leave the shim in place until the gen-
erator is re installed on the engine.
NOTE
The mica shim prevents stator to rotor contact.
A shim exists between the rotor and stator of
every new generator. It the old generator is not
equipped with a shim, do not use the shim on
the new generator. The new mica shim is not to
12.Use tool (P/N : 07--60083--00) to lock the engine fly- be removed until after the generator has been
wheel installed in the unit.
9--19 62-11389
included in the kit) in the bell housing. Install the pins
with the chamfer facing out into the two holes indi-
cated in Figure 9--20.
b. Remove the flywheel and inspect it for any debris or
damage.
20. c. Install spacer (Item 9) onto the bell housing using the
dowel pins.
NOTE
17.
Install the spacer so the irregularly shaped
piece covers the starter opening.
19.
d. Locate two screw holes on the face of the crankshaft
which are located approximately 0.5 in (12.7mm)
apart. All other screw holes are approximately 0.75 in
(19mm) apart (See Figure 9--20.).
e. Assemble two guide rods into the two holes on the
crankshaft located in the previous step. Assemble the
third rod across from the first two rods. See
17.Remove 3 of the 6 flywheel bolts on the generator. Figure 9--20..
18.Insert 3 guiding rods (P/N : SKM 5671.)
f. Install the flywheel on the crankshaft using the guide
19.Place the mica shim (P/N 54--00630--25) between rods to align properly. Make sure the flywheel mates
the rotor and the stator prior to loosening any other with the crankshaft with no rocking or side to side
bolts. movement.
20.Remove the last 3 flywheel bolts. g. Lift the generator using the lifting tool and hang it in
front of the engine. Make sure the generator leads
(Item 11) exit the stator winding on the side away from
the engine.
23.
h. The mounting holes on the generator rotor (Item 7)
22. have two holes offset to match the ones in the crank-
shaft and flywheel. Locate them and turn the engine
21. to line up the guide rods in the crankshaft with the off-
set holes in the generator rotor.
NOTE
The generator rotor does not turn in the stator.
i. Slide the generator rotor over the guide rods and
mate the stator with the spacer installed in step c. En-
sure the dowel pins in the bell housing are fully en-
gaged in the stator.
NOTE
The generator should slide freely on the guide
21. 24. rods if the holes in the generator rotor are
matched correctly with the crank shaft holes.
Otherwise it will bind up and the stator will not
mate properly with the spacer.
j. Install three screws and three washers to the rotor
21. Install the lifting tool (P/N :07--60085--00).
and tighten.
22. Remove the remaining stator bolts.
NOTE
23. Remove the generator with a sling. The screws will be torqued later.
24. Dowel Pins k. Remove the guide rods and assemble and tighten the
9.14.4 Generator Assembly Procedure remaining three rotor screws and washers.
a. Verify the existence and condition of the two original NOTE

dowel pins. (Item 24.) (CTD P/N 34--06210--00 -- not The screws will be torqued later.
62-11389 9--20
l. Install and tighten three stator screws and two wash- u. Look through the opening in the fan cover and ensure
ers with each screw in the following locations (See that the wires are not pinched and that they are ade-
Figure 9--20.) : quately routed.
One in five o’clock location v. Assemble the strain grommet (Item 12).
One in eight o’clock location w. Reconnect wires, sensors and thermistor.
One in eleven o’clock location x.Reassemble engine into unit.
NOTE 2 8
5
The remaining four stator mounting bolts will be 9
installed and will all be torqued after the fan 4 7
cover is installed. 3
6
m. Torque the rotor bolts to 90--110 foot--pounds (122 to 1
149 Nm) using an alternating sequence.
NOTE
Mark each rotor screw after it is torqued to
ensure that all the screws are torqued.
n. Remove the mica shim that is between the stator and

the rotor.
o. Install the fan onto the rotor using two washers and
one screw). 12
11 10
NOTE
The fan must be installed with blades away from
the engine.
1. Bolt, Stator 8. Stator
p. Torque the fan screws to 10--12 foot--pounds (14 to 16 2. Washer, Stator 9. Spacer
Nm. 3. Fan Cover 10. Rotor
q. Remove the connectors from the thermistors using a 4. Fan Mount Bolt 11. Generator Leads
pin extraction tool. (Packerd Tool No. 12014012) 5. Fan Mount Washer 12. Grommet
r. Feed all the wires through the inside of the fan cover 6. Fan
side opening. 7. Bolt, Rotor
s. Install the fan cover (Item 3) onto the generator stator Figure 9--19. Generator Assembly
and install the remaining mounting screws and wash- 11 O’CLOCK
ers. DOWEL
NOTE
Make sure the insulation on lead wires is not 0.5 in (12.7mm)
damaged during assembling of the fan cover.
Each mounting screw must be assembled with
two washers.
t. Torque the stator mounting screws to 33--37 foot

pounds (44.8Nm to 50.1 Nm). DOWEL
8 O’CLOCK 5 O’CLOCK
NOTE
Mark each stator screw after it is torqued to Figure 9--20. Bolt Hole Pattern For Bell Housing
ensure that all the screws are torqued. and Crankshaft
9--21 62-11389
9.15 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (EVXV) All of the windings are connected together at one end,
sharing a common wire where +12V is applied from the
The EVXV is an electronic device which controls the microprocessor.
flow of liquid refrigerant to the evaporator. The
expansion valve maintains a relatively constant degree
of superheat in the gas leaving the evaporator CAUTION
regardless of suction pressure. The valve has a dual
function -- automatic expansion control while the unit is Do not connect 12 VDC to the EVXV wires in
operating and prevention of liquid return to the an attempt to rotate the valve or irreparable
compressor when the unit is not operating. Unless the damage will occur.
valve is defective, it seldom requires any maintenance.
The other end of each winding has its own wire
connected back to the microprocessor.
1 Looking at the 5--pin connector on the EVXV coil, the
wiring is as follows:
Connector Pin Wire Color Winding

A ORANGE A
2 B RED B
C YELLOW A
D BLACK B
FLOW E GREY COM (+12V)
DIRECTION
Refer to Section 2.13 for resistance values.
1. Coil To open the valve, the microprocessor energizes each

winding of the coil in a specific sequence. Energizing the
2. Electronic Expansion Valve windings in the correct sequence rotates the rotor and
causes the valve to open one step.
Figure 9--21. Electronic expansion valve The windings are energized in the reverse sequence to
close the valve one step.
9.15.1 EVXV coil
If the windings are not energized in the proper
sequence, the valve will chatter, but the rotor will not
ORN RED rotate and the valve will not open (or close).
9.15.2 Checking Operation of EVXV
EVXV Operational Test:
Ensure that the EVXV coil assembly and accompanying
boot is securely attached to the valve body. This can be
A B accomplished by pushing the coil securely on the body
and slightly turning it while it is seated at the bottom. You
should feel the detent securing the coil and preventing it
COM (+12VDC) from easily sliding on the valve body. See Figure 2--4.
for EVXV location.
9.15.3 EVXV Diagnostics:
A B NOTE
The tester can be used to open and close the
EVXV manually in order to check its physical
operation. Disconnect the plug to the EVXV and
connect the tester to the valve using the 5--pin
YEL GRY BLK round adaptor (Connector P/N 22--50098--22;
Connector Seal P/N 22--50098--22A and (4) ter-
minals P/N 22--50078--58F.) Set step speed to
50 strokes per second and drive the valve open
Figure 9--22. Electronic expansion valve or closed. It will take approximately 10 seconds
The EVXV coil consists of four windings. See to reach the end stroke of the valve. Listen for
Figure 9--22. valve motor rotation and end stroke.
62-11389 9--22
Tools Required for EVXV Diagnostics: may not be closed because of a mechanical bind or
S SMA--12 Stepper Motor Tester (CTD P/N an electrical problem.
07--00375--00SV) i. If a problem exists, listen for any internal system leak-
age at the valve.
S PC Mode Jumper (Green) (CTD P/N 22--50180--01
9.15.4 Replacing The Electronic Expansion Valve
S Configuration Jumper (White) (CTD P/N
22--50180--00 a. Pump down the unit by closing the liquid line service
valve per Section 9.16.2.
Procedure for EVXV Diagnostics:
b. Remove coil.
a. Connect a manifold gauge test set to the compressor
discharge and suction service valves. c. Use a wet rag to keep valve cool whenever brazing.
Heat inlet, outlet and equalizer connection to valve
b. If the compressor is cold start the unit and let it warm body and remove valve. Clean all tube stubs so new
up for 5 to 10 minutes. valve fits on easily.
c. Connect the PC Mode jumper to the download port d. Install new valve by reversing steps b. through c.
with the Start/Run--Off switch in the OFF position.
e. Evacuate by placing vacuum pump on suction ser-
d. To remove the CSMV from the test, use the Stepper vice valve. Close the valves to the vacuum pump
Motor Tester to manually open the CSMV. (See note when a satisfactory vacuum level is reached.
below). Leave the CSMV connector off if using the
tester, or once the valve is opened. f. Open the king valve and then start the unit and check
refrigerant charge. (Refer to Section 9.19.1.) If refri-
gerant was removed from the system, charge it back
NOTE
into the system at this time. (Refer to Section 9.19.2)
If the tester is not available, exit PC Mode. Use
the Configuration plug when asked to use the g. Check unit operation by running Pretrip (Refer to Sec-
tester. This will allow you to enter Service Mode tion 3.4).
and will completely open the CSMV and EVXV. 9.16 PUMPING UNIT DOWN OR REMOVING RE-
FRIGERANT CHARGE
e. Place the Start/Run--Off switch in START/RUN posi-
tion. Pump down the low side of the system by front
seating the liquid line service valve. (Refer to Section NOTE
9.16.2.) Watch the gauges and let the suction pres- To avoid damage to the earth’s ozone layer, use a
sure drop to 0 to 10 inHg. Turn compressor off by pla- refrigerant recovery system whenever removing
cing the Start/Run--Off switch in the OFF position. refrigerant from a refrigeration system. When
working with refrigerants you must comply with all
NOTE local government environmental laws, U.S.A.
If ambient temperature is high, connect a clean EPA section 608.
refrigerant recovery bottle to the liquid line ser-
vice valve and remove 6 to 7 lbs. of refrigerant Whenever the refrigeration system is opened, it
from the system. This will prevent a high pres- must be evacuated and dehydrated before be-
sure shutdown during this procedure. ing placed back into service. (Refer to Section
9.18.1)
f. If pressure rises, repeat pump down until a low pres-
sure is maintained when the unit is shut off. Depend-
ing on the age of the unit, the compressor may not
seat completely. Monitor pressure on gauges during
CAUTION
this process. Service mode MUST be used whenever re-
g. Wait for the EVXV to reach 0% and then wait at least moving refrigerant charge, refrigerant leak
30 seconds or read the Data display value on the mi- checking or evacuating the low pressure
croprocessor. Use gauge readings and micropro- side or the the entire refrigeration system.
cessor display of the evaporator pressure reading for Refer to Section 6.2.3 for detailed information on how to
diagnosing the valve. access Service Mode.
NOTE 9.16.1 Removing the Refrigerant Charge From The
The gauge reading is on the compressor side of Complete System
the CSMV while the Evaporator Outlet Pres- Every component in the refrigeration system may be
sure transducer (EVOP) is between the EVXV serviced or replaced by removing the complete
and the CSMV. refrigerant charge and temporarily storing the
refrigerant a clean refrigerant recovery bottle.
h. Slowly open the king valve and monitor the EVOP a. Backseat suction and discharge service valves (turn
pressure on the Data display and on the gauge. The counterclockwise) to close off gauge connection and
suction pressure should not rise. If it does, the EVXV attach manifold gauges to valves. Backseat the king
9--23 62-11389
valve to close off the gage connection and attach a temporarily storing the refrigerant in the condenser and
second high side manifold gage to it. receiver.
b. Open valves 1/4 to 1/2 turn (clockwise). Purge gauge a. Backseat suction and discharge service valves (turn
lines. counterclockwise) to close off gauge connection and
attach manifold gauges to valves.
c. If the system is in operating condition, it will be quicker
to remove the charge by continuing with Step h. below. b. Open valves 1/4 to 1/2 turn (clockwise). Purge gauge
If the system is not in operating condition skip ahead to line.
Step g. c. Start the unit.
d. Front seat the king valve.
CAUTION e. Watching the gauges, let the suction pressure drop to
10”Hg / --4.9 psig (0.3 bar). Shut the compressor and
Only a refrigerant drum that has previously the unit off.
been used with R404A should be connected
to this refrigeration unit. f. Monitor the gauges. The suction pressure should
not rise rapidly. If the suction pressure continues to
d. Connect an empty and evacuated clean refrigerant rise, the king valve may not be closed properly. In
cylinder to the king valve connection. It will be helpful this case, the low side cannot be pumped down
if the cylinder were on a weight scale so the refriger- and the entire refrigerant charge must be removed
ant going into the cylinder can be monitored. from the system. (Refer to Section 9.16.1)
e. Start the unit and run in high speed cool. Cover the g. Frontseat (close by turning clockwise) the discharge
condenser to raise the discharge pressure to as high service valve and the refrigerant will be trapped be-
as 375 psig (25.5 bar). Do not let the discharge pres- tween the compressor discharge service valve and
sure exceed 400 psig (27.2 bar). Open the refrigerant the king valve.
cylinder valve, and allow the refrigerant to pump into h. Disconnect the negative battery and standby power
the cylinder. The amount of refrigerant going into the cables.
cylinder can be monitored by watching the weight of
the cylinder. i. Before opening up any part of the low side of the sys-
tem, a slight positive pressure should be indicated on
f. When the suction pressure drops below 0 psig / bar, the pressure gauge. If the pressure is below 0 psig/
the refrigerant flow has probably stopped. Close the bar slowly open the king valve slightly and then front-
valve to the refrigerant cylinder and shut off the unit seat the valve again. Repeat as necessary in order to
and compressor. There should be very little refriger- raise the pressure above 0 psig.
ant remaining in the system at this point.
j. Connect a refrigerant recovery device and a clean re-
g. Place the unit in Service Mode (Refer to Section frigerant recovery bottle to the center line of the mani-
6.2.3) to open the system. When entering Service fold gauge set and remove any remaining refrigerant
Mode, the microprocessor will open the CSMV and from the low side of the system but do not bring the
EVXV to 100% open and energize UL1. The mes- low side pressure below 0 psig/bar.
sage center will display “ENTERING SERVICE
k. After making necessary repairs, leak test and evacu-
MODE” and log an Evacuation Mode Start Event in
ate the low side of the refrigeration system. (Refer to
the Data Recorder. Ensure that the MessageCenter
Sections 9.17.1 and 9.18.2.)
displays “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” dur-
ing the actual refrigerant recovery process. l. After making necessary repairs, leak test and evacu-
ate the low side of the refrigeration system -- in partic-
h. Connect a refrigerant recovery device and a clean re-
ular any areas that were repaired, disconnected or
frigerant recovery bottle (or continue to use the same
opened. Refer to Section 9.17.3 and 9.18.2. If refri-
cylinder used in step d.) as shown in figure 9--31 to re- gerant was moved from the system, charge it back in-
move any remaining refrigerant from the system.
to the system at this time. (Refer to Section 9.19.1)
i. Refer to instructions provided by the manufacturer of 9.16.3 Pumping Down The Compressor
the refrigerant recovery system.
j. After making necessary repairs, leak test the refriger-
ation system -- in particular any areas that were re- WARNING
paired, disconnected or opened. Refer to Section
9.17. Any time service is being performed on
9.16.2 Pumping Down The Low Side disconnect the negative battery and
standby power cables.
Components on the low side of the refrigeration system
(the filter drier, EVXV, evaporator coil, Evaporator The compressor or any of the components attached to it
Outlet Pressure Transducer, CSMV, heat exchanger, (unloaders, high pressure switch, discharge pressure
suction line, etc.) may be serviced or replaced without and temperature transducers, compressor heads and
having to completely remove the refrigerant charge oil, etc.) may be serviced or replaced without having to
from the system by pumping down the low side, and completely remove the refrigerant charge from the
62-11389 9--24
compressor by pumping the compressor down, and 9.17.1 Leak Testing The Refrigeration System
isolating the compressor from the rest of the system. When A Leak Is Suspected, But The Refriger-
ant Has Not Been Removed From Any Part Of
a. Backseat suction and discharge service valves (turn The System.
counterclockwise) to close off gauge connection and
NOTE
b. Open service valves 1/4 to 1/2 turn (clockwise). Purge Service Mode is not required for this procedure.
manifold gauge lines.
c. Start the compressor and slowly frontseat the suction
service valve until the suction pressure reaches
10”Hg /--4.9 psig (0.3 bar). Shut the compressor and
the unit off. WARNING
d. Turn the unit and the compressor off. Disconnect the Any time service is being performed on
negative battery and standby power cables. moving parts or high voltage components,
e. Frontseat the discharge service valve to isolate com- disconnect the negative battery and
standby power cables.
pressor. Monitor gauge pressure. If either gauge is
below 0 psig/bar, open the suction service valve
slightly to raise the pressure slightly above 0 psig / bar Leak checking may be performed without the use of dry
and then frontseat the valve again. nitrogen or the use of Service Mode when a leak is
suspected in a system with an existing refrigerant
f. Connect a refrigerant recovery device and a clean re- charge.
frigerant recovery bottle to the center line of the mani-
fold gauge set and remove any remaining refrigerant a. Turn the unit and the compressor off. Disconnect the
from the compressor. negative battery and standby power cables.
b. Verify that the suspected area of the leak (high pres-
sure or low pressure side) has enough [20 to 150 psig
CAUTION (1.4 to 10.2 bar)] pressure to detect the leak. The lar-
ger the leak the less pressure is required. The smaller
The service valves are sealing off refrigerant the leak, the greater pressure is required.
from the rest of the system. Do not open
these valves until the compressor is ready to c. The recommended procedure for finding leaks in a
be returned to service. system is with an electronic leak detector. Testing
joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for locating
large leaks, or pinpointing small leaks once a general
9.17 LEAK CHECKING area has been located.
d. Some leaks may be repaired by simply tightening a
connection. Others may require pumping down the
CAUTION compressor (Refer to Section 9.16.3); or pumping
down the low side (Refer to Section 9.16.2); or com-
Service Mode MUST be used whenever re- pletely removing the charge from the system (Refer
moving refrigerant charge, refrigerant leak to Section 9.17.)
checking or evacuating the low pressure
side or the entire refrigeration system.. e. Check for proper unit operation by running Pretrip
(Refer to Section 3.4).
Refer to Section 6.2.3 for detailed information on how to 9.17.2 Leak Testing Of The Refrigeration System
access Service Mode. When The Entire Charge Has Been
Removed, And The Microprocessor Is In
The refrigeration system may be leak tested at any time Service Mode.
that a leak is suspected without the use of Service
Mode, provided that there is sufficient pressure to detect The refrigeration system must be leak tested once it is
the leak. closed and all repairs complete.
Service Mode is not required when the compressor has a. Re--attach the manifold gauges now if they were re-
been pumped down for service or repairs, and when moved.
leak testing is required prior to evacuation.
b. Pressurize the system to 5 to 10 psig (0.3 to 0.7 bar)
When Service Mode is being used due to refrigerant by opening the king valve for a few seconds, then
being removed from the system, or the system has been closing (frontseat) it again.
pumped down on the low pressure side, the
Microprocessor Display must display “RECOVER / c. Use dry nitrogen to increase the pressure as neces-
LEAK CHK / EVAC MODE” while the system is being sary to 20 to 150 psig (1.4 to 10.2 bar) to detect the
pressurized for leak testing and during the leak testing leak. The larger the leak the less pressure is required.
process. The smaller the leak, the greater pressure is required
9--25 62-11389
c. Use dry nitrogen to increase the pressure as neces-
CAUTION sary to 20 to 150 psig (1.4 to 10.2 bar) to detect the
leak. The larger the leak the less pressure is required.
Only a refrigerant drum containing R404A The smaller the leak, the greater pressure is required
should be connected to this refrigeration
unit in order to pressurize the system.
However, dry nitrogen may be used to in- WARNING
crease pressure. Any other gas or vapor will
contaminate the system which will require Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a
additional purging and evacuation of the pressure regulator. Cylinder pressure is
high side (discharge) of the system. approximately 2350 psig (159.9 bar). Do not
as an explosion may occur. (See
Figure 9--30.)
WARNING d. The recommended procedure for finding leaks in a

system is with an electronic leak detector. Testing
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for locating
pressure regulator. Cylinder pressure is large leaks, or pinpointing small leaks once a general
approximately 2350 psig (159.9 bar). Do not area has been located.
as an explosion may occur. (See e. Ensure that the microprocessor MessageCenter dis-
Figure 9--30.) plays “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” when
actually leak checking. If the microprocessor
d. The recommended procedure for finding leaks in a switches to charge mode during the charging pro-
system is with an electronic leak detector. Testing cess, switch it back to the
joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for locating “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE”. (Refer to
large leaks, or pinpointing small leaks once a general Section 6.2.3.)
area has been located.
f. Once leak testing is complete, vent the refrigerant /
e. Ensure that the microprocessor MessageCenter dis- nitrogen vapor out of the system.
plays “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” when
actually leak checking. If the microprocessor g. If no leaks are found the system is ready for evacu-
switches to charge mode during the charging pro- ation. (Skip to Step j.)
cess, switch it back to the h. If any leaks are found they must be repaired before
“RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE”. (Refer to proceeding.
Section 6.2.3.)
i. Repeat steps b. thru h. as necessary.
f. Once leak testing is complete, vent the refrigerant /
nitrogen vapor out of the system. j. Evacuate the system after all leaks are repaired. (Re-
fer to Section 9.18.1.)
g. If no leaks are found the system is ready for evacu-
ation. (Skip to Step j.) 9.17.4 Compressor Leak Checking
h. If any leaks are found they must be repaired before
proceeding. NOTE
Use of Service Mode is not required when leak
i. Repeat steps b. thru h. as necessary. checking only the compressor and the com-
j. Evacuate the system after all leaks are repaired. (Re- pressor has been pumped down and isolated
fer to Section 9.18.1.) from the refrigeration system.
9.17.3 Leak Testing Of the Low Pressure side of the

Refrigeration System when the Low Side had The compressor and its associated switches,
been pumped down, and the Microprocessor transducers, etc. must be leak tested once the
is in Service Mode. compressor is closed and all repairs complete.
The low side of the refrigeration system must be leak a. Re--attach the manifold gages now if they were re-
tested once it is closed and all repairs complete. moved.
a. Re--attach the manifold gages now if they were re- b. Pressurize the compressor to 5 to 10 psig
moved. (0.3 to 0.7 bar) by opening the suction service valve
for a few seconds, then closing (frontseating) it again.
b. Pressurize the system to 5 to 10 psig (0.3 to 0.7 bar)
by opening the king valve for a few seconds, then c. Use dry nitrogen to increase the pressure as neces-
closing (frontseat) it again. sary to 20 to 150 psig (1.4 to 10.2 bar) to detect the
62-11389 9--26
leak. The larger the leak the less pressure is required. 9.18.1 Complete System Evacuation And Dehydra-
The smaller the leak, the greater pressure is required tion
a. Re--attach the manifold gages now if they were re-
moved.
WARNING
NOTE
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a Standard service hoses are not recommended
pressure regulator. Cylinder pressure is for evacuation purposes. Evacuation hoses are
approximately 2350 psig (159.9 bar). Do not recommended for this procedure.
Figure 9--30.) b. Evacuate and dehydrate only after pressure leak test.
(Refer to Section 9.17.2)
d. The recommended procedure for finding leaks in a c. If possible keep the temperature of the major com-
compressor is with an electronic leak detector. Test- ponents (condenser, evaporator, compressor and re-
ing joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for locat- ceiver) above 60_F (15.6_C) to speed evaporation of
ing large leaks, or pinpointing small leaks once a gen- moisture. If the temperature is lower than 60_F
eral area has been located. (15.6_C), ice might form before moisture removal is
complete. Heat lamps, heat guns or alternate
e. Once leak testing is complete, vent the refrigerant / sources of heat may be used to raise system temper-
nitrogen vapor out of the system. ature.
f. If no leaks are found the system is ready for evacu- d. The recommended method to evacuate and dehy-
ation. (Skip to Step j.) drate the system is to connect three evacuation hose-
g. If any leaks are found they must be repaired before s as shown in Figure 9--23. to the vacuum pump and
proceeding. refrigeration unit. Also, as shown, connect an evacu-
ation manifold to the vacuum pump, electronic vac-
h. Repeat steps b. thru h. as necessary. uum gauge, and refrigerant recovery system.
i. Evacuate the compressor after all leaks are repaired. e.If the microprocessor is not already in Service Mode,
(Refer to Section 9.18.3.) place the unit in Service Mode (Refer to Section
6.2.3) to open the system. When entering Service
j. Once the compressor holds a good vacuum, fully Mode, the microprocessor will close the CSMV and
backseat the compressor suction and discharge ser- EVXV valves and then open them to 100% open and
vice valves then open 1/4 to 1/2 turn to monitor the energize UL1. The MessageCenter will display
pressures during testing. “ENTERING SERVICE MODE” and log an Evacu-
k. Check refrigerant charge per Section 9.19.1. ation Mode Start Event in the Data Recorder.
l. Check for noncondensibles and check for proper unit f.Backseat (turn counter--clockwise) the king, suction
operation by running unit Pretrip. (Refer to Section service and discharge service valves.
3.4). g. With the unit service valves closed (back seated) and
the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum gauge
9.18 EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION valves open, start the pump and draw a deep vac-
Moisture is detrimental to refrigerant systems. The uum. Shut off the pump and check to see if the vac-
presence of moisture in a refrigeration system can have uum holds. This operation is to test the evacuation
many undesirable effects such as: copper plating, acid setup for leaks. Repair if necessary.
sludge formation, “freeze-up” of the EVXV, and h. Once the vacuum holds in step g. midseat the refrig-
formation of acids, resulting in metal corrosion. Proper erant system service valves. Ensure that the micro-
evacuation of the system will remove any moisture from processor MessageCenter displays “RECOVER/
inside the system. LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” . (Refer to Section 6.2.3.)
i. Open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum
NOTES gauge valves if they are not already open. Start the
Essential tools to properly evacuate and dehy- vacuum pump. Evacuate unit until the electronic vac-
drate any system include a good vacuum pump uum gauge indicates 2000 microns. Close the elec-
(5 cfm/8m#H volume displacement, Carrier tronic vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut
Transicold P/N 07-00176-11) and a good vacu- off the vacuum pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure
um indicator such as a thermocouple vacuum the vacuum holds.
gauge (micrometer). (Carrier Transicold P/N j. Break the vacuum with dry nitrogen through the dis-
07--00414--00) charge service valve. Raise system pressure to
approximately 2 psig (0.1 bar). Ensure that the micro-
The use of a compound gauge is not recom- processor does not switch to the charge mode. If this
mended for use in determining when the evacu- occurs, switch it back to the
ation process is completed because of its inher- “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” (Refer to
ent inaccuracy. Section 6.2.3
9--27 62-11389
k. Purge nitrogen from system out of the suction service off the vacuum pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure
valve. the vacuum holds.
l. Repeat steps i. through k. one more time. Evacuate h. Break the vacuum with dry nitrogen through the dis-
unit to 500 microns. Close off vacuum pump valve charge service valve. Raise system pressure to
and stop pump. Wait a few minutes to see if vacuum approximately 2 psig (0.1 bar). Ensure that the micro-
holds. This checks for residual moisture and/or leaks. processor does not switch to the charge mode. If this
If the vacuum gage rises above 2000 microns, repeat occurs, switch it back to the
steps i. through k. “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” (Refer to
Section 6.2.3
m. Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close off vacuum
pump valve and stop pump. Wait five minutes to see if i. Purge nitrogen from system out of the suction service
vacuum holds. This checks for residual moisture and/ valve.
or leaks. j. Open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum
n. Once the system holds a good vacuum, it is ready to gauge valves if they are not already open. Start the
be charged with refrigerant. Refer to Section 9.19.3 vacuum pump. Evacuate unit until the electronic vac-
for charging a complete system with refrigerant. uum gauge indicates 500 microns. Close the elec-
tronic vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut
9.18.2 Low Side Evacuation And Dehydration off the vacuum pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure
the vacuum holds below 2000 microns.
a. Re--attach the manifold gages now if they were re-
moved. k. If vacuum holds below 2000 microns continue to step
m. If vacuum rises above 2000 microns continue to
NOTE step l..
Standard service hoses are not recommended l. .Repeat steps g. through j. until the vacuum stays be-
for evacuation purposes. Evacuation hoses are low 2000 microns.
recommended for this procedure. m. Once the system holds a good vacuum, open the
compressor discharge service valve and the king
b. Evacuate and dehydrate only after pressure leak test. valve.
(Refer to Section 9.17.2) 9.18.3 Evacuation And Dehydration of Compressor
c. If possible keep the temperature of the evaporator a. Re--attach the manifold gages to the compressor and
and compressor above 60_F (15.6_C) to speed evap- connect them to the vacuum pump manifold as
oration of moisture. If the temperature is lower than shown in Figure 9--23. However, do not connect to
60_F (15.6_C), ice might form before moisture re- the king valve.
moval is complete. Heat lamps, heat guns or alter-
nate sources of heat may be used to raise system NOTE
temperature. Standard service hoses are not recommended
d. The recommended method to evacuate and dehy- for evacuation purposes. Evacuation hoses are
drate the system is to connect three evacuation hose- recommended for this procedure.
s as shown in Figure 9--23. to the vacuum pump and
refrigeration unit. Also, as shown, connect an evacu- b. Evacuate and dehydrate only after pressure leak test.
ation manifold to the vacuum pump, electronic vac- (Refer to Section 9.17.4.)
uum gauge, and refrigerant recovery system. c. If possible keep the temperature of the compressor
e.If the microprocessor is not already in Service Mode, above 60_F (15.6_C) to speed evaporation of mois-
place the unit in Service Mode (Refer to Section ture. If the temperature is lower than 60_F (15.6_C),
6.2.3) to open the system. When entering Service ice might form before moisture removal is complete.
Mode, the microprocessor will close the CSMV and Heat lamps, heat guns or alternate sources of heat
EVXV valves and then open them to 100% open and may be used to raise compressor temperature.
energize UL1. The MessageCenter will display d. Open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum
“ENTERING SERVICE MODE” and log an Evacu- gauge valves if they are not already open. Start the
ation Mode Start Event in the Data Recorder. vacuum pump. Evacuate unit until the electronic vac-
f. Leave the king valve and the discharge service valve uum gauge indicates 500 microns. Close the elec-
frontseated and then midseat the suction service tronic vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut
valve. Ensure that the microprocessor Mes- off the vacuum pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure
sageCenter displays “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC the vacuum holds. This checks for residual moisture
MODE” . (Refer to Section 6.2.3.) and/or leaks.
e. Once the compressor holds a good vacuum, it is
g. Open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum
ready to be charged with refrigerant. Open the com-
gauge valves if they are not already open. Start the
pressor suction and discharge service valve to allow
vacuum pump. Evacuate unit until the electronic vac-
refrigerant to enter the compressor.
uum gauge indicates 2000 microns. Close the elec-
tronic vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut f. The system should now be ready to start.
62-11389 9--28
THE KING VALVE (ITEM 9) IS NOT
9 USED FOR COMPRESSOR ONLY
DEHYDRATION PROCEDURE
15 10
14
13 12
11
CD
P
8
4
3 7
CS
P
2 5
1
6
1. Refrigerant cylinder 9. King valve

2. Refrigerant recovery unit 10. Receiver
3 Manifold gage set 11. Compressor suction service valve
4. Valve 12. Compressor
5. Vacuum gage 13. Compressor discharge service valve
6. Vacuum pump 14. Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV)
7. Evacuation manifold 15. Evaporator
8. Condenser
Figure 9--23. Vacuum Pump Connection
9--29 62-11389
9.19 ADDING REFRIGERANT TO SYSTEM c. Start unit in Continuous Run mode with set point
lower than refrigerated compartment temperature.
Wait until unit switches to high speed diesel opera-
tion. Run approximately ten minutes.
CAUTION d. Place drum of refrigerant on scale and connect char-
ging line from drum to liquid line service valve. Purge
Do not vapor charge R404A. Only liquid charging line at king valve.
charging through the king valve is accept-
able. e. Note weight of drum and refrigerant.
f. Open liquid valve on drum and purge at the manifold
Check the refrigerant charge before adding any gage connected to the king valve.
refrigerant to the system. Only add refrigerant if charge g. Frontseat the king valve (turn clockwise) and watch
is low. If charge is low, leak testing must be performed the pressure on the manifold gage. When the pres-
(Refer to Section 9.17.2) and all leaks repaired before sure falls below the pressure in the refrigerant cylin-
adding refrigerant. der [or to 50 psig (3.4 bar)], open the manifold gage
valve and allow the liquid refrigerant to flow into the
unit.
9.19.1 Checking Refrigerant Charge
h. When approximately 5 lbs. (2.3 kg) have been added
a. Start unit in cooling mode. Run approximately ten (monitor the weight of the refrigerant cylinder while
minutes -- until the refrigeration system is warmed up charging), close the manifold gage, and open the king
and the refrigerated compartment temperature is less valve.
than 45°F (7.2C).
i. Check for the correct refrigerant charge (Refer to
b. Backseat suction service and king valves (turn coun- Section 9.19.1 and Table 3-1).
terclockwise) to close off gauge connection and at-
j. If the system is not full, repeat steps g. thru i. until the
tach manifold gauges to valves. (Attach the high side system is full of refrigerant.
gage to the king valve and the low side gage to the
suction service valve.) k. If the system becomes overcharged, reduce the
charge by opening the manifold gage valve connec-
c. Open valves 1/4 to 1/2 turn (clockwise). Purge gauge ted to the king valve and letting the liquid flow back in-
line. to the refrigerant cylinder until the level is correct.
d. Partially block off air flow to condenser coil so dis- l. Close the liquid line valve on the refrigerant cylinder
charge pressure rises to 230 psig (15.7 bar). and backseat the king valve. Remove the charging
hose.
e. Check the lower sight glass to determine charge. The
system is correctly charged when the lower sight m. Refer to Section 9.19.1 for instructions on checking
glass is not empty and the upper sight glass is the refrigerant charge.
not full. n. Check for noncondensibles and check for proper unit
f. If the system appears to be overcharged remove re- operation by running unit Pretrip. (Refer to Section
frigerant through the king valve into a clean refriger- 3.4).
ant recovery bottle. 9.19.3 Adding Full Charge
g. If the refrigerant system appears to be undercharged NOTE
add refrigerant (after leak testing the entire system,
and repairing any leaks) through the king valve. (Re- Place unit in Service Mode before performing
fer to Section 9.19.2.). the following operations on the unit. Refer to
Section 6.2.3.
9.19.2 Adding A Partial Charge a. Dehydrate unit and leave in deep vacuum. (Refer to
A partial charge is required when there has been a Section 9.18.1)
refrigerant leak or the system was not completely b. Place drum of refrigerant on scale and connect charg-
charged during a previous service. Leak testing and ing line from drum to liquid line service valve. Purge
repair must be completed before adding refrigerant. charging line at king valve.
(Refer to Section 9.17.1.) c. Note weight of drum and refrigerant.
NOTE d. Open liquid valve on drum. Midseat king valve and al-
The unit should be operating in COOL Mode low the liquid refrigerant to flow into the unit until the
(set point should be lower than refrigerated correct weight of refrigerant has been added as indi-
cated by scale. Correct charge will be found in
compartment temperature). Table 3-1.
a. Backseat suction service and king valves (turn coun-
terclockwise) to close off gage connection and attach NOTE
manifold gages to valves. (Attach the high side gage It is possible that all liquid may not be pulled into
to the king valve and the low side gage to the suction the receiver, as outlined in step d. In this case,
service valve.) frontseat the liquid line service valve and run
b. Open valves 1/4 to 1/2 turn (clockwise). Purge gage the unit in cooling until the correct amount of re-
lines. frigerant is added.
62-11389 9--30
e. When scale indicates that the correct charge has NOTE
been added, close liquid line valve on drum and back- Service replacement compressors are shipped
seat the liquid line service valve. Remove charging without oil.
hose.
f. Start unit in cooling mode. Run for approximately 10 Add only 7.0 pints (3.3 liters) of oil when first
minutes. If necessary, partially block off air flow to adding oil to the compressor. Run the unit for 20
condenser coil so discharge pressure rises to at least minutes in cooling mode. Check the oil level in
230 psig (15.8 bar). Refrigerant should appear at cen- the compressor sight glass. Add oil as
ter line of lower receiver sight glass.
necessary. Amount of oil added should not ex-
g. Check for noncondensibles (Refer to Section 9.19.4) ceed 7.6 pints (3.6 liters.) This procedure is
and check for proper unit operation by running unit designed to compensate for excess oil that may
Pretrip. (Refer to Section 3.4).
have migrated with refrigerant to other parts of
9.19.4 Checking For Noncondensibles the system during unit operation.
To check for noncondensibles, proceed as follows:
9.20.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor
a. Stabilize system to equalize pressure between the
suction and discharge side of the system. The engine
needs to be off for several hours. NOTE
The service replacement compressor is sold
b. Measure temperature at any of the copper tubing in without shutoff valves (but with valve flanges).
the condenser.
The valve pads should be installed on the re-
c. Check pressure at the compressor discharge service moved compressor prior to return shipping. The
valve. customer should retain the original capacity un-
d. Determine saturation pressure as it corresponds to loader valves for use on replacement compres-
the condenser temperature using the Temperature- sor.
Pressure Chart, Table 9--9.
a. Pumpdown the compressor. (Refer to Section
e. If gauge reading is not close to the calculated satura- 9.16.3.)
tion pressure in step d., noncondensibles or mixed re-
frigerants are present. b. Locate the compressor junction box. Write down
where all the wires are connected. Remove wiring.
f. Remove refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery sys- Disconnect wiring from compressor terminals and re-
tem. (Refer to Section 9.16.1.) move compressor junction box.
g. Evacuate and dehydrate the system. (Refer to Sec- c. Recover residual refrigerant from compressor, and
tion 9.18.1.) bring the internal compressor pressure to 0 psig.
h. Charge the unit. (Refer to Section 9.19.) d. Remove bolts from service valve flanges.
e. Remove compressor mounting bolts.
9.20 COMPRESSOR -- MODEL 06D
f. Remove compressor. Refer to Section 2.11 for weight
of compressor.
WARNING g. Draw a small sample of compressor oil and test for
acidity If acid is present a system cleanup may be ne-
Be aware of HIGH VOLTAGE supplied by the cessary.
generator as the unit may start h. Remove all external compressor components.
make sure the Start/Run--Off switch is in the
OFF position. Use discretion when servi-
cing the unit. It may be necessary to WARNING
standby power cables for certain service Relieve internal pressure of replacement
procedures. NEVER dis--assemble the compressor by slightly loosening the bolts
generator: HIGH MAGNETIC FIELD INSIDE! of both service valve flanges and then
This field can interfere with and cardiac im- lightly tapping the center of the valve
plants such as pacemaker and defibrillat- flanges with a soft mallet to break the seal.
ors.
i. Add oil to replacement compressor. Refer to Section
9.21.
CAUTION j. Reinstall components removed in step h.
k. Install compressor in unit. See Figure 9--24. for
Service mode MUST be used whenever re- torque information.
moving refrigerant charge, refrigerant leak
checking or evacuating the entire refrigera- l. Secure junction box to compressor and connect all
tion system. Refer to Section 6.2.3. wiring per wiring diagram. Install junction box cover.
9--31 62-11389
m. Remove any remaining old gasket material from the OF THE CYLINDER HEAD! Be careful not to drop the
discharge and suction service valve sealing surfaces head or damage the gasket sealing surface. (See
and Install new gaskets on service valves. Figure 9--24. and Figure 9--25.) Remove cylinder
head gasket.
n. Install mounting bolts in service valves and torque ac-
cording to values in Table 9--2. c. Remove discharge valve stops and reeds. After they
have been removed, free the valve plate from the cyl-
o. Leak test compressor according to Section 9.17.4.
inder deck by using the outside discharge valve hold-
p. Evacuate and dehydrate compressor according to down cap screw as a jack screw through the tapped
Section 9.18.3. hole of the valve plate. Remove the valve plate gas-
ket, see Figure 9--25., item 7
q. Start unit and check refrigerant charge. (Refer to Sec-
tion 9.16) 9.20.3 Compressor Reassembly
r. Change filter-drier. (Refer to Section 9.23) To clean compressor parts, use a suitable solvent with
proper precautions. Coat all moving parts with the prop-
s. Check compressor oil level per Section 9.21. Add oil if
er compressor oil (Refer to Section 2.11) before assem-
necessary.
bly. Refer to Table 9--2 for applicable compressor torque
t. Fully backseat compressor discharge and suction values.
service valves. Remove gages from compressor. In-
stall and tighten all service valve caps.
u. Running a Pretrip test is recommended before return- a. If the valve seats look damaged or worn, replace
ing the unit to service. valve plate assembly. Always use new reeds be-
cause it is difficult to reinstall used discharge valves
9.20.2 Compressor Disassembly so that they will seat properly.
a. Pump down the compressor. (Refer to Section b. Suction valves are positioned by dowel pins in the up-
9.16.3.) per face of the compressor. (See Figure 9--26.) and
will assume their original position when reinstalled.
b. Remove cylinder head cap screws. If the cylinder No two valves are likely to wear in exactly the same
head is stuck, tap the center of the cylinder head with way. Never interchange used valves. Used reeds
a wooden or lead mallet. DO NOT STRIKE THE SIDE should never be re--used.
1 2 3 4 13 12
14
5 11
6 7
8
Tighten to 33 to 37 ft lbs 9 10
BACK VIEW (44 to 50 Nm) Tighten to 60 to 70 ft lbs
(81 to 95 Nm) FRONT VIEW
1. Compressor discharge pressure trandsucer 8. Oil pan

2. High pressure switch 9. Oil drain location
3. Compressor discharge temperature sensor 10. Crankcase heater (option)
4. Electrical terminal box 11. Sight glass
5. Suction service valve flange 12. Cylinder head
6. Motor end cover 13. Valve plate
7. Serial/Model plate 14. Discharge service valve flange
Figure 9--24. Compressor -- model 06D
62-11389 9--32
c. Do not omit the suction valve positioning springs. 9.21 COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL
(See Figure 9--26.) Place the springs so that the ends
bear against the cylinder deck (middle bowed away
from cylinder deck). Use new gaskets when reinstal- CAUTION
ling valve plates and cylinder heads. Torque cylinder
heads in a cross pattern in staged ten ft. lb. incre- Service mode MUST be used whenever re-
ments according to values in Table 9--2. moving refrigerant charge, refrigerant leak
checking or evacuating. Refer to Section
d. Push pistons from the inside of the crankcase through 6.2.3.
the cylinders, being careful not to break the rings.
Place chamfered side of connecting rod against radi-
us of crank pins. Install the crankshaft through the
pump end of the compressor. Do not damage main
CAUTION
bearings. Install matching connecting rod caps Use only Carrier Transicold approved Poly-
through bottom cover plate. ol Ester Oil (POE). When using this hygro-
scopic oil, immediately reseal. Do not leave
3 1 container of oil open or contamination will
4 occur.
2
5
1 1
7
4
2
7
JACK HERE
3
1. Cylinder Head Gasket
2. Discharge valve screw and lockwasher
3. Discharge valve stop 1 Unloaders
4. Discharge valve 2 Oil fill and suction pressure transducer
5. Valve plate 3 Bearing head
6. Valve plate assembly 4 Oil pump
7. Valve plate gasket
Figure 9--27. Compressor Oil Pump End View
Figure 9--25. Exploded view of valve plate
9.21.1 Checking Compressor Oil Level
1.
CAUTION
3. 2.
An overcharge of oil will reduce system ca-
pacity and possibly cause internal com-
pressor damage.
a. Operate the unit in cooling mode for at least 20 min-
utes.
b. Check the front oil sight glass on the compressor to
ensure that no foaming of the oil is present after 20
minutes of operation. If the oil is foaming excessively
after 20 minutes of operation, check the refrigerant
system for flood-back of liquid refrigerant. Correct
this situation before performing step c.
1. Suction valve c. Turn unit off to check the oil level. The correct oil level
2. Suction valve positioning spring range should be 1/8 TO 1/2 the level of the capacity of
3. Valve plate dowel pin the sight glass or oil must be removed from the com-
Figure 9--26. Suction valve & positioning springs pressor. To remove oil from the compressor refer to
9--33 62-11389
Section 9.21.4. Refer to Section 9.21.2 for instruc- um pump, and pull the compressor into a 10”-15” va-
tions on adding oil if the level is below the bottom of cuum. Stop the pump. Watch the oil level in the sight
the sight glass. glass. Fill to 1/4 of the sight glass.
9.21.2 Adding Oil With Compressor In System 2) Break any remaining vacuum (raise to 0 psig/bar)
with refrigerant remaining in the system (crack open
the suction service valve), or from a fresh drum of re-
WARNING frigerant. Replace the oil port plug, and evacuate the
compressor crankcase. Open both service valves
Never run unit with discharge service valve before starting the unit. Run unit for 20 minutes in
frontseated. cooling mode. Check oil level at the compressor
sight glass.
Never remove fill plug with pressure in
compressor. 9.21.3 Adding Oil To Service Replacement Com-
pressor
Two methods for adding oil are the oil pump method and
closed system method. NOTE
a. Oil Pump Method Service replacement compressors are shipped
One compressor oil pump that may be purchased is a without oil.
Robinair, part no. 14388. This oil pump adapts to a one When first adding oil to the compressor, add
U.S. gallon (3.785 liters) metal refrigeration oil container only 6.3 pints (2.9 liters) to the compressor. Run
and pumps 2-1/2 ounces (0.0725 liters) per stroke when
the unit for 20 minutes in cooling mode. Check
connected to the oil fill (Item 2, Figure 9--27.). There is
no need to remove pump from can after each use. the oil level in the compressor sight glass. Add
oil as necessary. Amount of oil added should
When the compressor is in operation, the pump check not exceed 6.5 pints (3.1 liters.) This procedure
valve prevents the loss of refrigerant, while allowing the is designed to compensate for excess oil that
technician to develop sufficient pressure to overcome
may have migrated with refrigerant to other
the operating suction pressure to add oil as necessary.
parts of the system during unit operation.
Backseat suction service valve and connect oil charging
hose to oil fill (Item 2, Figure 9--27.). Purge the oil hose 9.21.4 Removing Oil From The Compressor
at oil pump. Add oil as necessary (Refer to Section
2.11). a. If the oil level is above the middle of the sight glass
(See Figure 9--28.), oil must be removed from the
b. Closed System Method compressor.
b. Backseat suction and discharge service valves (turn
CAUTION counterclockwise) to close off gauge connection and
Extreme care must be taken to ensure the c. Open valves 1/4 to 1/2 turn (clockwise). Purge gauge
hose is immersed in the oil at all times. line.
Otherwise air and moisture will be drawn
into the compressor. d. Close (frontseat) suction service valve and pump unit
down to 2 to 4 psig (0.1 to 0.3 bar). Frontseat dis-
In an emergency where an oil pump is not available, oil charge service valve and slowly bleed remaining re-
may be drawn into the compressor through the suction frigerant.
service valve.
e. Connect a refrigerant recovery device and a clean re-
1) Connect the suction connection of the gauge man- frigerant recovery bottle to the center line of the mani-
ifold to the compressor suction service valve port, fold gage set and remove any remaining refrigerant
and the common connection of the gauge manifold from the compressor down to 0 psig/bar. DO NOT
to a vacuum pump. Remove the discharge hose ALLOW THE COMPRESSOR TO GO INTO A
from the gauge manifold; connect one end to the VACUUM OTHERWISE AIR WILL BE DRAWN INTO
compressor oil fill port, and immerse the other end in THE COMPRESSOR WHEN THE OIL DRAIN PLUG
an open container of refrigeration oil. Start the vacu- IS LOOSENED.
Table 9--2 Compressor Torque Values
SIZE TORQUE RANGE

THREADS
DIAMETER USAGE
PER INCH FT-LB NM
(INCHES)
1/4 28 12 -- 16 16.3 -- 21.7 Unloader Valve
5/16 18 20 -- 30 27.1 -- 40.7 Discharge Service Valve
3/8 16 40 -- 50 54.2 -- 67.8 Cylinder Head
1/2 13 65--70 88.0--94.9 Suction Service Valve
62-11389 9--34
f. Remove the oil drain plug on the drain pan of the com- 9.22.2 Solenoid Valve Assembly Replacement
pressor and drain the proper amount of oil from the a. Put gauges on the compressor.
compressor to obtain the correct level (Refer to Sec-
tion 9.21.1). Replace the plug securely back into the b. Pump down the compressor to 0 to 5 psig
compressor. DO NOT FORGET TO OPEN SUC- (0 to 0.3 bar). Frontseat both service valves to isolate
TION AND DISCHARGE SERVICE VALVES. compressor.
c. Equalize compressor high and low side pressures.
g. Recheck oil level (Refer to Section 9.21.1).
d. Recover refrigerant remaining in compressor.
e. Remove coil retainer and coil.
f. Remove three allen head screws (Item 10) and re-
move unloader assembly from compressor head. Re-
move and discard gasket (Item 8).
g. Remove small screen from inside the compressor
head and blow it out to make sure it’s clean.
h. Place new gasket onto the new unloader valve body
(Item 7) and the using unloader ring pliers (CTD P/N
Sight Glass 07--00223--00) compress the unloader ring and insert
Both Sides the unloader into the compressor head.
i. Insert three allen head screws and torque to
- Full 12 to16 ft-lbs (1.3 to 1.8 Nm).
j. Insert three allen head screws and torque to
12 to16 ft-lbs (1.3 to 1.8 Nm).
k. Leak test compressor according to Section 9.17.4.
Figure 9--28. Oil Level in Sight Glass l. Evacuate and dehydrate compressor according to
Section 9.18.3.
9.22 UNLOADER VALVE m. Check unit operation by running Pretrip (Refer to
Section 3.4).
The compressor unloaders (See Figure 9--29.) are n. Fully backseat compressor discharge and suction
controlled by the Microprocessor. (Refer to Section service valves. Remove gauges from compressor. In-
2.3.3) stall and tighten all service valve caps.
9.22.3 Replacing unloader valve internal parts
9.22.1 Unloader Checkout procedure
a. Put gauges on the compressor.
a. Connect manifold gauges to the compressor suction
b. Pump down the compressor to 0 to 5 psig
and discharge service valves and start unit in cooling
(0 to 0.3 bar). Frontseat both service valves to isolate
with the trailer temperature at least 5_F (2.8_C)
compressor.
above set point and the compressor will be fully
loaded (both unloader coils are de-energized). Note c. Equalize compressor high and low side pressures.
suction pressure. d. Recover refrigerant remaining in compressor.
b. Unplug both unloader coils. e. Remove coil retainer and coil.
c. Using cable included in the test kit (CTD P/N f. Remove enclosing tube collar (Item 2) using installa-
07--50006--00), energize front unloader. Note dis- tion/removal tool supplied with repair kit (Item 3).
charge and suction pressures. A rise of approximate- g. Check plunger for restriction due to: (a) Corroded or
ly 3 psig (0.2 bar) will be noted on the suction pressure worn parts; (b) Foreign material lodged in valve; (c)
gauge. Discharge pressure should drop approxi- Bent or dented enclosing tube.
mately 5 to 15 psig (0.4 to 1.0 bar).
h. Install new parts. Do not over tighten enclosing tube
d. Disconnect UL1 and note pressures. Suction pres- assembly. Torque to a value of 100 inch pounds (11.3
sure should drop and discharge pressure should rise Nm).
by same amount as in step c. above. i. Remove supplied installation/removal tool. Install
e. Repeat steps c. & d. for UL2 (rear unloader). At the coil, voltage plate, and retainer.
end of the test, plug both unloaders back in. j. Leak test compressor according to Section 9.17.4.
k. Evacuate and dehydrate compressor according to
NOTE Section 9.18.3.
If either unloader coil energizes and the suction l. Fully backseat compressor discharge and suction
and discharge pressures do not change, the un- service valves. Remove gages from compressor. In-
loader assembly must be checked. stall and tighten all service valve caps.
9--35 62-11389
m. Check unit operation by running Pretrip (Refer to a. Pump down the unit per Section 9.16.2. Remove
Section 3.4). bracket, then replace drier. Tighten inlet side fitting.
9.22.4 Unloader Coil Replacement b. Slowly open king valve to purge air from the drier.
Tighten drier outlet side fitting after purging for a few
NOTE seconds.
The coil may be removed without pumping c. Close the king valve.
down the unit. d. Leak test drier connections.
a. Disconnect leads. Remove retainer. Lift off coil. e. Remove the refrigerant pressure from the low side of
the system according to Step j. of Section 9.16.2.
b. Verify coil type, voltage and frequency of old and new f. Evacuate the low side of the system according to
coil. This information appears on the coil housing. Section 9.18.2.
c. Place new coil over enclosing tube, retainer and con- g. Check refrigerant level.
nect wiring.
h. Check unit operation by running Pretrip (Refer to Sec-
d. Check unit operation by running Pretrip (Refer to Sec- tion 3.4).
tion 3.4).
9.24 CHECKING AND REPLACING HIGH
PRESSURE SWITCH (HPS)
Note: When installing coil,
1 make sure roll pin is fitted 9.24.1 Checking High Pressure Switch
into stem nut, and coil
Use tool
torque stem
seats properly onto pin to
keep it from rotating.
WARNING
nut to 20-22
ft-lbs (27-- 30 Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a
Nm)
pressure regulator. Cylinder pressure is
2 approximately 2350 psig (159.9 bar). Do not
9 use oxygen in or near a refrigerant system
4 10 Figure 9--30.)
3 5
1
6 Torque 3 Bolts to 4
7 12-16 ft-lbs (16 to
22 Nm) 5
2
11
12
8
3 6
1. Coil Assembly 8. Gasket, Valve Body

2. Stem/Enclosing Tube 9. Pin, Anti-Rotation (fits
Assy into top of stem nut)
3. Installation/Removal 10. Bolts, Valve Body (3)
Tool 11. Washers (3)
4. Spring, Plunger 12. Piston (use only with 1. Cylinder Valve
5. Plunger Assembly hot gas bypass and Gauge
6. “O” Ring unloaders) 2. Pressure Regulator
7. Valve Body 3. Nitrogen Cylinder
4. Pressure Gauge
[0 to 400 psig
Figure 9--29. Unloader Coil (0 to 27.2 bar)]
5. Bleed-Off Valve
9.23 CHECKING AND REPLACING FILTER-DRIER 6. 1/4 inch Connection
To Check Filter-Drier Figure 9--30. Typical Setup for Testing High
The unit must be running in Cool for this test. Check for a Pressure Switch
restricted or plugged filter-drier by feeling the liquid line a. Remove switch as outlined in Section 9.24.2
inlet and outlet connections of the drier cartridge. If the
outlet side feels cooler than the inlet side, then the b. Connect ohmmeter or continuity light across switch
filter-drier should be changed. terminals. Ohmmeter will indicate resistance and
continuity light will be lit if switch closes after relieving
To Replace Filter-Drier pressure.
62-11389 9--36
c. Connect switch to a cylinder of dry nitrogen. (See 9.25 DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
Figure 9--30.) (CDP)
d. Set nitrogen pressure regulator higher than cutout

point on switch being tested. Pressure switch open
and close points are shown in Section 2.12.
OUTPUT VOLTAGE WITH

e. Close valve on cylinder and open bleed-off valve.
5V SUPPLY (VOLTS)
f. Open cylinder valve. Slowly close bleed-off valve and
increase pressure until the switch opens. If a continu-
ity light is used, it will go out and if an ohmmeter is
used, the meter will indicate open. Open pressure on
gauge. Slowly open bleed-off valve (to decrease
pressure) until switch closes (light will light or ohmme-
ter indicator will move).
PRESSURE (PSIG)
NOTE
Note the pressure on the gage when opening Figure 9--31. Discharge Pressure Transducer
Values
and closing switch. Refer to Section 2.12 for
correct readings. 9.25.1 Testing Compressor Discharge Pressure
Transducer
9.24.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch a. Verify that the wiring to the transducer is correct. (See
wiring diagram, Section 11.)
a. Pump down compressor per Section 9.16.3. b. Power up the transducer circuit. Place unit into PC
Frontseat both suction and discharge service valves Mode (Refer to Section 6.1).
to isolate compressor. c. Check Voltage to transducer connector. Voltage
reading between A (negative) and B (positive) should
b. Slowly equalize compressor pressure through the be 5.0 VDC.
service valve gauge ports. d. To check the signal wiring, check continuity between
the transducer connector C terminal and 1MP05.
c. Recover refrigerant remaining in compressor to 0
e. Place +5.0 VDC on transducer terminal B and ground
psig/bar.
terminal A. Disconnect C from the microprocessor.
Test voltage between B and C. The reading should be
d. Disconnect wiring from defective switch, and remove as shown in Table 9--3 and Figure 9--31.
old switch. The HPS is located on the top cylinder
head (See Figure 9--24.). 9.25.2 Calibrating Compressor Discharge Pressure
Transducer
The Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer
e. Install new HPS after verifying switch settings and re-
(CDP) has a range of 0 to 500 psig (0 to 34.0 bar). With
connect wiring. (Refer to Section 9.24.1)
this large of a pressure range, some transducers will not
read exactly the same as the next. To allow for variations
f. Evacuate and dehydrate the compressor. (Refer to in transducers and still display an accurate pressure
Section 9.18.3) reading in the Data List, a calibration feature for the CDP
built into the microprocessor.
To calibrate the CDP, it must be removed from the
NOTE compressor and exposed to atmosphere
(0 psig/bar). During the calibration process, the
Evacuation and dehydration is necessary only
in the event that the compressor has reached microprocessor measures the difference between what
atmospheric pressure during this procedure. the transducer is sending and what the microprocessor
was expecting for a zero reading. The difference
between these two is called an offset. This offset is then
stored in the microprocessor’s memory, and is used in
g. Check unit operation by running Pretrip (Refer to Sec- all future calculations for displaying compressor
tion 3.4). discharge pressure.
Change 12/10 9--37 62-11389

Table 9--3 Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer
PSIG BAR Voltage PSIG BAR Voltage PSIG BAR Voltage
0 0 0.5 80 5.4 1.1 250 17.0 2.5
10 0.7 0.6 90 6.1 1.2 275 18.7 2.7
20 1.4 0.7 100 6.8 1.3 300 20.4 2.9
30 2.0 0.7 125 8.5 1.5 325 22.1 3.1
40 2.7 0.8 150 10.2 1.7 350 23.8 3.3
50 3.4 0.9 175 11.9 1.9 375 25.5 3.5
60 4.1 1.0 200 13.6 2.1 400 27.2 3.7
70 4.8 1.1 225 15.3 2.3 450 30.6 4.1
NOTE Suction Pressure: --14.7 psig or --30Hg (--1 bar)
The Compressor Discharge Pressure on the Discharge Pressure: 0 psig/bar
microprocessor Data List will never read less
than 0 psig/bar, even if it is exposed to a Engine RPM: 0
vacuum (such as when evacuating the system.) 9.25.3 Replacing Compressor Discharge Pressure
Consequently, a transducer reading of 0 does Transducer
not indicate accurate calibration. Every
Discharge Transducer must be calibrated
before being installed into a compressor. WARNING
a. Power up the transducer circuit. Place unit into PC The Compressor Discharge Pressure
Mode (Refer to Section 5.1). Transducer does not have a Schrader valve
b. Press the Select Key until in the connecting fitting. Any discharge
pressure remaining in the compressor will
“PRESS "# TO VIEW DATA” is displayed in the be released when removing the CDP.
MessageCenter.
c. Press the Up Arrow until a. Pump down compressor per Section 9.16.3.
“DISCHARGE PRESSURE:” is showing in the Frontseat both suction and discharge service valves
MessageCenter. to isolate compressor.
d. Press and hold the Equal Key for 6 seconds. The b. Slowly equalize compressor pressure through the
MessageCenter will blink 5 times. When it stops blink- service valve gauge ports.
ing, the display will either show c. Recover refrigerant remaining in compressor to 0
“DISCHARGE PRESSURE: 0.0 BAR/PSIG”, or the psig/bar.
message “CALIBRATION UNSUCCESSFUL”.
d. Disconnect wiring from defective transducer, and re-
e. When “DISCHARGE PRESSURE: 0.0 BAR/PSIG” move the transducer. The CDP is located on the top
appears, the offset has been saved into the micropro- cylinder head (See Figure 9--24.)
cessor memory, and the calibration is complete.
e. Connect wiring and calibrate the transducer per Sec-
f. If the calibration was unsuccessful, either there is tion 9.25.2.
more than 0 psig/bar on the transducer, or the trans- f. Install new CDP and reconnect wiring.
ducer is further away from 0 than an offset will allow.
The transducer must be replaced. g. Evacuate and dehydrate the compressor. (Refer to
Section 9.18.3)
NOTE
The +5.0 VDC (terminal B) is common between NOTE
the Compressor Discharge Pressure Trans- Evacuation and dehydration is necessary only
ducer, the Compressor Suction Pressure in the event that the compressor has reached
Transducer, and the RPM sensor. If this circuit atmospheric pressure during this procedure.
is shorted to ground (due to one of the men-
tioned components being defective, or a worn h. Check unit operation by running Pretrip (Refer to Sec-
wire) the MessageCenter will show: tion 3.4).
62-11389 9--38
Table 9--4 CSP and EVOP Pressure Transducers
PSIG BAR Voltage PSIG BAR Voltage PSIG BAR Voltage

--10 --0.7 0.7 30 2.0 2.1 70 4.8 3.5
--5.0 --0.3 0.8 35 2.4 2.2 75 5.1 3.6
0.0 0.0 1.0 40 2.7 2.4 80 5.4 3.8
5.0 0.3 1.2 45 3.1 2.6 85 5.8 4.0
10.0 0.7 1.4 50 3.4 2.8 90 6.1 4.1
15.0 1.0 1.5 55 3.7 2.9 95 6.5 4.3
20.0 1.4 1.7 60 4.1 3.1 100 6.8 4.5
25.0 1.7 1.9 65 4.4 3.3
9.26 SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER(CSP) 9.26.2 Calibrating Compressor Suction Pressure

Transducer
The Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer (CSP)

has a range of --14.7 to100 psig (--1 to 6.8 bar).
LOW RANGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER Calibration is not required because the range is so
-- CSP/EVOP small.
OUTPUT VOLTAGE WITH
NOTE
5V SUPPLY (VOLTS)
The +5.0 VDC (terminal B) is common between

the Compressor Discharge Pressure Trans-
ducer, the Compressor Suction Pressure
Transducer, and the RPM sensor. If this circuit
is shorted to ground (due to one of the men-
tioned components being defective, or a worn
wire) the MessageCenter will show:
Suction Pressure: --14.7 psig or --30Hg (--1 bar)

Discharge Pressure: 0 psig/bar
PRESSURE (PSIG) Engine RPM: 0
9.26.3 Replacing Compressor Suction Transducer

Figure 9--32. Transducer Values a. Pump down compressor per Section 9.16.3.
Frontseat both suction and discharge service valves
to isolate compressor.
9.26.1 Testing Compressor Suction Pressure
Transducer b. Slowly equalize compressor pressure through the
service valve gauge ports.
a. Verify that the wiring to the transducer is correct. (See c. Recover refrigerant remaining in compressor to 0
wiring diagram, Section 11). psig/bar.
d. Disconnect wiring from defective transducer, and re-
b. Power up the transducer circuit. Place unit into PC
move old transducer. The CSP is located on the fitting
Mode (Refer to Section 6.1).
on the crankcase of the compressor.
c. Check Voltage to transducer. Voltage reading be- e. Install new CSP and reconnect wiring.
tween A (negative) and B (positive) should be 5.0
VDC. f. Evacuate and dehydrate the compressor. (Refer to
Section 9.18.3)
d. To check the signal wiring, check continuity between
the transducer connector C terminal and micropro- NOTE
cessor connector 1MP29. Evacuation and dehydration is necessary only
in the event that the compressor has reached
e. Place +5.0 VDC on transducer terminal B and ground atmospheric pressure during this procedure.
Test voltage between B and C. The reading should be g. Check unit operation by running Pretrip (Refer to Sec-
as shown in Table 9--4 and Figure 9--32. tion 3.4).
Change 12/10 9--39 62-11389

9.27 EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER 9.28 REPLACING RECEIVER SIGHT GLASS AS-
(EVOP) SEMBLY OR FUSIBLE PLUG
CAUTION
The Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EVOP) has a Service mode MUST be used whenever re-
range of --14.7 to100 psig (--1 to 6.8 bar). Because of moving refrigerant charge, refrigerant leak
this much smaller range, calibration of the EVOP is not checking or evacuating the entire refrigera-
required. tion system. Refer to Section 6.2.3.
a. Remove the refrigerant from the complete system.
9.27.1 Testing the EVOP
b. Unscrew the sight glass assembly or fusible plug and
a. Verify that the wiring to the transducer is correct. (See discard.
wiring diagram, Section 11). c. Wrap threads of new sight glass or plug with Teflon
tape or spread some sealing compound on pipe
b. Power up the transducer circuit. Place unit into PC threads of new sight glass assembly or plug and
Mode (Refer to Section 6.1). install. Torque the sight glass to 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to
34 Nm). Torque the fuse plug to 4 to 8 ft lbs (5 to 11
c. Check Voltage to transducer. Voltage reading be- Nm).
tween A (negative) and B (positive) should be 5.0 d. Using a trace amount of refrigerant removed from the
VDC. system in Step a. bring the pressure of the system up
to about 10 psig (xxx). Add dry nitrogen to increase
d. To check the signal wiring, check continuity between the pressure to 100 psig (6.9 bar). Leak check receiv-
the transducer connector C terminal and micropro- er sight glass or fusible plug. (Section 9.17.2. )
cessor connector 1MP06. e. After leak checking unit, release the refrigerant/nitro-
gen to atmosphere and evacuate and dehydrate as
e. Place +5.0 VDC on transducer terminal B and ground outlined in Section 9.18.1.
f. Add refrigerant charge. (Refer to Section 9.19.3)
Test voltage between B and C. The reading should be
as shown in Table 9--4 and Figure 9--32. g. Check unit operation by running Pretrip. (Refer to
Section 3.4).
9.29 COMPRESSOR SUCTION MODULATION

9.27.2 Replacing Evaporator Pressure Transducer VALVE (CSMV)
The purpose of the CSMV is to control suction pressure,
maintain the compressor within normal operating range
a. Pump down the unit per Section 9.16.2. and maximize unit capacity and fuel economy.
At initial startup, the microprocessor will go through a
b. Disconnect wiring from defective transducer, and re- self test. When the test is complete, the MessageCenter
move old transducer. The EVOP is located in the suc- will display “SMV CLOSING”. When closing is
tion line in the evaporator section. (See Figure 2--4.) complete, the MessageCenter will display “SETTING
SMV XX%”. The XX% will count up to a predetermined
c. Install new EVOP and reconnect wiring. percentage depending on ambient temperature and
compartment temperature. The unit will then go through
d. Slowly open king valve and pressurize the low size of its normal start procedure.
the system to approximately 30 psig (2 bar.)
e. Leak test the EVOP connections. CSMV
f. Remove the refrigerant pressure from the low side of

the system according to Step j. of Section 9.16.2.
2-1/8 inch Nut
g. Evacuate the low side of the system according to
Section 9.18.2.
h. Check refrigerant level. Figure 9--33. Suction Modulation Valve

9.29.1 Function
i. Check unit operation by running Pretrip (Refer to Sec- The CSMV coil consists of two windings labeled 1 and 2.
tion 3.4). Each winding has two poles, labeled A and B.
62-11389 9--40 Change 12/10

Both poles of both windings have a wire connected back
to the microprocessor. WARNING
Looking at the 4--pin connector on the CSMV coil, the
Carrier Transicold does not recommend al-
wiring is as follow : lowing the compressor to pull less than
Table 9--5 CSMV Connections 0 psig/bar at any time.
c. Once the unit has reached suction pressure of

Connector Pin Wire Color Winding/Pole
0 psig/bar place the Start/Run--Off switch in the the
A BLACK 1A OFF position. After the engine shuts down, the micro-
processor will fully close the CSMV.
B WHITE 1B
C RED 2B NOTE
D GREEN 2A Carefully listen to the valve. When the unit is off
and the valve is closing, the valve will make a
ratcheting noise that may be heard or felt as it is
Refer to Section 2.13 for resistance value. closing. If this can be heard or felt, it indicates
There is no common connection point between the two that the microprocessor is attempting to close
windings. the valve, and may serve as a quick indication
that the drive module is in working order. It is
The microprocessor opens and closes the CSMV by not, however, an indication that the valve piston
sending a series of electrical pulses to the coil. is actually working.
d. Wait about 2 minutes after the engine stops to ensure

CAUTION the valve is fully shut.
e. If the CSMV is fully shut, the suction pressure should
Do not connect 12 VDC to the CSMV wind- still read 0 psig/bar. If the valve is stuck at some posi-
ings in an attempt to rotate the valve or irre- tion other than fully closed, or it cannot fully close for
parable damage will occur. any reason, the suction pressure during this test will
rise.
9.29.2 CSMV Diagnostics
1) If the suction pressure holds at 0, go to Step f.
If the CSMV is suspected to be faulty, the first thing the
operator should do is perform a Pretrip test (Refer to 2) If the suction pressure rises, go to Step g.
Section 3.4). Some symptoms that could indicate a
f. Use the Stepper Motor Tester (CTD special tool P/N
faulty CSMV are:
07--00375--00) to manually open the valve. The suc-
SUnusually high suction pressure in COOL mode. tion pressure on the manifold gauge should go up. If
the suction pressure does not go up, the CSMV is
A27 -- “HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE ALARM” may stuck closed (go to Step g.) or there is something ob-
be generated. structing the refrigerant.
SUnusually low suction pressure NOTE
A18 -- “LOW REFRIGERANT ALARM” may be gen- Opening the valve can also be accomplished by
erated using the microprocessor. Place the Start/Run--
Off switch in the START/RUN position. The mi-
SPoor temperature control croprocessor will go through its self test and the
display will show
Compartment temperature deviates from set point.
“SMV CLOSING: WAIT XXX SECONDS”. The
If the unit fails Test 10 during pretrip valve is obviously closed at this point, but the
(P180 “CHECK SUCTION MOD VALVE”) the CSMV microprocessor is programmed to always close
could be faulty. The CSMV could have become the CSMV every time the microprocessor is
mechanically jammed, or it could have failed electrically
powered up. The display will then show “SET-
in the power head, or it may not be receiving the proper
signal from the microprocessor. There are several steps TING SMV XXX%” . Refer to 9.29 above. If the
the operator should make in addition to the unit Pretrip to suction pressure does not go up, the CSMV is
further diagnose the valve. stuck closed (go to Step g.) or there is some-
thing obstructing the refrigerant.
a. The CSMV may be stuck in some position other than
completely closed and the stepper motor cannot NOTE
move the piston. To check if the valve is stuck, first If the valve passes steps a. through f., the valve
start the unit and run in cool mode with manifold is operating properly.
gauges attached to the compressor
g. If the suction pressure rises during Step e., or if the
b. Allow the suction pressure to pull down to 0 psig/bar. valve is determined to be stuck closed in Step f., turn
9--41 62-11389
the unit Off by placing the Start/Run--Off switch in the b. Unplug the CSMV connector from the engine har-
OFF position and unplug the 4 pin connector to the ness.
CSMV. With a reliable digital ohmmeter, check the
winding resistance between 1A (Black) wire and the c. Loosen the 2 1/8” nut on the CSMV and remove the
1B (White) wire AND between the 2A (Green) wire power head assembly. (See Figure 9--33.)
and the 2B (Red) wire. Refer to Section 2.13 for d. Install the new CSMV power head.
standard resistance in normal ambient temperatures.
If this resistance is confirmed, proceed to Step 8. If an e. The power head should be set to 100% (Open) when
infinite or zero ohm reading occurs, first check the received from the warehouse. This is to ensure the
wires at the connector for good contact. If the connec- Teflon valve seal is not damaged when it is installed.
tor is in good condition and the resistance is still bad, Ensure the valve is fully open by using Stepper Motor
one (or both) of the coils could be faulty. Replace the Tester (CTD special tool P/N 07--00375--00) to manu-
CSMV power head assembly P/N 14--00263--20. Re- ally open the valve to 100% before it is installed.
fer to Section 9.29.3.
f. Torque the 2 1/8” nut to 35 to 40 ft--lbs (47.4 to 54.2
Nm)
1 g. Reconnect the CSMV connector to the engine har-

1A (BLK) (WHT) 1B ness.
NOTE
Place the unit in Service Mode before pumping
2A (GRN) (RED) 2B down and/or removing the refrigeration charge
2 when required i.e. when replacing the valve
body. Refer to Section 6.2.3.
h. Evacuate the low side of the refrigeration system.

Figure 9--34. CSMV Coil (Refer to Section 9.18.2)
h. Locate the wires on the engine harness side of the
CSMV connector. Locate the wires labeled CSMVA, i. Open the king valve, run the unit for approximately 10
CSMVB, CSMVC and CSMVD. These will correlate minutes and initiate a pretrip.
to the connector pins labeled A, B, C and D. See Emergency repair procedures :
Table 9--5.
In the event that the CSMV system has a failure, and
i. Place the Start/Run--Off switch in the START/RUN replacement components are not readily available in an
position. DO NOT ALLOW THE UNIT TO START. emergency. A LIMP-HOME procedure can be done as
When the MessageCenter displays “SMV CLOSING: follows :
WAIT XXX SECONDS”, measure the AC voltage be-
tween pins A and B and then between C and D using a a. Attach a manifold gauge set.
voltmeter that is set to read AC volts. The digital volt-
meter should read from 10 to 16 VAC for each pair of b. Perform a low side pump down. When the unit has
wires. If this test passes, there is a good signal com- reached 0 to 5 psig (0 to 0.34 bar) close the suction
ing from the microprocessor. service valve and turn the unit OFF.
j. If a reading of 10 to 16 VAC is not present on one or c. Remove CSMV power head by loosening the 2-1/8
both of the wire pairs, check the wiring between the inch diameter nut (see Figure 9--33.), and sliding the
microprocessor and the CSMV connector, or check power head out.
the microprocessor for proper model number configu-
ration. d. Remove the piston by loosening the Allen screw and
removing the piston and screw.
k. If all the above tests pass, the CSMV is operating
properly and the abnormal unit operation can be con- e. Install the power head assembly (without the piston),
tributed to something other than the CSMV. torque to 35 to 40 foot-lbs (47.4 to 54.2 Nm).
9.29.3 Replacing The CSMV Power Head f. Open all valves.
(14--00263--20)
g. Start the unit.
a. Pump the unit down at the king valve (Refer to Sec-
tion 9.16.1). h. Adjust the suction service valve so that the approxi-
mate temperature OR current limit is maintained. For
NOTE perishable loads, it is recommended that the adjust-
Place unit in Service Mode before pumping ment be made so that the available capacity is slightly
larger than the load, the unit will cycle OFF and ON.
down and/or removing the refrigeration charge
when required i.e. when replacing the valve i. Once repair parts become available, repair as re-
body. Refer to Section 6.2.3. quired.
62-11389 9--42
Table 9--6 Phase Reversal Module Functionality
Phase Direc- Network Input Phase Output
tion Phases Wire Input +12V Output +12V
IN/S1 IN/S2
L1 BLUE
L2 BLACK CLOSED OPEN
DIRECT CONTACT CONTACT YES YES
L3 BROWN
L2 BLUE
L1 BLACK OPEN CLOSED
INVERSE CONTACT CONTACT YES YES
L3 BROWN
L1 BLUE
L2 BLACK OPEN OPEN
DIRECT CONTACT CONTACT NO NO
L3 BROWN
L2 BLUE
L1 BLACK OPEN OPEN
INVERSE CONTACT CONTACT NO NO
L3 BROWN
9.30 PHASE REVERSAL MODULE (PRM) e. Once the microprocessor detects this signal on
5MP04, it will energize PSCONR and enable the
PSR circuit and disable the GEN circuit.
9.30.1 Operation And Test
f. The chart above can be used to diagnose module
One principle of 3--phase powered electric motors is that working conditions.
the direction of rotation can be reversed by changing
any two wires going to the motor. The purpose of the 9.31 OVERLOAD GROUND FAULT DETECTOR
Phase Reversal Module is to always have the motors (OGF)
operate in the correct direction, regardless of the 9.31.1 Operation
incoming voltage phase connections. The above chart a. The OGF is designed to detect Current Overloads
reflects the functionality of the Phase Reversal Module. and Ground Faults in the AC voltage circuits. Current
(Refer to the schematic diagram in Section 11 for more over 40A for 2 seconds, or more than 150mA ground
information.) leakage will energize the internal relay and open the
a. In a 3 phase system, each phase is represented by NC contact. (Refer to the unit Wiring Schematic in
L1, L2, or L3. Section 11 for more information.)
b. When the NC contact is opened, power is dropped to
b. Each phase has an input to the module, and will in- the Generator Contactor Relay (GENCONR), the
dicate whether the output from the module needs to Power Supply Contactor Relay (PSCONR), and the
be direct (S1 energized) or inverse (S2 energized) in input for plug 2MP26. This will drop the power feed to
order for the motors to operate in the correct direc- the 3--phase circuit and will trigger Alarm 100. (Refer
tion. to Section 8.)
c. The outputs on the module have common input wires c. As long as the LED on the module is lit, indicating
and energize the output S1 and S2 according to the ground fault leakage, the contact will stay open. The
chart above. This enables PSCON or PSCON2 cir- module must be powered down by placing the Start/
cuits depending on whether the phase rotation is dir- Run--Off switch in the OFF position. For further test-
ect or inverse. ing refer to Section 9.31.2.)
9.31.2 OGF Checkout Procedure
NOTE
a. To check operation after initial power--up make sure
S1 and S2 contact outputs will not be energized that 12V is supplied to the module and that the
(closed) at he same time, and both contact out- Ground Fault LED is not lit. If it is lit on power--up the
puts are de--energized (open) when there is no module is either faulty or there is a Ground Fault in the
12VDC voltage on the +12V input terminal of power up circuit wiring. (Refer to Section 11.)
the module. b. If the LED is lit on power--up turn power off by placing
the Start/Run--Off switch in the OFF position. Use an
d. There will be 12VDC voltage on the +12V output ter- Ohmmeter to measure L1, L2, L3 going through the
minal of the module whenever there is voltage ap- module to ground. If any leg shows low resistance or
plied to the +12V input terminal. The microprocessor resistance that is not equal to the other two legs, the
detects this signal on pin 5MP04 and senses the wiring should be checked for shorts to ground. The
availability of AC power. module is faulty if the wiring checks out OK.
9--43 62-11389
c. Overload detection current sensor inputs to the mod- 9.33.2 Checking Calibration Of Defrost Air Switch
ule are rated at 16.7mV per Amp. For every Amp that
is read at the wires coming from the GENCON T1, T2
and T3 terminals with an Amp meter, there should be 2
a corresponding voltage reading on the brown, or- 5
ange and black sensor leads of the module to ground.
For example: 40Amps = 0.67VAC.
6 3
4
1
1. Ohmmeter or Continuity Device

2. Adjustment Screw (0.050” socket head
size)
3. Low Side Connection
4. Pressure Line or Aspirator Bulb (P/N
07-00177-01)
5. Magnehelic Gauge (P/N 07-00177-00)
6. High Side Connection
Figure 9--36. Defrost Air Switch Test Setup

Figure 9--35. Overload Ground Fault Wiring a. Make sure magnehelic gauge is in proper calibration.
NOTE
9.32 LIGHT BAR The Magnehelic Gauge may be used in any
9.32.1 Light Bar Operation and Test position, but must be re-zeroed if position of
gauge is changed from vertical to horizontal or
a. The green LEDs illuminate when +12 volts is applied vice versa. USE ONLY IN POSITION FOR
to Pin G and ground is applied to Pin B. WHICH IT IS ZEROED. The Defrost Air Switch
b. The amber LEDs will illuminate when +12 volts is ap- MUST be in the same orientation as it will be in
plied to Pin G and ground is applied to Pin B and Pin when installed in the unit.
H. b. With air switch in vertical position, connect high pres-
c. Use an Ohmmeter to test light bar operation. PIN B sure side of magnehelic gauge to high side connec-
should be open to other terminals, and PIN G should tion of air switch. (See Figure 9--36.)
have 325 to 550 ohms to PIN H. c. Install tee in pressure line to high side connection. Tee
should be approximately half-way between gauge and
9.33 DEFROST AIR SWITCH (DAS) air switch or an improper reading may result.
d. Attach an ohmmeter to the air switch electrical con-
9.33.1 Testing The Defrost Air Switch And Circuit tacts to check switch action.
a. To check the Defrost Air Switch circuit, run the unit in
high speed cooling and jump across the air switch ter- NOTE
minals. This will start the defrost cycle as it simulates Use a hand aspirator (P/N 07-00177-01), since
the action of the defrost air switch. Bypassing the switch blowing into tube by mouth may cause an incor-
in this manner test the defrost air switch circuit. rect reading.
NOTE e. With the gauge reading at zero, apply air pressure

very slowly to the air switch. An ohmmeter will indi-
If 1DTT is above 40_F (4.4_C) the Mes-
cate continuity when switch actuates. The switch
sageCenter will show contacts should close and the ohmmeter reading
“CANNOT START DEFROST CYCLE”. should go to 0. Any hesitation in the ohmmeter indi-
cates a possible problem with the switch and it should
b. The unit will remain in defrost until 1DTT reaches be replaced.
55_F (12.8_C). At this point the defrost cycle will ter- f. Refer to Section 2.12 for switch settings. If switch fails to
minate and the unit will resume automatic operation. actuate at correct gauge reading, adjust switch by turn-
c. If the above test indicates satisfactory operation, test ing adjusting screw clockwise to increase setting or
DAS settings using a Dwyer Magnehelic gauge (P/N counterclockwise to decrease setting.
07-00177) or similar instrument. (Refer to Section g. Repeat checkout procedure until switch actuates at
9.33.2) correct gauge reading.
62-11389 9--44
h. After switch is adjusted, place a small amount of paint b. Drain engine coolant. Refer to Section 9.9.1.
or fingernail polish on the adjusting screw so that c. Remove the surround with the grille attached. (Refer
vibration will not change switch setting. to Section 9.4.)
9.34 EVAPORATOR COIL d. Remove radiator hoses from radiator.
9.34.1 Cleaning e. Unsolder refrigerant lines to the coil.
The use of recycled cardboard cartons is increasing f. Remove the ambient sensor (Item 5) after removing
across the country. The recycled cardboard cartons the bug screen enough to reach sensor and wiring.
create much more fiber dust during transport than “new” g. Remove the (8) bolts from the condenser frame as-
cartons. The fiber dust and particles are drawn into the sembly (Item 1) at bottom front and top of unit.
evaporator where they lodge between the evaporator
fins. If the coil is not cleaned on a regular basis, h. Remove the condenser/radiator assembly from the
sometimes as often as after each trip, the accumulation unit.
can be great enough to restrict air flow, cause coil icing, i. Remove the radiator frame assembly (Item 4) and set
repetitive defrosts and loss of unit capacity. Due to the aside by removing the (8) bolts that secure radiator
“washing” action of normal defrost the fiber dust and frame assembly to condenser frame assembly Item
particles may not be visible on the face of the coil but 1.
may accumulate deep within.
j. Separate the radiator (Item 3) from the condenser/ra-
Clean the evaporator coil on a regular basis, not only to diator assembly by removing the (8) bolts from the
remove cardboard dust, but to remove any grease or oil angle brackets that attach it to the assembly.
film which sometimes coats the fins and prevents water Figure 9--37.
from draining into the drain pan.
k. Remove condenser coil (Item 2) from the condenser
Cardboard fiber particles after being wetted and dried frame assembly (Item 1.) by removing (8) bolts.
several times can be very hard to remove. Therefore,
l. Assemble in reverse order using new coil.
several washings may be necessary.
a. Remove rubber check valves (Kazoo) from drain
lines (front of refrigerated compartment). CAUTION
b. Spray coil with a mild detergent solution such as
Do not bend the copper tubing on the con-
Oakite 164 or 202) or any good commercial grade au- denser coil when installing the new con-
tomatic dish washer detergent such as Electrosol or denser. Bend the unit tubing if tubes do not
Cascade and let the solution stand for a few minutes align correctly.
and reverse flush (opposite normal air flow) with clean
water at mild pressure. A garden hose with spray NOTE
nozzle is usually sufficient. Make sure drain lines are Before applying heat to the new condenser ap-
clean. ply a wet rag to the entire copper to aluminum
c. Run unit until defrost mode can be initiated to check transition area to avoid melting the protective
for proper draining from drain pan. heat shrink or damaging the joint.
9.35 CONDENSER COIL m. Leak-check the coil per Section 9.17.2. Evacuate the
9.35.1 Cleaning system per Section 9.18.1, then charge the unit with
refrigerant per Section 9.19.
Remove all foreign material from the condenser coil by
reversing the normal air flow. (Air is pulled in through the n. Refill engine coolant if radiator was removed. (Refer
front and discharges over the engine.) Compressed air or to Section 9.9.1.)
water may be used as a cleaning agent. Take care so that 9.35.3 Radiator Replacement
the fins aren’t bent over during this procedure.
a. Drain radiator coolant and hoses. Refer to Section
NOTE 9.9.1.
Only clean water should be used to wash the b. Remove condenser fans per Section 9.12. The
condenser. Do not use any detergents to clean bracket that is attached to the tubing that goes to the
the condenser. receiver must be removed for proper clearance.
9.35.2 Condenser Coil Replacement c. Remove (8) screws from radiator frame assembly
(Item 4) and remove the radiator frame assembly.
NOTE
d. Remove top (2) brackets holding the radiator (Item 3)
If the condenser coil requires replacement, the
in place and remove the radiator through the top of
entire Condenser/Radiator assembly must be the unit.
removed from the unit and disassembled/reas-
sembled on the bench. e. Re--assemble in reverse order of removal.
f. Flush and fill radiator with coolant. (Refer to Section
a. Remove the refrigerant charge per Section 9.16. 9.9.1.)
9--45 62-11389
1
4
6
TOP AND BOTTOM
OF FRAME
3
1. Condenser Frame Assembly 4. Radiator Frame Assembly

2. Condenser Coil 5. Ambient Sensor
3. Radiator 6. (8) Bolts -- Top and Bottom of Frame
Figure 9--37. Condenser and Radiator Assemblies

9.36 MICROPROCESSOR SENSOR CHECKOUT Two preferred methods of determining the actual test
An accurate ohmmeter must be used to check temperature at the sensor, is an ice bath at 32_F (0_C)
resistance values shown in Table 9--7. or a calibrated temperature tester.
Due to variations and inaccuracies in ohmmeters,
thermometers or other test equipment, a reading within
2% of the chart value would indicate a good sensor. If a
sensor is bad, the resistance reading will usually be
much higher or lower than the resistance values given in
Table 9--7.
62-11389 9--46
Table 9--7 Sensor Resistance
Sensors AAT, 1RAT, 1SAT, ENCT, EVOT, CST, 1DTT, REMSN 1,2,3
°F °C Ohms °F °C Ohms °F °C Ohms °F °C Ohms
--40 --40 336,500 18 --7.8 49,060 76 24.4 10,250 134 56.7 2,809
--38 --38.9 312,600 20 --6.7 46,230 78 25.6 9,760 136 57.8 2,697
--36 --37.8 290,600 22 --5.6 43,580 80 26.7 9,299 138 58.9 2,590
--34 --36.7 270,300 24 --4.4 41,100 82 27.8 8,862 140 60.0 2,488
--32 --35.6 251,500 26 --3.3 38,780 84 28.9 8,449 142 61.1 2,390
--30 --34.4 234,200 28 --2.2 36,600 86 30.0 8,057 144 62.2 2,297
--28 --33.3 218,200 30 --1.1 34,560 88 31.1 7,686 146 63.3 2,208
--26 --32.2 203,400 32 0 32,650 90 32.2 7,334 148 64.4 2,124
--24 --31.1 189,700 34 1.1 30,850 92 33.3 7,000 150 65.6 2,042
--22 --30 177,000 36 2.2 29,170 94 34.4 6,684 155 68.3 1,855
--20 --28.9 165,200 38 3.3 27,590 96 35.6 6,384 160 71.1 1,687
--18 --27.8 154,300 40 4.4 26,100 98 36.7 6,099 165 73.9 1,537
--16 --26.7 144,200 42 5.5 24,700 100 37.8 5,828 170 76.7 1,402
--14 --25.6 134,800 44 6.6 23,390 102 38.9 5,571 175 79.4 1,281
--12 --24.4 126,100 46 7.7 22,160 104 40.0 5,327 180 82.2 1,171
--10 --23.3 118,100 48 8.9 20,990 106 41.1 5,095 185 85.0 1,072
--8 --22.2 110,500 50 10 19,900 108 42.2 4,874 190 87.8 983
--6 --21.1 103,600 52 11.1 18,870 110 43.3 4,665 195 90.6 902
--4 --20 97,070 54 12.2 17,900 112 44.4 4,465 200 93.3 829
--2 --18.9 91,030 56 13.3 16,980 114 45.5 4,275 205 96.1 762
0 --17.8 85,400 58 14.4 16,120 116 46.7 4,095 210 98.9 702
2 --16.7 80,160 60 15.5 15,310 118 47.8 3,923 215 101.7 647
4 --15.6 75,270 62 16.6 14,540 120 48.9 3,759 220 104.4 598
6 --14.4 70,720 64 17.7 13,820 122 50.0 3,603 225 107.2 553
8 --13.3 66,460 66 18.9 13,130 124 51.1 3,454 230 110.0 511
10 --12.2 62,500 68 20.0 12,490 126 52.2 3,313 235 112.8 473
12 --11.1 58,790 70 21.1 11,880 128 53.3 3,177 240 115.6 438
14 --10.0 55,330 72 22.2 11,310 130 54.4 3,049 245 118.3 406
16 --8.9 52,090 74 23.3 10,760 132 55.6 2,926 250 121.1 378
9--47 62-11389
Table 9--8. Sensor Resistance (CDT)
°C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms

--40 --40 3,360,000 --7.8 18 189,690 24.4 76 102,460 56.7 134 28,160 126.7 260 3,290
--38.9 --38 3,121,020 --6.7 20 461,170 25.6 78 97,600 57.8 136 27,040 132.2 270 2,850
--37.8 --36 2,900,710 --5.6 22 434,790 26.7 80 92,990 58.9 138 25,970 137.8 280 2,490
--36.7 --34 2,697,500 --4.4 24 410,080 27.8 82 88,630 60.0 140 24,960 143.3 290 2,170
--35.6 --32 2,509,940 --3.3 26 386,940 28.9 84 84,510 61.1 142 23,980 148.9 300 1,910
--34.4 --30 2,336,720 --2.2 28 365,260 30.0 86 80,600 62.2 144 23,050 154.4 310 1,680
--33.3 --28 2,186,670 --1.1 3 344,930 31.1 88 76,890 63.3 146 22,160 160.0 320 1,480
--32.2 --26 2,028,680 0 32 325,860 32.2 90 73,380 64.4 148 21,310 165.5 330 1,310
--31.1 --24 1,891,780 1.1 34 307,970 33.3 92 70,040 65.6 150 20,500 171.1 340 1,160
--30 --22 1,765,060 2.2 36 291,180 34.4 94 66,880 68.3 155 18,980 176.7 350 1,040
--28.9 --20 1,647,700 3.3 38 275,410 35.6 96 63,880 71.1 160 16,940 182.2 360 920
--27.8 --18 1,538,950 4.4 40 260,590 36.7 98 61,040 73.9 165 15,450 187.8 370 830
--26.7 --16 1,438,120 5.5 42 246,670 37.8 100 58,330 76.7 170 14,070 193.3 380 740
--25.6 --14 1,344,580 6.6 44 233,570 38.9 102 55,770 79.4 175 12,870 198.9 390 670
--24.4 --12 1,257,770 7.7 46 221,260 40.0 104 53,330 82.2 180 11,750 204.4 400 600
--23.3 --10 1,177,150 8.9 48 209,670 41.1 106 51,010 85.0 185 10,750 210.0 410 540
--22.2 --8 1,102,240 10 50 198,760 42.2 108 48,800 87.8 190 9,870 215.6 420 490
--21.1 --6 1,032,600 11.1 52 188,490 43.3 110 46,710 90.6 195 9,050 221.1 430 450
--20 --4 967,830 12.2 54 178,820 44.4 112 44,710 93.3 200 8,320 226.7 440 410
--18.9 --2 907,560 13.3 56 169,700 45.5 114 42,820 96.1 205 7,650 232.2 450 370
--17.8 0 851,450 14.4 58 161,100 46.7 116 41,010 98.9 210 7,050 237.8 460 340
--16.7 2 799,180 15.5 60 152,990 47.8 118 39,290 101.7 215 6,510 243.3 470 310
--15.6 4 750,470 16.6 62 145,340 48.9 120 37,660 104.4 220 6,000 248.9 480 280
--14.4 6 705,060 17.7 64 138,120 50.0 122 36,100 107.2 225 5,540 254.4 490 260
--13.3 8 662,690 18.9 66 131,310 51.1 124 34,610 110.0 230 5,130 260.0 500 240
--12.2 10 623,150 20.0 68 124,870 52.2 126 33,200 112.8 235 4,760
--11.1 12 586,230 21.1 70 118,790 53.3 128 31,850 115.6 240 4,410
--10.0 14 551,740 22.2 72 113,040 54.4 130 30,560 118.3 245 4,090
--8.9 16 519,500 23.3 74 107,600 55.6 132 29,330 121.1 250 3,800
62-11389 9--48
Table 9--9 Temperature Pressure Chart
Temperature Pressure Temperature Pressure

_C _F BAR PSIG _C _F BAR PSIG
--40 --40 0.3 4.5 0 32 5.0 72.5
--37 --35 0.5 7.1 1 34 5.2 75.6
--34 --30 0.7 9.9 2 36 5.4 78.8
--32 --25 0.9 12.9 3 38 5.7 82.1
--29 --20 1.1 16.3 4 40 5.9 85.5
--28 --18 1.2 17.7 6 42 6.1 89.0
--27 --16 1.3 19.2 7 44 6.4 92.5
--26 --14 1.4 20.7 8 46 6.6 96.2
--24 --12 1.5 22.3 9 48 6.9 99.9
--23 --10 1.7 23.9 10 50 7.2 103.7
--22 --8 1.8 25.6 13 55 8.0 115.4
--21 --6 1.88 27.3 16 60 8.7 126.1
--20 --4 2.0 29.1 18 65 9.5 137.4
--19 --2 2.1 30.9 21 70 10.3 149.4
--18 0 2.3 32.8 24 75 11.2 162.1
--17 2 2.4 34.8 27 80 12.1 175.5
--16 4 2.5 36.8 29 85 13.1 189.6
--14 6 2.7 38.9 32 90 14.1 204.5
--13 8 2.8 41.1 35 95 15.2 220.2
--12 10 3.0 43.3 38 100 16.3 236.8
--11 12 3.1 45.6 41 105 17.5 254.2
--10 14 3.3 48.0 43 110 18.8 272.4
--9 16 3.5 50.4 46 115 20.1 291.6
--8 18 3.7 52.9 49 120 21.5 311.8
--7 20 3.8 55.5 52 125 23.0 332.9
--6 22 4.0 58.1 54 130 24.5 355.0
--4 24 4.2 60.9 57 135 26.1 378.1
--3 26 4.4 63.7 60 140 27.7 402.3
--2 28 4.6 66.5 63 145 29.5 427.6
--1 30 4.8 69.5 66 150 31.3 454.0
9--49 62-11389
SECTION 10
UNIT TROUBLESHOOTING
CAUTION
Under no circumstances should anyone attempt to service the Advance Microprocessor. Should a
problem develop with the Advance Microprocessor, contact your nearest Carrier Transicold dealer
for replacement.
NOTE
Run a Pretrip and Check all active alarms before continuing with troubleshooting.
10.1 ENGINE
INDICATION / TROUBLE POSSIBLE CAUSES ACTION /

REFERENCE
SECTION
NOTE:
See section 10.5 and Figure 10--1. thru Figure 10--4. for Electronic Speed Control troubleshooting
10.1.1 Engine Will Not Start
Battery insufficiently charged Check
Battery terminal post dirty or defective Check
Bad electrical connections at starter Check
Starter motor will not Starter motor malfunctions 10.1.4
crank or low cranking speed
Starter motor solenoid defective Engine Manual
Open starting circuit 10.1.5
Incorrect grade of lubricating oil 2.8
No fuel in tank Check
Air in fuel system 9.7
Water in fuel system Drain Sump
Starter motor cranks Plugged fuel filter(s) Replace
but engine fails to start Plugged inlet screens to lift pump. Check
Plugged fuel lines to injector(s) Check
ESC defective 10.5
Intake air heater defective 9.9.8
Starter cranks, engages, Engine lube oil too heavy 2.8
but dies after a few seconds Voltage drop in battery cable(s) Check
ESC defective 10.5
10--1 62-11389
REFERENCE
SECTION
10.1.2 Engine Starts Then Stops
Fuel supply restricted Check
No fuel in tank Check
Leak in fuel system Check
Faulty fuel control operation Engine
Fuel filter restricted Replace
Plugged inlet screens to lift pump. Check
Engine stops after Injector nozzle(s) defective Engine Manual
several rotations Injection pump defective Engine Manual
Air cleaner or hose restricted 9.9.6
Safety device open 2.14
ESC defective 10.5
Optional fuel pump (FP) malfunction 9.8.2
Mechanical lift fuel pump malfunction Engine Manual
Oil pressure switch defective Replace
10.1.3 Engine Will Not Shut Off
10.5
Check FSA /
Engine will not shut off ESC operation defective Injection Pump
Assembly
10.1.4 Starter Motor Malfunction
Battery insufficiently charged Check
Battery cable connections loose or oxidized Check
Battery cables defective Replace
Starter motor will not Starter brushes shorted out Engine Manual
crank or turns slowly
Starter brushes hang up or have no contact Engine Manual
Starter solenoid damaged Engine Manual
Engine lube oil too heavy 2.8
Starter motor turns Pinion or ring gear obstructed or worn Clean both,
but pinion does not engage remove burrs,
or replace
Starter motor does not disengage Starter motor solenoid defective Engine Manual
after engine starts Defective starter Engine Manual
10.1.5 Malfunction In The Engine Starting Circuit
Battery defective Check
Loose electrical connections Tighten
No power to starter solenoid (SS)
ESC defective 10.5
No power to Starter Solenoid connector 10.5
62-11389 10--2
REFERENCE
SECTION
10.1.6 Miscellaneous Engine Troubleshooting
Restriction in air cleaner 9.9.6
Air in fuel system 9.7
Air vent restricted in fuel tank cap Clean
Restricted fuel lines Engine Manual
Loss of power Defective fuel injection pump Engine Manuall
Defective injector(s) or incorrect type Engine Manual
Incorrect fuel injection pump timing Engine Manuall
Incorrect valve timing Engine Manual
Poor compression Engine Manual
Engine shockmounts defective Replace
Vibration
Poor compression Engine Manual
Restriction in air cleaner 9.9.6
Exhaust pipe restriction Removel
Restriction in water jacket Engine Manual
Restriction in radiator 9.9.1
Overheating
Coolant level too low 8.5.1
Loose water pump Replace
Defective thermostat Engine Manual
Defective water pump / belt Engine Manual
Excessive crankcase pressure Plugged crankcase breather line 9.9.7
10--3 62-11389
10.2BATTERY CHARGER

REFERENCE
SECTION
Short in 12 volt wiring causing See 9.13.1
F7 or F8 fuse blows overload of charger
Internal short See 9.13.1
Bad cell in battery Test battery for
defect accord-
Charging rate does not taper ing to battery
back after charging for a few min- manufacturer’s
utes of engine crank instructions
Defective charger Replace
Open F7 or F8 Replace.
Charger is not receiving AC input Using a voltme-

ter, confirm
charger is re-
ceiving correct
340 to 590
Charger does not charge (540/34) VAC
voltage. If not
check input
connections.
Charger output is not connected to 12 volt battery Check output
wiring connec-
tions to battery.
Defective charger Replace
Battery not connected to charger. It is Check charging
Low output voltage measured normal to measure 12 volts or less across leads from
across charger output charger output with no battery connected charger to bat-
tery
62-11389 10--4
10.3 GENERATOR
REFERENCE
SECTION
Damaged harness Check
No voltage with engine running GENCON damaged Check
Open or short in stator windings Check
Low engine speed Correct
Excessive load Check
Low voltage
High resistance connections -- connections Clean and
warm or hot Tighten
Fluctuating speed Correct
Fluctuating voltage Irregular speed of engine Engine Manual
Loose terminal or load connections Tighten
High voltage Excessive engine speed Correct
Generator overloaded Check
Clogged ventilation openings Clean
Overheating
Insufficient circulation Check Fan
Unbalanced load Balance
Mechanical Noise Loose laminations 9.14.2
10.4 REFRIGERATION / TEMPERATURE CONTROL
REFERENCE
SECTION
10.4.1 Unit Will Not Cool
Compressor contactor or relay defective Check
Compressor malfunction Compressor defective 10.7
A defrost cycle did not terminate 9.33

Refrigeration system Abnormal pressure 10.4.8
Check system for noncondensibles 9.19.4
10.4.2 Unit Runs But Has Insufficient Cooling
Compressor valves defective 9.20
Compressor
Unloader malfunction 9.22
Abnormal pressure 10.4.8
Unloader malfunction 9.22
Expansion valve malfunction 10.4.11
Refrigeration system
No or restricted evaporator airflow 10.4.10
Suction Modulation Valve malfunction 9.29
10.4.3 Unit Operates Long Or Continuously In Cooling
Hot Load Allow time to
pull down
Refrigerated Compartment
Defective or insufficient refrigerated compartment insula- Correct
tion or air leak
Abnormal pressure 10.4.8
Refrigeration system Temperature sensor malfunction Check
Compressor Defective 9.20
10--5 62-11389
REFERENCE
SECTION
10.4.4 Unit Will Not Terminate Cooling
Temperature sensor malfunction Check
Contactor (CCON) stuck closed Check
Check set point
Unit fails to stop cooling Check whether
Microprocessor improperly set microprocessor
is set at °C or
°F
10.4.5 Unit Will Not Heat Or Has Insufficient Heating
Heater(s) defective 9.10
Heater contactors or coil defective Replace
Defective wiring / connectors Replace
Unit will not heat or has insuffi- Loose terminal connections Tighten
cient heat
Low voltage 10.3
No air flow or air flow is restricted 9.9.1
10.4.6 Unit Will Not Terminate Heating
Microprocessor temperature improperly set Reset
Unit fails to stop heating Microprocessor malfunction 10.6
10.4.7 Defrost Cycle Malfunction
Defrost air switch (DAS) out of calibration 9.33.2
1DTT is above 40_F (4.4_C) Cool Box Down
Will not initiate defrost Defrost air switch (DAS) defective 9.33 & 9.33.2
automatically
Loose terminal connections (DAS) Tighten
Air sensing tubes defective or disconnected (DAS) Check
Keypad defective Replace
Loose terminal connections between keypad and micro- Tighten
Will not initiate defrost manually processor
1DTT is above 40_F (4.4_C) Cool Box Down
Unit has been running less than 15 seconds Try again
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Initiates but does not defrost
Heater(s) burned out 9.10
Defrost air switch (DAS) out of adjustment 9.33 & 9.33.2
Frequent defrost
Wet load Normal
Does not terminate or Low refrigerant charge 9.19
cycles on defrost. Defrost air switch (DAS) out of adjustment 9.33 & 9.33.2
Hot Load Allow time to
pull down
Refrigerated Compartment
Defective or insufficient refrigerated compartment insula- Correct
tion or air leak
62-11389 10--6
INDICATION/ REFERENCE
POSSIBLE CAUSES SECTION
TROUBLE
10.4.8 Abnormal Pressure
Condenser coil dirty 9.35
Condenser fans rotating backwards Check Wiring
Condenser fan inoperative Check
High discharge pressure 9.19.4 and
Refrigerant overcharge or noncondensibles Table 3-1
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
Suction modulation valve malfunction 9.29
Low discharge pressure Compressor valves(s) worn or broken 9.20
Suction service valve partially closed Open
Filter-drier partially plugged 9.23
Low refrigerant charge Table 3-1
Expansion valve defective 10.4.11
Low suction pressure No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow 10.4.10
Excessive frost on evaporator coil 10.4.7
Evaporator fan rotating backwards Check Wiring
Suction modulation valve malfunction 9.29
King valve partially closed Open
Compressor valves(s) worn or broken 9.20
High suction pressure
Compressor gasket(s) defective 9.20
Suction and discharge Compressor valves defective 9.20
pressures tend to equalize
when unit is operating Compressor gasket(s) defective 9.20
10.4.9 Abnormal Noise

Loose mounting bolts Tighten
Worn bearings 9.20
Compressor Worn or broken valves 9.20
Liquid slugging 10.4.11
Insufficient oil 9.21
Loose or striking shroud Check
Condenser or evaporator fan Bearings defective 9.11
Bent shaft 9.11
Water pump belt Cracked or worn Replace
10.4.10 No Evaporator Air Flow Or Restricted Air Flow
Frost on coil 9.33
Evaporator coil blocked
Dirty coil 9.34
Evaporator fan loose or defective 9.11
No or partial evaporator Evaporator fan rotating backwards 9.11
air flow
Evaporator air flow blocked in refrigerated compartment Check
10--7 62-11389
REFERENCE
SECTION
10.4.11 Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV) Malfunction
Low refrigerant charge 9.17.2/9.19
EVOT defective Check and Re-
place
EVOP defective Check and Re-
EVXV not controlling correctly place
Coil not seated properly on valve Check
EVXV inlet screen plugged Check and Re-
place
Loose connector Check and
Tighten
10.4.12 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) Malfunction
Coil not seated properly Check
Coil defective Check and Re-
place
Loose connector Check and
Tighten
CST defective Check and Re-
CSMV not controlling correctly place
CSP defective Check and Re-
place
CDT defective Check and Re-
place
CDP defective Check and Re-
place
62-11389 10--8
10.5 Electronic Speed Control Troubleshooting Guide
Table 10--1 ENSCU LED Fault Chart
(See following pages for troubleshooting trees)
Fault LED display pat- Failed component

tern
1 Engine Over Speed: more than 2,530 RPM One Long–One ENSSN or mechanical engine
Short problem
2 No signal from ENSSN for 2 seconds after RPM Two Long–One ENSSN or wiring problem
is greater than 1,000 RPM for 10 seconds, OR Short
for 5 seconds while engine cranking (no voltage
at pin 18 of ENSCU).
3 Actuator (FSA) wiring disconnected or open cir- Two Long–Three FSA or wiring problem
cuit. Coil Resistance Spec: 2.8 ohm +/- 10%. Short
4 ENSCU supply voltage is greater than 26V. Two Long–Seven ENSCU or alternator problem
Short
10--9 62-11389
START HERE
Start unit.
NO Using strobe light YES
07-00177-01 or equivalent,
NOTE : Ensure the run relay is check engine RPM.
energized during test . With ENSSN Is RPM equal to or over 2,530?
unplugged during testing , unit will
stall & go through start sequence
again . Unit will not start . This is
normal . Check for high
Check high speed mechanical
Verify there is at least 11 VDC going resistance or an
stop on injection pump assembly
into the ENSSN 12V terminal ? YES open in the ENSSN
for loose screws or tampering.
ground circuit. YES Are the screws loose?
Did you find and
NO correct the condition?
YES
Check for high

resistance or Set proper high speed RPM
an open System per this manual
between ENSCU OK Did you find and
System correct the condition?
terminal 25 & YES
ENSSN 12V OK NO
terminal. YES
Did you find
and correct Remove new ENSCU
NO System
the condition? and re-install old
OK
ENSCU back into unit,
NO ENSCU is not the fault.
Review results of
above tests with your
NO supervisor. If Check for proper internal mechanical
necessary, go to the operation of injection pump assembly
Using jumper wire, check for beginning of the and governor assembly. Did you
5 VDC at ENSCU terminal 10. table & test again. find and correct the condition?
Do you have 5 VDC at
terminal 10? YES
NO
NO
YES Review results

NO Replace ENSCU. Did you of above tests System
find and correct the condition? with your super OK
visor. If
necessary, go
YES to the
Check for open or high beginning of the
resistance on circuit between Replace ENSSN.. Did you table &
NO find and correct the condition? test again.
ENSSN and ENSCU. Did you
find and correct the condition?
NO YES
YES
Remove new ENSSN System

and re-install old OK
System ENSSN back into unit,
OK ENSSN is not the fault.
Review results of
above tests with your
supervisor. If
necessary, go to the
beginning of the table
& test again.
Figure 10--1. ESC Diagnostic Tree -- 1 Long, 1 Short LED Code
62-11389 10--10
START HERE
NO
Verify unit starts, go into
high speed and stall after
running for a few seconds?
Using jumper wire,
verify there is at least 11
VDC at ENSCU terminal 25? Check for high
YES resistance or an
Verify there is at least 11 open in the
VDC going into the YES ENSSN ground YES
ENSSN 12 V terminal? circuit.
Did you find and
correct the condition?
Check for high
resistance or an System
NO
open between OK
ENSCU terminal
System
25 & ENSSN YES
OK Using jumper wire, check for
12 V terminal. .
5 VDC at ENSCU terminal
Did you find
10. Do you have 5 VDC at
and correct YES terminal 10?
the condition?
YES
NO
Replace ENSCU.
Did you find and correct
the condition?
NO
NO
Remove new ENSCU Check for open or high

System resistance on circuit
and re-install old OK YES NO
ENSCU back into between ENSSN and ENSCU.
unit, ENSCU is not Did you find and correct the
the fault. Review condition?
results of above
tests with your Replace ENSSN. Did you
supervisor. If Remove new ENSSN
find and correct the
necessary, go to the and re-install old
condition?
beginning of the table & ENSSN back into unit,
test again. ENSSN is not the fault.
Review results of
NO
above tests with your YES
supervisor. If
& test again. System
OK
10--11 62-11389
START HERE
Go to Advance Micro Does the engine starter
diagnostic table NO engage & turn the engine
Figure 10--6. over?
YES
Check for high resistance Verify the proper voltage

going into FSA terminal Using jumper wire, are the
or an open on the FSA ground proper voltages present
1. 12 VDC when NO
circuit terminal 2. YES at ENSCU terminal 7?
Did you find and correct Start/Run-Off switch is
the condition? first turned on for the
pull in voltage, 1 VDC for
hold in voltage & 0.8 VDC
YES during starter engagement. YES
Do you have the correct
NO voltage?
NO
System
OK YES Check for open or high
With the FSA disconnected, Replace ENSCU. Did you find resistance on circuit
check the resistance of the and correct the condition? between FSA and ENSCU..
FSA coil. Spec is YES Did you find and correct
2.8 ohms +/- 10%. the condition?
Is ohm reading within spec?
NO YES
Remove the FSA from the NO
NO engine & inspect. FSA should
move freely without binding and Remove new ENSCU
shaft should be straight. Is and re-install old Review results
FSA functioning properly? System
ENSCU back into unit, of above tests
Replace the FSA. Did OK
ENSCU is not the fault. with your super
you find and correct NO Review results of above visor. If
the condition? tests with your necessary, go
YES
supervisor. If necessary, to the
go to the beginning of beginning of the
the table & test again. table &
NO Review results test again.
of above tests
with your super
Remove new FSA visor. If
and re-install old necessary, go
FSA back into to the
unit, FSA is not beginning of the
the fault. Review table &
YES results of above test again.
tests with your
supervisor. If
beginning of the table &
test again.
System
OK
62-11389 10--12
START HERE
With the Start/Run-Off
switch ON and the ENSCU
wire 13 removed from the
connector (connector
Replace ENSCU. Did you plugged in), check voltage Check voltage output at
find and correct the condition? NO at ENSCU terminal 13. Is YES alternator. Is voltage 26
voltage 26 VDC or higher? VDC or higher?
NOTE: With connector
unplugged, unit will not YES
start but will crank.
Check voltage while unit
is cranking.
NO YES Replace alternator.
NO Did you find and
Starting at terminal NO YES

Remove new ENSCU System 13 at the ENSCU,
and re-install old OK check circuit for
ENSCU back into induced voltage
unit, ENSCU is not the creating the 26 VDC Remove new System
fault. Review results signal. alternator and OK
of above tests with Did you find and re-install old
your supervisor. If correct the condition? alternator back into
necessary, go to the unit, alternator is not
beginning of the fault. Review
the table & test again. YES results of above
tests with your
NO supervisor. If
System beginning of the
OK table & test again.
Review results
of above tests
with your super
visor. If
necessary, go
to the
beginning of the
table &
test again.
10--13 62-11389
10.6 Microprocessor Troubleshooting Guide
The purpose of the following procedure is to provide a logical and straightforward guide to be used when troubleshoot-
ing operational or other problems occurring with the microprocessor. Often users and technicians have mistakenly
worked to correct a problem that has ended up being normal operation. The microprocessor has several different con-
ditions contributing to operating parameters. These conditions are called out in the various diagnostic charts to aid the
technician in pinpointing the problem, or in realizing that the unit is performing normally.
When using these tables, it is important to verify the reported symptom or problem and then correctly identify the ap-
propriate table for that particular condition. Using the incorrect table will lead to an incorrect diagnosis. A table of con-
tents is included to easily identify the correct table to use.
When using these Diagnostic Tables, it is very important not to skip any steps. Follow the flow of the tables in the order
that they are laid out. These tables are formatted into a logical troubleshooting sequence. Skipping around the tables
will most likely lead to errors in diagnosis.
Throughout the tables, the steps will point the technician to areas to look at or check for a problem. Most of the steps
will lead the technician to a circuit or other area of the unit to check, test, and possibly repair other than the micropro-
cessor. Some steps will point to a possible problem with the microprocessor. Whenever reaching one of these steps, it
is a very good practice to install the new microprocessor, then verify unit operation PRIOR TO writing hours, Trailer ID,
Unit Serial Number, etc., into the new microprocessor. Once the technician is satisfied that a new microprocessor is re-
quired, the hours, trailer ID, unit serial number, customer configurations, or IntelliSets, etc., should be entered. Should
the problem remain even with the new microprocessor in place, once all repairs are made, the original microprocessor
is to be reinstalled into the unit, to avoid unnecessary costs to the customer or having the Warranty Request rejected if
there is no problem found with the returned microprocessor.
All steps leading to replacement of the microprocessor have a number associated with them. When filling out the MPR
tag that will be attached to the returned part, write the step number on the upper half of the tag in the Failure Description
Field. Include the same information in the Failure Description Field when entering the warranty claim information on
line. This will show which diagnostic table was used and the path that was followed to determine the micro was at fault.
62-11389 10--14
START HERE Disconnect StarTrak from unit
Is unit equipped YES and install J1 jumper. This will
with StarTrak? eliminate StarTrak from the system.
NO
Is Micro Status
NO YES
LED blinking?
Check the F1 fuse. Check Micro Status
YES
Is the fuse blown? LED blink rate.
Replace the fuse.

Did you find and Return to
correct the the top of
this chart Micro Status LED Micro Status LED is blinking
condition? is blinking at 1 at 1/2 second ON & 1/2
NO
YES NO second ON & 1 second OFF.
second OFF.
Check ground Inspect and repair poor Check the Glow / Crank switch
connectors at the connections at the micro and wiring for shorting. Is the
YES battery, starter, and display. Did you find switch or circuit shorted? YES
engine block and and correct the condition?
inside the control box.
Did you find and NO NO
correct the condition? NO NO
Ensure the operator is waiting
YES Replace
NO long enough by turning the Load current version
YES Switch and
Start/Run-Off switch ON and of software from http://
Check voltage repair
waiting 2minutes for the display www.transcentral.
between QC1 & QC2. wiring as
YES to come on. Did you find and carrier.com Did the
Voltage should read needed. Did
correct the condition? current version of
11 volts or higher. you find and
NO software load correctly?
Is voltage within range correct the
Is the Inspect and repair problem?
NO system he 3 wiring NO
operat-- harnesses for the
Check Wiring for high ing OK micro and display: YES Go To Condition 8 --
resistance or an open. now? the cable from the Programming Problems
Did you find and YES micro to the back of with PC Cards if using a PC
YES correct the condition? YES the display, the Card to upgrade software or
cable from the back Condition 9 -- Programming
NO YES Problems with MicroProgrammer
System OK of the display to the YES
display itself and the if using a PC to upgrade software.
Re-install Did the software load correctly?
Check voltage ribbon cable from
StarTrak if
between 5MPA1 & the keypad to the
YES disconnected
QC2. Voltage board. Did you find Did the loading
earlier.
should read 11 and correct the of the software NO
volts or higher. Is condition? correct the YES
voltage problem?
within range?
NO
(MPR Code #2)
NO
YES Check Wiring for high Replace micro and operate YES Review the results of
resistance or an open. NO system in order to verify repair. above tests with your
Did you find and (MPR Code #1) Did you find and correct the supervisor. If necessary,
correct the condition? condition? go to the beginning of the
NO table & test again.
System OK YES
Re-install Remove new micro and re-install old micro System OK
StarTrak if back into the unit. Micro is not the fault. Re-install
disconnected Review results of above tests with your StarTrak if
earlier. supervisor. If necessary, go to the beginning disconnected
of the table & test again. earlier.
Figure 10--5. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 1 -- Start/Run-Off Switch On -- Unit Does Not Operate
10--15 62-11389
START HERE
Wrong Chart. The unit
See Condition 1. NO starts & runs. YES
Micro may not be configured properly.

Verify correct model number is selected
NO YES
in the micro via unit data. Did you find
and correct the condition?
Unit may be running on old software.

Upgrade software to current version. YES
Did the software load correctly? Did the loading of the
software correct the problem? YES
YES
NO NO
Go To Check ground connectors at the

Condition 8 -- YES battery, starter, engine block and YES
Programming Problems inside the control box. Did you find
with PC Cards if using a and correct the condition?
PC Card to upgrade NO
software
-- or -- Check for active & inactive alarms.
Condition 9 -- Refer to Section 8 for troubleshooting YES
Programming Problems alarms. Did you find and correct the
with MicroProgrammer condition?
if using a PC to upgrade
NO
software.
Did the software load correctly?
Verify function settings, configurations and System
IntelliSet settings are installed & correct. Did YES OK
NO you find and correct the condition?
NO
Review the results of
above tests with your Use Pre Trip to check for any alarms.
supervisor. If Use the Component Test Mode (Section
necessary, go to the 6.2.2) to verify operation. Did you find and YES
beginning of the table correct the condition?
& test again.
NO
Use this manual to check for correct

operation. Did you find and correct the condition? YES
NO
Download data recorder & review

unit operation. Did you find and YES
YES
NO
Remove new micro & re-install Are you sure unit is not operating
old micro back in the unit. Micro properly? Operate the system. Did you YES
is not the fault. Review results find and correct the condition?
of above tests with your
supervisor. If necessary, go to NO
beginning of table & test again. (MPR Code #5)
NO
Replace micro and operate system in YES
order to verify repair. Did you find
and correct the condition?
Figure 10--6. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 2 -- Start/Run-Off Switch On -- Unit Operates But Not Properly
62-11389 10--16
Turn the Start/Run There a problem
-- Off switch to the with the
START HERE OFF position. StarTrak
Is the unit Does the engine system.
equipped with NO continue to run? NO Repair as
StarTrak? necessary.
YES YES
Replace Start/Run NO
-Off switch. Did
Check for defective you find and
Disconnect StarTrak Start/Run-Off switch. YES YES
from the unit and install Is Switch defective?
J1 Jumper. This will
eliminate StarTrak NO NO
from the system.
Check wiring to System OK
Start/Run-Off switch for an Re-install
YES StarTrak if
open or short. Did you find
and correct the condition? disconnected
earlier.
NO
Verify the Run Relay
de-energizes when the Replace Run
Start/Run-Off switch is Relay. Did
Unplug fuel solenoid or fuel in the OFF position. you find and YES
and speed actuator. Does correct
the unit stop? YES the
condition?
Is the relay
YES defective? YES
NO NO
Check wiring for fuel NO NO

solenoid of fuel and speed YES
actuator for a short. Did Check wiring to Run Relay
you find and correct the for an open or short. Did you
condition? find and correct the condition? Verify correct fuel solenoid or
fuel and speed actuator operation
NO & replace if needed.
Fuel solenoid or fuel and Operate system in order to verify
speed actuator is defective repair. Did you find and correct
YES or mechanically seized. the condition.
NO
System OK Re-install Did the loading Load current version of Remove new fuel
StarTrak if of the software software from http://www. solenoid or fuel and
disconnected YES correct the YES transcentral.carrier.com. speed actuator & re-
earlier. problem? Did the software load install old component.
correctly? Old component is not the fault.
NO
YES NO
YES Go To
Condition 8 --
Remove connectors from unit one at a Review the results of Programming Problems
time to determine if any other devices above tests with your with PC Cards if using a
are providing power feedback, NO supervisor. If PC Card to upgrade
causing the micro to remain powered. necessary, go to the software
Did you find and correct the condition? beginning of the table -- or --
& test again. Condition 9 --
Programming Problems
with MicroProgrammer
if using a PC to upgrade
software.
Did the software load correctly?
Figure 10--7. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 3 -- Start/Run-Off Switch Off -- Unit Fails To Stop
10--17 62-11389
Unit may be running old soft
YES START HERE Check the Speed Solenoid NO ware. Upgrade software from YES
http://www.transcentral.carrier.com.
or FSA and linkage for correct operation.
Did you find and correct
Did you find and correct the condition?
the condition?
NO
Check System discharge pressure at compressor.

YES
Is discharge pressure 435PSI or higher?
NO
Check system suction pressure at compressor. Is suction pressure 5PSI or lower? YES System OK
NO
Check engine coolant temperature. Is coolant temperature 77°F or below? YES
NO Is the ambient temp 80°F YES

Is unit in or higher? Has the unit been in defrost
YES
defrost? for less than 30 seconds
System OK YES and suction pressure is less
NO Has the unit been in than 10 PSI OR Has the unit YES
NO
Does the unit have a door defrost for more than been in defrost for up to
switch or remote switch? 5 1/2 minutes? NO 5 1/2 minutes and the
suction pressure is more
YES YES than 10 PSI?
Is the door open?
NO Is the switch configured for low speed? YES
NO
NO Check door switch wiring for an open.
NO
Did you find and correct the condition? YES
YES Is setpoint 10°F or lower?
Are alarms A122 and A123 YES
both present?
Check funtional parameter
settings for high speed delay Has the unit been
NO NO running less that the
NO minutes for continuous run.
selected high YES
Check funtional parameter settings for speed delay minutes?
Is the unit in Start/Stop YES high speed delay minutes for start/stop NO
operation?
Check the configurations for high speed delay.
Is the setpoint 10.5°F NO Is the setpoint further away from the selected
or higher? probe temp for less than the selected minutes? YES
NO
YES
YES Is return air temp equal to or NO NO Is selected probe temp within YES
+/- 3.6°F of setpoint?
colder than setpoint?
Is speed relay LED27 Check the F2 circuit
NO for excess amp draw or
illuminated on micro?
short to ground. Did
YES you find and YES
The micro is calling for low speed YES correct the condition?
operation. If you believe this is not Is the F2 fuse blown?
correct, review your testing with your
supervisor before changing NO
YES
microprocessor. NO
Is there voltage at QC3?
NO
NO
Replace relay. Did you
YES Check for proper operation of the find and correct the condition?
NO
YES speed relay. Is the relay
Review the test results with your operating properly?
supervisor. If necessary, go to Check for proper operation
the beginning of the table and Micro is calling for high speed. Is YES of the Electronic Speed
test again. there 12V at FSA and ESC pin Control Module or FSA. YES
ENSCU16?
NO NO NO
Check wiring and connections from QC3 to ESC module or Repair or replace ESC or actuator YES
YES
FSA. Did you find and correct the condition? as needed.
Figure 10--8. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 4 -- Unit Will Not Run In High Speed
62-11389 10--18
START HERE
YES
Is the unit operating in defrost?
NO
Unit may be running old software. Upgrade
software from YES
http: //www.transcentral.carrier.com. Did
you find and correct the condition?
NO
Check functional parameter settings for air flow.

YES
Does the setting show high?
NO
Does the unit have IntelliSet options?
YES YES
Is ProductShield High YES
NO Air configured on?
What is the version of software in the micro?
Software Rev 04.02.00 Software Rev 04.03.00

and earlier. and later.
NO
Check to see if the ambient Check to see if the ambient
YES is inside the Min/Max range. is outside the Min/Max range. YES
Did you find and correct the Did you find and correct the
condition? condition?
NO
Check setpoint NO
System OK Is setpoint +10.4F or Is setpoint +10.5F or

lower? higher?
Is return air temperature Is selected probe tem greater

NO equal to or colder than YES NO than 3.6F from setpoint?
setpoint?
Is speed relay LED27
NO illuminated on the YES
micro? Did you find and YES
Is there a voltage of 12V or
higher at QC3? Check wiring for high resist
YES
ance or shorted con
NO YES System OK
nections. Did you find and
NO correct the condition?
Is there 12V or higher at the
ESC module pin ENSCU.16 or FSA?
NO
YES Check the ESC or FSA. Did you find

and correct the condition? YES
NO
Review the test results with your

supervisor. If necessary, go to
the beginning of the table and
test again.
Figure 10--9. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 5 -- Unit Will Not Run In Low Speed
10--19 62-11389
START HERE
What does the
“CONNECTION OK” ReeferManager program “NOT CONNECTED”
display on the bottom of
the screen of your PC?
Are the dates for the
data on the download YES There is no
screen? serial
connection.
NO
System
Data Recorder date & time may OK Is the micro
be set wrong. Set the correct date YES status light
& time. Did you find and correct NO blinking 1 YES
the condiditon? second on & 1
second off? Verify the integrity of
NO the download cable
and connections.
Did you find and
Did you have a communication Go to Condition 1 -- correct the condition?
failure during a download? Unit does not operate. YES
NO YES
NO
When viewing down Use the configuration

loaded data, does all YES jumper to verify that
the data appear on Intermittent communication download port wiring is
Jan 01, 1970? problem. Ensure AC cord is correct and doesn’t have an
NO YES
properly connected or PC battery open, high resistance or a
is fully charged. Did you find short. See Section XXX. Did
YES and correct the condition? you find and correct the
condition?
When viewing the DataRecorder date & NO NO
download in Reports, a time have never been set.
specific sensor or event Set date & time. Operate Verify the correct com port is
does not show up in the the system in order to Verify PC power saving features selected in the PC software. See
data file. The verify the repair. are OFF. (I.E. screen saver, monitor YES Help>Contents>PC Setup for
Reports data filter time out, hard disc time out, auto additional information. Did you
settings may be set YES
power down/sleep mode). find and correct the condition?
incorrectly or specific Did you find and correct the condition?
sensors and events may NO
not be recorded.
DataRecorder is not NO
configured properly. Verify com port
Use the Reports Data availability (I.E. infrared
Verify the integrity of the devices turned off, PDA
Filter pull down menu to download cable and YES
set sensors & events to YES applications turned off,
connections. Did you find computer has 9 pin serial
be viewed OR use and correct the c ondition?
Service Manager or port. DO NOT connect
ReeferManager to USB port. Did you find
correctly set up recording NO and correct the condition?
parameters. Operate the
system in order to verify NO
Use PC
the repair. System
Download Card Use PC
to download OK
Download Card
System data. to download
OK
data.
Figure 10--10. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 6 -- Data Recorder Data Download Problems When Using
ReeferManager and a Download Cable. Data File Analysis Problems Using Reports
62-11389 10--20
START HERE Using either a PC card or computer with a
Make sure the Start/Run-Off download cable hooked into the serial
switch is ON or the micro is port/download plug, load current version of
in PC Mode. (See Section 6.1.) the software into micro. Insert PC card
into the PC card slot on the micro.
What does the MessageCenter

display say about the PC Card?
MessageCenter has Doesn’t acknowledge

“CARD LOCKED - “CARD FULL -
“UNKNOWN CARD” addition PC Card that a PC Card has
REMOVE CARD” REMOVE CARD”
error messages. been inserted..
PC Card may be The card “Write Protect” Download card has no PC Card is not seated
See Section 7.1 for a
defective. Try a switch is ON. Unlock PC more empty memory properly. Remove card
list of MessageCenter
different card. Did Card by sliding “Write space. Use from slot, wait 10
error messages. Find
you find and Protect” switch to the ReeferManager seconds & re-insert
your specific error
correct condition? “OFF” position & re-insert to extract downloaded card. Did you find and
message and follow
the card. Operate the data & then erase the directions in the correct the condition?
NO system in order to verify card. Operate the description column.
the repair. system in Repair as needed.
order to verify the Operate the system in
If you have tried 2 or repair.
more PC cards on one order to verify the
particular micro, take repair.
those same suspect NO
PC cards and try
them on another micro.
System
If the cards function YES
OK
properly on the
second micro, it
proves the first micro PC card slot may be
is not reading the defective. Turn power off and
PC cards properly. YES verify status light is not
YES blinking. Check for bent pins
Is the micro at fault?
in the card slot & straighten
YES
(MPR Code #4) as needed. Did you find and
Replace micro and operate correct the condition?
system in order to verify
NO repair. Did you find and
correct the condition? NO
NO Are pins unable to

Micro is not the YES be straightened or
fault. (MPR Code #4) pins broken?
Micro is not the
fault. Remove new
micro & re-install old
micro.
Review the test results

with your supervisor. If
necessary, go to the NO
and test again.
Figure 10--11. Microprocessor Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 7 -- PC Card Problems
10--21 62-11389
START HERE
Are you trying to load any version of Does the MessageCenter say
software that is older than 04.00.00? YES “OLD SOFTWARE: CANNOT LOAD”?
NO NO
YES
Insert the PC Card into the PC Card slot on
the front of the micro. Be certain that the
instructions label on the download card is
facing the “Caution” label on the micro. Do Once 04.00 is installed into the micro, it is no
not force the card into the slot. Handle the longer possible to load any version of 03 or
card from the edges. Did you find and previous software. Newer versions can be
correct the condition? loaded as released. If loading 04.00 or 04.02
and the micro has 03.xx or previoius software,
NO incrementally upgrade the software. See
Bulletin SER04-47 for instructions.
System OK
Does the MessageCenter acknowledge a
program card was nstalled by displaying Verify you are using a Progra PC card and not
“OLD SOFTWARE,” “NEW SOFTWARE” NO another PC card. Did you find and correct the YES
or “SAME SOFTWARE”? condition?
YES NO
Once the unit shuts down to begin the
software installation process, the suction
modulation valve closing process begins. The
software installation processes will not begin Can the card be read by the
YES until the CSMV is completely closed, which ReeferManager program?
will delay the actual process for about 45
seconds. Did you find and correct the
condition? YES NO
NO Place card back Possible

System OK into the micro and defective
try again. Did this NO
Micro display will show PC card. Retry
solve the problem? operation with
“ENGINE AND MICRO WILL
YES STOP NOW” and engine will YES another card.
stop. Did you find and correct YES
the condition?
NO System OK
The display will show “ INSTALLING PROGRAM SOFTWARE.”

YES
Make sure you wait until the display shows “INSTALLL COMPLETE”
before removing card. Did you find and correct the condition?
NO
Using the ReeferManager
Program, install Program Does MessageCenter display “CARD DATA CORRUPT -- CANNOT LOAD”?
YES
card into computer and
re-install the correct .bex file.
NO
Software has finished YES Is the card status LED on solid?

loading.
NO
There is a problem loading
Has the card status the software. Turn unit
Is the card status LED flashing 1/2 YES LED been illuminated for YES Start/Run-Off switch
second on and 1/2 second off? more than 5 minutes? off. Remove the Program
card and try again.
NO NO
Micro does not recognize the card. Try another Wait at least 5 minutes.
program card, or use MicroProgrammer.
Figure 10--12. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 8 -- Programming Problems With PC Cards
62-11389 10--22
START HERE Does the MessageCenter say Once 04.00 is installed into the micro, it
Are you trying to load any version of YES
“OLD SOFTWARE: CANNOT s no longer possible to load any version
software that is older than 04.00.00? LOAD”? of 03 or previous software. Newer
YES
versions can be loaded as released. If
NO NO loading 04.00 or 04.02 and the micro
has 03.xx or previoius software,
incrementally upgrade the software.
Only MicroProgrammer version 3.14 is to be used to See Bulletin SER04-47 for instructions.
properly install 04.00.00 and later software. Earlier
versions of MicroProgrammer should be discarded. NO
MicroProgrammer only runs on Windows 95/98. It will
not run on Windows 2000 or XP. Are you using
version 3.14 on a Windows 95/98 machine? Obtain MicroProgrammer 3.14 and Windows
NO 95/98 for software installation.
Did you find and correct the condition?
YES
YES
When downloading with a cable, make sure cable
Did you find and connections are secure and tight. Turn off all screen
correct the condition? NO savers and power saver options on the laptop. These YES System OK
options can interfere with software download. Did you
find and correct the condition?
NO
YES Make sure you are not using USB or 9-pin adapters on the YES
computer. Did you find and correct the condition?
NO
Problem is with
Did the MicroProgrammer program launch computer. Try load-
properly on your computer? NO YES
ing software with
another computer.
System OK
YES
When you loaded the problem file, Verify you are loading a
Load the correct
does it say “FILE VALID” on the NO correct . BEX file for the NO file and try again.
bottom of the screen? Advance micro. Are you
loading the correct file?
Try again using YES
a good cable. Close MicroProgrammer
The PROGRAM MICRO button is not
YES and start over again OR YES
active. Click on the button. Is the YES
use Program PC card.
NO software loading?
NO NO
Check the integrity of Is the Percent Did you achieve
the download cable. Is Did you get a
YES NO Complete YES 100% download? YES
the cable OK? “Communication Error”
message? increasing?
YES
Check download port on unit. (Plug
in jumper and see if you can put YES Make sure you wait at least 5 minutes for
YES NO software to load. If you waited the 5 minutes,
micro into configuration mode.)
Will micro go into configuration mode? turn the unit off for 30 seconds. Exit out of
the MicroProgrammer. Turn unit back on. YES
Restart MicroProgrammer and try again.
NO If you are at this table for a second time,
Problem is with program micro using Program PC card.
computer. Try Repair faulty wiring or damaged
loading software NO download port. Did you find and YES
with another correct the condition?
computer.
Figure 10--13. Micro Diagnostic Tree -- Cond. 9 -- Programming Problems With MicroProgrammer
10--23 62-11389
10.7 Compressor Troubleshooting Guide
The purpose of the following procedure is to provide a logical and systematic method of determining whether 06D
compressor repair or replacement is required.
A. Checkout Procedure For Determining If Compressor Repair Or Replacement Is Required
Certain operating conditions or refrigeration system components may be misdiagnosed and subsequently lead to the
determination that the compressor is bad. These conditions or components must be checked prior to replacing a
compressor and must be checked after a replacement compressor is installed to prevent replacement compressor
damage.
1. Check refrigerant level per Section 9.19.2.
2. Install gauges on the suction and discharge service valves. A separate gauge should be connected to the unit liquid
line king valve in order to determine pressures in other steps.
3. Check unloaders as follows:
a. With the unit operating in high speed cool, check the status of the front and rear cylinder unloaders. The micropro-
cessor energizes the unloaders independently, based on suction pressure. If one or both unloaders are energized,
unplug or disconnect the power source separately for the front and rear unloaders.
b. Using a separate 12V power source energize and de--energize each unloader separately. Note the suction pres-
sure change as each unloader is energized or de--energized. Both unloaders should show a rise in suction pressure
rise of 3 to 6 PSIG (0.2 to 0.4 bar) when energized and a drop of 3 to 6 PSIG when de--energized. If little or no change
is noticed for either unloader, the cylinder head(s) must be removed for further inspection. See Section B. for in-
spection procedure.
4. Perform unit pumpdown as follows:
a. Slowly close (frontseat) the receiver king valve and allow the unit suction pressure to reach 0 PSIG. Shut the unit
off and observe the suction, discharge, and receiver pressure. Receiver pressure should drop very slowly, and suc-
tion and discharge pressure will slowly equalize to within a nominal saturated pressure range. Refer to the refriger-
ant pressure temperature chart in Table 9--9 for pressures corresponding to approximate ambient temperatures.
Remember, the engine compartment temperatures are generally higher than actual ambient air temperatures. A
fast reading digital thermometer such as 07--00269 is helpful in determining ambient temperatures.
NOTE
The amount of time required to pump the unit down to 0 PSIG is not by itself an indicator that the compressor
is bad. A longer than normal pumpdown time necessitates additional checks to determine the cause.
b. If the suction, discharge, and receiver pressures do not rapidly equalize after the CSMV closes further com-
pressor evaluation can only be done by following the compressor inspection procedure (Section B.)
5. To determine the cause of suction, discharge, and receiver pressure equalization, start the unit with the king valve
closed and slowly close the suction service valve until suction pressure reaches 0 PSIG. Turn the unit off and close
the suction service valve.
a. If the pressures equalize quickly to above saturated pressure it will be necessary to follow the compressor inspec-
tion procedure. (Section B.)
62-11389 10--24
B. Compressor Inspection Procedure
NOTE
Only conduct this procedure after running Pretrip.
The system must be OFF during the following procedure.
1. Refrigerant Recovery
a. Close (frontseat) the suction and discharge service valves.
b. Reclaim the refrigerant by using an approved refrigerant recovery machine, and reduce the compressor pressure
to 0 PSIG. (Refer to Section 9.16.)
NOTE
To avoid damage to the earth’s ozone layer, use a refrigerant recovery system whenever removing refrigerant.
When working with refrigerants you must comply with all local government environmental laws, U.S.A. EPA sec-
tion 608.
CAUTION
Service mode MUST be used whenever removing refrigerant charge, refrigerant leak checking or
evacuating. Refer to Section 6.2.3.
WARNING
Ensure the START/RUN--OFF switch in in the OFF position and the power plug is removed from the
unit before removing the compressor terninal box cover and wiring.
2. Compressor Inspection
a. Start with the front cylinder head of the compressor.
WARNING
Do not unscrew cylinder head capscrews all the way before breaking seal. Entrapped pressure could
result in injury.
b. Loosen cylinder head capscrews. If the head is stuck, tap it lightly with a wooden or lead mallet to free it. Be careful
not to drop the head or damage the gasket sealing surface. Remove cylinder head capscrews and gasket.
c. Remove the valve plate.
NOTE
Do not pry the valve plate in order to remove it from the crankcase. If necessary, remove 2 bolts from the dis-
charge valve stop. Remove the valve stop. Using one of the discharge valve stop bolts as a jacking screw, lift
the valve plate from the dowel pins, pushing the head off the crankcase.
d. Inspect the parts of the cylinder head and/or the valve plate.
1) Inspect cylinder head gaskets for proper alignment and center web blow--out.
2) Inspect the discharge valves for loose or damaged valve stops, or any debris that may affect the proper opera-
tion of the valves.
3) Inspect for broken, cracked, or chipped discharge reeds.
4) If applicable, inspect the discharge check valve to ensure the piston moves and contacts the plate.
5) Inspect for broken, cracked, or chipped suction valves.
6) Inspect the valve plate and the cylinder head for cracks.
7) Inspect valve plate gaskets for damage and wear.
e. Remove oil in the cylinders on top of the pistons to avoid unnecessary clean up. Inspect the top of the piston for
damage. Check for debris, burned and carbonized oil sludge, or mechanical failure.
10--25 62-11389
f. Inspect cylinder bores for excessive wear. Excessive wear for cylinder bores is defined as heavy and uneven
scratches, gouges, or chipping of the internal wall of the cylinder, with a depth greater than 0.025 inch, which are
caused by foreign objects, other than a normal reciprocating movement of the pistons and piston rings.
g. Check compressor rotation.
1) Rotate the compressor by hand if possible.
2) All pistons should move freely and smoothly up and down without any inconsistent resistance or seizure.
h. Repeat Steps 2.b. thru 2.g. for the center head and the rear head.
3. Decision to repair or replace
a. The compressor should be REPAIRED if no defects are found, or if the only defects found are in Steps 2.d.1), 4),
5) or 6).
b. The compressor should be REPLACED if it failed the examination of 2.f., 2.g., 2. h., or has broken discharge
valves.
4. Replacement of the compressor.
a. Refer to Section 9.20 for compressor replacement procedures.
b. Drain and measure the compressor oil, and put it in a plastic bottle. Follow Carrier Transicold instructions for re-
turning the oil with the compressor.
5. Repair of the compressor.
a. Replace gaskets in addition to all replacement parts.
b. The torque required to reassemble the screws of the valve stop on the valve plate is 12 ft lbs (16. 3 Nm)
c. Replace a new valve plate or a cylinder head only when it is defective. The torque required for the bolts of the cylin-
der head is 35 to 55 ft lbs (40 to 48 Nm)
d.The failed compressor may have pumped oil into the system. Do not charge more oil until you install the new com-
pressor and run the unit to determine if oil level is correct.
6. A reminder when shipping for warranty credit
a.When shipping the failed compressor for warranty credit, include the completed field failure diagnostic report and
the bottled oil sample for the purpose of further analysis.
7. Electrical testing of the compressor.
a.Check current draw of the motor winding with a current meter while the motor is running. Each of the 3 legs should
draw an equal amount of current within 10%. The rated load current at 460VAC is 17.5 amps for a high efficiency
41CFM compressor.
b.Check the resistance of each winding while compressor is off and power is isolated and disconnected from any
source. The resistance will be approximately 1ohm and should be equal across all legs.
c.Check the resistance to ground from each leg while compressor power is isolated and disconnected from any
source. There should be low resistance to ground, open with standard ohmmeter. Because oil and refrigerant fluids
are conductors, the use of a megohmeter may show variations in resistance to ground through the case of the com-
pressor using higher test voltages.
62-11389 10--26
START HERE
Gone through the system diagnostics.

No system or other component defect dis-
covered.
The system is OFF.
Recover refrigerant.
Start the compressor inspection with

front cylinder head.
Remove the cylinder head.

Next (center or rear) Inspect the parts of the head and the valve plate.
cylinder heads. Inspect pistons.
Inspect the cylinder bores.
Check the compressor rotation.
NO
Done for
all
heads?
YES
Repair
Replace
Replace or repair the compressor?
Follow repair procedures. Follow replacement procedures.
END
Figure 10--14. Compressor Diagnostics
10--27 62-11389
C. Procedure After Compressor Repair Or Replacement
1. Run Pretrip to ensure all refrigeration components function properly.
2. In addition, to ensure the repair of the original compressor or the reliability of the replacement compressor, check
the following:
a. Verify proper air switch setting using 07--00177 magnehelic gauge or equal.
b. Verify that air switch will initiate defrost by momentarily jumping the air switch contacts.
c. Check all switches and sensors for proper operation.
3. See Section 9.21 for compressor oil level check procedure
4. Perform refrigerant and compressor oil moisture/acid tests per instructions with test kits; change oil or reclaim refri-
gerant as required. Refer to 98--50037 for system cleanup procedures.
5. If a compressor failure, such as broken valves, had the possibility of releasing large particles into the system, the
discharge strainer located in the inlet of the discharge check valve should also be removed and inspected.
62-11389 10--28
SECTION 11
WIRING
Plugs used with Schematic 62--11451 Sheet Rev D Drawing Rev F
1MP -- NATURAL Component Terminal
REMSN1 (REMSN--E) 3 (14)
REMSN2 (REMSN--H) 4 (14)
1 24
CDP--C 5 (16) (30)
EVOP--C (DP16--S) 6 (17) (30)
ENCT 7 (18)
CDT 9 (20)
CST 10 (19)
AAT 11 (22)
1RAT (DP16--G) 12 (23)
12 35 MAP--A 13
REMSN1 (REMSN--F) 14 (3)
(SP1)
REMSN2 (REMSN--G) 14 (4)
(SP1)
REMSN3 (REMSN--K) 14 (33)
(SP1)
CSP--A (SP16) 15 (29) (30)
OGF--OV (HC--1) (SP16) 15
CDP--A 16 (5) (30)
EVOP--A (DP16--P) 17 (6) (30)
ENCT 18 (7)
CST (SP14) 19 (10)
EVOT (DP16--F) (SP14) 19 (32)
CDT 20 (9)
DTT (DP16--B) 21 (34)
AAT 22 (11)
1SAT (DP16--D) (SP12) 23 (35)
1RAT (DP16--H) (SP12) 23 (12)
MAP--C 28
CSP--C 29 (15) (30)
CSP--B (SP7) 30 (15) (29)
CDP--B (SP7) 30 (5) (16)
EVOP--B (SP7) (DP16--R) 30 (6) (17)
MAP--B (SP7) 30
REMSN3 (REMSN--J) 33 (14)
EVOT (DP16--E) 32 (19)
DTT (DP16--A) 34 (21)
1SAT (DP16--C) 35 (23)
Unused terminals: 1, 2, 8, 16, 24, 25, 26, 27, 31, 33
11--1 62-11389
2 MP -- Black 3 MP -- Grey
1 24 1 24
12 35 12 35
Component Terminal Component Terminal

OC--C 3 SATCOM--C (GND) 3 (15) (27)
DAS 6 SLP--C (GND) 5 (13)(17) (29)
CSMV--D 8 (19) (20) (32) UL1 12
EVXV--B (DP16--K) 11 (12) (22)
(23) (35) SLP--E 13
12 (11) (22) SATCOM--B (RX) 15 (3) (13) (27)
EVXV--E (DP16--N) (23) (35)
RMSN--D 13 SLP--A (RX) 17 (5) (29)
REMSN--C 16 LB--H (AMBER) 19
ENOPS 17 UL2 23
ENSCU--3 18 SATCOM--A (TX) 27 (3) (15)
CSMV--C 19 (8) (20) (32) SLP--B (TX) 29 (5) (13) (17)
CSMV--A 20 (8) (19) (32) LB--B (GREEN) 32
EVXV--D (DP16--M) 22 (11) (12)
(23) (35)
23 (11) (12)
EVXV--A (DP16--J) (22) (35)
HC19 (SP61) 26
ENOLS--B 28
SP15 29
CSMV--B 32 (8) (19) (20)
35 (11) (12)
EVXV--C (DP16--L) (22) (23)
Unused terminals: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9,
Unused terminals: 1,2,4,5,7,9,10,14,
10, 11, 14, 16, 18, 20,21, 22, 24, 25,
15, 21, 24, 25, 27, 30, 31, 33, 34
26, 28, 30, 31, 33, 34, 35
62-11389 11--2
4 MP 5 MP 6 MP
1 8 1 4
1 6
9 1 7 1 5 8
6 2
Component Terminal Component Terminal Component Connector Terminal

CCONR--1 (SP60) 1 MPQCC9/SP52 1 DISP--1 (BLK) A 1
CDCON--A2 2 SP56 2 DISP--2 (WHT) B 2
1EVCON--A2 3 PRM--OUT+ 4 DISP--3 (RED) C 3
SP55 4 PSCONR--2 7 DISP--4 (GRN) D 4
CCONR--2 5 BUZZER 8 DISP--5 (BRN) E 5
CDCON--A1 6 GPR--85 9 DISP--7 (BLU) F 6
GENCONR--2 7 SSR--85 10 DISP--6 (ORN) G 7
CT2/OGF (SP54) 8 DISP--8 (YEL) H 8
CT2,3 & 4 BLACK 9
CT3/OGF (SP53) 10
1HTCON1--A1 13
1HTCON2--A1 14
1EVCON--A1 15
Unused terminals: 11 & 12. Unused terminals: 3, 5, 6, 11 & Unused terminals: None
12
11--3 62-11389
A DP16 H 20 ENSCU
26
13
19
J S 8
13
7
1
Component Terminal Component Terminal
1DTT--B A 2MP--18 3
1DTT--A B FSA--1 7
1SAT--A C ESSN--S 10
1SAT--B D SP3 13
EVOT--A E HC--2 16
EVOT--B F STARTER MOTOR 18
1RAT--A G SP6 (GND) 19
1RAT--B H SP5 24
EVXV--A J ENSSN--12V 25
EVXV--B K FSA--2 26
EVXV--C L Unused Terminals: 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9,
11, 12, 14, 15, 17, 20,21, 22, 23
EVXV--D M
EVXV--E N
EVOP--A P
EVOP--B R
EVOP--C S
62-11389 11--4
HC Plug
19 8 9
18 7 2 10
6 11
17 1 3
16 5 4 12
15 13
14
Component Terminal
OGF--OV/HC--1 1
MPQC--3 2
MPQC--1 3
MPQC4 4
SP52 7
SSR--87 8
SP60 11
F5--B 12
GPR--87 14
SP57 15
SP50 16
RS--B 17
SP52 18
SP61 19
Unused terminals: 5, 6, 9, 10 & 13
11--5 62-11389
SPLICE POINTS SPLICE POINTS
Splice Point No. Component Splice Point No. Component
F5--A 5MP--2
HC--16 56 PRM -- +12V
GPR--30 DES--B
50
F6--A HC--15
SSR--30 MPQC--2
F9--A PRM--OV
57
BUZZER + CCON--A2
5MP--1 GENCONR--3
OGF -- +12V LOW VOLT GND
SSR--86 F9--B
HC--18 58 CCONR--3
52 MPQC--9 PSCONR--3
MPQC--8 EVM--4
SP59 59 EVHTS--A
DES--A SP62
HC--7 4MP--1
SP62 60 CCONR--1
CT--BLUE HC--11
53 4MP--10 HC--19
OGF--BLU OGF--S+
61
CT--BROWN GENCONR--1
54 4MP--8 PSCONR--1
OGF--BROWN SP52
4MP--4 62 SP59
1HTCON1--A2 CDM2--4
55
1HTCON2--A2 SP55
63
SP63 EVHTS--B
62-11389 11--6
ADVANCE MICRO DISPLAY HARNESS CONNECTIONS
Test Point Pin Color Description
TP14 Pin 1 Black +12 Vdc for Display backlighting and indicator LED s
TP13 Pin 2 White Ground for Backlighting and indicator LEDs
TP13 Pin 3 Red Ground for Backlighting and indicator LEDs
TP12 Pin 4 Green +5 Vdc for Display processor and LCD
TP11 Pin 5 Brown Display ground
TP10 Pin 6 Orange TX the serial communications from the control to the display
TP9 Pin 7 Blue RX the serial communications from the display to the control
TP8 Pin 8 Yellow Display ground
VOLTAGE TESTS:
Negative Test Lead Positive Test Lead Voltage Reading
TP13 TP14 12
TP13 TP12 5
TP13 TP11 0
TP13 TP8 0
TP11 TP14 12
TP11 TP8 0
TP8 TP14 12
11--7 62-11389
ZONE LEGEND
C13 ATT AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
K7 B BUZZER
L3 BTY BATTERY
M2 BTYC BATTERY CHARGER (SOLID STATE)
T1 C COMPRESSOR
R12,R1 CCON COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR
I8,R12 CCONR COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR RELAY
D10 CDP COMP’R DISCHARGE PRESSURE
C12 CDT COMP’R DISCHARGE TEMP SENSOR
J9, S4 CDCON CONDENSER MOTOR CONTACTOR
T4,T5 CDM 1,2 CONDENSER MOTORS 1 & 2
D8 CSMV COMP”R SUCTION MODULATING VALVE
D10 CSP COMP’R SUCTION PRESSURE
C11 CST COMPRESSOR SUCTION TEMPERATURE
E4 CT1 DC CURRENT SENSOR
J1 CT2,3,4 AC CURRENT SENSOR
D6 DAS DEFROST AIR SWITCH
C5 DES DIESEL ELECTRIC SWITCH
C7 IDS DOOR SWITCH EVAP (OPTION)
C12 DTT DEFROST TEMP SWITCH
C11 ENCT ENGINE COOLANT TEMP
B15 ENOPS ENGINE OIL PRESS SWITCH
O3 ENSCU ENGINE SPEED CONTROL UNIT
O3 ENSSN ENGINE SPEED SENSOR
J9,S3 1EVCON MOTOR CONTACTOR EVAP 1
L10 1EVHTS EVAP HIGH TEMP SWITCH
T3 EVM1 EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR
D10 EVOP EVAP OUTLET PRESSURE
C15 EVOT EVAP OUTLET TEMPERATURE
D9 EVXV EVAP EXPANSION VALVE
F4 F1 FUSE -- POWER 7.5 AMP
G15 F2 FUSE -- SPEED RELAY 10 AMP
G15 F3 FUSE -- RUN RELAY 7.5 AMP
F3 F5 FUSE -- MIDI FUSE 80.0 AMP
D4 F6 FUSE -- MICRO POWER 15.0 AMP
L2 F7/F8 FUSE BATTERY CHARGER 2 OR 4 AMP
N10 F9 FUSE -- CONTACTORS 10.0 AMP
P5 F10/11/12 FUSE -- HEATERS 12 AMP QUICK BLOW
P2 F26/27/28 FUSE -- EVAP/COND FANS 12 AMP
L14 FLS FUEL LEVEL SENSOR (OPTION)
L15 FP FUEL PUMP (OPTION)
O2 FSA FUEL SOLENOID ACTUATOR
R12,P10,D1 GENCON GENERATOR CONTACTOR
J7,S10,S12 GENCONR GENERATOR CONTACTOR RELAY
A1 GEN GENERATOR
J8, D16 GPR GLOW HEATER RELAY
-- GRD GROUND
-- GRN FRAME GROUND
C7 HP1 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH
M5,M6 HTR1,2 ELECTRIC HEATER 1 & 2
J10,O7,O5 1HTCON1,2 HEAT CONTACTOR 1 & 2 EVAP 1
K16 IAH INTAKE AIR HEATER
K8 IPC INTERNAL PROTECTOR, COMPRESSOR
K9 IPCDM1,2 INTERNAL PROTECTOR COND MOTOR 1 & 2
J9 IPEVM1 INTERNAL PROTECTOR, EVAP MOTOR
I14 LB LIGHT BAR (OPTION)
D10 MAP MANIFOLD ATMOSPHERIC PRESS SENSOR
E3 -- E15 MP MICROPROCESSOR BOARD
A10 OC OPTIONAL CONTROL PANEL CONNECTOR
B4,D8 OCJ1 OPTIONAL CONTROL PANEL JUMPER
H1 OGF OVERLOAD GROUND FAULT
E4 PWR POWER (MACRO)
A3,Q10,Q11 PRM PHASE REVERSAL MODULE
R10,D3,R11 PSCON POWER SUPPLY CONTACTOR
P11 PSCON ILK CONTACTOR INTERLOCK
R11,D2,R10 PSCON2 POWER SUPPLY CONTACTOR 2
Q11 PSCON2ILK CONTACTOR 2 INTERLOCK
J8,O10,O12 PSCONR POWER SUPPLY CONTACTOR RELAY
A2 PSR POWER RECEPTACLE
C14 1RAT RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE, EVAP
D7 REMS1,2 REMOTE SWITCH (OPTIONAL)
D13,14,15 REMSN1--3 REMOTE SENSOR (OPTIONAL)
H15 RR RUN RELAY
D4 RS RUN/STOP SWITCH
C13 1SAT SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE, EVAP 1
J14 SATCOM SATELLITE COMMUNICATION (OPTIONAL)
J6 SLP SERIAL PORT
L3 SM STARTER MOTOR
H15 SR SPEED RELAY
L16 SS STARTER SOLENOID
K3 SSC STARTER SOLENOID CONTACTOR
J8 SSR STARTER SOLENOID RELAY
J14 UL1,2 UNLOADER FRONT, REAR
VECTOR 6500
With START/RUN -- OFF type Start/Run Switch
BASED ON 62--11451 ART2--S2--REVD
Change10/10
INDEX
A Configuration Mode, 6--2, 6--3

CONTINUOUS RUN OPERATION, 3--10, 4--4
Air Cleaner, 9--13
Cool Mode Operation, 5--3
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor, 2--10
Coolant Capacity , 2--17
Auto Start/Stop, 5--21
Cooling System, 9--11
Auto-Start, 1--1
Crankcase Breather, 9--14
B D
Battery, 1--1
Data Ohms And Amps, 2--20
BATTERY CHARGER, 9--17, 10--4
Data Recording, 3--29
DataTrak, 3--34
C Defrost, 4--5, 5--13
DEFROST AIR SWITCH, 9--44
Cargo Protect Mode, 4--4, 5--12, 5--21
Defrost Initiation, 5--13
Changing IntelliSets, 3--32, 3--33
Defrost Operation With Heaters, 5--14
Changing Set Point With Remote Control Panel, 3--36
Defrost Operation Without Heaters, 5--15
Charging Amps, 3--9
Defrost Safety, 2--19
Checking Refrigerant Level , 9--30
Defrost Temperature Sensor, 2--10
Complete System Dehydration, 9--27
Defrost Termination Thermistor , 2--19
Component Specifications, 2--19
Defrost Timer, 2--18
Component Test Mode, 6--14
DEMAND CONTROL LOGIC, 5--3, 5--8
COMPRESSOR, 2--7, 9--31
DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (CDP),
Compressor Data, 2--18 9--37
Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer, 2--10, Display, 2--14
2--18
Display Bezel Assembly, 6--27
Compressor Discharge Temperature Transducer,
2--10 DOOR LATCH, 9--8
COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL, 9--33 Door Switches & Remote Switches, 2--16
Compressor Oil Level , 9--33 Door/Remote Switch, 4--5
Compressor Sensors , 2--10 Download Port, 6--1
COMPRESSOR SUCTION MODULATION VALVE,
9--40
Compressor Suction Modulation Valve , 2--10 E
Compressor Suction Pressure, 2--10 Econo Mode, 4--5
Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer, 2--10, ELECTRICAL DATA, 2--19
2--18
ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE, 2--10, 9--22
Compressor Transducers, 2--10
ELECTRONIC MODULES, 2--16
Compressor Troubleshooting Guide, 10--24
Electronic Speed Control, 9--13
CONDENSER COIL, 9--45
Electronic Speed Control Troubleshooting
Condenser Coil Replacement, 9--45 Guide, 10--9
Condenser Fan And Motor Assemblies, 9--16 ENGINE, 2--7, 10--1
Condenser/Subcooler, 2--7 Engine Air System, 2--18
Index--1 62--11389
INDEX -- Continued
Engine Coolant, 1--1 FUSIBLE PLUG, 9--40
Engine Coolant Temperature, 3--8
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor, 2--7
G
Engine Cranking, 4--1
GENERATOR, 9--17, 10--5
Engine Data, 2--18
GRILLE INSERT REMOVAL, 9--6
Engine Oil, 2--18, 9--12
Engine Oil And Fuel Flow Diagrams, 9--12
Engine Oil Filter, 9--12 H
Engine Oil Pressure Switch, 2--7 Heat Exchanger, 2--10
Engine RPM Sensor , 2--7 Heat Mode Operation , 5--2
Engine Running, 4--2 Heat/Cool/Idle Switching Operation, 5--4
Engine Screw Thread, 2--18 High CDT, 5--21
Engine Sensors, 2--7 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH, 2--19, 9--36
ENGINE SERVICE, 9--11 High Speed Delay, 4--5
Engine Speed Control Unit, 2--7 High Speed Delay for Initial Compressor
Engine Speed Operation , 5--13 Operation, 4--5
Engine Transducers and Sensors, 2--7 High Speed Pulldown, 4--5, 5--21
ENGINE/STANDBY SWITCH, 2--14 High Speed to Low Speed Delay, 4--5

HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUITS, 9--9
EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION, 9--27
Evaporator Blower and Motor, 9--15
Evaporator Coil, 2--10, 9--45 I
EVAPORATOR HEATERS, 9--14
Indicator LEDs, 2--14
Evaporator Outlet Pressure Installing New Software, 6--18
Transducer (EVOP), 2--19
Intake Air Heater, 4--2, 9--14
Evaporator Outlet Temperature, 2--10
IntelliSet, 3--31
EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER, 9--40
Evaporator Sensors, 2--10
Evaporator Transducers, 2--10 K
Key Descriptions, 2--14
F
Failed To Start -- Auto Mode, 4--4 L
Filter Drier, 2--9 LANGUAGE SELECTION, 3--27
FILTER-DRIER, 9--36 LEAK CHECKING, 9--25
Frozen Setpoint, 4--5 LED Light Bar, 2--16
Fuel and Speed Actuator, 2--7 LIGHT BAR, 9--44
Fuel Level Sensor, 9--11 Lock/Unlocking the Remote Control Panel, 3--37
Fuel Pump, 9--10 Low Speed Engine Coolant Warm-up, 4--5
Fuel System, 9--10 Low Speed Startup, 4--5
Full Charge, 9--30 Low Suction Pressure, 4--5
Functional Parameters, 3--23 Lubrication System, 2--18
62--11389 Index--2
INDEX -- Continued
M PHASE REVERSAL MODULE, 9--43

Phase Reversal Module (PRM), 2--16
Maintenance Schedule, 9--2
PM Hourmeters, 6--20
MANUAL DEFROST, 3--13 PRE TRIP INSPECTION, 9--4
Megohmmeter, 9--9 Pretrip, 3--4
MessageCenter, 2--14 Product Shield, 4--5
MessageCenter , 7--1 ProductShield, 5--17
Microprocessor Replacement, 6--23 PRODUCTSHIELD ECONO, 5--18
MICROPROCESSOR SENSOR CHECKOUT , 9--46 Pulldown / Pull--up Mode, 5--1
Microprocessor Troubleshooting Guide, 10--14 Pumping Unit Down, 9--23
N R
Natural Defrost, 5--15 Radiator Replacement, 9--45
Natural Defrost Termination, 5--15 Range Lock, 5--15
Natural Defrost Termination Sequence, 5--15 Range Protect, 5--21
Noncondensibles, 9--31 Range Protect:, 4--5
Normal Defrost, 5--14 Receiver, 2--9
Normal Defrost Termination, 5--14 Receiver Fuse Plug Setting, 2--19
Normal Defrost Termination Sequence, 5--14 RECEIVER SIGHT GLASS, 9--40
Null Mode Operation, 5--4 ReeferManager, 6--15, 6--20
Refrigerant, 1--1
Refrigerant Charge, 9--30
O Refrigerant Circuit -- Cooling, 2--21
Oil Filter, 9--12 Refrigerant Circuit -- Heating & Defrosting, 2--21
OVERLOAD GROUD FAULT DETECTOR, 9--43 Refrigeration System Data , 2--18
Overload Ground Fault Module (OGF), 2--16 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM START--UP, 4--2
Remote Control Panel, 2--17, 3--35
P Remove Jumper Mode, 6--2

Removing Pre--set Set Points With Remote
Partial Charge, 9--30 Control Panel , 3--38
PC Card, 6--17 Removing Refrigerant Charge, 9--23
PC Card to Install Software, 6--19 Restart Voltage, 3--9
PC Mode, 6--1 Return Air Temperature Sensor, 2--10
PC SUPPORT SOFTWARE, 6--15 RUNNING MODES, 4--2
Index--3 62--11389
INDEX -- Continued
S Switch Descriptions, 2--14
Safety Decals, 1--6

Safety Devices, 2--20 T
Safety Precautions, 1--1 Technician Test Modes, 6--2
SELF TEST & PRESET, 3--3 TEMPERATURE CONTROL, 10--5
Service Mode, 6--15 TRIP START, 3--14
SET POINT, 3--7, 5--1 Troubleshooting, 8--1
Silent Mode, 4--5 Troubleshooting Software Loading, 6--20
Sleep Mode, 3--11
Sortware Version Numbers, 6--18
U
SPEED CONTROL OVERRIDES, 4--4
Unit Data, 3--19
START--RUN/OFF SWITCH, 2--14
Unloader, 9--35
Start--Stop, 4--3
Unloader Control Operation, 5--3
Start--Stop Indicator, 4--4
UNLOADER CONTROL OVERRIDES, 5--20
Start--Stop Operation, 3--8, 4--2
START--UP, 4--1, 4--2 Unloaders, 2--7
Start-Stop With A Perishable Setpoint, 4--5

STARTING UNIT, 3--1, 3--2 V
Starting Unit with Remote Control Panel, 3--36
View Alarms, 3--15, 3--16
Startup, 4--2
VIEW HOURMETERS, 3--22
Stopping Unit, 3--28
Suction Pressure Transducer, 9--39
SUPPLY AIR LIMIT CONTROL , 5--12 W
Supply Air Temperature Sensor , 2--10 Water Pump V--Belt, 9--14
SURROUND REMOVAL, 9--7 WIRING, 11--1
62--11389 Index--4
North America Central America
Carrier Transicold and Mexico
700 Olympic Drive Ejercito Nacional No. 418
Athens, GA 30601 USA Piso 9, Torre Yumal Carrier Transicold Division, Carrier
Tel: 1--706--357--7223 Col. Chapultepec Morales Corporation
Fax: 1--706--355--5435 11570 Mexico, D.F. Truck/Trailer Products Group
Tel: (5255) 9126.0300 P.O. Box 4805
Fax: (5255) 9126.0373 Syracuse, N.Y. 13221 U.S A
www.carrier.transicold.com
A member of the United Technologies Corporation family. Stock symbol UTX
©2009 Carrier Corporation D Printed in U. S. A. 1209

62-11389 Vector6500 Change12 10

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

62-11389 Vector6500 Change12 10

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

62-11389 Vector6500 Change12 10

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Trailer & Rail Refrigeration

OPERATION & SERVICE

62--11389 Rev -- Change 12/10

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

Change 12/10 xiii 62--11389

Under no circumstances should a techni- Battery

UNITS EQUIPPED WITH REMOTE TWO WAY

High voltage (dielectric) testing must not be

62--60280--00 Standby Safety

R-404A Engine Speed

Table 2-2 Additional Support Manuals

Manual Number Equipment Covered Type of Manual

1. Condenser/Radiator 13.Compressor (C)

1. Exhaust System 7. Serial (Download) Port (SLP)

1. Defrost Air Switch (DAS) 5. Compressor Suction Service Valve

Figure 2--3. Curbside View

6 EVXV IS LOCATED CLOSER

1. Evaporator air nozzle 7. Evaporator Outlet Pressure Transducer (EVOP)

1. Heat Contactor 1 (1HTCON1) 18. Buzzer (B)

1. Solenoid valve 9. Strainer

b. Unloaded Operation (Figure 2--7.)

1. Solenoid valve 9. Strainer

RUN RELAY (RR -- Board QC4 (+12V

1MP (WHITE) RELAY POWER

Table 2-3. Field Effect Transistors

MODE LIGHTS DISPLAY

-20 +34° F STANDBY

DISPLAY and KEYPAD MODULE

Figure 2--10. Display and Keypad

Indicator LEDs Key Descriptions

Engine Model V2203--DI--E3B--CTD--5

2.12 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA

2.13 ELECTRICAL DATA

Change 1010 2--19 62-11389

2.13.2 Component Resistance & Current Draw

2.14 SAFETY DEVICES

Figure 2--13. Refrigerant Circuit During Cooling

1. Place the ENGINE/STANDBY 2. Place the START/RUN - OFF switch

3. The microprocessor will then enter pretest,

-20 +34.5° F STANDBY

3. Place the START / RUN - OFF I START/RUN

NOTE • The power supply cable and circuit breaker must

1. Place Start/Run--Off switch in the “START / RUN” position.

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

2. Press the SELECT key until the MessageCenter

The PRETRIP mode is for checking unit operation and TIP

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

1. With the set point displayed, press the UP ARROW or DOWN